12-Physics Book Problems

HIGHER SECONDARY
SEDOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -1
ELECTROSTATICS
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
GBHSS, PARANGIPETTAI - 608 502
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 1 ELECTROSTATICS PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS. 3. Two small-sized identical equally charged spheres, each

1. Calculate the number of electrons in one coulomb of negative charge. having mass 1 g are hanging in equilibrium as shown in the
Solution :- q = 1 C ; e = 1.6 X 10-19 C ; n=? figure. The length of each string is 10 cm and the angle
▪ According to the quantisation of charge ; 𝑞 = 𝑛 𝑒 θ is 30° with the vertical. Calculate the magnitude of the
𝑞 1 1019 charge in each sphere.(Take g = 10 ms−2)
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑛= = −19
= Solution:-: 𝑚 = 1 g = 10−3 𝑘g ; 𝜃 = 30 ;
𝑒 1.6 𝑋 10 1.6
𝒏 = 𝟔. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟖 electrons 𝑔 = 10 𝑚𝑠 −2 ; 𝐿 = 10 𝑐𝑚 = 0.1 ; 𝑞 = ?
2. Consider two point charges q1 and q2 at rest as shown in the ▪ Since they are positively charged spheres, there will be a repulsive force between
figure. They are separated by a distance of 1m. Calculate the them and they will be at equilibrium with each other at an angle of 30° with the
force experienced by the two charges for the following vertical.
cases: ▪ At equilibrium, each charge experiences zero
(a) q1 = +2 μC and q2 = +3 μC net force in each direction. We can draw a free
(b) q1 = +2 μC and q2 = –3 μC body diagram for one of the charged spheres
(c) q1= +2 μC and q2 = –3 μC kept in water (𝜺𝒓 = 𝟖𝟎) and apply Newton’s second law for both
Solution :- vertical and horizontal directions.
(a) 𝑞1 = +2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑞2 = +3 𝜇𝐶 ; r = 1 m then , ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = ? & ⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = ? ▪ In the x-direction, the acceleration of the
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 3 𝑋 10−6 charged sphere is zero.
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂ 𝑇 sin 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹𝑒 (− ̂)
𝑖 =0
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 12 12 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 sin 𝜃 ̂𝑖 = 𝐹𝑒 ̂𝑖
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟐𝟏 = 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑵 𝒊̂ ( along + X axis) (𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 sin 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑒 − − − (1)
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 3 𝑋 10−6 ▪ In the y-direction also, the net acceleration experienced by the charge is
& ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 (− 𝑖̂)
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 21 12 zero. 𝑇 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑗 + 𝑚 𝑔 (−̂) 𝑗 =0
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟏𝟐 = − 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑵 𝒊̂ (along - X axis) (𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑗 = 𝑚 𝑔 ̂𝑗
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 cos 𝜃 = 𝑚 𝑔 − − − (2)
(b) 𝑞1 = +2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑞2 = −3 𝜇𝐶 ; r = 1 m then, ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = ? & ⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = ?
▪ Divide equation (1) by 92)
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 (−3) 𝑋 10−6 𝑇 sin 𝜃 𝐹𝑒
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 12 12 =
𝑇 cos 𝜃 𝑚𝑔
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟐𝟏 = − 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑵 𝒊̂ (along - X axis) 𝐹𝑒 1 1 𝑞2
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 (−3) 𝑋 10−6 tan  = = [ ] [∵ 𝑎 = 𝐿 sin 𝜃]
& ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 (− 𝑖̂) 𝑚𝑔 𝑚 𝑔 4 𝜋 𝜀0 (2𝑎)2
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 21 12 1 1 𝑞2
tan  = [ ]
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟏𝟐 = 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑵 𝒊̂ (along + X axis) 𝑚𝑔 4 𝜋 𝜀0 (2 𝐿 sin 𝜃)2
∴ 𝑞 = 𝑚 𝑔 [4 𝜋 𝜀0 ](2 𝐿 sin 𝜃)2 tan 𝜃
2
(c) 𝑞1 = +2 𝜇𝐶 and 𝑞2 = −3 𝜇𝐶 placed in water (𝜀𝑟 = 80), ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = ? & ⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = ? 1
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑞 = 2 𝐿 sin 𝜃 √𝑚 𝑔 [4 𝜋 𝜀0 ] tan 𝜃 [∵ = 9 𝑋 109 ]
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 − 54 𝑋 10−3 4 𝜋 𝜀0
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21
𝑊
= 𝑟̂12 = = ̂𝒊
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝜀𝑟 𝑟 2 𝜀𝑟 80 10−3 𝑋 10 𝑋 tan 30
𝑞 = 2 𝑋 0.1 𝑋 sin 30 𝑋 √ 9 𝑋 109
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝑾
𝟐𝟏 = − 𝟔. 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎
−𝟒
𝑵 ̂𝒊 (along - X axis)
1 𝑞 𝑞 ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 54 𝑋 10−3 1 10−3 𝑋 10 𝑋 0.5774 5.774 𝑋 10−12
⃗⃗⃗𝐹12
𝑊
=
1 2
𝑟̂ = = ̂𝒊 𝑞 = 0.2 𝑋 2 𝑋 √ 9 𝑋 109
= 0.1 𝑋 √ 9
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝜀𝑟 𝑟 2 21 𝜀𝑟 80 0. 1
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝑾
𝟐𝟏 = 𝟔. 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎
−𝟒
𝑵 ̂𝒊 (along + X axis) 𝑞 = 𝑋 √5.774 𝑋 10−6
3
NOTE : All three cases obeys Newton’s third law of motion (𝑖. 𝑒) ⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟏𝟐 = − ⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟐𝟏 𝑞 = 0.0333 𝑋 √5.774 𝑋 10−6
𝑞 = 8.001 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10−6 = 8.001 𝑋 10−8 𝐶
𝑞 = 80. 01 𝑋 10−8 𝐶 = 80.01 𝑛 𝐶
victory R.SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed , PG ASST (PHYSICS) , GBHSS, PARANGIPETTAI - 608 502
4. Calculate the electrostatic force and gravitational force between the proton and ▪ Since, 𝑟 = 1 𝑚 From figure, 𝑟12 = 𝑟14 = √2 𝑟2 = 𝑟√2 = √2 𝑚 ; 𝑟13 = 2 𝑟 = 2 𝑚
the electron in a hydrogen atom. They are separated by a distance of ▪ Magnitude of the forces,
5.3 × 10–11 m. The magnitude of charges on the electron and proton are
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 9 𝑋 10−3
1.6 × 10–19 C. Mass of the electron is me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg and mass of proton is 𝐹12 = = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 = = 4.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑁
mp = 1.6 × 10–27 kg. 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟122 (√2)
2 2
Solution :- 𝑟 = 5.3 𝑋 10−11 𝑚 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 1 𝑞1 𝑞3 9
1 𝑋 10 −6
𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 9 𝑋 10−3
𝑚𝑒 = 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑚𝑝 = 1,6 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝐺 = 6.67 𝑋 10−11 𝑁 𝑚2 𝐶 −2 𝐹13 = 2 = 9 𝑋 10 𝑋 = = 2.25 𝑋 10−3 𝑁
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟13 (2)2 4
▪ The magnitude of the electrostatic force between electron and proton 1 𝑞1 𝑞4 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 9 𝑋 10−3
9
1 𝑒 2 (1.6 𝑋 10 −19 )2 𝐹14 = = 9 𝑋 10 𝑋 = = 4.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑁
𝐹𝐸 = = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟142 (√2)
2
2
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 (5.3 𝑋 10−11 )2
9
9 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10 −38 ▪ From the figure, 𝜃 = 45°, then the total force on 𝑞1
𝐹𝐸 = 𝐹1 = ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 + ⃗⃗⃗𝐹13 + ⃗⃗⃗𝐹14
𝑡𝑜𝑡
5.3 𝑋 5.3 𝑋 10−22
9 𝑋 2.56 𝑋 10−7 23.04 𝑋 10−7 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = [𝐹12 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹12 sin 𝜃 (− 𝑗̂)] + 𝐹13 ̂𝑖 + [𝐹14 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹14 sin 𝜃 𝑗̂]
𝐹𝐸 = = = 8.202 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 10−7
28.09 29.09 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 𝐹12 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 − 𝐹12 sin 𝜃 𝑗̂ + 𝐹13 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹14 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹14 sin 𝜃 𝑗̂
−𝟖
𝑭𝑬 = 𝟖. 𝟐𝟎𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑵 ▪ Since 𝐹12 = 𝐹14 , we have
▪ The magnitude of the gravitational force between electron and proton 𝑡𝑜𝑡
⃗ 1 = 𝐹12 cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + 𝐹13 𝑖̂ + 𝐹14 cos 𝜃 𝑖̂
−11 −27 −31 𝐹
𝐺 𝑚𝑃 𝑚𝑒 6.67 𝑋 10 𝑋 1,6 𝑋 10 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10
𝐹𝐺 = = 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 2 𝐹12 cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + 𝐹13 𝑖̂
𝑟2 (5.3 𝑋 10−11 )2 𝑡𝑜𝑡
6.67 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−69 6.67 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−47 ⃗ 1 = 2 (4.5 𝑋 10−3 ) cos 45° 𝑖̂ + 2.25 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂
𝐹
𝐹𝐺 = = 1
28.09 𝑋 10−22 28.09 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 2 (4.5 𝑋 10−3 ) 𝑖̂ + 2.25 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂
−𝟒𝟕
𝑭𝑮 = 𝟑. 𝟒𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑵 √2
▪ The ratio of the two forces, ⃗⃗⃗𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = [4.5 √2 + 2.25] 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂ = [6.363 + 2.25] 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂
−8
𝐹𝐸 8.202 𝑋 10 ⃗𝑭𝒕𝒐𝒕
𝟏 = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟏𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎
−𝟑
𝒊̂
= ≈ 2.4 𝑋 1039
𝐹𝐺 3. 456 𝑋 10 −47 6. Calculate the electric field at points P, Q for the following two cases, as shown in
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑭𝑬 ≈ 𝟏𝟎𝟑𝟗 𝑭𝑮 the figure.
∴ 𝑭𝑬 ≫ 𝑭𝑮 (a) A positive point charge +1 μC is placed at the origin
5. Consider four equal charges q1, q2, q3 and q4 = q = +1 μC (b) A negative point charge –2 μC is placed at the origin
located at four different points on a circle of radius 1m, as Solution :-
shown in the figure. Calculate the total force acting on the
(a) = +1 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟𝑃 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝑄 = 4 𝑚 ⃗𝐸𝑃 = ? ⃗𝐸𝑄 = ?
charge q1 due to all the other charges.
Solution :- Electric field at P,
𝑡𝑜𝑡 1 𝑞 1 𝑋 10−6
𝑞1 = 𝑞2 = 𝑞3 = 𝑞4 = 𝑞 = +1 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟 = 1 𝑚 ; ⃗𝐹1 = ? ⃗𝐸𝑃 = 𝑖 ̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑃2 (2)2
▪ Figure shows forces and its components act on charge 𝑞1
9 𝑋 103
𝐸⃗𝑃 = 𝑖̂
4
⃗𝑬𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝒊̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
Electric field at Q ,
1 𝑞 1 𝑋 10−6
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 2 𝑗̂ = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑗̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑄 (4)2
9 𝑋 103
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 𝑗̂
16
⃗𝑬𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝒋̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
(b) = − 2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟𝑃 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝑄 = 6𝑚 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑃 =? 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑄 =? ▪ Its magnitude, |⃗⃗⃗𝐸𝐴 | = 2.25 𝑋 109 √12 + 12 = 2.25 𝑋 109 √2

Electric field at P ▪ Then the direction of 𝐸 ⃗𝐴,
1 𝑞 2 𝑋 10−6 ⃗𝐸𝐴 2.25 𝑋 109 (𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂) (𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂)
⃗𝐸𝑃 = (−𝑖 ̂ ) = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 (−𝑖̂) 𝐸̂𝐴 = = =
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑃2 (2)2 ⃗⃗⃗
| 𝐸𝐴 | 9
2.25 𝑋 10 √2 √2
18 𝑋 103
𝐸⃗𝑃 = − 𝑖̂ ▪ Acceleration experienced by the electron placed at A,
4
⃗ 𝑷 = − 𝟒. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
𝟑 𝐹 𝑞 𝐸⃗𝐴
𝑬 𝑎𝐴 = =
Electric field at Q 𝑚 𝑚
1 𝑞 2 𝑋 10−6 − 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 2.25 𝑋 109 ( 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ )
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 𝑖̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂ 𝑎𝐴 =
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑄2 (6)2 9.1 𝑋 10−31
− 1.6 𝑋 2.25 𝑋 1021 ( 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ )
18 𝑋 103 𝑎𝐴 =
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 𝑖̂ 9.1
36 𝑎𝐴 = − 3.956 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1021 ( 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ )
⃗ 𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
𝑬 𝟑
⃗ 𝑨 = − 𝟑. 𝟗𝟓𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 ( 𝒊̂ + 𝒋̂ )𝑵 𝒌𝒈−𝟏
𝒂
7. Consider the charge configuration as shown in the ▪ The electron is accelerated in a direction exactly opposite to 𝐸 ⃗𝐴
figure. Calculate the electric field at point A. If an 8. A block of mass m carrying a positive charge q is placed on
electron is placed at points A, what is the acceleration an insulated frictionless inclined plane as shown in the
experienced by this electron? figure. A uniform electric field E is applied parallel to the
(mass of the electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg and charge of inclined surface such that the block is at rest. Calculate the
electron = −1.6 × 10–19 C) magnitude of the electric field E.
Solution :- 𝑞1 = 𝑞2 = + 1 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟1 = 𝑟2 = 2 𝑚𝑚 ; ⃗𝐸𝐴 = ? Solution :-
▪ The free body diagram for the mass m is drawn below.
▪ Electric field due to 𝑞1 ,
1 𝑞1
𝐸⃗1 = 𝑗̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟12
1 𝑋 10−6
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑗̂
(2 𝑋 10−3 )2
−6
1 𝑋 10
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑗̂
4 𝑋 10−6
⃗𝑬𝟏 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝒋̂
1 𝑞2
𝐸⃗2 = 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟22 There are three forces that acts on the mass m:
▪
1 𝑋 10−6 (i) The downward gravitational force exerted by the Earth (mg)
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑖̂
(2 𝑋 10−3 )2 (ii) The normal force exerted by the inclined surface (N)
−6
1 𝑋 10 (iii) The Coulomb force given by uniform electric field (qE)
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑖̂
4 𝑋 10−6 ▪ Along x-direction, applying Newton’s second law, we have
⃗ 𝟐 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂
𝑬 𝟗
𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 𝑖̂ + 𝑞 𝐸 (− 𝑖̂) = 0
▪ Hence the resultant electric field at A, 𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 𝑖̂ − 𝑞 𝐸 𝑖̂ = 0
⃗⃗⃗𝐸𝐴 = 𝐸⃗1 + 𝐸⃗2 𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 − 𝑞 𝐸 = 0
= 2.25 𝑋 109 𝑗̂ + 2.25 𝑋 109 𝑖̂ 𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 = 𝑞 𝐸
⃗ 𝑨 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 ( 𝒊̂ + 𝒋̂ ) 𝒎𝒈 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝜽 𝒎𝒈 𝒉
𝑬
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑬 = 𝒒
=
𝒒𝑳
9. The following pictures depict electric field lines for various charge (iii) In the figure (c), the electric field lines start at q1 and q3 and end at q2. This implies
configurations. that q1 and q3 are positive charges. The ratio of the number of field lines
𝑞1 𝑁1 8 1
| |= = =
𝑞2 𝑁2 16 2
|𝑞2 | 20
|𝑞1 | = = = 10
2 2
𝑞3 𝑁3 8 1
& | |= = =
𝑞2 𝑁2 16 2
|𝑞2 | 20
|𝑞3 | = = = 10
2 2
𝒒 ∴ 𝒒𝟏 = 𝒒𝟑 = + 𝟏𝟎 𝒏𝑪
(i) In figure (a) identify the signs of two charges and find the ratio | 𝟏 | 10. Calculate the electric dipole moment for the following charge configurations.
𝒒𝟐
(ii) In figure (b), calculate the ratio of two positive charges and identify the
strength the electric field at three points A, B, and C
(iii) Figure (c) represents the electric field lines for three charges. If q2 = –20 nC,
then calculate the values of q1 and q3
Solution :-
(i) The electric field lines start at q2 and end at q1. In figure (a), q2 is positive and q1
is negative.
The number of the lines ending at q1 ; 𝑁1 = 6
The number of the lines starting from q2 ; 𝑁2 = 18 Solution :-
𝑞1
𝑁1 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑞1 = 𝑁1 𝜀𝑜 Figure (a) :
𝜀𝑜 Position vector for the +q on the positive x-axis = 𝑎 𝑖̂
𝑞2
𝑁2 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑞2 = 𝑁2 𝜀𝑜 Position vector for the +q charge the negative x axis = 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂)
𝜀𝑜 So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = (+𝑞) 𝑎 𝑖̂ + (+𝑞) 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂) = 0
𝑞1 𝑁1 𝜀𝑜 Figure (b) :
∴ =
𝑞2 𝑁2 𝜀𝑜 Position vector charge +𝑞 placed at the origin = 0
𝑞1 𝑁1 6 1 Position vector for the +q on the positive x-axis = 𝑎 𝑖̂
| |= = =
𝑞2 𝑁2 18 3 So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = 0 + (+𝑞) 𝑎 𝑖̂ = 𝑞 𝑎 𝑖̂
|𝒒𝟐 | = 𝟑 |𝒒𝟏 | Figure (c) :
(ii) In figure (b), Position vector for the −2𝑞 on the positive y-axis = 𝑎 𝑗̂
The number of field lines emanating from 𝒒𝟏 ; 𝑁1 = 18 Position vector for the +q charge on the negative y axis = 2 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂)
The number of field lines emanating from 𝒒𝟐 ; 𝑁2 = 18 So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = (−2𝑞) 𝑎 𝑗̂ + (+𝑞) 2 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂) = −4𝑞𝑎 𝑗̂
𝑞1 𝑁1 18 Figure (d) :
∴ = = = 1 Position vector for the −2𝑞 on the negative x axis = 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂)
𝑞2 𝑁2 18
𝒒𝟏 = 𝒒𝟐 Position vector for the +q charge on the positive y axis = 𝑎 𝑗̂
At point A, the electric field lines are denser compared to the lines at point B. Position vector for the +q charge on the negative y axis = 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂)
So the electric field at t A is greater in magnitude compared to the field at t B. So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = (−2𝑞) 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂) + (+𝑞) 𝑎 𝑗̂ + (+𝑞) 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂) = 2 𝑞 𝑎 𝑖̂
Further, no electric field line passes through C, which implies that the resultant (e.g) The water molecule (H2O) has this charge configuration.
electric field at C due to these two charges is zero. The water molecule has three atoms (two H atom and one O atom). The
centres of positive (H) and negative (O) charges of a water molecule lie
at different points, hence it possess permanent dipole moment.
The electric dipole moment ; ⃗𝒑 = 𝟔. 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟎 𝑪 𝒎
11. A sample of HCl gas is placed in a uniform electric field of magnitude 13. Consider a point charge +q placed at the origin and another point charge -2q
3 × 104 N C–1. The dipole moment of each HCl molecule is 3.4 × 10–30 Cm. placed at a distance of 9 m from the charge +q. Determine the point between the
Calculate the maximum torque experienced by each HCl molecule. two charges at which electric potential is zero.
Solution :- 𝐸 = 3𝑋 104 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝑝 = 3.4 𝑋 1030 𝐶 𝑚 ; 𝜏𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ? Solution :-
▪ The maximum torque experienced by the dipole is when it is aligned ▪ According to the superposition principle, the total electric potential at a point is
perpendicular ( = 90) to the applied field. So equal to the sum of the potentials due to each charge at that point.
𝜏𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑝 𝐸 sin 90 = 3.4 𝑋 1030 𝑋 3𝑋 104 𝑋 1 ▪ Consider the point at which
𝝉𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟏𝟎. 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟔 𝑵 𝒎 the total potential zero is
12. (a) Calculate the electric potential at points P and Q as shown in the figure located at a distance 𝑥 from
below. the charge +q as shown in
(b) Suppose the charge +9 μC is replaced by –9 μC find the electrostatic the figure.
potentials at points P and Q 𝑉+𝑞 + 𝑉−2𝑞 = 0
(c) Calculate the work done to bring a test charge +2 μC from infinity to the 1 𝑞 1 (−2𝑞)
+ =0
point Q. Assume the charge +9 μC is held fixed at origin and +2 μC is brought 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑥 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 9 − 𝑥
from infinity to P. 1 𝑞 1 2𝑞
=
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑥 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 9 − 𝑥
1 2
=
𝑥 9−𝑥
9−𝑥 =2𝑥
9= 2𝑥+𝑥 =3𝑥
Solution :- ∴ 𝑥 =3𝑚
(a) Electric potential at point P is given by 14. The following figure represents the electric potential as a function of
1 𝑞 9 𝑋 10−6 81 𝑋 103 x – coordinate. Plot the corresponding electric field as a function of x.
𝑉𝑃 = = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = = 8.1 𝑋 103 = 8100 𝑉 Solution :-
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑃 10 10
Electric potential at point Q is given by ▪ The electric field is the negative gradient of the electric potential. In vector form
1 𝑞 9 𝑋 10−6 81 𝑋 103 𝜕𝑉 𝜕𝑉 𝜕𝑉
𝑉𝑄 = = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = = 5.06 𝑋 103 = 5060 𝑉 ⃗𝐸 = − [ 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ + 𝑘̂ ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑄 16 16 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑧
Here , 𝑉𝑃 < 𝑉𝑄 .The potential difference between the points P and Q is given by ▪ In the given problem, since the potential depends
𝜕𝑉 𝜕𝑉
∆𝑉 = 𝑉𝑃 − 𝑉𝑄 = 8100 − 5060 = 3040 𝑉 = 3.04 𝑋 103 𝑉 only on x, we have = = 0. Thus,
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦
(b) Suppose we replace the charge +9 μC by –9 μC, then the corresponding potentials 𝜕𝑉
at the points P and Q are, ⃗𝐸 = −𝑖̂
𝜕𝑥
𝑉𝑃 = − 8.1 𝑋 103 = − 8100 𝑉 (i) From 0 to 1 cm, the slope is constant and
𝑉𝑄 = − 5.06 𝑋 103 = − 5060 𝑉 𝜕𝑉
= 25 So, ⃗𝑬 = −𝟐𝟓 𝒊̂ 𝑽 𝒄𝒎−𝟏
Here , 𝑉𝑃 < 𝑉𝑄 . The potential difference between the points P and Q is given by 𝜕𝑥
(ii) From 1 to 4 cm, the potential is constant,
∆𝑉 = 𝑉𝑃 − 𝑉𝑄 = − 8100 − (−5060) = − 3040 𝑉 = −3.04 𝑋 103 𝑉 𝜕𝑉
V = 25 V and ⃗ = 𝟎
= 0 . So 𝑬
(c) The electric potential V at a point Q due to some charge is defined as the workdone 𝜕𝑥
by an external force to bring a unit positive charge from infinity to Q. So to bring (iii) From 4 to 5 cm, the slope constant and
𝜕𝑉
the q amount of charge from infinity to the point Q, work done is given as follows. = − 25 . So ⃗𝑬 = + 𝟐𝟓 𝒊̂ 𝑽 𝒄𝒎−𝟏
𝜕𝑥
𝑊𝑄 = 𝑞 𝑉𝑄 = 2 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 5.06 𝑋 103 = 10.12 𝑋 10−3 𝐽 ▪ The plot of electric field for the various points along
the x axis is given below.
15. Four charges are arranged at the corners of the square 16. A water molecule has an electric dipole moment of 6.3 × 10 –30 Cm. A sample
PQRS of side a as shown in the figure.(a) Find the work contains 1022 water molecules, with all the dipole moments aligned parallel to
required to assemble these charges in the given the external electric field of magnitude 3 × 105 N C–1. How much work is
configuration. (b) Suppose a charge q′ is brought to the required to rotate all the water molecules from θ = 0o to 90o?
centre of the square, by keeping the four charges fixed at Solution :- 𝜃𝑖 = 0° ; 𝜃𝑓 = 90° ; 𝐸 = 3 𝑋 105 𝑁 𝐶−1 ; 𝑝 = 6.3 𝑋 10−30 𝐶 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1022
the corners, how much extra work is required for this? ▪ When the water molecules are aligned in the direction of the electric field, it has
Solution :- minimum potential energy.
(a) The work done to arrange the charges in the corners of the square is independent ▪ The work done to rotate the dipole from θ = 0o to 90o is equal to the potential
of the way they are arranged. We can follow any order. energy difference between these two configurations.
(i) First, the charge +q is brought to the corner P. This requires no work since no 𝑊 = 𝑈 (𝜃𝑓 ) − 𝑈 ( 𝜃𝑖 )
charge is already present, WP = 0
𝑊 = − 𝑝 𝐸 cos 𝜃𝑓 + 𝑝 𝐸 cos 𝜃𝑖 = 𝑝 𝐸 (cos 𝜃𝑖 − cos 𝜃𝑓 )
(ii) Let 𝑉𝑄 be the potential at a point Q due to +q located at a point P, then Work
𝑊 = 𝑝 𝐸 (cos 0° − cos 90°) = 𝑝 𝐸 (1 − 0) = 𝑝 𝐸
required to bring the charge –q to the corner Q 𝑊 = 6.3 𝑋 10−30 𝑋 3 𝑋 105 = 18.9 𝑋 10−25 𝐽
1 𝑞
𝑊𝑄 = (−𝑞) 𝑉𝑄 = (−𝑞) ▪ Hence for 10 water molecules, the total work done is
22
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑃𝑄 𝑊𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 1022 𝑋 18.9 𝑋 10−25
1 𝑞2 𝑾𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝟏𝟖. 𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑱
𝑊𝑄 = −
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 17. Calculate the electric flux through the rectangle of sides 5 cm and 10 cm kept in
(iii) Let 𝑉𝑅 be the potential at the point R due to charges at the point P and Q, the region of a uniform electric field 100 NC –1. The angle θ is 60o. If θ becomes
then Work required to bring the charge +q to the corner R zero, what is the electric flux?
1 𝑞 1 (−𝑞) Solution :- E = 100 N C-1 ; 𝐴 = 𝑙 𝑏 = 5 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−2 = 50 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝜃 = 60°
𝑊𝑅 = 𝑞 𝑉𝑅 = 𝑞 [ + ] ▪ The electric flux through the rectangular area
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑃𝑅 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑄𝑅
1 𝑞 1 𝑞 Φ𝐸 = 𝐸⃗ . 𝐴 = 𝐸 𝐴 cos 𝜃 = 100 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 cos 60°
𝑊𝑅 = 𝑞 [ − ] 1
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎√2 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 Φ𝐸 = 5000 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 = 2500 𝑋 10−4
𝟏 𝒒𝟐 𝟏 2
𝑾𝑹 = [ − 𝟏] 𝚽𝑬 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
𝟒 𝝅 𝜺𝒐 𝒂 √𝟐
▪ For 𝜽 = 𝟎° Φ𝐸 = 𝐸⃗ . 𝐴 = 𝐸 𝐴 cos 𝜃 = 100 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 cos 0°
(iv) Let 𝑉𝑠 be the potential at the centre point O due to all the four charges in the
Φ𝐸 = 5000 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 1
four corners, then Work required to bring the fourth charge –q at the
𝚽𝑬 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
position S
18. (i) In figure (a), calculate the electric flux through the closed areas A1 and A2.
1 𝑞 1 (−𝑞) 1 𝑞 (ii) In figure (b), calculate the electric flux through the cube
𝑊𝑆 = (−𝑞)𝑉𝑆 = (−𝑞) [ + + ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑃𝑆 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑄𝑆 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅𝑆
1 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 1 𝑞2 1
𝑊𝑆 = (−𝑞) [ − + ]= − [1 − + 1]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 𝑎√2 𝑎 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 √2
𝟐
𝟏 𝒒 𝟏
𝑾𝑺 = − [𝟐 − ]
𝟒 𝝅 𝜺𝒐 𝒂 √𝟐
(b) The potential created by the two +q charges are canceled by the potential created
by the –q charges which are located in the opposite corners. Therefore the net
electric potential at the centre O due to all the charges in the corners is zero.
Hence no work is required to bring any charge to the point O. Physically this
Solution :-
implies that if any charge q′ when brought close to O, then it moves to the point
(i) In figure (a), the area A1 encloses the charge +𝑄. So electric flux through this
O without any external force. 𝑄
closed surface A1 is Φ𝐸 = . But the closed surface A2 contains no charges
𝜀𝑜
inside, so electric flux through A2 is zero.
(ii) In figure (b), the net charge inside the cube is ; 𝑄 = +5𝑞 − 2𝑞 = +3𝑞 and the 20. A parallel plate capacitor has square plates of side 5 cm and separated by a
𝑸 𝟑𝒒
total electric flux in the cube is therefore, 𝚽𝑬 = = distance of 1 mm. (a) Calculate the capacitance of this capacitor. (b) If a 10 V
𝜺𝒐 𝜺𝒐
battery is connected to the capacitor, what is the charge stored in any one of the
Note that the charge -10 q lies outside the cube and it will not contribute the total
flux through the surface of the cube. plates? (The value of o = 8.85 × 10–12 N–1m–2 C2)
19. A small ball of conducting material having a charge Solution :- a = 5 cm = 5 X 10-2 m ; A = a2 = 25 X 10-4 m2 ; d = 1 mm =10-3 m ; V = 10 V
𝜺𝒐 𝑨
+q and mass m is thrown upward at an angle θ to (a) Capacitance of the capacitor ; 𝑪 =
𝒅
horizontal surface with an initial speed vo as shown 8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−4
in the figure. There exists an uniform electric field 𝐶= = 221.2 𝑋 10−13 𝐹 = 𝟐𝟐. 𝟏𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟐 𝑭 = 𝟐𝟐. 𝟏𝟐 𝒑𝑭
10−3
E downward along with the gravitational field g. (b) Charge stored in any one of the plate ; 𝑸 = 𝑪 𝑽
Calculate the range, maximum height and time of 𝑄 = 22.12 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 10 = 221.2 𝑋 10−12 𝐶 = 𝟐𝟐𝟏. 𝟐 𝒑𝑪
flight in the motion of this charged ball. Neglect the 21. A parallel plate capacitor filled with mica having εr = 5 is connected to a 10 V
effect of air and treat the ball as a point mass.
battery. The area of each parallel plate is 6 cm2 and separation distance is 6 mm.
Solution :-
(a) Find the capacitance and stored charge. (b) After the capacitor is fully
▪ If the conductor has no net charge, then its motion is the same as usual projectile
charged, the battery is disconnected and the dielectric is removed carefully.
motion of a mass m
Calculate the new values of capacitance, stored energy and charge.
▪ Here, in this problem, in addition to downward gravitational force, the charge
Solution :- 𝜀𝑟 = 5 ; 𝑉 = 10 𝑉 ; 𝐴 = 6 𝑐𝑚2 = 6 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝑑 = 6 𝑚𝑚 = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
also will experience a downward uniform electrostatic force. 𝜀𝑜 𝜺𝒓 𝐴
▪ The acceleration of the charged ball due to gravity = −𝑔 𝑗̂ (a) The capacitance of the capacitor in the presence of dielectric is ; 𝐶 =
𝑑
𝑞𝐸 8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 5 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−4
▪ The acceleration of the charged ball due to uniform electric field = − 𝑗̂ 𝐶 = = 44.25 𝑋 10−13 𝐹 = 4.425𝑋 10−12 𝐹 = 𝟒. 𝟒𝟐𝟓 𝒑𝑭
𝑚 6 𝑋 10−3
𝒒𝑬
▪ The total acceleration of charged ball in downward direction; 𝒂
⃗ = − [𝒈 + ] 𝒋̂ The stored charge ; 𝑄 = 𝐶 𝑉
𝒎
𝒒𝑬 𝑄 = 4.425 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 10 = 44.25 𝑋 10−12 𝐶 = 𝟒𝟒. 𝟐𝟓 𝒑𝑪
▪ Its magnitude ; 𝒂 = 𝒈 + 1
𝒎 The stored charge ; 𝑈 = 𝐶 𝑉 2
▪ Galileo’s conclusion that all objects fall 2
1
at the same rate towards the Earth is 𝑼 = 𝑋 4.425 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 10 𝑋 10 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟏𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝑱
true only in a uniform gravitational 2
(b) After the removal of the dielectric, since the battery is already disconnected the
field. When a uniform electric field is
total charge will not change. But the potential difference between the plates
included, the acceleration of a charged
increases. As a result, the capacitance is decreased. New capacitance is
object depends on both mass and
charge. 𝐶 4.425 𝑋 10−12
𝑪𝒐 = = = 0.885 𝑋 10−12 𝐹 = 0. 𝟖𝟖𝟓 𝒑𝑭
▪ But still the acceleration is constant 𝜺𝒓 5
throughout the motion. In fact we can The stored charge remains same and 44.25 pC. Hence newly stored energy is
simply replace g by (𝒈 + )
𝒒𝑬
1 1 𝑄2 1 𝑄2 𝜀𝑟
𝒎 𝑈𝑜 = 𝐶𝑜 𝑉2 = = = 𝜀𝑟 𝑈
Expression for without charge with charge +q 2 2 𝐶𝑜 2 𝐶
(i) Time of flight 2 𝑣𝑂 sin 𝜃 𝟐 𝒗𝑶 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝜽 𝑼𝒐 = 5 𝑋 2.213 𝑋 10−10 = 𝟏𝟏. 𝟎𝟔𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝑱
𝑇𝑓 = [𝑻𝒇 ] = 𝒒𝑬
𝑔
𝑬 [𝒈+ ]
𝒎
The increased energy is,
(ii) Maximum height 2 2
𝑣𝑜 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝒗 𝟐 𝒔𝒊𝒏𝟐 𝜽 ∆𝑼 = 𝑈𝑜 − 𝑈 = (11.065 − 2.213) 𝑋 10−10 = 𝟖. 𝟖𝟓𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝑱
ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑥 = [𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ]𝑬 = 𝒐 𝒒 𝑬 ▪ When the dielectric is removed, it experiences an inward pulling force due to the
2𝑔 𝟐 [𝒈+ ]
𝒎 plates. To remove the dielectric, an external agency has to do work on the
(iii) Range 𝑣𝑜2 sin 2𝜃 𝒗𝒐𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝜽 dielectric which is stored as additional energy. This is the source for the extra
𝑅= [𝑹]𝑬 = 𝒒𝑬
𝑔 [𝒈+ ]
𝒎
energy 8.84 × 10–10 J.
▪ For +𝒒 , we have [𝑻𝒇 ] < 𝑻𝒇 ; [𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ]𝑬 < 𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ; [𝑹]𝑬 < 𝑹
𝑬
▪ For −𝒒 , we have [𝑻𝒇 ] > 𝑻𝒇 ; [𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ]𝑬 > 𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ; [𝑹]𝑬 > 𝑹
𝑬 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
22. Find the equivalent capacitance between P and Q ▪ Total charge ; 𝑄 = 𝑞1 + 𝑞2

for the configuration shown below in the figure. 𝑟1
𝑄 = 𝑞2 + 𝑞2
Solution :- 𝑟2
▪ In fig (i), 1 F, 3 F and 6 F, 2 F are in 𝑟1 + 𝑟2
𝑄 = 𝑞2 [ ]
parallel connection, then 𝑟2
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = 1 + 3 = 4 F 𝑟2 2 200 𝑋 10−9
∴ 𝑞2 = 𝑄 [ ] = 100 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 [ ]=
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = 6 + 2 = 8 F 𝑟1 + 𝑟2 8+2 10
▪ In fig (ii), 4 F, 4 F and 8 F, 8 F are in series connection, then 𝒒𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝑪 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒏𝑪
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 ▪ Thus, 𝑞1 = 𝑄 − 𝑞2 = 100𝑋10−9 − 20𝑋10−9 = (100 − 20)𝑋 10−9
= + = + = = ⟹ 𝐶𝑆 = 2 F ∴ 𝒒𝟏 = 𝟖𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝑪 = 𝟖𝟎 𝒏𝑪
𝐶𝑆 𝐶1 𝐶2 4 4 4 2
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 ▪ The electric charge density on sphere A is
= + = + = = ⟹ 𝐶𝑆 = 2 F 𝑞1 𝑞1 80 𝑋 10−9
𝐶𝑆 𝐶1 𝐶2 4 4 4 2 𝜎1 = = =
𝐴1 4 𝜋 𝑟12 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (8 𝑋10−2 )2
▪ In fig (iii), 2 F, 4 F are in parallel connection, then
80 𝑋 10−9 10 𝑋10−5
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = 2 + 4 = 6 F 𝜎1 = = = 9.96 𝑋10−2 𝑋10−5
So the equivalent capacitance between P and Q is = 𝟔 𝐅 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 64 𝑋 10−4 100.48
𝝈𝟏 = 𝟗. 𝟗𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝑪 𝒎−𝟐 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟗𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝒎−𝟐
▪ Thus the combination of capacitances in figure can be replaced by a single ▪ The electric charge density on sphere B is,
capacitance 6 μF as shown in fig (iv) 𝑞2 𝑞2 20 𝑋 10−9
𝜎2 = = =
𝐴2 4 𝜋 𝑟22 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (2 𝑋10−2 )2
20 𝑋10−9 20 𝑋10−5
𝜎2 = = = 3. 981 𝑋10−1 𝑋10−5
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 4 𝑋10−4 50.24
𝝈𝟐 = 𝟑. 𝟗𝟖𝟏 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝒎−𝟐
▪ Note that the surface charge density is greater on the smaller sphere compared
1
to the larger sphere (σ2 ≈ 4 σ1) which confirms that ; 𝜎 ∝
𝑟
▪ Since the potential on both spheres is the same, we have
1 𝑞1 80 𝑋 10−9
23. Two conducting spheres of radius r1 = 8 cm and r2 = 2 cm are separated by a 𝑽𝑨 = 𝑽𝑩 = = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = 90 𝑋 102 = 9000 𝑉 = 𝟗 𝒌𝑽
distance much larger than 8 cm and are 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 8 𝑋 10−2
connected by a thin conducting wire as 24. Dielectric strength of air is 3 × 106 V m–1. Suppose the radius of a hollow sphere
shown in the figure. A total charge of in the Van de Graff generator is R = 0.5 m, calculate the maximum potential
Q = +100 nC is placed on one of the difference created by this Van de Graaff generator.
spheres. After a fraction of a second, the Solution :- 𝐸𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑉 𝑚−1 ; 𝑅 = 0.5 𝑚 ; 𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ?
charge Q is redistributed and both the ▪ The electric field on the surface of the sphere is given by (by Gauss law)
spheres attain electrostatic equilibrium. 1 𝑄
𝑬𝒎𝒂𝒙 =
(a) Calculate the charge and surface charge density on each sphere. 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅2
(b) Calculate the potential at the surface of each sphere. ▪ So the maximum potential difference created is given by,
Solution :- 1 𝑄 1 𝑄 𝑅
(a) At electrostatic equilibrium, 𝑉𝐴 = 𝑉𝐵 𝑽𝒎𝒂𝒙 = = = 𝑬𝒎𝒂𝒙 𝑅
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅 𝑅
1 𝑞1 1 𝑞2 𝑽𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 3 𝑋 10 𝑋 0.5 = 1.5 𝑋 106 𝑉
6
=
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟2 𝑽𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕
𝑞1 𝑞2
=
𝑟1 𝑟2
𝑟1
𝑞1 = 𝑞2 − − − − − − (1) kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝑟2
EXERCISE PROBLEMS. ▪ Resultant force on ‘q’ along Y- axis

1. When two objects are rubbed with each other, approximately a charge of 50 nC 𝐹𝑦 = 𝐹1 (− 𝑗̂) + 𝐹2 s𝑖𝑛 45° (− 𝑗̂ ) + 𝐹5 𝑗̂ + 𝐹4 sin 45° 𝑗̂
can be produced in each object. Calculate the number of electrons that must be 1 1
transferred to produce this charge. 𝐹𝑦 = 𝐹1 𝑗̂ − 𝐹2 𝑗̂ + +𝐹5 𝑗̂ + 𝐹4 𝑗̂
√2 √2
Solution :- q = 50 nC = 50 X 10-9 C ; e = 1.6 X 10-19 C ; n=?
▪ Since, 𝐹1 = 𝐹2 = 𝐹4 = 𝐹5 = 𝐹, we get ⃗𝐹𝑦 = ⃗⃗0
▪ According to quantization of electric charges,
𝑞 =𝑛𝑒 ▪ Simillarly resultant force on ‘q’ along X- axis,
𝑞 50 𝑋 10−9 50 𝑋 1010 ⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹3 𝑖̂ + 𝐹2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 45° 𝑖̂ + 𝐹4 cos 45° 𝑖̂
∴ 𝑛= = = 1 1
𝑒 1.6 𝑋 10−19 1.6 ⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹3 𝑖̂ + 𝐹2 𝑖̂ + 𝐹4 𝑖̂
𝑛 = 3.125 𝑋 101 𝑋 1010 √2 √2
𝒏 = 𝟑𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒆𝒍𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 1 1
⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹3 𝑖̂ + 2 𝐹2 𝑖̂ = 𝐹 [1 + 2 ] 𝑖̂
√2 √2
2. The total number of electrons in the human body is typically in the order of ⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹 [1 + √2 ]𝑖̂
1028. Suppose, due to some reason, you and your friend lost 1% of this number
of electrons. Calculate the electrostatic force between you and your friend ▪ Thus total force on charge ‘q’,
separated at a distance of 1m. Compare this with your weight. Assume mass of 𝐹𝑡𝑜𝑡 = ⃗⃗⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹 [1 + √2 ] 𝑖̂
each person is 60 kg and use point charge approximation. 𝟏 𝑸𝒒
⃗𝑭𝒕𝒐𝒕 = [𝟏 + √𝟐 ]𝒊̂
1 𝟒 𝝅 𝜺 𝒐 𝑹𝟐
Solution :- 𝑁 = 1028 ; 𝑛 = 1028 𝑋 1% = 1028 𝑋 = 1026 ; 𝑟 = 1 𝑚 ; 𝑚 = 60 𝑘𝑔
100
▪ Hence, total force on the charge ‘q’ acts along X-axis whose magnitude is,
▪ Charge on each person ; 𝑞 = 𝑛 𝑒 = 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 1019 = 1.6 𝑋 107 𝐶
28
𝟏 𝑸𝒒
▪ Then electrostatic force between them, 𝑭𝒕𝒐𝒕 = [𝟏 + √𝟐 ] 𝑵
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 1 𝑞2 𝟒 𝝅 𝜺 𝒐 𝑹𝟐
𝐹𝐸 = = 4. Suppose a charge +q on Earth’s surface and another +q charge is placed on the
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 surface of the Moon. (a) Calculate the value of q required to balance the
(1.6 𝑋 107 )2 gravitational attraction between Earth and Moon (b) Suppose the distance
𝐹𝐸 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 2.56 𝑋 1014
1 between the Moon and Earth is halved, would the charge q change?
𝐹𝐸 = 𝟐𝟑. 𝟎𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 𝑵 (Take mE = 5.9 × 1024 kg, mM = 7.9 × 1022 kg)
▪ Weight of the person ; ; 𝑊 = 𝑚 𝑔 = 60 𝑋 9.8 = 588 𝑁 Solution :- 𝐺 = 6.67 𝑋 10−11 𝑁 𝑚2 𝑘𝑔−2 ; 𝑞 =?
▪ Hence the ratio of the force and the weight, , ▪ Let ‘R’ be the distance between earth and moon.
𝐹𝐸 23.04 𝑋 1023 ▪ Since the gravitational attraction is balanced by electrostatic force, 𝐹𝐸 = 𝐹𝐺
= = 3.918 𝑋10−2 𝑋1023 1 𝑞2 𝑚𝐸 𝑚𝑀 𝐺 𝑚𝐸 𝑚𝑀
𝑊 588
𝑭𝑬 =𝐺 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑞2 =
= 𝟑. 𝟗𝟏𝟖 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟏 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅 2 𝑅 2 1
[ ]
𝑾 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜
3. Five identical charges Q are placed equidistant on a
semicircle as shown in the figure. Another point charge 𝐺 𝑚𝐸 𝑚𝑀 6.67 𝑋 10−11 𝑋 5.9 𝑋 1024 𝑋 7.9 𝑋 1022
∴ 𝑞= √ = √
q is kept at the centre of the circle of radius R. Calculate 1 9 𝑋 109
[ ]
the electrostatic force experienced by the charge q. 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜
Solution :-
6.67 𝑋 5.9 𝑋 7.9 𝑋 1026
▪ Let the forces acts on ‘q’ be ⃗𝐹1 , ⃗𝐹2 , ⃗𝐹3 , ⃗𝐹4 , ⃗𝐹5 𝑞= √
▪ Here the magnitudes of these forces must be same. (i.e) 9
𝐹1 = 𝐹2 = 𝐹3 = 𝐹4 = 𝐹5 = 𝐹 𝒒 = 𝟓. 𝟖𝟕𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟑 𝑪
▪ Here ⃗⃗𝐹2 and ⃗⃗𝐹4 are resolved into two perpendicular components. (i.e.) ▪ When the distance between earth and moon is halved, the
(1) 𝐹2 cos 45° 𝑖̂ & 𝐹2 s𝑖𝑛 45° (− 𝑗̂ ) charge ‘q’ remains the same, because the value of charge is
(2) 𝐹4 cos 45° 𝑖̂ & 𝐹4 sin 45° 𝑗̂ independent of the distance.
5. Draw the free body diagram for the following charges as shown in the figure (a), 7. A closed triangular box is kept in an
(b) and (c). electric field of magnitude
E = 2 × 103 N C–1 as shown in the
figure. Calculate the electric flux
through the (a) vertical rectangular
surface (b) slanted surface and (c)
entire surface.
Solution :-
(a) Vertical rectangular surface : (𝑙 = 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑏 = 5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝜃 = 0°)
Solution :-
Φ𝐸 = ∮ 𝐸 𝑑𝑠 cos 𝜃 = 𝐸 ∮ 𝑑𝑠 cos 0°
Φ𝐸 = 𝐸 𝐴 = 𝐸 𝑙 𝑏
Φ𝐸 = 2 𝑋 103 𝑋 15 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10−2 = 150 𝑋 10−1
𝚽𝑬 = 𝟏𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
(b) Slanted surface : (𝑙 = 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑥 ; 𝜃 = 60°)
5 5 5
sin 30 ° = ⟹ 𝑥 = = = 10 𝑐𝑚
𝑥 𝑠𝑖𝑛 30° 1
( )
2
1
Φ𝐸 = ∮ 𝐸 𝑑𝑠 cos 𝜃 = 𝐸 ∮ 𝑑𝑠 cos 60° = 𝐸 𝐴 [ ]
6. Consider an electron travelling with a 2
speed 𝒗𝟎 and entering into a uniform 1
Φ𝐸 = 𝐸𝑙𝑥
electric field ⃗𝑬 which is perpendicular 2
to 𝒗⃗⃗⃗ 𝟎 as shown in the Figure. Ignoring 2 𝑋 103 𝑋 15 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−2
Φ𝐸 =
gravity, obtain the electron’s 2
acceleration, velocity and position as 𝚽𝑬 = 𝟏𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
functions of time. (c) Entire surface :
Solution :- ▪ In the figure electric field lines enters through the vertical rectangular
(i) Acceleration : surface and leaves through the slanted surface. Also the closed surface
▪ From Newton’s second law ; ⃗𝐹 = 𝑚 𝑎 ⃗ contains no charge inside.
▪ In general the electric flux is negative if the electric field lines enter the closed
▪ Force experienced by the electron in the electric field ; 𝐹
⃗ = 𝑒𝐸
⃗
surface and positive if the electric field lines leave the closed surface. Thus the
▪ Thus 𝑚𝑎 = 𝑒𝐸 ⃗
total electric flux through entire surface is zero (i.e.) 𝚽𝑬 = − 𝟏𝟓 + 𝟏𝟓 = 𝟎
𝑒 𝐸⃗ 𝑒𝐸 8. The electrostatic potential is given as a function of x in figure (a) and (b).
𝑎 = = (−𝑗̂)
𝑚 𝑚 Calculate the corresponding electric fields in regions A, B, C and D. Plot the
𝒆𝑬 electric field as a function of x for the figure (b).
⃗ = −
𝒂 𝒋̂
𝒎
(ii) Velocity :
▪ From equation of motion ; ⃗𝑣 = ⃗⃗𝑢 + ⃗𝑎 𝑡
𝒆𝑬
⃗ = 𝒗𝟎 𝒊̂ −
𝒗 𝒕 𝒋̂
𝒎
(iii) Position :
1
▪ From equation of motion ; 𝑆 = 𝑢 ⃗ 𝑡 + 𝑎 𝑡2
2
𝟏 𝒆𝑬 𝟐
⃗𝑺 = 𝒗𝟎 𝒕 𝒊̂ −
𝟐 𝒎
𝒕 𝒋̂ kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
Solution :- Solution :-
Figure (a) : According to the relation between E and V we have ; 𝐸= −
𝑑𝑉 𝑑 = 0.6 𝑚𝑚 = 0.6 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐸 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑉 𝑚−1 ; 𝑑  = 1 𝑚𝑚 = 1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
𝑑𝑥 𝑉
▪ In region - A ; 𝑑𝑉 = 5 − 8 = − 3 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.2 − 0 = 0.2 (a) Let ‘V’ be the required potential difference, then ; 𝐸 =
𝑑
𝑑𝑉 (−3) 30 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑋 0.6 𝑋 10−3 = 1.8 𝑋 103
∴ 𝑬𝑨 = − = − = + = +𝟏𝟓 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏 𝑽 = 𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝑽
𝑑𝑥 0.2 2
▪ In region - B ; 𝑑𝑉 = 5 − 5 = 0 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.4 − 0.2 = 0.2 (b) Since potential difference is directly proportional to the separation (𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑), if
𝑑𝑉 0 separation increases, potential difference also increases.
∴ 𝑬𝑩 = − = − = 𝟎 𝑉
𝑑𝑥 0.2 (c) Let 𝑉 be the new potential difference, then ; 𝐸 =
▪ In region - C ; 𝑑𝑉 = 7 − 5 = 2 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.6 − 0.4 = 0.2 𝑑
𝑑𝑉 2 20 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−3 = 3 𝑋 103
∴ 𝑬𝑪 = − = − = − = − 𝟏𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏 𝑽 = 𝟑𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝑽
𝑑𝑥 0.2 2
▪ In region - D ; 𝑑𝑉 = 1 − 7 = − 6 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.8 − 0.6 = 0.2 10. A point charge of +10 μC is placed at a
𝑑𝑉 (−6) 60 distance of 20 cm from another identical
∴ 𝑬𝑫 = − = − = + = +𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏 point charge of +10 μC. A point charge of -2 μC
𝑑𝑥 0.2 2
Figure (b) : is moved from point a to b as shown in the
𝑑𝑉 30 figure. Calculate the change in potential
𝑑𝑥 = 1 − 0 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 30 − 0 = 30 ; 𝑬=− = − = −𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1 energy of the system? Interpret your result.
𝑑𝑉 (−30) Solution :-
𝑑𝑥 = 2 − 1 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 0 − 30 = −30 ; 𝑬=− = − = +𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1
𝑑𝑉
𝑑𝑥 = 3 − 2 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 0 − 0 = 0 ; 𝑬=− = 𝟎
𝑑𝑥
𝑑𝑉 (−30)
𝑑𝑥 = 4 − 3 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = −30 − 0 = −30 ; 𝑬 = − = − = +𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1
𝑑𝑉 30
𝑑𝑥 = 5 − 4 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 0 − (−3)0 = +30 ; 𝑬 = − = − = −𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1
𝑞1 = 𝑞2 = +10 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑞 = −2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟1 = 5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑟2 = 15 𝑐𝑚
𝑟1! = √52 + 52 = √50 = 5√2 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑟2!= √152 + 52 = √250 = 5√10 𝑐𝑚
▪ Initial potential energy, when −2 𝜇𝐶 is at ‘a’
1 𝑞1 𝑞 1 𝑞2 𝑞 1 𝑞1 𝑞 𝑞2 𝑞
𝑈𝑖 = + = [ + ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟2 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 𝑟2
1 1 1
𝑈𝑖 = 𝑞1 𝑞 [ + ] [∵ 𝑞1 = 𝑞2 ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 𝑟2
1 1
𝑈𝑖 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (−2)𝑋 10−6 𝑋 [ −2
+ ]
5 𝑋 10 15 𝑋 10−2
9. A spark plug in a bike or a car is used to ignite the air-fuel mixture in the engine. 1 1 1
𝑈𝑖 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 [ + ] 𝑋
It consists of two electrodes separated by a gap of around 5 15 10−2
0.6 mm gap as shown in the figure. To create the spark, an 3+1 4 24
𝑈𝑖 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 [ ] = −18 𝑋 = −
electric field of magnitude 3 × 106 V m–1 is required. 15 15 5
(a) What potential difference must be applied to produce 𝑼𝒊 = − 𝟒. 𝟖 𝑱
the spark? (b) If the gap is increased, does the potential ▪ Final potential energy, when −2 𝜇𝐶 is at ‘b’
difference increase, decrease or remains the same? ▪ −2 𝜇𝐶 ä‹JfŸ b -æš cŸsnghJ ÏWÂ bkh¤j ä‹dG¤j M‰wš,
(c) find the potential difference if the gap is 1 mm. kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
1 𝑞1 𝑞 1 𝑞2 𝑞 1 𝑞1 𝑞 𝑞2 𝑞 Figure (c):
𝑈𝑓 = + = [ + ! ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1! 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟2! 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1!1 𝑟2 ▪ Since 𝐶𝑂 , 𝐶𝑂 and 𝐶𝑂 are in parallel,
1 1 1 𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂
𝑈𝑓 = 𝑞 𝑞 [ ! + !] [∵ 𝑞1 = 𝑞2 ] 𝑪𝑷 = 𝟑 𝑪𝑶
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 1 𝑟1 𝑟2
1 1 Figure (d):
𝑈𝑓 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (−2)𝑋 10−6 𝑋 [ + ] (1) Resultant capacitors across P and Q :
5√2 𝑋 10 −2 5√10 𝑋 10−2
1 1 1
𝑈𝑓 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 [ + ]𝑋
√2 √10 5 𝑋 10−2
1 1.023
𝑈𝑓 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 [0.707 + 0.316] 𝑋 = −18 𝑋 = −18 𝑋 0.2046
5 5
𝑼𝒇 = − 𝟑. 𝟔𝟖𝟑 𝑱
▪ The change in potential energy ;
∆ 𝑈 = 𝑈𝑓 − 𝑈𝑓 = −3.683 − (−4.8) = −3. 683 + 4.8 = +𝟏. 𝟏𝟏𝟕 𝑱 ≈ +𝟏. 𝟏𝟐 𝑱
Here, 𝐶1 and 𝐶3 are in series,
▪ Positive sign implies that to move the charge –2μC external work is required. 1 1 1 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 𝐶1 𝐶3
11. Calculate the resultant capacitances for each of the following combinations of = + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆1 =
𝐶𝑆1 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶1 + 𝐶3
capacitors.
𝐶2 and 𝐶4 are in series,
1 1 1 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 𝐶2 𝐶4
= + = ⇒ 𝐶 𝑆2 =
𝐶 𝑆2 𝐶2 𝐶4 𝐶2 𝐶4 𝐶2 + 𝐶4
𝐶𝑆1 and 𝐶𝑆2 are in parallel
𝐶𝑃𝑄 = 𝐶𝑆1 + 𝐶𝑆2
𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶2 𝐶4
𝐶𝑃𝑄 = +
Solution :- 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 𝐶2 + 𝐶4
▪ Effective capacitance of capacitors in series, ( 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 ) 𝐶1 𝐶3 + ( 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 ) 𝐶2 𝐶4
1 1 1 1 𝐶𝑃𝑄 =
( 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 ) ( 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 )
= + + +⋯
𝐶𝑆 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 + 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶4 + 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶4 + 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶4
𝐶𝑃𝑄 =
▪ Effective capacitance of capacitors in series, ( 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 ) ( 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 )
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 + 𝐶 3 + ⋯ (2) Resultant capacitors across R and S :
Figure (a) :
▪ Since 𝐶𝑂 and 𝐶𝑂 are in parallel,
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂 = 2 𝐶𝑂
▪ Also, 𝐶𝑂 and 2 𝐶𝑂 are in series,
1 1 1 3 𝟐 𝑪𝒐
= + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑪𝑺 =
𝐶𝑆 𝐶𝑂 2 𝐶𝑜 2 𝐶𝑜 𝟑
Figure (b):
▪ Since 𝐶𝑂 and 𝐶𝑂 are in parallel, Here, 𝐶1 and 𝐶2 are in series,
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂 = 2 𝐶𝑂 1 1 1 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 𝐶1 𝐶2
= + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆1 =
▪ Also, 2 𝐶𝑂 and 2 𝐶𝑂 are in series, 𝐶𝑆1 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶1 + 𝐶2
1 1 1 2 1 𝐶3 and 𝐶4 are in series,
= + = = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑪𝑺 = 𝑪𝒐 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 𝐶3 𝐶4
𝐶𝑆 2 𝐶𝑂 2 𝐶𝑜 2 𝐶𝑜 𝐶𝑜 1 1 1
= + = ⇒ 𝐶 𝑆2 =
𝐶 𝑆2 𝐶3
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝐶4 𝐶3 𝐶4 𝐶3 + 𝐶4
Thus 𝐶𝑆1 and 𝐶𝑆2 are in parallel ℎ =0+

1 𝑒𝐸 2
𝑡𝑒 =
1 𝑒𝐸 2
𝑡
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = 𝐶𝑆1 + 𝐶𝑆2 2 𝑚 2 𝑚 𝑒
𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶4 2𝑚ℎ
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = + (𝑜𝑟) 𝑡𝑒 2 =
𝐶1 + 𝐶2 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 𝑒𝐸
( 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 ) 𝐶1 𝐶2 + ( 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 ) 𝐶3 𝐶4 2𝑚ℎ 2 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 1 X 10−3
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = ∴ 𝑡𝑒 = √ = √
( 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 ) ( 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 ) 𝑒𝐸 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 5 𝑋 103
𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 + 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶4 + 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶4 + 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶4
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = 18.2 𝑋 10−18
( 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 ) ( 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 )
𝒕𝒆 = √ = √2. 275 𝑋 10−18 = 1.508 𝑋 10−9 𝑠
Figure (e) : 8
𝒕𝒆 ≈ 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒏 𝒔
𝐹 𝑒𝐸
Time of flight of proton : 𝑡 = 𝑡𝑃 ; 𝑆 = h ; u = 0 ; a = =
𝑚 𝑚
1 2
𝑆=𝑢𝑡+ 𝑎𝑡
2
1 𝑒𝐸 2 1 𝑒𝐸 2
ℎ=0+ 𝑡𝑃 = 𝑡
2 𝑚 2 𝑚 𝑒
2𝑚ℎ
∴ 𝑡𝑃 2 =
Here, 𝐶0 and 𝐶0 are in series, 𝑒𝐸
1 1 1 2 𝐶𝑂
= + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆1 = 2𝑚ℎ 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−27 𝑋 1 X 10−3
𝐶𝑆1 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 2 𝑡𝑃 = √ = √
𝑒𝐸 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 5 𝑋 103
Also, 𝐶0 and 𝐶0 are in series,
1 1 1 2 𝐶𝑂
= + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆2 = 2 𝑋 10−14
𝐶𝑆2 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 2 𝑡𝑃 = √ = √0.4 𝑋 10−14
5
Thus, 𝐶𝑆1 , 𝐶𝑆2 and 𝐶0 are in parallel,
𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 𝑡𝑃 = √40 𝑋 10−16
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑆1 + 𝐶𝑆2 + 𝐶𝑂 = + + 𝐶𝑂 𝑡𝑃 = 6. 325 𝑋 10−8 = 63.25 𝑋 10−9 𝑠
2 2
𝑪𝑷 = 𝟐 𝑪𝑶 𝒕𝑷 ≈ 𝟔𝟑 𝒏 𝒔
12. An electron and a proton are allowed to fall through the separation between the (b) Time of flight of neutron ; 𝑡 = 𝑡𝑛 ; 𝑆 = h ; u = 0 ; a = 𝑔
plates of a parallel plate capacitor of voltage 5 V and separation distance 1
𝑆 = 𝑢 𝑡 + 𝑎 𝑡2
h = 1 mm as shown in the figure. (a) Calculate the time of flight for both electron 2
and proton (b) Suppose if a neutron is allowed to fall, what is the time of flight? 1 1
ℎ=0+ 𝑔 𝑡𝑛 2 = 𝑔 𝑡𝑛 2
(c) Among the three, which one will reach the bottom first? 2 2
2ℎ
∴ 𝑡𝑛 2 =
𝑔
2ℎ 2 𝑋 1 X 10−3
𝑡𝑛 = √ = √
𝑔 10
2 𝑋 10−3
(Take mp = 1.6 × 10–27 kg, me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg and g = 10 m s–2) 𝑡𝑛 = √ = √2 𝑋 10−4 = 1. 414 𝑋 10−2
𝑉 5
10
Solution :- h = 1 mm = 1 X 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝑉 = 5 𝑉 ; 𝐸 = = −3 = 5 𝑋 103 𝑁𝐶 −1
ℎ 10 𝒕𝒏 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒔 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝒎 𝒔
𝐹 𝑒𝐸
(a) Time of flight of electron ; 𝑡 = 𝑡𝑒 ; 𝑆 = h ; u=0 ; a= = (c) Since, 𝒕𝒆 < 𝒕𝑷 < 𝒕𝒏 , out of three, electron reach first..
𝑚 𝑚
1
𝑆 = 𝑢 𝑡 + 𝑎 𝑡2 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
2
13. During a thunder storm, the movement (b) Potential difference across each capacitor :
of water molecules within the clouds 𝑉 9 𝑉 9
creates friction, partially causing the 𝑽𝒂 = = = 𝟑 𝑽 ; 𝑽𝒃 = = = 𝟑 𝑽
3 3 3 3
bottom part of the clouds to become 𝑉 9 𝑉 9
negatively charged. This implies that the 𝑽𝒄 = = =𝟑𝑽 ; 𝑽𝒅 = = = 𝟑 𝑽
3 3 3 3
bottom of the cloud and the ground act as (c) Energy stored in each capacitor ;
a parallel plate capacitor. If the electric 1 1
field between the cloud and ground 𝑼𝒂 = 𝐶𝑎 𝑉𝑎2 = 𝑋 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 36 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟑𝟔 𝝁 𝑱
2 2
exceeds the dielectric breakdown of the 1 1
2
air (3 × 10 Vm ), lightning will occur.
6 –1 𝑼𝒃 = 𝐶𝑏 𝑉𝑏 = 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 27 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟐𝟕 𝝁 𝑱
2 2
(a) If the bottom part of the cloud is 1000 m above the ground, determine 1 1
the electric potential difference that exists between the cloud and 𝑼𝒄 = 𝐶𝑐 𝑉𝑐 = 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 9 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟗 𝝁 𝑱
2
2 2
ground. 1 1
2
(b) In a typical lightning phenomenon, around 25 C of electrons are 𝑼𝒅 = 𝐶𝑑 𝑉𝑑 = 𝑋 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 36 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟑𝟔 𝝁 𝑱
2 2
transferred from cloud to ground. How much electrostatic potential 15. Capacitors P and Q have identical
energy is transferred to the ground? cross sectional areas A and
Solution :- 𝑬 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑉 𝑚−1 ; 𝑑 = 1000 𝑚 ; 𝑞 = 25 𝐶 separation d. The space between
𝑉
(a) Formula for electric field ; 𝐸 = the capacitors is filled with a
𝑑
Hence the potential difference ; 𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑋 1000 = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑽 dielectric of dielectric constant er
(b) Since the electrostatic potential energy is the amount of work done, then as shown in the figure. Calculate the
9
𝑊 = 𝑞 𝑉 = 25 𝑋 3 𝑋 10 = 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑱 𝟗 capacitance of capacitors P and Q.
14. For the given capacitor configuration (a) Find the Solution :-
charges on each capacitor (b) potential difference
across them (c) energy stored in each capacitor.
Solution :- 𝐶𝑎 = 8 𝜇𝐹 ; 𝐶𝑏 = 6 𝜇𝐹 ; 𝐶𝑐 = 2 𝜇𝐹 ;
𝐶𝑑 = 8 𝜇𝐹 ; 𝑉 = 9 𝑉
▪ Here, 𝐶𝑏 and 𝐶𝑐 are in parellel,
𝐶𝑏𝑐 = 𝐶𝑏 + 𝐶𝑐 = 6 + 2 = 8 𝜇 𝐹 (1) Capacitor 𝑷 : Here two capacitors are connected in parallel. They are,
▪ Effective capacitance of this series connection, 𝐴 𝐴
1 1 1 1 3 8 𝜀𝑜 [ ] 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 [ ]
= + + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝐶𝑠 = 𝜇𝐹 𝐶1 = 2 = & 𝐶2 = 2 = 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴
𝐶𝑠 8 8 8 8 3 𝑑 2𝑑 𝑑 2𝑑
▪ Net charge on this series ciruit ; ▪ Thus effective capacitance in parallel combination,
8 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜺𝒐 𝑨
𝑄 = 𝐶𝑠 𝑉 = 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 9 = 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = + = (𝟏 + 𝜺𝒓 )
3 2𝑑 2𝑑 𝟐𝒅
(a) Charges on each capacitor : (2) Capacitor 𝑸 : Here two capacitors are connected in series. They are
▪ Since 𝐶𝑎 = 𝐶𝑏𝑐 = 𝐶𝑑 , potential difference across them also equal (i.e.) 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀𝑜 𝐴
𝐶1 = = & 𝐶2 = =
𝑉 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑
𝑉𝑎 = 𝑉𝑏𝑐 = 𝑉𝑑 = 3 = 3 𝑉 [ ]
2
[ ]
2
▪ Thus charges on each capacitor ; ▪ Thus effective capacitance in series combination,
𝒒𝒂 = 𝐶𝑎 𝑉𝑎 = 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3 = 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 1 1 1 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 1 𝑑 1 + 𝜀𝑟
−6 −𝟔
= + = + = [ + 1] = [ ]
𝒒𝒃 = 𝐶𝑏 𝑉𝑏𝑐 = 6 𝑋 10 𝑋 3 = 𝟏𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑪 𝐶 𝑄 𝐶 1 𝐶 2 2 𝜀 𝜀
𝑟 𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀 𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀 𝑜 𝐴 𝜀 𝑟 2 𝜀 𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑟
𝒒𝒄 = 𝐶𝑐 𝑉𝑏𝑐 = 2 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3 = 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝟐 𝜺𝒐 𝑨 𝜺𝒓
∴ 𝑪𝑸 = [
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com ]
𝒒𝒅 = 𝐶𝑑 𝑉𝑑 = 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3 = 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝒅 𝟏 + 𝜺𝒓
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -2
CURRENT ELECTRICITY

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
GBHSS,kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
PARANGIPETTAI - 608 502
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 2 CURRENT ELECTRICITY PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 6. The resistance of a wire is 20 Ω. What will be new resistance, if it is stretched
1. Compute the current in the wire if a charge of 120 C is flowing through a copper uniformly 8 times its original length?
wire in 1 minute. Solution :- 𝑅1 = 20 Ω ; 𝑙1 = 𝑙 ; 𝑙2 = 8 𝑙 ; 𝑅2 = ?
Solution :- 𝑡 = 1 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 60 𝑠 ; 𝑞 = 120 𝐶 ; 𝐼 = ?  Though the wire is stretched, its volume remains unchanged.(i.e.)
 By definition, electric current (i.e.) rate of flow of charge is given by, Initial volume = final volume
𝑞 120 𝐴1 𝑙1 = 𝐴2 𝑙2
𝐼= = =𝟐𝑨 𝐴1 𝑙 = 𝐴2 (8 𝑙)
𝑡 60
2. If an electric field of magnitude 570 N C–1, is applied in the copper wire, find the 𝐴2 1
= − − − − − − (1)
acceleration experienced by the electron. 𝐴1 8
Solution :- 𝐸 = 570 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 𝑚 = 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑎 = ? 𝑙1
 Initial resistance ; 𝑅1 = 𝜌
 From Newton’s second law, force is given by ; 𝐹 = 𝑚 𝑎 𝐴1
 Hence the acceleration,  New resistance ; 𝑅2 = 𝜌 2
𝑙
𝐹 𝑒𝐸 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 570 912 𝐴2
𝑎= = = −31
= 𝑋 1012 = 100.1 𝑋 1012  Hence the ratio ;
𝑅1
=
𝑙1 𝐴2
=
𝐴1 𝑙1
=
1
𝑋
𝑙
=
1
𝑚 𝑚 9.1 𝑋 10 9.1 𝑅2 𝐴1 𝑙2 𝐴1 𝑙2 8 8𝑙 64
𝒂 = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟎𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒎 𝒔−𝟐 ∴ 𝑅2 = 64 𝑅1 = 64 𝑋 20 = 𝟏𝟐𝟖𝟎 𝛀
3. A copper wire of cross-sectional area 0.5 mm2 carries a current of 0.2 A. If the
 Hence, stretching the length of the wire has increased its resistance.
free electron density of copper is 8.4 × 1028 m–3 then compute the drift velocity
7. Consider a rectangular block of metal of height A, width B and length C as shown
of free electrons.
in the figure. If a potential difference of V is
Solution :- 𝐴 = 0.5 𝑚𝑚2 = 0.5 𝑋 10−6 𝑚2 ; 𝐼 = 0.2 𝐴 ; 𝑛 = 8.4 𝑋 1028 𝑚−3 applied between the two faces A and B of the
 The relation between drift velocity of electrons and current in a wire of cross- block [figure (a)], the current IAB is observed.
sectional area A is ; 𝐼 = 𝑛 𝐴 𝑒 𝑣𝑑 Find the current that flows if the same
𝐼
 Hence, the drift velocity ; 𝑣𝑑 = potential difference V is applied between the
𝑛𝐴𝑒
0.2 0.2 𝑋 10−3 two faces B and C of the block [figure (b)].
𝑣𝑑 = = Give your answers in terms of IAB.
8.4 𝑋 1028 𝑋 0.5 𝑋10−6 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 6.72
Solution :-
𝒗𝒅 = 2.976 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10−3 = 2.976 𝑋 10−5 𝑚 𝑠−1
 ln first case ; length =C and area = AB. Hence resistance and current
𝒗𝒅 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟐𝟗𝟕𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 ≈ 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝐶
4. Determine the number of electrons flowing per second through a conductor, 𝑅𝐴𝐵 = 𝜌 = 𝜌
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝐴𝐵
when a current of 32 A flows through it. 𝑉 𝑉 𝑉 (𝐴𝐵)
Solution :- 𝐼 = 32 𝐴 ; 𝑡 = 1 𝑠 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 ; 𝑛 = ? 𝐼𝐴𝐵 = =
𝐶
= − − − − (1)
𝑞 𝑛𝑒 𝑅𝐴𝐵 [𝜌 ] 𝜌𝐶
 By definition, current (rate of flow of charge) is given by ; 𝐼 = = 𝐴𝐵
𝑡 𝑡
 Hence the number of electrons flowing per second ;  ln second case ; length =A and area = BC. Hence resistance and current
𝐼𝑡 32 𝑋 1 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝐴
𝒏= = = 20 𝑋 1019 = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 𝒆𝒍𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝑅𝐵𝐶 = 𝜌 = 𝜌
𝑒 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝐵𝐶
𝑉 𝑉 𝑉 (𝐵𝐶)
5. A potential difference across 24 Ω resistor is 12 V. What is the current through 𝐼𝐵𝐶 = = = − − − − (2)
the resistor? 𝑅𝐵𝐶 𝐴 𝜌𝐴
[𝜌 ]
𝐵𝐶
Solution :- R = 24  ; V = 12 V ; I=?  Divide equation (2) by (1), we get
 From Ohm’s law; 𝐼𝐵𝐶 [𝑉 (𝐵𝐶)/𝜌 𝐴] 𝑉 (𝐵𝐶) 𝜌𝐶 𝐶2
𝑉 12 1 = = 𝑋 = 2
𝐼= = = 𝐼𝐴𝐵 [𝑉 (𝐴𝐵)/𝜌 𝐶] 𝜌𝐴 𝑉 (𝐴𝐵) 𝐴
𝑅 24 2 𝑪𝟐
𝑰 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨 𝑰𝑩𝑪 = 𝟐 𝑰𝑨𝑩
𝑨
 Since 𝐶 > 𝐴 , the current 𝑰𝑩𝑪 > 𝑰𝑨𝑩
8. Calculate the equivalent resistance for the circuit 11. Calculate the equivalent resistance between A and B in the given circuit.
which is connected to 24 V battery and also find the
potential difference across each resistors in the
circuit.
Solution :- 𝑅1 = 4 Ω ; 𝑅2 = 6 Ω ; V = 24 V
 Effective resistance in series circuit,
𝑹𝑺 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 = 4 + 6 = 𝟏𝟎 𝛀
𝑉 24 Solution :- 𝑅𝐴𝐵 = ?
 From Ohm’s law, current in the circuit ; 𝐼= = = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝑨
𝑹𝑺 10  Here, 2  and 2  , 4  and 4 , 6  and 6  are in parallel, then
 Hence voltage across the resistors, 1 1 1
= + = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃1 = 1 Ω
𝑉1 = 𝐼 𝑅1 = 2.4 𝑋 4 = 𝟗. 𝟔 𝑽 𝑅𝑃1 2 2
𝑉2 = 𝐼 𝑅2 = 2.4 𝑋 6 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟒 𝑽 1 1 1 1
= + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃2 = 2 Ω
9. Calculate the equivalent resistance in the following 𝑅𝑃2 4 4 2
circuit and also find the values of current I, I1 and I2 in 1 1 1 2 6
the given circuit. = + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃2 = = 3 Ω
𝑅𝑃3 6 6 6 2
Solution :- 𝑅1 = 4 Ω ; 𝑅2 = 6 Ω ; V = 24 V  Thus the above circuit becomes,
 Effective resistance in parallel circuit,
1 1 1 1 1 6+4 10 1
= + = + = = =
𝑅𝑃 𝑅1 𝑅2 4 6 24 24 2.4
(or) 𝑹𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝛀  Here, 1 , 2  and 3  are in series, then the
 Then current flows through the resistors, effective resistance becomes,
𝑉 24 𝑅𝐴𝐵 = 𝑅𝑃1 + 𝑅𝑃2 + 𝑅𝑃3 = 1 + 2 + 3
𝐼1 = = =𝟔𝑨
𝑹𝟏 4 𝑹𝑨𝑩 = 𝟔 𝛀
𝑉 24 12. Five resistors are connected in the configuration as shown in the figure.
𝐼2 = = = 𝟒𝑨
𝑹𝟐 6 Calculate the equivalent resistance between the points a and b.
 The current I is the sum of the currents in the two branches. Then Solution :-
𝑰 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 = 6 + 4 = 𝟏𝟎 𝑨  Let us assume that a current is entering
10. Two resistors when connected in series and parallel, their equivalent the junction at a.
resistances are 15 Ω and
𝟓𝟔
Ω respectively. Find the values of the resistances.  Since all the resistances in the outside
𝟏𝟓 loop are the same (1Ω), the current in the
56
Solution :- 𝑅𝑆 = 15 Ω ; 𝑅𝑃 = Ω ; 𝑅1 = ? ; 𝑅2 = ? branches ac and ad must be equal. Hence
15
 Effective resistance in series circuit ; 𝑹𝑺 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 the points C and D are at the same
15 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 − − − − − − − − − (1) potential and no current through 5 Ω.
1 1 1 𝑅 +𝑅  It implies that the 5 Ω has no role in
 Effective resistance in parallel circuit ; = + = 1 2
𝑅𝑃 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑅1 𝑅2 determining the equivalent resistance
15 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 15 and it can be removed. So the circuit is
= = [∵ 𝑏𝑦 𝑒𝑞𝑛 (1)]
56 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑅1 𝑅2 simplified as shown in the figure.
∴ 56 = 𝑅1 𝑅2 − − − − − − − − (2)
 From equation (1) & (2) ; 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 = 15 and 𝑅1 𝑅2 = 56, we get
𝑅1 = 7 & 𝑅2 = 8 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅1 = 8 & 𝑅2 = 7
 If 𝑅1 = 7 then, 𝑅2 = 15 − 𝑅1 = 15 − 7 = 8 . So 𝑹𝟏 = 𝟕 𝛀 ; 𝑹𝟐 = 𝟖 𝛀
 If 𝑅1 = 8 then, 𝑅2 = 15 − 𝑅1 = 15 − 8 = 7 . So 𝑹𝟏 = 𝟖 𝛀 ; 𝑹𝟐 = 𝟕 𝛀
 Effective resistance in series connection is, 16. Two electric bulbs marked 20 W – 220 V and 100
𝑹𝑺𝟏 = 𝑅𝑎𝑐 + 𝑅𝑐𝑏 = 1 + 1 = 2 Ω W – 220 V are connected in series to 440 V supply.
𝑹𝑺𝟐 = 𝑅𝑎𝑑 + 𝑅𝑑𝑏 = 1 + 1 = 2 Ω Which bulb will get fused?
 Effective resistance in parallel connection is, Solution :-
1 1 1 1 1  To check which bulb will get fused, the voltage
= + = + =1
𝑅𝑎𝑏 𝑅𝑆1 𝑅𝑆2 2 2 drop across each bulb has to be calculated.
𝑹𝒂𝒃 = 𝟏 𝛀 𝑉2
13. If the resistance of coil is 3 Ω at 200 C and α = 0.004/0C then determine its  The power delivered by the battery ; 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 =
𝑅
resistance at 100 0C.  Hence the resistance of the bulbs,
Solution :- 𝑇𝑜 = 20 𝐶 ; 𝑇 = 100  𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 3 Ω ; 𝑅𝑇 = ? 𝑉1 2 2202 48400
𝑅1 = = = = 2420 Ω
 Resistance at 𝑇 𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅𝑜 [1 + 𝛼 (𝑇 − 𝑇𝑜 )] 𝑃1 20 20
𝑅𝑇 = 3 [ 1 + 0.004 (100 − 20)] = 3 [1 + 0.004 𝑋 80] 𝑉2 2 2202 48400
𝑅2 = = = = 484 Ω
𝑅𝑇 = 3 [ 1 + 0.32] = 3 𝑋 1.32 𝑃2 100 100
𝑹𝑻 = 𝟑. 𝟗𝟔 𝛀  The two bulbs are connected in series, effective resistance
14. Resistance of a material at 200C and 400C are 45 Ω and 85 Ω respectively. Find 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 2420 + 484 = 2904 Ω
its temperature coefficient of resistivity.  When the bulbs are connected in series, the current passing
Solution :- 𝑇𝑜 = 20 𝐶 ; 𝑇 = 40 𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 45 Ω ; 𝑅𝑇 = 85 Ω ; α = ? through each bulb is the same and it is given by,
 The temperature coefficient of resistivity is 𝑉 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 220 + 220 440
𝐼= = = = 𝐴
1 Δ𝑅 1 (𝑅𝑇 − 𝑅𝑜 ) 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 2904 2904
𝛼 = 𝑅 Δ 𝑇 = 𝑅 ( 𝑇− 𝑇 ) −1
𝑜 𝑜 𝑜 𝐼 = 1.515 𝑋 10 𝐴 = 0. 1515 𝐴
𝛼=
1 (85−45)
𝑋 (40−20) =
1
𝑋
40
=
1
𝑋2  The voltage drop across the 20W bulb is
45 45 20 45 𝑉1 = 𝐼 𝑅1 = 0.1515 𝑋 2420 = 3.667 𝑋 102 = 𝟑𝟔𝟔. 𝟕 𝑽
𝜶 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟒𝟒 / 𝑪  The voltage drop across the 100W bulb is
15. A battery of voltage V is connected to 30 W bulb and 𝑉2 = 0.1515 𝑋 484 = 7. 333 𝑋 101 = 𝟕𝟑. 𝟑𝟑 𝑽
60 W bulb as shown in the figure. (a) Identify  The 20 W bulb will get fused because the voltage across it is more than the
brightest bulb (b) which bulb has greater voltage rating.
resistance? (c) Suppose the two bulbs are connected 17. A battery has an emf of 12 V and connected to a resistor of 3 Ω. The current in
in series, which bulb will glow brighter?
the circuit is 3.93 A. Calculate (a) terminal voltage and the internal resistance
Solution :- 𝑃1 = 30 𝑊 ; 𝑃2 = 60 𝑊
of the battery (b) power delivered by the battery and power delivered to the
(a) The power delivered by the battery ; 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 .
resistor
Since the bulbs are connected in parallel, the voltage
Solution :- I = 3.93 A ; 𝜖 = 12 V ; R = 3 Ω
drop across each bulb is the same. If the voltage is kept fixed, then the power is
(a) The terminal voltage of the battery is equal to voltage drop across the resistor
directly proportional to current (P ∝ I). Since 𝑃1 < 𝑃2 , we have 𝐼1 < 𝐼2 . So 60
𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 3.93 𝑋 3 = 𝟏𝟏. 𝟕𝟗 𝑽
W bulb draws twice as much as current as 30 W and hence 60 W bulb will glow
Internal resistance of the battery,
brighter than 30 W bulb. 𝜖−𝑉 12 − 11.79
𝑉2 1 𝑟= [ ]𝑅 = [ ] 𝑋3
(b) The power delivered by the battery ; 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 = . Hence 𝑃  𝑉 11.79
𝑅 𝑅 0.21𝑋 3 0.63
Since 𝑃1 < 𝑃2 , we have 𝑅1 > 𝑅2 . It implies that, the 30W has twice as much as 𝒓 = = = 5.341 𝑋 10−2 Ω = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟓𝟑𝟒𝟏 𝛀
11.79 11.79
resistance as 60 W bulb. (b) The power delivered by the battery,
(c) When the bulbs are connected in series, the current passing through each bulb is 𝑃 = ∈ 𝐼 = 12 𝑋 3.93 = 47.16 𝑊
the same. It is equivalent to two resistors connected in series. The bulb which has The power delivered to the resistor
higher resistance has higher voltage drop. So 30W bulb will glow brighter than 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 = 11.79 𝑋 3.93 = 46.33 𝑊
60W bulb. So the higher power rating does not always imply more brightness and The remaining power P = 47.16 − 46.33 = 𝟎. 𝟖𝟑 𝑾 is delivered to the internal
it depends whether bulbs are connected in series or parallel. kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
resistance and cannot be used to do useful work. (It is equal to 𝐼2 𝑟).
18. From the given circuit, Find 21. The following figure shows a complex network of
(a) Equivalent emf of the combination conductors which can be divided into two closed
(b) Equivalent internal resistance loops like EACE and ABCA.
(c) Total current Solution :-
(d) Potential difference across external  Apply Kirchhoff’s voltage rule (KVR) in EACE
resistance ∑𝐼 𝑅 = ∑ ∈
(e) Potential difference across each cell 𝐼1 𝑅1 + 𝐼2 𝑅2 + 𝐼3 𝑅3 = ∈
Solution :- 𝑛 = 4; ∈= 9𝑉; 𝑟 = 0.1 Ω  Apply Kirchhoff’s voltage rule (KVR) in ABCA
∑𝐼 𝑅 = ∑ ∈
(a) Equivalent emf of the combination ; ∈𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑛 ∈ = 4 𝑋 9 = 𝟑𝟔 𝑽
𝐼4 𝑅4 + 𝐼5 𝑅5 − 𝐼3 𝑅3 = 0
(b) Equivalent internal resistance ; 𝒓𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑛 𝑟 = 4 𝑋 0.1 = 𝟎. 𝟒 𝛀 22. Calculate the current that flows in the 1 Ω resistor in the following circuit.
(c) Total current ;
𝑛 ∈ 4𝑋9
𝐼= =
𝑅+𝑛𝑟 10 + 4 𝑋 0.1
36 36
𝑰 = = = 𝟑. 𝟒𝟔𝟐 𝑨
10 + 0.4 10.4
(d) Potential difference across external resistance ; 𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 3.462 𝑋 10 = 𝟑𝟒. 𝟔𝟐 𝑽
𝑉 34.62
(e) Potential difference across each cell ; 𝐯 = = = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟓𝟓 𝑽
4 4
19. From the given circuit. Find Solution :-
(a) Equivalent emf  We can denote the current that flows from 9V battery as I1 and it splits up into I2
(b) Equivalent internal resistance and (I1 – I2) at the junction E according Kirchhoff ’s current rule (KCR).
(c) Total current (I)  Now consider the loop EADFE and apply KVR, we get
(d) Potential difference across each cell ∑𝐼𝑅 = ∑ ∈
(e) Current from each cell 3 (𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) − 𝐼2 = 6
Solution :- 3 𝐼1 − 3 𝐼2 − 𝐼2 = 6
(a) Equivalent emf ; ∈𝒕𝒐𝒕 = ∈ = 𝟓 𝑽 3 𝐼1 − 4 𝐼2 = 6 − − − − − − (1)
𝑟 0.5  Now consider the loop EFCBE and apply KVR, we get
(b) Equivalent internal resistance ; 𝒓𝒕𝒐𝒕 = = = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝛀
𝑛 4 ∑𝐼𝑅 = ∑ ∈
∈ 5
(c) Total current ; 𝐼 = 𝑟 = 0.5 𝐼2 + 3 𝐼1 + 2 𝐼1 = 9
𝑅+ 10+
𝑛 4 5 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 = 9 − − − − − − (2)
5 5 (2) 𝑋 4 ⇒ 20 𝐼1 + 4 𝐼2 = 36 − − − − − − (3)
𝐼= =
10 + 0.125 10.125  (1) + (3) ⇒ 23 𝐼1 = 42
𝑰 = 4. 939 𝑋 10−1 𝐴 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟗𝟑𝟗 𝑨 ≈ 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨 42
(d) Potential difference across each cell ; 𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 0.5 𝑋 10 = 𝟓 𝑽 𝑰𝟏 = = 𝟏. 𝟖𝟐𝟔 𝑨
23
I
(e) Current from each cell ; 𝑰𝟏 = =
0.5
= 𝟎. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑨  Put , 𝐼1 = 1.826 in equation (1)
n 4 3 (1.826) − 4 𝐼2 = 6
20. For the given circuit find the value of I. 5.478 − 4 𝐼2 = 6
Solution :- −4 𝐼2 = 6 − 5.478 = 0.522
▪ From Kirchoff’s first law, at junction P ; ∑ 𝐼 = 0 (𝑜𝑟) 4 𝐼2 = −0.522
0.2 + (−0.4) + 0.6 + (−0.5) + 0.7 + (−𝐼) = 0 0.522
0.2 − 0.4 + 0.6 − 0.5 + 0.7 − 𝐼 = 0 𝑰𝟐 = − = − 𝟎. 𝟏𝟑𝟎𝟓 𝑨
4
∴ 𝐼 = 0.2 − 0.4 + 0.6 − 0.5 + 0.7  It implies that the current in the 1  resistor flows from F to E.
𝑰 = 𝟏. 𝟓 − 𝟎. 𝟗 = 𝟎. 𝟔 𝑨
23. In a Wheatstone’s bridge P = 100 Ω, Q = 1000 Ω and R = 40 Ω. If the galvanometer 28. An electric heater of resistance 10 Ω connected to 220 V power supply is
shows zero deflection, determine the value of S. immersed in the water of 1 kg. How long the electrical heater has to be switched
Solution :- on to increase its temperature from 30°C to 60°C. (Specific heat capacity of
 From the balanced condition of Wheatstone’s bridge, water is s = 4200 J kg–1 K–1)
𝑃 𝑅 Solution :- R = 10 Ω ; V = 220 V ; m = 1 kg ; 𝑇1 = 30C ; 𝑇2 = 60C ; t = ?
= 𝑉2
𝑄 𝑆  From Joule’s law of heating ; 𝐻 = 𝐼2 𝑅 𝑡 = 𝑡
𝑅
𝑅𝑄 40 𝑋 1000
𝑺= = = 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝛀  Heat absorbed by the water ; 𝐻 = 𝑚 𝑠 Δ𝑇 = 𝑚 𝑠 (𝑇2 − 𝑇1 )
𝑃 100  Here, heat produced by the heater in time ‘t’ is equal to the heat absorbed by the
24. What is the value of x when the Wheatstone’s network is balanced?
water to increase its temperature (i.e.)
Solution :- P = 500 Ω, Q = 800 Ω, R = x + 400, S = 1000 Ω
𝑉2
 From the balanced condition of Wheatstone’s bridge, 𝑡 = 𝑚 𝑠 (𝑇2 − 𝑇1 )
𝑃 𝑅 𝑅
= 𝑅
𝑄 𝑆 𝑡 = 2 𝑚 𝑠 (𝑇2 − 𝑇1 )
𝑉
500 𝑥 + 400 10
= 𝑡= 𝑋 1 𝑋 4200 𝑋 (60 − 30)
800 1000 2202
5 𝑥 + 400 10
= 𝑡= 𝑋 4200 𝑋 30
8 1000 220 𝑋 220
5000 = 8 (𝑥 + 400) 4200 𝑋 3 12600
5000 = 8 𝑥 + 3200 𝑡= = = 2.604 𝑋 101
22 𝑋 22 484
8 𝑥 = 5000 − 3200 = 1800 𝒕 = 𝟐𝟔. 𝟎𝟒 𝒔
1800
𝒙 = = 𝟐𝟐𝟓 𝛀
8
25. In a meter bridge experiment with a standard resistance of 15 Ω in the right gap,
the ratio of balancing length is 3:2. Find the value of the other resistance.
Solution :- Q = 15 Ω ; 𝑙1 ∶ 𝑙2 = 3 ∶ 2 ; 𝑃 = ?
𝑃 𝑙1
 From the theory of meter bridge ; =
𝑄 𝑙2
𝑙1 3 45
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑃=𝑄 = 15 𝑋 =
𝑙2 2 2
𝑷 = 𝟐𝟐. 𝟓 𝛀
26. In a meter bridge experiment, the value of resistance in the resistance box
connected in the right gap is 10 Ω. The balancing length is l1 = 55 cm. Find the
value of unknown resistance.
Solution :- Q = 10 Ω ; 𝑙1 = 55 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑙2 = 100 − 𝑙1 = 45 𝑐𝑚 ; P = ?
𝑃 𝑙1
𝑄 𝑙2
𝑙1 55 550
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑃=𝑄 = 10 𝑋 =
𝑙2 45 45
𝑷 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟐𝟐 𝛀
27. Find the heat energy produced in a resistance of 10 Ω when 5 A current flows
through it for 5 minutes.
Solution :- R = 10 Ω ; 𝐼 = 5 𝐴 ; 𝑡 = 5 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 300 𝑠 ; 𝐻 = ?
 From Joule’s law of heating,
𝐻 = 𝐼 2 𝑅 𝑡 = 52 𝑋 10 𝑋 300 = 25 𝑋 3000 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝑯 = 𝟕𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝑱 = 𝟕𝟓 𝒌 𝑱
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. A copper wire of 10–6 m2 area of cross section, carries a current of 2 A. If the
1. The following graphs represent the current versus voltage and voltage versus number of free electrons per cubic meter in the wire is 8 × 10 28, calculate the
current for the six conductors A,B,C,D,E and F. Which conductor has least current density and average drift velocity of electrons.
resistance and which has maximum resistance? Solution :- 𝐴 = 10−6 𝑚2 ; 𝐼 = 2 𝐴 ; 𝑛 = 8 𝑋 1028 ; 𝐽 = ? ; 𝑣𝑑 = ?
 Current density ;
𝐼 2
𝑱= = = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝑨 𝒎−𝟐
𝐴 10−6
 Aveage drift velocity ;
𝐼 𝐽
𝑣𝑑 = =
𝑛𝐴𝑒 𝑛𝑒
2 𝑋 106 1
𝑣𝑑 = 28 −19
= 𝑋 10−3
8 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10 6.4
𝒗𝒅 = 𝟏. 𝟓𝟔𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟔𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟓 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
Solution :- 4. The resistance of a nichrome wire at 200C is 10 Ω. If its temperature coefficient
Figure (1) : of resistivity of nichrome is 0.004/0C, find the resistance of the wire at boiling
Δ𝑉 2
 Resistance of conductor - A ; 𝑅𝐴 = = = 0.5 Ω point of water. Comment on the result.
Δ𝐼 4
Δ𝑉 4 Solution :- 𝑇𝑜 = 0 𝐶 ; 𝑇 = 100  𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 10 Ω ; 𝑅𝑇 = ?
Resistance of conductor - B ; 𝑅𝐵 = = = 1.33 Ω
Δ𝐼 3  Resistance of the conducting wire at T 0C is,
Δ𝑉 5 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅𝑜 [1 + 𝛼 (𝑇 − 𝑇𝑜 )]
Resistance of conductor - C ; 𝑅𝐶 = = = 2.5 Ω
Δ𝐼 2 𝑅𝑇 = 10 [ 1 + 0.004 (100 − 0)]
Figure (2) : 𝑅𝑇 = 10 [1 + 0.004 𝑋 100]
Δ𝑉 4
 Resistance of conductor - D ; 𝑅𝐷 = = =2Ω 𝑅𝑇 = 10 [ 1 + 0.4] = 10 𝑋 1.4
Δ𝐼 2
Δ𝑉 3 𝑹𝑻 = 𝟏𝟒 𝛀
Resistance of conductor - E ; 𝑅𝐸 = = = 0.75 Ω  As the temperature increases the resistance of the wire also increases.
Δ𝐼 4
Resistance of conductor - F ; 𝑅𝐹 =
Δ𝑉
=
2
= 0.4 Ω 5. The rod given in the figure is made up of two different materials. Both have
Δ𝐼 5 square cross sections of 3 mm side. The resistivity of the first material is
 Thus conductor F has least resistance (i.e.) 𝑹𝑭 = 𝟎. 𝟒 𝛀 4 × 10–3 Ωm and that of second material has resistivity of 5 × 10–3 Ωm. What is
And conductor C has maximum resistance (i.e.) 𝑹𝑪 = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝛀 the resistance of rod between its ends?
2. Lightning is very good example of natural current. In
typical lightning, there is 109 J energy transfer across
the potential difference of 5 × 107 V during a time
interval of 0.2 s. Using this information, estimate the Solution :- 𝐴 = 3𝑚𝑚𝑋3𝑚𝑚 = 9 𝑚𝑚2 = 9 𝑋 10−6 𝑚2 ; 𝑙1 = 25 𝑐𝑚 = 25 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
following quantities 𝑙2 = 70 𝑐𝑚 = 70 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝜌1 = 4 𝑋 10−3 ; 𝜌2 = 5 𝑋 10−3
(a) total amount of charge transferred between cloud  Resistance of first material ;
and ground (b) the current in the lightning bolt (c) the 𝜌1 𝑙1 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−2 1000
𝑅1 = = = Ω
power delivered in 0.2 s. 𝐴 9 𝑋 10−6 9
Solution :- 𝑉 = 5 𝑋 107 𝑉 ; 𝑡 = 0.2 𝑠 ; 𝑈 = 109 𝐽  Resistance of second material ;
𝑈 109 1 𝜌2 𝑙2 5 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−2 3500
(a) Total charge ; 𝑸 =
𝑉
= 5 𝑋 107
= 5 𝑋 102 = 0.2 𝑋 102 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑪 𝑅2 = = −6
= Ω
𝐴 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑄 20 200  Since the two materials are in series, their effective resistance,
(b) Current ; 𝑰 = 𝑡 = 0.2 = 2 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝑨
1000 3500 1000 + 3500 4500
𝑈 109 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 = + = =
(c) Power ; 𝑷= = = 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑾 = 𝟓 𝑮 𝑾 9 9 9 9
𝑡 0.2
𝑹𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝛀
6. Three identical lamps each having a resistance R are connected to the battery of (d) Power delivered :
emf 𝝐 as shown in the figure Suddenly the switch S is closed. (a) Calculate the  When S is open,
current in the circuit when S is open 𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
and closed (b) What happens to the 𝑷𝑨 = 𝑉 𝐴 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
3 3𝑅 𝟗𝑹
intensities of the bulbs A,B and C. (c) 𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
Calculate the voltage across the 𝑷𝑩 = 𝑉𝐵 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
3 3𝑅 𝟗𝑹
three bulbs when S is open and 𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
closed (d) Calculate the power 𝑷 𝑪 = 𝑉𝐶 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
3 3𝑅 𝟗𝑹
delivered to the circuit when S is 𝝐𝟐 𝝐𝟐
Total power delivered; 𝑷𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑷𝑨 + 𝑷𝑩 + 𝑷𝑪 = 𝟑 ( ) =
𝟗𝑹 𝟑𝑹
opened and closed (e) Does the
 When S is closed,
power delivered to the circuit
𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
decrease, increase or remain same? 𝑷𝑨 = 𝑉𝐴 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
Solution :- 2 2𝑅 𝟒𝑹
𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
(a) Current : 𝑷𝑩 = 𝑉𝐵 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
 When S is open, all the bulbs A, B and C are in series, and hence their effective 2 2𝑅 𝟒𝑹
𝑷𝑪 = 0
resistance becomes ; 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅 + 𝑅 + 𝑅 = 3 𝑅 . Thus from Ohm’s law, 𝝐𝟐 𝝐𝟐
𝜖 𝝐 Total power delivered; 𝑷𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑷𝑨 + 𝑷𝑩 + 𝑷𝑪 = 𝟐 ( ) =
𝟒𝑹 𝟐𝑹
𝑰= =
𝑅𝑇 𝟑𝑹 (e) When S is suddenly closed, the power delivered to the circuit will increases.
 When S is closed, only the bulbs A and B are in series and hence their effective 7. An electronics hobbyist is building a radio which requires 150 Ω in her circuit.
resistance becomes 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅 + 𝑅 = 2 𝑅 and no current flows through bulb C. But she has only 220 Ω, 79 Ω and 92 Ω resistors available. How can she connect
Thus from Ohm’s law, the available resistors to get the desired value of resistance?
𝜖 𝝐 Solution :-
𝑰= =
𝑅𝑇 𝟑𝑹  The value of equivalent resistance in series connection will be greater than each
(b) Intensity : individual resistance. Similarly the value of equivalent resistance in parallel
 When S is open, all the bulbs A, B and C are in series. Here current through all connection will be lesser than each individual resistance.
the bulbs are same. So all the bulbs glow with equal intensity.  When all the three resistors are connected in series, their effective resistance will
 When S is closed, only the bulbs A and B are in series . The intensities of the be greater than 220 Ω and when all the three resistors are connected in parallel,
bulbs A and B equally increase. Bulb C will not glow since no current pass their effective resistance will be less than 79 Ω
through it.  Initially first two resistors 220 Ω and 79 Ω are connected in parallel and their
(c) Voltage (Potential difference) : effective value,
 When S is open, 1 1 1 220 + 79 299
𝜖 𝝐 = + = =
𝑽𝑨 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐴 = 𝑋𝑅 = 𝑅 𝑃 220 79 220 𝑋 79 17380
3𝑅 𝟑 17380
𝜖 𝝐 ∴ 𝑅𝑃 = = 5. 811 𝑋 101 Ω ≈ 𝟓𝟖 𝛀
𝑽𝑩 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐵 = 𝑋𝑅 = 299
3𝑅 𝟑  Now 58 Ω and third resistor 92 Ω are connected in series its effective value,
𝜖𝜖 𝝐
𝑽𝑪 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐶 = 𝑋𝑅 = 𝑅𝑺 = 58 + 92 = 150 Ω
3𝑅 𝟑
 When S is closed,  Thus in order to get 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝛀 resistance, 220 Ω and 79 Ω are connected in parallel
𝜖 𝝐 and this combination is connected in series with 9𝟐 𝛀
𝑽𝑨 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐴 = 𝑋𝑅 =
2𝑅 𝟐
𝜖 𝝐
𝑽𝑩 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐵 = 𝑋𝑅 =
2𝑅 𝟐
𝑽𝑪 = 0 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
8. A cell supplies a current of 0.9 A through a 2 Ω resistor and a current of 0.3 A 10. A potentiometer wire has a length of 4 m and resistance of 20 Ω. It is connected
through a 7 Ω resistor. Calculate the internal resistance of the cell. in series with resistance of 2980 Ω and a cell of emf 4 V. Calculate the potential
Solution :- 𝐼1 = 0.9 𝐴 ; 𝐼2 = 0.3 𝐴 ; 𝑅1 = 2 Ω ; 𝑅2 = 7 Ω ; r = ? gradient along the wire.
 From Ohm’s law (V = I R), Solution :- 𝑙 = 4 𝑚 ; 𝑅 = 20  ; 𝑅𝑒𝑥 = 2980  ; ϵ = 4 V ; 𝑉 = ?
20
𝜖 = 𝐼1 (𝑅1 + 𝑟) = 0.9 (2 + 𝑟) − − − − (1)  Resistance per unit length of the potentiometer wire, 𝑟 = = 5 Ω 𝑚−1
4
𝜖 = 𝐼2 (𝑅2 + 𝑟) = 0.3 (7 + 𝑟) − − − − (2) 𝜖 4 4
 From equation (1) and (2)  From Ohm’s law ; 𝐼 = = (20+2980) = 3000
(𝑅+ 𝑅𝑒𝑥 )
0.9 (2 + 𝑟) = 0.3 (7 + 𝑟) 𝐼=
4
= 1. 33 𝑋 10−3 𝐴
1.8 + 0.9 𝑟 = 2.1 + 0.3 𝑟 3 𝑋 103
0.9 𝑟 − 0.3 𝑟 = 2.1 − 1.8  Potential difference across the potentiometer wire
0.6 𝑟 = 0.3 𝑉 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 1.33 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 20 = 26.6 𝑋 10−3 𝑉
0.3 1  Then the potential gradient along the wire
𝑟= = 2 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝛀
0.6 𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑟 = 1.33 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 5 = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑽𝒎−𝟏
9. Calculate the currents in the following circuit. 11. Determine the current flowing through the galvanometer (G) as shown in the
figure.
Solution :-
 Apply Kirchoff’s current law at the junction P,
2 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 (𝑜𝑟)
𝐼2 = 2 − 𝐼1 − − − − − − (1)
 Apply Kirchoff’s voltage law to the closed loop
PQSP ,
5 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 15 𝐼2 = 0
Solution :- 5 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 15 (2 − 𝐼1 ) = 0
 Apply Kirchoff’s current law at the junction B, 5 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 30 + 15 𝐼1 = 0
𝐼1 = 𝐼2 + 𝐼3 − − − − − − (1) 20 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 30 = 0
 Apply Kirchoff’s voltage law to the closed loop ABEFA and BCDEB, 20 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 = 30 − − − − − − (2)
100 𝐼3 + 100 𝐼1 = 15 − − − − − − (2)  Similarly Apply Kirchoff’s voltage law to the closed loop QRSQ,
and 100 𝐼2 − 100 𝐼3 = − 9 − − − − − − (3) 10 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑔 ) − 10 𝐼𝑔 − 20 (𝐼2 + 𝐼𝑔 ) = 0
 Put equation (1) in (2) 10 𝐼1 − 10 𝐼𝑔 − 10 𝐼𝑔 − 20 𝐼2 − 20 𝐼𝑔 = 0
100 𝐼3 + 100( 𝐼2 + 𝐼3 ) = 15 10 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 20 𝐼2 = 0
100 𝐼3 + 100 𝐼2 + 100 𝐼3 = 15
10 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 20 (2 − 𝐼1 ) = 0
100 𝐼2 + 200 𝐼3 = 15 − − − − − − (4)
(4) − (3) ⟹ 300 𝐼3 = 24 10 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 40 + 20 𝐼1 = 0
24 8 30 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 40 = 0
𝐼3 = = = 0.08 𝐴 30 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 = 40 − − − − − − (3)
300 100
 Put this in equation (3) (2)𝑋 3 ⟹ 60 𝐼1 + 30 𝐼𝑔 = 90 − − − − − − (4)
100 𝐼2 − 100 (0.08) = − 9 (3)𝑋 2 ⟹ 60 𝐼1 − 80 𝐼𝑔 = 80 − − − − − − (5)
100 𝐼2 − 8 = − 9 (4) − (5) ⟹ 110 𝐼𝑔 = 10
100 𝐼2 = − 9 + 8 = − 1 11 𝐼𝑔 = 1
1 𝟏
𝐼2 = − = − 0.01 𝐴 𝑰𝒈 = 𝑨
100 𝟏𝟏
 Then equation(1) becomes,
𝐼1 = − 0.01 + 0.08 = 0.07 𝐴
 Thus , 𝑰𝟏 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟕 𝑨 ; 𝑰𝟐 = − 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏 𝑨 ; 𝑰𝟑 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟖 𝑨 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
12. Two cells each of 5V are connected in series with a 8 Ω resistor and three Solution :-
parallel resistors of 4 Ω, 6 Ω and 12 Ω. Draw a circuit diagram for the above
arrangement. Calculate (i) the current drawn from the cells (ii) current through
each resistor
Solution :-
 Circuit diagram for the above arrangement,
14. In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V gives a balance point at 35

(i) The current drawn from the cells : cm length of the wire. If the cell is replaced by another cell and the balance point
 Here, 4, 6  and 12  all are in parallel, their effective resistance, shifts to 63 cm, what is the emf of the second cell?
1 1 1 1 3+2+1 6 1 Solution :- : 𝜖1 = 1.25 𝑉 ; 𝑙1 = 35 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑙2 = 63 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝜖2 = ?
= + + = = = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃 = 2 Ω
𝑅𝑃 4 6 12 12 12 2  The ratio of emf’s of two cells using potentiometer,
 Also, 8  and 2  are in series, their effective resistance, ‹ 𝜖1 𝑙1
𝑅𝑺 = 8 + 2 = 10  =
𝜖2 𝑙2
 Total potential difference(voltage) ; 𝑉 = 5 + 5 = 10 𝑉 𝑙2
 Then current in the circuit, 𝜖2 = 𝜖1
𝑙1
𝑉 10 63 𝑋 10−2 78.75
𝑰= = =𝟏𝑨 𝜖2 = 1.25 𝑋 =
𝑅𝑆 10 35 𝑋 10−2 35
 The potential difference across parallel combination of effective 𝝐𝟐 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑽
resistance 𝑅𝑃 = 2 Ω is ; 𝑉𝑃 = 𝐼 𝑅𝑃 = 1 𝑋 2 = 2 𝑉
(ii) Current through each resistor :
▪ Current through 8 Ω resistor ; 𝑰 = 𝟏 𝑨
𝑉𝑃 𝟐
▪ Current through 4 Ω resistor ; 𝑰𝟏 = = = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨
4 𝟒
𝑉𝑃 𝟐
▪ Current through 6 Ω resistor ; 𝑰𝟐 = = = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟑 𝑨
6 𝟔
𝑉𝑃 𝟐
▪ Current through 12 Ω resistor ; 𝑰𝟑 = = = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟕 𝑨
12 𝟏𝟐
13. Four bulbs P, Q, R, S are connected in a circuit of unknown arrangement. When
each bulb is removed one at a time and replaced, the following behavior is
observed. Draw the circuit diagram for these bulbs.
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -3
MAGNETISM
AND
MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF ELECTRIC CURRENT

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 3 MAGNITISM AND MAGNETIC EFFECT OF ELECTRIC CURRENT PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 3. Compute the magnetic length of a uniform bar

1. The horizontal component and vertical component of Earth’s magnetic field at a magnet if the geometrical length of the magnet is
place are 0.15 G and 0.26 G respectively. Calculate the angle of dip and resultant 12 cm. Mark the positions of magnetic pole points.
Solution :
magnetic field. (G-gauss, cgs unit for magnetic field 1G = 10–4 T)
 We know that, Magnetic length : Geometrical length = 5 : 6
Solution : 𝐵𝐻 = 0.15 𝐺 ; 𝐵𝑉 = 0.26 𝐺 ; 𝐼 = ? ; 𝐵 = ? 𝑀𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑒𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 5
 Angle of dip ‘I’ is given by, (i.e.) =6
𝐺𝑒𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
𝐵𝑉 0.26 26 5 5
tan 𝐼 = = = = 1. 733 𝑀𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑒𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 𝑋 𝐺𝑒𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 𝑋 12
𝐵𝐻 0.15 15 6 6
𝑰 = tan−1 (1.733) = 𝟔𝟎° 𝑀𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑒𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 10 𝑐𝑚
 Resultant magnetic field,  In this figure, the dot implies the pole points.
𝐵= √𝐵𝐻2 + 𝐵𝑉2 = √0.152 + 0.262
𝐵 = √0.0225 + 0.0676 = √0.0901
𝑩 = 𝟎. 𝟑 𝑮
2. Let the magnetic moment of a bar magnet be 𝒑 ⃗ 𝒎 whose magnetic length is d = 2l
and pole strength is 𝒒𝒎 . Compute the magnetic moment of the bar magnet when
it is cut into two pieces (a) along its length (b) perpendicular to its length. 4. Calculate the magnetic flux coming out from
Solution : closed surface containing magnetic dipole (say,
(a) Bar magnet cut into two pieces along its length : a bar magnet) as shown in figure.
Solution :
 The total flux emanating from the closed
surface S enclosing the dipole is zero. So,
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = 𝟎
⃗ . 𝒅𝑨
𝚽𝑩 = ∮ 𝑩
 When the bar magnet is cut along the axis into two pieces, the magnetic length  Here the integral is taken over closed surface. Since no isolated magnetic pole
does change , but magnetic pole strength becomes halved . So the new (called magnetic monopole) exists, this integral is always zero. This is similar to
𝑞
magnetic pole strength is ; 𝑞𝑚 = 𝑚 Gauss’s law in electrostatics.
2 5. The repulsive force between two magnetic poles in air is 9 × 10 –3 N. If the two
1 1
 Hence the magnetic moment ; 𝑝𝑚 = 𝑞𝑚 𝑑 = 𝑞𝑚 2 𝑙 = 𝑝𝑚 poles are equal in strength and are separated by a distance of 10 cm, calculate
2 2
 𝟏 the pole strength of each pole.
 In vector notation ; 𝒑
⃗𝒎= ⃗𝒎
𝒑 Solution : 𝐹 = 9 𝑋 10−3 𝑁 ; 𝑟 = 10 𝑐𝑚 = 10 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑞𝑚𝐴 = 𝑞𝑚𝐵 = 𝑞𝑚 = ?
𝟐
(b) Bar magnet cut into two pieces perpendicular to the axis :  The magnitude of the force between two poles is given by
𝜇𝑜 𝑞𝑚𝐴 𝑞𝑚𝐵
𝐹=
4𝜋 𝑟2
−7
4 𝜋 𝑋 10 𝑞𝑚2
9 𝑋 10−3 =
4𝜋 (10 𝑋 10−2 )2
2
𝑞𝑚
 When the bar magnet is cut perpendicular to the axis into two pieces, the 9 𝑋 10−3 = 10−7 𝑋
10−2
magnetic pole strength does change , but magnetic length becomes halved. So 9 𝑋 10−3
the new magneticlength is ;: 𝑑 =
𝑑
=𝑙 𝑞𝑚2 = = 900
2 10−5
−𝟏
 1 1 1 ∴ 𝒒𝒎 = 𝟑𝟎 𝑵 𝑻
 Hence magnetic moment ; 𝑝𝑚 = 𝑞𝑚 𝑑  = 𝑞𝑚 2
𝑑 = 2 𝑞𝑚 (2 𝑙) = 2
𝑝𝑚
 𝟏
⃗𝒎= 𝟐
⃗𝒎
𝒑 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
6. A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of 0.5 J T–1. Calculate magnitude and 8. Compute the intensity of magnetisation of the bar magnet whose mass,
direction of the magnetic field produced by the bar magnet which is kept at a magnetic moment and density are 200 g, 2 A m2 and 8 g cm–3, respectively.
distance of 0.1 m from the centre of the bar magnet along (a) axial line of the bar Solution : 𝑚 = 200g = 200 𝑋10−3 𝑘g ; 𝑝𝑚 = 2 𝐴𝑚2 ; 𝜌 = 8 𝑔𝑐𝑚−3 = 8 𝑋103 𝑘𝑔 𝑚−3
magnet and (b) normal bisector of the bar magnet.  Density of the bar magnet ;
Solution : 𝑝𝑚 = 0.5 𝐽 𝑇−1 ; 𝑟 = 0.1 𝑚 ; 𝐵𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = ? ; 𝐵𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = ? 𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑚
𝜌= =
(a) Magnetic field at a point on the axial line of the bar magnet, 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝑉
𝜇 2 𝑝𝑚  Hence the volume ;
𝐵 ⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 𝑜 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝑟3 𝑚 200 𝑋10−3
−7
4 𝜋 𝑋 10 2 𝑋 0.5 𝑉= = = 25 𝑋 10−6 𝑚3
𝐵⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 𝑖̂ 𝜌 8 𝑋103
4𝜋 (0.1)3  So the intensity of magnetization ;
1 1 𝑝𝑚 2 0. 08
𝐵⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂ = 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂ 𝑀= = = = 0.08 𝑋 106 𝐴 𝑚−1
0.001 10−3 𝑉 25 𝑋 10−6 10−6
⃗⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂
𝑩 −𝟒 𝑴 = 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 𝑨 𝒎−𝟏
 Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field along axial is Baxis = 1 × 10–4 T and 9. Using the relation 𝑩⃗⃗ = 𝝁𝒐 (𝑯
⃗⃗⃗ + 𝑴
⃗⃗⃗ ), show that 𝝌 = 𝝁 − 𝟏 .
𝒎 𝒓
direction is towards South to North. Solution :
(b) Magnetic field at a point on the normal bisector of the bar magnet, ⃗⃗
𝑀
𝜇 𝑝  By definition, the magnetic susceptibility is ; 𝜒𝑚 =
𝐵⃗ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 𝑜 𝑚 𝑖̂ ⃗
𝐻
4 𝜋 𝑟3 (𝑜𝑟) ⃗⃗ = 𝜒𝑚 𝐻
𝑀 ⃗ − − − − − (1)
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 0.5
𝐵 ⃗ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 𝑖̂  By definition, the magnetic field is ; 𝐵 = 𝜇 ⃗𝐻
⃗ − − − − − (2)
4𝜋 (0.1)3
0.5 0.5  The given relation, 𝑩⃗⃗ = 𝝁𝒐 (𝑯⃗⃗⃗ + 𝑴
⃗⃗⃗ )
𝐵 ⃗ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂ = 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂  put equation (1) and (2), we get
0.001 10−3
⃗⃗⃗𝐵𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝒊̂ 𝜇𝐻 ⃗ = 𝜇𝑜 (𝐻 ⃗ + 𝜒𝑚 𝐻⃗)
 Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field along equatorial is Bequator 𝜇𝐻 ⃗ = 𝜇𝑜 𝐻 ⃗ (1 + 𝜒𝑚 )
= 0.5 × 10–4 T and direction is towards North to South. 𝜇 = 𝜇𝑜 (1 + 𝜒𝑚 )
𝜇
Note : The magnitude of Baxis is twice that of magnitude of Bequator and the direction of Baxis = (1 + 𝜒𝑚 )
and Bequator are opposite. 𝜇𝑜
7. Consider a magnetic dipole which on switching ON external magnetic field orient (𝑜𝑟) 𝜇𝑟 = 1 + 𝜒𝑚
only in two possible ways i.e., one along the direction of the magnetic field (𝑜𝑟) 𝝌 𝒎 = 𝝁𝒓 − 𝟏
(parallel to the field) and another anti-parallel to magnetic field. Compute the 10. Two materials X and Y are magnetised whose values of intensity of
energy for the possible orientation. magnetisation are 500 A m–1 and 2000 A m–1 respectively. If the magnetising
Solution : field is 1000 A m–1, then which one among these materials can be easily
 Let 𝒑𝒎 be the dipole and before switching ON the external magnetic field, there is magnetized?
Solution :
no orientation. Therefore, the energy U = 0.
 Susceptibility of material X,
 As soon as external magnetic field is switched ON, the magnetic dipole orient
|𝑀⃗⃗ | 500 1
parallel (θ = 0o ) to the magnetic field with energy, 𝜒𝑚𝑋 = = = = 0.5
𝑼𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒍 = − 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 𝐜𝒐𝒔 0𝑜 = − 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 = 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒎 |𝐻⃗| 1000 2
 Otherwise, the magnetic dipole orients anti-parallel (θ = 180o) to the magnetic  Susceptibility of material Y
field with energy, ⃗⃗ |
|𝑀 2000
𝑼𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒍 = − 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 𝐜𝒐𝒔 180𝑜 = + 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 = 𝒎𝒂𝒙𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒎 𝜒𝑚𝑌 = = = 2
⃗
|𝐻 | 1000
 Here 𝜒𝑚 < 𝜒𝑚 .. It implies that material Y can be easily magnetized.
𝑋 𝑌
11. The following figure shows the variation of 14. A coil of a tangent galvanometer of diameter 0.24 m has 100 turns. If the
intensity of magnetisation with the applied horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is 25 × 10–6 T then, calculate the
magnetic field intensity for three magnetic current which gives a deflection of 60o.
materials X, Y and Z. Identify the materials Solution : 𝑁 = 100 ; 𝑑 = 0.24 𝑚 ; 𝑟 = 0.12 𝑚 ; 𝐵𝐻 = 25 𝑋 10−6 𝑇 ; 𝜃 = 60°
X, Y and Z.  From the theory of TG, the current through the circular coil is,
Solution : 2 𝑟 𝐵𝐻
𝐼= tan 𝜃
 The slope of M-H graph is a measure of the 𝜇𝑜 𝑁
magnetic susceptibility, which is given by 2 𝑋 0.12 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−6
𝐼= tan 60
|⃗𝑀
⃗| 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 100
𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 = = 𝜒𝑚 6 𝑋 10 −6
|⃗𝐻| 𝐼= 𝑋 √3
(a) Material X : Slope is positive and larger value. So, it is a ferromagnetic 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5
−1
material. 6 𝑋 1.732 𝑋 10
𝐼=
(b) Material Y : Slope is positive and lesser value than X. So, it could be a 12.56
paramagnetic material. 𝐼 = 8. 274 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 10−1 = 8.274 𝑋 10−2 𝐴
(c) Material Z : Slope is negative and hence, it is a diamagnetic material. 𝑰 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟖𝟐𝟕𝟒 𝑨
12. The magnetic field shown in the figure is due to the current carrying wire. In 15. Compute the magnitude of the magnetic field of a long, straight wire carrying a
which direction does the current flow in the wire?. current of 1 A at distance of 1m from it. Compare it with Earth’s magnetic field.
Solution : Solution : 𝑰 = 1 𝐴 ; 𝑎 = 1 𝑚 ; 𝐵 = ? ; 𝐵 ∶ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑡ℎ = ?
 Magnetic field due to long straight current carrying wire,
𝜇𝑜 𝐼 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 1
𝐵= = = 2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
2𝜋𝑎 2𝜋𝑋1
 But the Earth’s magnetic field is ; 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑡ℎ ≈ 10−5 𝑇
 Thus, 𝑩 ∶ 𝑩𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒉 = 𝟏 ∶ 𝟏𝟎𝟎
(i.e.) Bstraightwire is one hundred times smaller than BEarth
16. Calculate the magnetic field inside a solenoid, when (a) the length of the
solenoid becomes twice with fixed number of turns (b) both the length of the
solenoid and number of turns are doubled (c) the number of turns becomes
twice for the fixed length of the solenoid
Solution :
 Using right hand rule, current flows upwards.
 The magnetic field inside a solenoid of length L and turns N is
13. What is the magnetic field at the centre of the loop shown in figure? 𝜇𝑜 𝑁 𝐼
𝐵𝐿,𝑁 = − − − − − − (1)
𝐿
𝜇 𝑁𝐼 𝐵
(a) If 𝐿 → 2𝐿 then ; 𝐵2𝐿,𝑁 = 𝑜 = 𝐿,𝑁
2𝐿 2
𝜇𝑜 2 𝑁 𝐼 𝜇 𝑁𝐼
(b) If 𝐿 → 2𝐿, 𝑁 → 2𝑁 then ; 𝐵2𝐿,2𝑁 = = 𝑜 = 𝐵𝐿,𝑁
2𝐿 𝐿
𝜇 2𝑁𝐼
(c) If 𝑁 → 2𝑁 then ; 𝐵𝐿,2𝑁 = 𝑜 = 2 𝐵𝐿,𝑁
𝐿
 Here 𝑩𝑳,𝟐𝑵 > 𝑩𝟐𝑳,𝟐𝑵 > 𝑩𝟐𝑳,𝑵 . Thus, strength of the magnetic field is increased
Solution :
 The magnetic field due to current in the upper semicircle and lower semicircle of when we pack more loops into the same length for a given current
the circular coil are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction.
 Hence, the net magnetic field at the centre of the loop (at point O) is zero
(i.e.) ⃗𝑩 = ⃗𝟎.
17. A particle of charge q moves with velocity 𝒗

⃗⃗ along positive y - direction in a 19. An electron moving perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field 0.500 T
magnetic field ⃗⃗⃗
𝑩 . Compute the Lorentz force experienced by the particle undergoes circular motion of radius 2.50 mm. What is the speed of electron?
(a) when magnetic field is along positive y-direction (b) when magnetic field Solution : 𝐵 = 0.500 𝑇 ; 𝑟 = 2.5 𝑚𝑚 = 2.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 𝑣 = ?
points in positive z - direction (c) when magnetic field is in zy - plane and  Lorentz force acts as centripetal force for the particle causing it to execute circular
𝑚𝑣
making an angle θ with velocity of the particle. Mark the direction of magnetic motion. The radius of the circular path is ; 𝑟 =
𝐵𝑒
force in each case..  Therefore the speed of the electron ; 𝑣 =
𝐵𝑒𝑟
𝑚
Solution : ⃗⃗𝑣 = 𝑣 𝑗̂ 0.5 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 2.5 𝑋 10−3
𝐵 = 𝐵 𝑗̂
(a) When magnetic field is along positive y - direction, then ⃗⃗⃗ 𝑣=
9.1 𝑋 10−31
Lorentz force ; 𝐹 ⃗ 𝑚 = 𝑞 (⃗𝑣 𝑋 𝐵⃗ ) = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝐵 𝑗̂) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑗̂) = 0 0.5 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 2.5 𝑋 109
𝑣 =
So, no force acts on the particle when it moves along the direction of 9.1
magnetic field. 𝑣 = 2. 197 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 109
⃗⃗⃗ = 𝐵 𝑘̂ 𝒗 = 𝟐. 𝟏𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
(b) When magnetic field is along positive z - direction, then 𝐵
20. A proton moves in a uniform magnetic field of strength 0.500 T magnetic field
Lorentz force ; 𝐹 ⃗ 𝑚 = 𝑞 (⃗𝑣 𝑋 𝐵⃗ ) = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝐵 𝑘̂ ) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑘̂ ) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 𝑖̂ is directed along the x-axis. At initial time, t = 0 s, the proton has velocity
Therefore, the magnitude of the Lorentz force is qvB and direction is along positive ⃗ = [𝟏. 𝟗𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒊̂ + 𝟐, 𝟎𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒌̂ ] 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 .Find
𝒗
x - direction.
(a) At initial time, what is the acceleration of the proton?
(c) When magnetic field is in zy -plane, then 𝐵 ⃗⃗⃗ = 𝐵 cos 𝜃 𝑗̂ + 𝐵 sin 𝜃 𝑘̂
(b) Is the path circular or helical? If helical, calculate the radius of helical
Lorentz force ; 𝐹𝑚 = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗ ) = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝐵[cos 𝜃 𝑗̂ + 𝐵 sin 𝜃 𝑘̂]) trajectory and also calculate the pitch of the helix (Note: Pitch of the helix is the
𝐹𝑚 = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 cos 𝜃 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑗̂) + 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 sin 𝜃 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑘̂) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 sin 𝜃 𝑖 distance travelled along the helix axis per revolution).
Solution : ⃗𝐵 = 0.500 𝑖̂ ; ⃗𝑣 = [1.95 𝑋 105 𝑖̂ + 2.00 𝑋 105 𝑘̂ ] ; 𝑡 = 0 𝑠 ; 𝒂 = ? ; 𝑻 = ?
(a) Mass of proton ; 𝑚𝑝 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔
Charge of proton ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶
From Newton’s II law, acceleration is
𝐹𝐵 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗)
𝑎= =
𝑚𝑝 𝑚𝑝
1.6 𝑋 10−19 [(1.95 𝑋 105 𝑖̂ + 2.00 𝑋 105 𝑘̂ ) 𝑋 0.500 𝑖̂ ]
𝑎=
18. Compute the work done and power delivered by the Lorentz force on the particle 1.67 𝑋 10−27
1.6 𝑋 10−19 [1 𝑋 105 𝑗̂] 1.6 𝑋 10−14
of charge q moving with velocity 𝒗 ⃗ . Calculate the angle between Lorentz force 𝑎= = 𝑗̂
1.67 𝑋 10−27 1.67 𝑋 10−27
and velocity of the charged particle and also interpret the result. 1.6 𝑋 10 13
Solution : 𝑎= 𝑗̂ = 9. 581 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1013 𝑗̂
1.67
 Lorentz force on a charged particle moving on a magnetic field is, ⃗ = 𝟗. 𝟓𝟖𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟐 𝒋̂ (𝑜𝑟)
𝒂 𝒂 = 𝟗. 𝟓𝟖𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟐 𝒎 𝒔−𝟐
⃗⃗⃗𝐹𝑚 = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗) (b) Here this acceleration directed perpendicular to the magnetic field, due to the
 Work done by the magnetic field ; 𝑊 = ∫ 𝐹 . 𝑑𝑟 ⃗⃗⃗⃗ = 𝑞 ∫(⃗⃗𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗ ) . 𝑣 𝑑𝑡 = 0 Lorentz force, the velocity component 𝑣𝑧 = 2.00 𝑋 105 𝑘̂ along Z-axis alone
𝑑𝑊 continuously changed. Thus the path of proton is helical. The radius of helical
 And power is given by ; 𝑃 = =0 path is
𝑑𝑡
 Since, 𝐹 ⃗ . ⃗𝑣 = 0 we have 𝑭
⃗ ⊥ 𝒗 ⃗ . The angle between Lorentz force and velocity of 𝑚𝑝 𝑣𝑧 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑋 2.00 𝑋 105
𝑟 = =
the charged particle is 90o. 𝐵𝑒 0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
−3
 Thus Lorentz force changes the direction of the velocity but not the magnitude of 3.34 𝑋 10 33.4 𝑋 10−3
𝑟= =
the velocity. Hence Lorentz force does no work and also does not alter kinetic 0.8 8
𝒓 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟕𝟓 𝒎𝒎
energy of the particle.
Time period ; 22. Let E be the electric field of magnitude 6.0 × 106 N C–1 and B be the magnetic
2𝜋 2 𝜋 𝑚𝑝 field magnitude 0.83 T. Suppose an electron is accelerated with a potential of
𝑇= =
𝜔 𝐵𝑒 200 V, will it show zero deflection?. If not, at what potential will it show zero
2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27 10. 4876 𝑋 10−8 104. 876 𝑋 10−8 deflection?
𝑇= = =
0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 0.8 8 Solution : 𝐸 = 6.0 𝑋 106 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝐵 = 0.83 𝑇 ; 𝑉 = 200 𝑉 ; 𝑣 = ? ; 𝑣200 = ? ; 𝑉0 = ?
𝑻 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟏𝟎𝟗𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟖 𝒔 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟏𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟖 𝒔  At zero deflection, the velocity of electron,
Hence, pitch of the helix is 𝐸 6.0 𝑋 106
𝑋 = 𝑣𝑥 𝑇 = 1.95 𝑋 105 𝑋 13.11 𝑋 10−8 = 25.5645 𝑋 10−3 𝑣= = = 𝟕. 𝟐𝟐𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝐵 0.83
𝑿 = 𝟐𝟓. 𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟓. 𝟓𝟔 𝒎𝒎  Since the accelerating potential is 200 V, the electron acquires
The proton experiences appreciable acceleration in the magnetic field, hence the kinetic energy because of this accelerating potential. Hence
pitch of the helix is almost six times greater than the radius of the helix. 1 2
21. Two singly ionized isotopes of uranium 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐𝑼 and
𝑚 𝑣200 =𝑒𝑉
2
𝟐𝟑𝟖
𝟗𝟐𝑼 (isotopes have same atomic number but 2
2𝑒𝑉
𝑣200 =
different mass number) are sent with velocity 𝑚
1.00 × 105 m s–1 into a magnetic field of strength 2𝑒𝑉
0.500 T normally. Compute the distance between ∴ 𝑣200 = √
𝑚
the two isotopes after they complete a semi-circle.
Also compute the time taken by each isotope to 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 200 640 𝑋 1012
complete one semi-circular path. 𝑣200 = √ = √
9.1 𝑋 10−31 9.1
(Given: masses of the isotopes: m235 = 3.90 × 10–25 kg and m238 = 3.95 × 10–25 kg)
𝒗𝟐𝟎𝟎 = 𝟖. 𝟑𝟖𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
Solution : 𝐵 = 0.500 𝑇 ; 𝑣 = 1.00 𝑋 105 𝑚 𝑠 −1 ; 𝑚235 = 3.90 𝑋 10−25 𝑘𝑔 ;  Since the speed 𝒗𝟐𝟎𝟎 > 𝒗 , the electron is deflected towards direction of Lorentz
−25 −19
𝑚238 = 3.95 𝑋 10 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10 𝐶 ; 𝑑 =? force. So, in order to have null deflection, the potential 𝑉0 , we have to supply is
 Since isotopes are singly ionized, they have equal charge which is equal to the 1
charge of an electron 𝑚 𝑣 2 = 𝑒 𝑉0
2
 The radius of the path of 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐𝑼 is r235
𝑚 𝑣2 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 (7.229 𝑋 106 )2
∴ 𝑉0 = =
𝑚235 𝑣 3.90 𝑋 10−25 𝑋 1.00 𝑋 105 3.90 𝑋 10−1 3.90 2𝑒 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝑟235 = = = = 9.1 𝑋 7.229 𝑋 7.229 𝑋 100
𝐵𝑒 0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 0.8 8 𝑉0 =
𝑟235 = 0.4875 𝑚 3.2
Hence the diameter ; 𝑑235 = 2 𝑟235 = 2 𝑋 0.4875 = 0.975 𝑚 = 97.5 𝑐𝑚 𝑽𝟎 = 𝟏𝟒𝟖. 𝟔 𝑽
 The radius of the path of 𝟐𝟑𝟖 23. Suppose a cyclotron is operated to accelerate protons with a magnetic field of
𝟗𝟐𝑼 is r235
𝑚238 𝑣 3.95 𝑋 10−25 𝑋 1.00 𝑋 105 3.95 𝑋 10−1 3.95 strength 1 T. Calculate the frequency in which the electric field between two
𝑟238 = = −19
= = Dees could be reversed.
𝐵𝑒 0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10 0.8 8
𝑟238 = 0.49375 𝑚 Solution : B = 1 T ; 𝑚𝑝 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 𝑓 = ?
Hence the diameter ; 𝑑238 = 2 𝑟238 = 2 𝑋 0.49375 = 0.9875 𝑚 = 98.75 𝑐𝑚  The frequency is,
 Therefore the separation distance between the isotopes is ; 𝐵𝑞
𝑓=
∆𝒅 = 𝑑238 − 𝑑235 = 0.9875 = 0.975 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝒎 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 𝒄𝒎 2 𝜋 𝑚𝑝
 The time taken by each isotope to complete one semi-circular path are 1 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝑑235 0.975 𝑓=
𝑡235 = = = 0.975 𝑋 10−5 = 9.75 𝑋 10−6 𝑠 = 9.75 𝜇𝑠 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27
𝑣 1.00 𝑋 105 1.6 𝑋 108
𝑑238 0.9875 𝑓=
𝑡238 = = = 0.9875 𝑋 10−5 = 9.875 𝑋 10−6 𝑠 = 9.875 𝜇𝑠 10.4876
𝑣 1.00 𝑋 105 𝑓 = 1.525 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 108 = 1.525 𝑋 107 𝐻𝑧
𝒇 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝑯𝒛 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟐𝟓 𝑴𝑯𝒛
24. A metallic rod of linear density is 0.25 kg m–1 is lying horizontally on a smooth 26. The resistance of a moving coil galvanometer is made twice its original value in
inclined plane which makes an angle of 45o with the order to increase current sensitivity by 50%. Find the percentage change in
horizontal. The rod is not allowed to slide down by flowing a voltage sensitivity.
current through it when a magnetic field of strength 0.25 T is Solution :
acting on it in the vertical direction. Calculate the electric  Let 𝐼𝑆 be the initial current sensitivity. If current sensitivity is increased by 50%,
current flowing in the rod to keep it stationary. then new current sensitivity,
𝑚
Solution : = 0.25 𝑘𝑔 𝑚−1 ; 𝐵 = 0.25 𝑇 ; 𝐼 = ? 50 1 3
𝑙 𝑰𝑺 = 𝐼𝑆 + 50% 𝐼𝑆 = 𝐼𝑆 [1 + ] = 𝐼𝑆 [1 + ] = 𝑰𝑺 = 1.5 𝐼𝑆
 Magnetic Lorentz force experienced by the current carrying conductor placed in 100 2 2
magnetic field ; 𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 sin 90° = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙  Let 𝑉𝑆 be the initial Voltage sensitivity. When the resistance is doubled, then new
 The direction of this force 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 is given by Fleming’s left hand rule. voltage sensitivity is
 This force is resolved in to two perpendicular components 3

𝐼𝑆 ( ) 𝐼𝑆
2 3
1) 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠 45° − along the inclined plane 𝑽𝑺 =  = 2𝑅 = 𝑽𝑺 = 0.75 𝑉𝑆
𝑅𝑔 4
upwards 𝑔
2) 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛 45° − perpendicular to the  Hence the voltage sensitivity decreases. The percentage decrease in voltage
incline plane downwards sensitivity is
 Similarly, weight 𝑚𝑔 also resolved in to two 𝑽𝑺 − 𝑽𝑺 𝑽𝑺 − 𝟎. 𝟕𝟓 𝑽𝑺
𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟎 % = 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟎% = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟎% = 𝟐𝟓 %
perpendicular components. 𝑽𝑺 𝑽𝑺
1) 𝑚𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑠 45° − perpendicular to the
incline plane downwards
2) 𝑚𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 45° − along the inclined plane downwards
 For equilibrium of the rod ; 𝑚𝑔 sin 45 ° = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 cos 45 °
𝑚
𝑚𝑔 sin 45 ° ( )𝑔 0.25 𝑋 9.8
∴ 𝐼= = 𝑙 = = 𝟗. 𝟖 𝑨
𝐵 𝑙 cos 45 ° 𝐵 0.25
 So, we need to supply current of 9.8 A to keep the metallic rod stationary.
25. The coil of a moving coil galvanometer has 5 turns and each turn has an effective
area of 2 × 10–2 m2. It is suspended in a magnetic field whose strength is
4 × 10–2 Wb m–2. If the torsional constant K of the suspension fibre is
4 × 10–9 N m deg–1.
(a) Find its current sensitivity in division per micro - ampere.
(b) Calculate the voltage sensitivity of the galvanometer for it to have full scale
deflection of 50 divisions for 25 mV.
(c) Compute the resistance of the galvanometer.
Solution :𝑛 = 5 ; 𝐴 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 4 𝑋10−2 𝑊𝑏 𝑚−2 ; 𝐾 = 4 𝑋 10−9 𝑁 𝑚 𝑑𝑒𝑔−1
(a) Current sensitivity,
𝜃 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 5 𝑋 4 𝑋10−2 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2 1
𝑰𝑺 = = = −9
= −6 𝑑𝑒𝑔/𝐴 = 𝟏 𝒅𝒆𝒈/𝝁𝑨
𝐼 𝐾 4 𝑋 10 10
(b) Voltage sensitivity,
𝜃 50
𝑽𝑺 = = = 2 𝑋 103 𝑑𝑒𝑔/𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
𝑉 25 𝑋 10−3
(c) Resistance of the galvanometer,
1
𝑰𝑺 ( −6 ) 1
10 = 0.5 𝑋 103 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝛀 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝒌𝛀
𝑹𝒈 =
𝑽𝑺
= =
2 𝑋 103 2 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−6 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. A circular coil with cross-sectional area 0.1 cm2 is kept in a uniform magnetic
1. A bar magnet having a magnetic moment 𝒑 ⃗ 𝒎 is cut into four pieces i.e., first cut field of strength 0.2 T. If the current passing in the coil is 3 A and plane of the
loop is perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field. Calculate
into two pieces along the axis of the magnet and each piece is further cut along
(a) total torque on the coil
the axis into two pieces. Compute the magnetic moment of each piece.
(b) total force on the coil
Solution :
(c) average force on each electron in the coil due to the magnetic field. (The free
electron density for the material of the wire is 1028 m–3).
Solution : 𝑨 = 0.1 𝑐𝑚2 = 0.1 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 0.2 𝑇 ; 𝐼 = 3 𝐴 ; 𝑛 = 1028 𝑚−3 ; 𝜃 = 0°
(a) Total torque on the coil
 Initial magnetic moment of the magnet ; 𝒑 ⃗ 𝒎 = 𝒒𝒎 ⃗𝒅 = 𝒒𝒎 ⃗⃗⃗⃗𝟐𝒍 𝜏 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃 = 𝐼 𝐴 𝐵 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
 When it cut along the axis into four pieces, the pole strength of each piece becomes 𝜏 = 3 𝑋 0.1 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 0.2 𝑋 sin 0° [∵ sin 0° = 0]
𝑞𝑚 𝝉=𝟎
, but the magnetic length will not change. Hence magnetic moment of each piece, (b) Total force on the coil,
4
 𝑞 1 𝟏 𝐹 = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 sin 𝜃
⃗𝒑𝒎 = 𝑚 ⃗𝑑 = (𝑞𝑚 ⃗⃗⃗⃗ 2 𝑙) = ⃗𝒑𝒎
4 2 𝟒 𝑭=𝟎 [∵ sin 0° = 0]
2. A conductor of linear mass density 0.2 g m–1 suspended (c) Charge of electron ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶
by two flexible wire as shown in figure. Suppose the If 𝑙 is the length of the coil, the drift velocity ; 𝑣𝑑 =
𝑙
tension in the supporting wires is zero when it is kept 𝑡

Lorentz force on each electron,
inside the magnetic field of 1 T whose direction is into the 𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝑞 𝑣 = 𝐵 𝑒 𝑣𝑑 [∵ 𝐼 = 𝑛 𝐴 𝑒 𝑣𝑑 ]
page. Compute the current inside the conductor and also 𝐼 𝐵𝐼
the direction of the current. Assume g = 10 m s–2 𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝑒 =
𝒎
𝑛𝐴𝑒 𝑛𝐴
Solution : = 𝟎. 𝟐 𝒈 𝒎−𝟏 = 𝟎. 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒌𝒈 𝒎−𝟏 ; 𝑩 = 𝟏 𝑻 ; 𝒈 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎 𝒔−𝟐 0.2 𝑋 3 0.6
𝒍 𝐹𝐵 = 28 −4
= 𝑋 10−24 = 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟒 𝑵
10 𝑋 0.1 𝑋 10 0.1
4. A bar magnet is placed in a uniform magnetic field whose strength is 0.8 T.If the
bar magnet is oriented at an angle 30o with the external field experiences a
torque of 0.2 Nm. Calculate: (a) the magnetic moment of the magnet
(b) the work done by the magnetic field in moving it from most stable
configuration to the most unstable configuration and also compute the work
done by the applied magnetic field in this case.
Solution : 𝐵 = 0.8 𝑇 ; 𝜃 = 30° ; 𝜏 = 0.2 𝑁 𝑚
(a) We know that, the torque ; 𝜏 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃
Hence magnetic moment is given by,
 Weight of the conductor due to gravity in downward direction, 𝜏 0.2 0.2 0.2 2
𝐹𝑔 = 𝑚 𝑔 𝑝𝑚 = = = = =
𝐵 sin 𝜃 0.8 𝑋 sin 30° 1 0.4 4
 Magnetic Lorentz force acting perpendicular to conductor in upward direction, 0.8 𝑋
2
𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 𝒑𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨 𝒎𝟐
 When the tension of the supporting wire becomes zero, we have (b) For most stable configuration ; 𝜃 = 0° and energy 𝑈𝑆
𝐹𝐵 = 𝐹𝑔 For most unstable configuration ; 𝜃 = 180 and energy 𝑈𝑈𝑆
𝐵𝐼𝑙=𝑚𝑔
𝑚
𝑚𝑔 ( )𝑔 0.2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10
𝑰= = 𝑙 = = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑨 = 𝟐 𝒎 𝑨
𝐵𝑙 𝐵 1
 From the figure, 6. Calculate the magnetic field at the centre of a square loop which carries a current
𝑈𝑆 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 𝜃 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 0° = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 of 1.5 A, length of each side being 50 cm.
𝐿
( )
𝑈𝑈𝑆 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 𝜃 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 180° = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 −1 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 Solution : 𝐿 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 50 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝐼 = 1.5 𝐴 𝑎 = = 25𝑐𝑚 = 25 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
2
 Hence the work done by the magnetic field in moving it from most stable 𝜙1 = 𝜙 = 45° ; 𝜙2 = 180° − 𝜙 ; 𝜃 = 45°
configuration to the most unstable configuration is,  Let the square loop is made up of four straight conductors AB, BD, DC and CA
𝑊𝐹 = 𝑈𝑈𝑆 − 𝑈𝑆 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 − (− 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 ) = 2 𝑝𝑚 𝐵  From Biot - Savart law, the magnetic field at a
𝑊𝐹 = 2 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 0.8 distance ‘a’ due to straigtht current carrying
𝑾𝑭 = 𝟎. 𝟖 𝑱 conductor AB is,
 Work done by the applied magnetic field, 𝜇𝑜 𝐼
𝐵𝐴𝐵 = [sin 𝜙1 + sin 𝜙2 ]
𝑊𝐵 = 𝑈𝑆 − 𝑈𝑈𝑆 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 = − 2 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 4𝜋𝑎
𝑊𝐵 = − 2 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 0.8 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 1.5
𝐵𝐴𝐵 = [sin 45° + sin 45° ]
𝑊𝐵 = − 𝟎. 𝟖 𝑱 4 𝜋 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−2
−5
5. A non - conducting sphere has a mass of 100 g and 10 𝑋 1.5
radius 20 cm. A flat compact coil of wire with turns 5 𝐵𝐴𝐵 = [2 sin 45° ]
25
is wrapped tightly around it with each turns 1
concentric with the sphere. This sphere is placed on 𝐵𝐴𝐵 = 0. 06 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 2 𝑋 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
√2
an inclined plane such that plane of coil is parallel to  Similarly, magnetic field due to BD, DC and CA
the inclined plane. A uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T
exists in the region in vertically upward direction. 𝐵𝐵𝐷 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
Compute the current I required to rest the sphere in 𝐵𝐷𝐶 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
equilibrium. 𝐵𝐶𝐴 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
−2
Solution : 𝑀 = 100 g = 0.1 kg ; R = 20 cm =20 X 10 m ; N = 5 ; B = 0.5 T ; I = ?  From Fleming’s left hand rule, the magnetic field at the centre, due to all four
 Here sphere be at two types of equilibrium. They are, conductors is directed perpendicularly inwards to the plane of the paper. Hence
(i) Straight line equilibrium the total magnetic field
(ii) Rotational equilibrium 𝐵 = 𝐵𝐴𝐵 + 𝐵𝐵𝐷 + 𝐵𝐷𝐶 + 𝐵𝐶𝐴
 Under straight line equilibrium ; 𝑓𝑆 = 𝑀 𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 − − − − − − (1) 𝐵 = 4 𝑋 6 √2 𝑋 10−7
 Torque on the sphere due to magnetic field about its centre ; 𝐵 = 24 𝑋 1.414 𝑋 10−7
𝜏 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃 (anticlockwise direction) 𝐵 = 33. 936 𝑋 10−7 = 3.3936 𝑋 10−6 𝑇
Torque on the sphere due to friction about its centre ; 𝑩 = 𝟑. 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑻
𝜏 = 𝑓𝑆 𝑅 (clockwise direction)
Under rotational equilibrium ; 𝑓𝑆 𝑅 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃 − − − − − − (2)
 Put equation (1) in (2)
𝑀 𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑅 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃
𝑀 𝑔 𝑅 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 [∵ 𝑝𝑚 = 𝑁 𝐼 𝐴]
𝑀𝑔𝑅 = 𝑁𝐼𝐴𝐵
𝑀 𝑔 𝑅 = 𝑁 𝐼 (𝜋 𝑅2 ) 𝐵
𝑀𝑔
𝐼 =
𝑁𝜋𝑅𝐵
0.1 𝑋 10
𝐼 =
5 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 0.5
102 100
𝐼 = =
50 𝑋 𝜋 50 𝑋 𝜋
𝟐
𝑰 = 𝑨 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝝅
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -4
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
AND
ALTERNATING CURRENT

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 4 ELECTROMAGNETIC INUDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENT PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 4. A closed coil of 40 turns and of area 200 cm2, is rotated in a magnetic field of
1. A circular antenna of area 3 m2 is installed at a place in Madurai. The plane of flux density 2 Wb m–2. It rotates from a position where its plane makes an angle
the area of antenna is inclined at 47o with the direction of Earth’s magnetic field. of 30o with the field to a position perpendicular to the field in a time 0.2 s. Find
If the magnitude of Earth’s field at that place is 4.1 × 10–5 T find the magnetic flux the magnitude of the emf induced in the coil due to its rotation.
linked with the antenna. Solution : 𝐴 = 200 𝑐𝑚2 = 200 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 2 𝑇 ; 𝑁 = 40 ; 𝑡 = 0.2 𝑠
Solution : 𝑨 = 3 𝑚2 ; 𝜃 = 90° − 47° = 43 ° ; 𝐵 = 4.1 X 10−5 T  Initially, 𝜃 = 90° − 30° = 60 ; Hence initial magnetic flux
 Magnetic flux, Φ𝐵𝑖 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 Φ𝐵𝑖 = 2 𝑋 200 𝑋 10−4 X cos 60°
Φ𝐵 = 4.1 X 10−5 X 3 X cos 43° 1
Φ𝐵𝑖 = 400 𝑋 10−4 X = 200 𝑋 10−4
Φ𝐵 = 4.1 X 10−5 X 3 X 0.7314 2
Φ𝐵 = 8. 997 X 10−5 = Φ𝐵𝑖 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑊𝑏
𝚽𝑩 = 𝟖𝟗. 𝟗𝟕 𝐗 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑾𝒃 = 𝟖𝟗. 𝟗𝟕 𝝁 𝑾𝒃  Finally, 𝜃 = 90° − 90° = 0° ; Hence final magnetic flux
2. A circular loop of area 5 ×10–2 m2 rotates in a uniform Φ𝐵𝑓 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃
magnetic field of 0.2 T. If the loop rotates about its Φ𝐵𝑓 = 2 𝑋 200 𝑋 10−4 X cos 0°
diameter which is perpendicular to the magnetic field as Φ𝐵𝑓 = 400 𝑋 10−4 X 1 = 400 𝑋 10−4
shown in figure. Find the magnetic flux linked with the
Φ𝐵𝑓 = 4 𝑋 10−2 𝑊𝑏
loop when its plane is (a) normal to the field (b) inclined
60o to the field and (c) parallel to the field.  Since the magnetic flux changes, an emf is induced which is given by
Solution : 𝐴 = 5 𝑋 10−2 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 0.2 𝑇 𝑑Φ𝐵 Φ𝐵𝑓 − Φ𝐵𝑖
∈= 𝑁 = 𝑁
(a) When circular loop normal to the magnetic field, then 𝜽 = 𝟎°. The magnetic flux 𝑑𝑡 𝑡
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 4 𝑋 10−2 − 2 𝑋 10−2 40 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2
−2 ∈ = 40 𝑋 =
Φ𝐵 = 0.2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10 X cos 0° 0.2 0.2
Φ𝐵 = 1 𝑋 10−2 X 1 = 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝐖𝐛 ∈ = 400 𝑋 10−2 = 𝟒 𝑽
(b) When circular loop inclined 𝟔𝟎° to the magnetic field, then 𝜽 = 𝟗𝟎° − 𝟔𝟎° = 𝟑𝟎° 5. A straight conducting wire is dropped horizontally from a certain height with
The magnetic flux its length along east – west direction. Will an emf be induced in it? Justify your
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 answer.
−2
Φ𝐵 = 0.2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10 X cos 30° Solution :
√3 1.732  Yes! An emf will be induced in the wire because it moves perpendicular to the
Φ𝐵 = 1 𝑋 10−2 X = 𝑋 10−2 horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field and hence it cuts the magnetic
2 2
−𝟐
𝚽𝑩 = 𝟎. 𝟖𝟔𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎 = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝐖𝐛 −𝟑 lines of Earth's magnetic filed.
(c) When circular loop parallel to the magnetic field, then 𝜽 = 𝟗𝟎°. The magnetic flux 6. If the current i flowing in the straight conducting wire as shown in the figure
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 decreases, find out the direction of induced current in the metallic square loop
−2
Φ𝐵 = 0.2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10 X cos 90° placed near it.
−2
Φ𝐵 = 1 𝑋 10 X 0 = 𝟎 Solution :
3. A cylindrical bar magnet is kept along the axis of a circular solenoid. If the  From right hand rule, the magnetic field by the
magnet is rotated about its axis, find out whether an electric current is induced straight wire is directed into the plane of the square
in the coil. loop perpendicularly and its magnetic flux is
Solution : decreasing.
 The magnetic field of a cylindrical magnet is  The decrease in flux is opposed by the current
symmetrical about its axis. As the magnet is induced in the loop by producing a magnetic field in
rotated along the axis of the solenoid, there is the same direction as the magnetic field of the wire.
no induced current in the solenoid because  Again from right hand rule, for this inward magnetic
the flux linked with the solenoid does not field, the direction of the induced current in the loop
change due to the rotation of the magnet is clockwise.
7. The magnetic flux passes perpendicular to the plane of the circuit and is directed 9. A copper rod of length l rotates about one of its
into the paper. If the magnetic flux varies with respect to time as per the ends with an angular velocity ω in a magnetic
following relation: 𝚽𝑩 = (2t3 + 3t2 + 8t + 5) mWb , what is the magnitude of the field B as shown in the figure. The plane of
induced emf in the loop when t = 3 s? Find out the direction of current through rotation is perpendicular to the field. Find the
the circuit. emf induced between the two ends of the rod.
Solution : Φ𝐵 = 𝑡 + 3 𝑡 + 8 𝑡 + 5) 𝑋 10 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝑁 = 1 ; 𝑡 = 3 𝑠 ; ∈ = ? ; 𝑖 = ?
(2 3 2 −3
Solution :
 From laws of electromagnetic induction,  Consider a small element of length 𝑑𝑥 at a
𝑑Φ𝐵 𝑑 3 2 −3 distance 𝑥 from the centre O of the circle
∈= 𝑁 = (2 𝑡 + 3 𝑡 + 8 𝑡 + 5) 𝑋 10
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 described by the rod.
∈ = (2 𝑋 3 𝑡 2 + 3 𝑋 2 𝑡 + 8 + 0)𝑋 10−3  As this element moves perpendicular to the
∈ = (6 𝑡 2 + 6 𝑡 + 8) 𝑋 10−3
field with a linear velocity 𝑣 = 𝑥 𝜔, the emf
 At t = 3 s, the magnitude of induced emf
developed in the element 𝑑𝑥 is
∈ = [6 (3)2 + 6 (3) + 8]𝑋 10−3
𝑑 ∈ = 𝐵 𝑑𝑥 𝑣 = 𝐵 𝑑𝑥 (𝑥 𝜔)
∈ = [54 + 18 + 8]𝑋 10−3
𝑑 ∈ = 𝐵 𝜔 𝑥 𝑑𝑥
∈ = 𝟖𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑽 = 𝟖𝟎 𝒎 𝑽
 This rod is made up of many such elements, moving perpendicular to the field.
 As time passes, the magnetic flux linked with the
The emf developed across two ends is
loop increases. 𝑙 𝑙
 According to Lenz’s law, the direction of the 𝑥2
∈ = 𝐵 𝜔 ∫ 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝐵 𝜔 [ ]
induced current should be in a way so as to oppose 2 0
the flux increase. 𝟏
0
 So, the induced current flows in such a way to ∈ = 𝑩 𝝎 𝒍𝟐

𝟐
produce a magnetic field opposite to the given 10. A solenoid of 500 turns is wound on an iron core of relative permeability 800.
field. This magnetic field is perpendicularly
The length and radius of the solenoid are 40 cm and 3 cm respectively. Calculate
outwards.
the average emf induced in the solenoid if the current in it changes from
 Therefore, the induced current flows in anti-
0 to 3 A in 0.4 second.
clockwise direction.
8. A conducting rod of length 0.5 m falls freely from the top of a building of height Solution : : 𝜇𝑟 = 800 ; 𝑁 = 500 ; 𝑙 = 40 𝑐𝑚 = 40 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ;
7.2 m at a place in Chennai where the horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic 𝑟 = 3 𝑐𝑚 = 3 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑑𝑖 = 3 − 0 = 3 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.4 𝑠 ; ∈ = ?
field is 4.04 × 10–5 T. If the length of the rod is perpendicular to Earth’s horizontal  Self inductance,
magnetic field, find the emf induced across the conductor when the rod is about 𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 2 𝐴 𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 2 𝜋 𝑟 2
𝐿= =
to touch the ground. (Assume that the rod falls down with constant acceleration 𝑙 𝑙
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 800 𝑋 (500)2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (3 𝑋 10−2 )2
of 10 m s )–2
𝐿=
Solution : 𝐵𝐻 = 4.04 𝑋 10−5 𝑇 ; ℎ = 7.2 𝑚 ; 𝑙 = 0.5 𝑚 40 𝑋 10−2
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 800 𝑋 250000 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 9 𝑋 10−4
 From the equation of motion, the final velocity of the rod is 𝐿=
𝑣 2 = 𝑢2 + 2 𝑔 ℎ [∵ 𝑢 = 0] 40 𝑋 10−2
2 𝐿 = 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 20 𝑋 250000 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 9 𝑋 10−9
𝑣 = 0 + (2 𝑋 10 𝑋 7.2)
𝐿 = 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2 𝑋 25 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 9 𝑋 10−4
𝑣 2 = 144
𝐿 = 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1800 𝑋 10−4
𝒗 = 𝟏𝟐 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝐿 = 1.775 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−4
 The magnitude of the induced emf when the rod is about to touch the ground is 𝑳 = 𝟏. 𝟕𝟕𝟓 𝑯
∈ = 𝐵𝐻 𝑙 𝑣
 Hence induced emf,
∈ = 4.04 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 12
𝑑𝑖 3 30
∈ = 24.24 𝑋 10−5 𝑉 ∈=−𝐿 = − 1.775 𝑋 = −1.775 𝑋 = − 1.775 𝑋 7. 5
∈ = 𝟐𝟒𝟐. 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑽 = 𝟐𝟒𝟐. 𝟒 𝝁 𝑽 𝑑𝑡 0.4 4
∈ = − 𝟏𝟑. 𝟑𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑽
11. The self-inductance of an air-core solenoid is 4.8 mH. If its core is replaced by 13. Consider two coplanar, co-axial circular coils A
iron core, then its self-inductance becomes 1.8 H. Find out the relative and B as shown in figure. The radius of coil A is
permeability of iron. 20 cm while that of coil B is 2 cm. The number
Solution : 𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑟 = 4.8 𝑚𝐻 = 4.8 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 ; 𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 = 1.8 𝐻 ; 𝜇𝑟 = ? of turns in coils A and B are 200 and 1000
 Self inductance of air core solenoid ; respectively. Calculate the mutual inductance
𝜇0 𝑁 2 𝐴 between the coils. If the current in coil A
𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑒 =
𝑙 changes from 2 A to 6 A in 0.04 s, determine the
 Self inductance of iron core solenoid ; induced emf in coil B and the rate of change of
𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 2 𝐴 flux through the coil B at that instant.
𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 =
𝑙 Solution : 𝑁𝐴 = 200 ; 𝑁𝐵 = 1000 ; 𝑟𝐴 = 20𝑐𝑚 = 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝐵 = 2 𝑐𝑚 = 2 𝑋10−2 𝑚
 Hence, 𝑑𝑖𝐴 = 6 − 2 = 4 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.04 𝑠 ; 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = ? ; ∈𝐵 = ?
𝜇0 𝑁 2 𝐴  Mutual inductance between the coils,
𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑟 ( ) 1
𝑙 𝜇 𝑁 𝑖
= = 𝑁𝐵 ( 0 𝐴 𝐴 ) 𝜋 𝑟𝐵2
𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 𝐴2
𝜇𝑟 𝑁𝐵 Φ𝐵 𝑁𝐵 B𝐴 A𝐵 2 𝑟𝐴 𝑁𝐵 𝜇0 𝑁𝐴 𝑖𝐴 𝜋 𝑟𝐵2
( ) 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = = = =
𝑙 𝑖𝐴 𝑖𝐴 𝑖𝐴 2 𝑟𝐴 𝑖𝐴
𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 1.8 3 𝑋 103 3000 𝜇0 𝑁𝐴 𝑁𝐵 𝜋 𝑟𝐵2
∴ 𝜇𝑟 = = = = 𝑀𝐵𝐴 =
𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑟 4.8 𝑋 10−3 8 8 2 𝑟𝐴
𝝁𝒓 = 𝟑𝟕𝟓 (𝒏𝒐 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕) 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 200 𝑋 1000 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 (2 𝑋10−2 )2
12. The current flowing in the first coil changes from 2 A to 10 A in 0.4 s. Find the 𝑀𝐵𝐴 =
2 𝑋 20 𝑋 10−2
mutual inductance between two coils if an emf of 60 mV is induced in the second 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = 8 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5
coil. Also determine the magnitude of induced emf in the second coil if the 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = 7. 887 𝑋 101 𝑋 10−5 = 𝟕. 𝟖𝟖𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝑯
current in the first coil is changed from 4 A to 16 A in 0.03 s. Consider only the  Magnitude of the induced emf in the coil B,
magnitude of induced emf. 𝑑𝑖𝐴 4
Solution : ∈𝐵 = 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = 7. 887 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 = 7.887 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 100
𝑑𝑡 0.04
(i) 𝑑𝑖1 = 10 − 2 = 8 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.4 𝑠 ; ∈2 = 60 𝑚𝑉 = 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 ; 𝑀 = ? ∈𝑩 = 7.887 𝑋 10−2 𝑉 = 78.87 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 = 𝟕𝟖. 𝟖𝟕 𝒎𝑽
 Magnitude of mutual induced emf is ;  The rate of change of magnetic flux of coil B is
𝑑𝑖1 𝒅
∈2 = 𝑀21 (𝐍𝑩 𝚽𝑩 ) = ∈𝑩 = 78.87 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 = 𝟕𝟖. 𝟖𝟕 𝒎 𝑾𝒃 𝒔−𝟏
𝑑𝑡 𝒅𝒕
 Hence mutual inductance between the coils, 14. A circular metal of area 0.03 m2 rotates in a uniform magnetic field of 0.4 T. The
∈2 axis of rotation passes through the centre and perpendicular to its plane and is
𝑀21 = also parallel to the field. If the disc completes 20 revolutions in one second and
𝑑𝑖
( 1) the resistance of the disc is 4 Ω, calculate the induced emf between the axis and
𝑑𝑡
60 𝑋 10−3 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.4 the rim and induced current flowing in the disc.
𝑀21 = = = 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.05
8
( ) 8 Solution : : 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑇 ; 𝐴 = 0.3 𝑚2 ; 𝑓 = 20 𝑟𝑝𝑠 ; 𝑅 = 4  ; ∈ = ? ; 𝑖 = ?
0.4  Area swept out by the disc in unit time = Area of the disc × frequency
𝑴𝟐𝟏 = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑯 = 𝟑 𝒎 𝐻 𝑑𝐴
(ii) 𝑑𝑖1 = 16 − 4 = 12 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.03 𝑠 ; ∈2 = ? = 0.3 𝑋 20 = 0.6 𝑚2
 Magnitude of Induced emf in the second coil due to the rate of change of 𝑑𝑡
current in the first coil is 𝑑Φ𝐵 𝑑 (B A) 𝑑𝐴
𝑑𝑖1 ∈= = = 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑋 0.6 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟒 𝑽
∈2 = 𝑀21 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑡  Thus induced current,
12
∈2 = 3 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 = 100 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 12 ∈ 0.24
0.03 𝒊 = = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟔 𝑨
2 ∈ = 𝟏. 𝟐 𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑅 4
15. A rectangular coil of area 70 cm2 having 600 turns rotates about an axis 17. An inverter is common electrical device which we use in our homes. When there
perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.4 Wb m–2. If the coil completes 500 is no power in our house, inverter gives AC power to run a few electronic
revolutions in a minute, calculate the instantaneous emf when the plane of the appliances like fan or light. An inverter has inbuilt step-up transformer which
coil is (a) perpendicular to the field (b) parallel to the field and (c) inclined at converts 12 V AC to 240 V AC. The primary coil has 100 turns and the inverter
60o with the field. delivers 50 mA to the external circuit. Find the number of turns in the
Solution : 𝑁 = 600 ; 𝐴 = 70 𝑐𝑚2 = 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑇 ; secondary and the primary current.
500 50 Solution : 𝑉𝑃 = 12 𝑉 ; 𝑉𝑆 = 240 𝑉 ; 𝑁𝑃 = 100 𝑉 ; 𝐼𝑆 = 50 𝑚𝐴 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝐴
𝑓 = 500 𝑟𝑝𝑚 = = = 8.333 𝑟𝑝𝑠
60 6  By transformer equation;.
(a) When perpendicular to the field, 𝜃 = 𝜔 𝑡 = 0° 𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑆 𝐼𝑃
∈ = ∈𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 2 𝜋 𝑓 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = = =𝐾
𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑃 𝐼𝑆
50  Hence the transformation ratio ;
∈ = 600 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 2 𝜋 𝑋 𝑋 sin 0° = 𝟎
6 𝑉𝑆 240
(b) When parallel to the field, 𝜃 = 𝜔 𝑡 = 90° 𝐾= = = 20
𝑉𝑆 12
∈ = ∈𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 2 𝜋 𝑓 sin 𝜔 𝑡  Number of turns in secondary coil ; 𝑵𝑺 = 𝑁𝑃 𝐾 = 100 𝑋 20 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎
50
∈ = 600 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 2 𝜋 𝑋 𝑋 sin 90°  Primary current ; 𝑰𝑷 = 𝐼𝑆 𝐾 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 20 = 1000 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟏 𝑨
6
22 18. Write down the equation for a sinusoidal voltage of 50 Hz and its peak value is
∈ = 100 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 2 𝑋 𝑋 50 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−4 20 V. Draw the corresponding voltage versus time graph.
7
∈ = 88 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−4 = 𝟖𝟖 𝑽 Solution : 𝑓 = 50 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑉𝑚 = 20 𝑉 ; 𝑉 = ? ; 𝑇 = ?
(c) When inclined at 60o with the field, 𝜃 = 𝜔 𝑡 = 90° − 60° = 30°  Voltage at any instant,
∈ = ∈𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 2 𝜋 𝑓 sin 𝜔 𝑡 𝑉 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡
50 𝑉 = 20 sin(2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 50 𝑋 𝑡)
∈ = 600 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 2 𝜋 𝑋 𝑋 sin 30° 𝑽 = 𝟐𝟎 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟑𝟏𝟒 𝒕
6
22 1  Time for one cycle ,
∈ = 100 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 2 𝑋 𝑋 50 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 1 1
7 2
∈ = 44 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−4 = 𝟒𝟒 𝑽 𝑇= = = 0.02 𝑠
𝑓 50
16. An ideal transformer has 460 and 40,000 turns in the primary and secondary 𝑻 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒔 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒎𝒔
coils respectively. Find the voltage developed per turn of the secondary if the  Corresponding Wave form is shown
transformer is connected to a 230 V AC mains. The secondary is given to a load 19. The equation for an alternating current is given by i = 77 sin 314t. Find the peak
of resistance 104 Ω. Calculate the power delivered to the load. current, frequency, time period and instantaneous value of current at t = 2 ms.
Solution : 𝑁𝑃 = 460 ; 𝑁𝑆 = 40000 ; 𝑉𝑃 = 230 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝑆 = 104 Ω ;
𝑉𝑆
=? ; 𝑃 =? Solution : : 𝑖 = 77 sin 314 𝑡 ; 𝑡 = 2 𝑚𝑠 = 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑠
𝑁𝑆
 General equation for alternating current ; 𝑖 = 𝐼𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝐼𝑚 sin 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡
 From the transformer equation, voltage per turn of the secondary is ;
𝑉𝑆 𝑉𝑃 230 1  Comparing this equation with given equation, we get
= = = (a) Peak current ; 𝑰𝒎 = 𝟕𝟕 𝑨
𝑁𝑆 𝑁𝑃 460 2 𝝎 314 314 100
𝑽𝑺 (b) Frequency ; 𝒇 = 2𝜋 = = 2 𝑋 3.14 = = 𝟓𝟎 𝑯𝒛
2𝜋 2
∴ = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑽/𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒏 1 1
𝑵𝑺 (c) Time period ; 𝑻= = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟐 𝒔
𝑓 50
 Total secondary voltage ; 𝑽𝑺 = 𝑁𝑆 𝑋 0.5 = 40000 𝑋 0.5 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝑽
(d) At 𝑡 = 2 𝑚𝑠, instantaneous current
 Power delivered to the load ,
𝑉𝑆 𝑖 = 77 sin (314 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑟𝑎𝑑)
𝑃𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 180°
𝑅𝑆 𝑖 = 77 sin (314 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 )
20000 𝑋 20000 3.14
𝑃𝑆 = = 40000 𝑊 𝑖 = 77 𝑋 sin 36°
104 𝒊 = 77 𝑋 0. 5877 = 𝟒𝟓. 𝟐𝟔 𝐀
𝑷𝑺 = 𝟒𝟎 𝒌𝑾 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
20. A 400 mH coil of negligible resistance is connected to an AC circuit in which an  Phase angle between voltage and current ;
effective current of 6 mA is flowing. Find out the voltage across the coil if the 𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶
tan 𝜙 =
frequency is 1000 Hz. 𝑅
Solution : 𝐼𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 6 𝑚𝐴 = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 ; 𝐿 = 400 𝑚𝐻 = 400 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 ; 𝑓 = 1000 𝐻𝑧 −1
𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 184 − 144
𝜙 = tan [ ] = tan−1 [ ]
 Voltage across the coil of inductance 𝐿 𝑅 30
40 4
𝑉𝐿 = 𝐼 𝑋𝐿 = 𝐼 𝜔 𝐿 = 𝐼 (2 𝜋 𝑓) 𝐿 𝜙 = tan−1 [ ] = tan−1 [ ]
𝑉𝐿 = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1000 𝑋 400 𝑋 10−3 30 3
𝝓 = tan−1 [1. 333] = 𝟓𝟑. 𝟏𝟐°
𝑉𝐿 = 150.72 𝑋 10−1
 Since the phase angle is positive, voltage leads current by 53.12° for this
𝑽𝑳 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟎𝟕𝟐 𝑽
inductive circuit.
𝟏𝟎𝟐
21. A capacitor of capacitance μF is connected across a 220 V, 50 Hz A.C. mains. 23. A 500 μH inductor,
𝟖𝟎
pF capacitor and a 628 Ω resistor are connected to form
𝝅
𝝅𝟐
Calculate the capacitive reactance, RMS value of current and write down the a series RLC circuit. Calculate the resonant frequency and Q-factor of this circuit
equations of voltage and current. at resonance.
102 102
Solution : 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 220 𝑉 ; 𝑓 = 50 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝐶 = 𝜇𝐹 = 𝑋 10−6 𝐹 ; 𝑋𝐶 = ? ; 𝐼𝑅𝑀𝑆 = ? Solution : 𝐿 = 500 𝜇𝐻 = 500 𝑋 10−6 𝐻 ; 𝐶 =
80
𝑝𝐹 =
80
𝑋 10−12 𝐹 ; R = 628 Ω
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋2 𝜋2
1 1
 Capacitive reactance ; 𝑋𝐶 = = 
Resonance frequency,
𝜔𝐶 2𝜋𝑓𝐶
1 1 1 1 1
𝑋𝐶 = = 𝑓𝑟 = = = −9
102 10−2 2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶 80 10
2𝜋𝑋 𝑋 80
2 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 50 𝑋 (
𝜋
) 𝑋 10−6 2 𝜋 √500 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−12
𝜋 𝜋 √500
𝑿𝑪 = 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝛀 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝛀 109 109 109 109 109 1
𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 220 𝑓𝑟 = = = = = 2
= 𝑋 107
 RMS value of alternating current ; 𝑰𝑹𝑴𝑺 = = = 𝟐. 𝟐 𝛀 2√500 𝑋 80 2√40000 2 𝑋 200 400 4 𝑋 10 4
𝑋𝐶 100 𝑓𝑟 = 0.25 𝑋 107 = 2500 𝑋 103 𝐻𝑧 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝒌 𝑯𝒛
 Equation for alternating voltage ;  Q -factor,
𝑉 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔𝑡 𝑉𝐿 𝐼 𝑋𝐿 𝑋𝐿 𝜔𝑟 𝐿 2 𝜋 𝑓𝑟 𝐿
𝑉 = 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 √2 sin 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡 𝑄= = = = =
𝑉𝑅 𝐼𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 𝑅
𝑉 = 220 𝑋 1.414 sin 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 50 𝑋 𝑡 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2500 𝑋 103 𝑋 500 𝑋 10−6
𝑽 = 𝟑𝟏𝟏 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟑𝟏𝟒 𝒕 𝑄=
 Equation for alternating current ; 628
𝜋 2 𝑋 2500 𝑋 103 𝑋 500 𝑋 10−6 25000 𝑋 10−3
𝑖 = 𝐼𝑚 sin (𝜔𝑡 + ) 𝑄 = =
2 200 2
𝜋 𝑸 = 𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟓
𝑖 = 𝐼𝑅𝑀𝑆 √2 sin (2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡 + ) 24. Find the instantaneous value of alternating voltage 𝒗 = 𝟏𝟎 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟑𝝅 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 𝒕) volt
2
𝜋 at (a) 0 s (b) 50 μs (c) 75 μs.
𝑖 = 2.2 𝑋 1.414 sin (2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 50 𝑋 𝑡 + )
2 Solution :
𝝅
𝒊 = 𝟑. 𝟏𝟏 𝐬𝐢𝐧 (𝟑𝟏𝟒 𝒕 + )  Voltage at any instant ; 𝑣 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡
𝟐
22. Find the impedance of a series RLC circuit if the inductive reactance, capacitive  Given voltage equation ; 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑡)
reactance and resistance are 184 Ω, 144 Ω and 30 Ω respectively. Also calculate (a) At 𝑡 = 0 𝑠 ; 𝑣 = 10 sin 0° = 𝟎
the phase angle between voltage and current. (b) At 𝑡 = 50 𝜇𝑠 ,
Solution : 𝑋𝐿 = 184 Ω ; 𝑋𝐶 = 144 Ω ; R = 30 Ω ; Z = ? ; ϕ = ? 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−6 )
 Impedance ; 2
𝑍 = √𝑅 + (𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 ) 2 𝑣 = 10 sin(150 𝜋 𝑋 10−2 𝑟𝑎𝑑)
180°
𝑍 = √302 + (184 − 144)2 = √302 + 402 𝑣 = 10 sin (150 𝜋 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 )
𝜋
𝑍 = √900 + 1600 = √2500 𝑣 = 10 sin(1.5 𝑋 180° ) = 10 sin(270° )
𝒁 = 𝟓𝟎 𝛀 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑣 = 10 𝑋 (−1) = − 𝟏𝟎 𝑽
(c) At 𝑡 = 75 𝜇𝑠 ; 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑋 75 𝑋 10−6 ) (c) New Q- factor,

−2 −2 180°
𝑣 = 10 sin(225 𝜋 𝑋 10 𝑟𝑎𝑑) = 10 sin (225 𝜋 𝑋 10 𝑋 ) 1 2𝐿 1 2 𝑋 80 𝑋 10−6
𝜋
𝑣 = 10 sin(2.25 𝑋 180° ) = 10 sin(405° ) 𝑄𝑛𝑒𝑤 = √ = 𝑋√
𝑅 𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 50 1000 𝑋 10−12
𝑣 = 10 sin(360 + 45° ) = 10 sin(45° )
𝑣 = 10 𝑋 (0.7071) = 𝟕. 𝟎𝟕𝟏 𝑽 1 160 𝑋 106 1 16 𝑋 107 1
25. The current in an inductive circuit is given by 0.3 sin (200t – 40°) A. Write the 𝑄𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 𝑋√ = 𝑋√ = 𝑋 √16 𝑋 104
50 1000 50 1 𝑋103 50
equation for the voltage across it if the inductance is 40 mH.
4 𝑋 102 400
Solution : 𝑖 = 0.3 𝑠𝑖𝑛 (200 𝑡 − 40°) 𝐴 ; 𝐿 = 40 𝑚𝐻 = 40 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 ; 𝑉 = ? 𝑄𝑛𝑒𝑤 = = =𝟖
50 50
 In an inductive circuit, the voltage leads the current by 90o. Therefore, 𝟏𝟎 −𝟒 𝟐
𝑣 = 𝑉𝑚 sin(𝜔 𝑡 + 90°) 27. capacitor of capacitance F, an inductor of inductance H and a resistor of
𝝅 𝝅
𝑣 = 𝐼𝑚 𝑋𝐿 sin(𝜔 𝑡 + 90°) resistance 100 Ω are connected to form a series RLC circuit. When an AC supply
𝑣 = 𝐼𝑚 𝜔 𝐿 sin(𝜔 𝑡 + 90°) of 220 V, 50 Hz is applied to the circuit, determine (a) the impedance of the
𝑣 = 0.3 𝑋 200 𝑋 40 𝑋 10−3 sin(200 𝑡 − 40° + 90°) circuit (b) the peak value of current flowing in the circuit (c) the power factor
𝒗 = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝒕 + 𝟓𝟎°) 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕 of the circuit and (d) the power factor of the circuit at resonance.
26. A series RLC circuit which resonates at 400 kHz has 80 μH inductor, 2000 pF 10−4 2
capacitor and 50 Ω resistor. Calculate (a) Q-factor of the circuit (b) the new Solution : 𝐶 = 𝐹 ; 𝐿= 𝐻 ; 𝑅 = 100 Ω ; 𝑉𝑟𝑚𝑠 = 220 𝑉 ; 𝑓 = 50 𝐻𝑧
𝜋 𝜋
value of capacitance when the value of inductance is doubled and (c) the new (a) Inductive reactance,
Q-factor. 2
𝑋𝐿 = 𝜔 𝐿 = 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝐿 = 2 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 50𝑋 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝛀
Solution : 𝑓𝑟 = 400 𝑘𝐻𝑧 = 400 𝑋 103 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝐿 = 80 𝜇𝐻 = 80 𝑋 10−6 𝐻 ; 𝜋
𝐶 = 2000 𝑝𝐹 = 2000 𝑋 10−12 𝐹 ; 𝑅 = 50 Ω Capacitive reactance,
(a) Q-factor of the circuit, 1 1 1 104
𝑋𝐶 = = = = = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝛀
𝜔𝐶 2𝜋𝑓𝐶 10−4 100
1 𝐿 1 80 𝑋 10−6 1 80 𝑋 106 1 8 𝑋 107 2 𝜋 𝑋 50 𝑋
𝜋
𝑄= √ = 𝑋√ = 𝑋 √ = 𝑋 √
𝑅 𝐶 50 2000 𝑋 10−12 50 2000 50 2 𝑋103 Impedance ; 𝑍 = √𝑅2 + (𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 )2
1 2 𝑋 102 200 𝑍 = √1002 + (200 − 100)2
𝑄= 𝑋 √4 𝑋 104 = = =𝟒
50 50 50 𝑍 = √1002 + 1002
(b) Resonance frequency ;
1 1 𝑍 = √2 𝑋 1002 = √2 𝑋 100 = 1.414 𝑋 100
𝑓𝑟 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓𝑟 2 = 2
𝒁 = 𝟏𝟒𝟏. 𝟒 𝛀
2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶 4𝜋 𝐿𝐶 (b) Peak value of current,
1
∴ 𝐶= 𝑉𝑚 𝑉𝑟𝑚𝑠 √2
4 𝜋 2 𝐿 𝑓𝑟 2 𝐼𝑚 = =
When inductance 𝐿 is doubled, new capacitance , 𝑍 𝑍
220 𝑋 1.414 220
1 𝐼𝑚 = =
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 141.1 100
4 𝜋 2 (2 𝐿) 𝑓𝑟 2 𝑰𝒎 = 𝟐. 𝟐 𝑨
1 (c) Power factor of the circuit,
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 =
4 𝑋 (3.14) 2 𝑋 2 𝑋 80 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (400 𝑋 103 )2 𝑅 100 1 1
1 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝝓 = = = = = 𝟎. 𝟕𝟎𝟕
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 𝑍 141.4 1.414 √2
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2 𝑋 80 𝑋 160000 (d) Power factor of the circuit at resonance (𝑍 = 𝑅),
1
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 𝑅 𝑅
3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 640 𝑋 160000 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝝓 = = = 𝟏
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 9. 9 06 𝑋 10−10 𝑍 𝑅
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 ≅ 10 𝑋 10−10 = 1000 𝑋 10−12 𝐹
𝑪𝒏𝒆𝒘 ≅ 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝑭 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 5. A rectangular coil of area 6 cm2 having 3500 turns is kept in a uniform magnetic
1. A square coil of side 30 cm with 500 turns is kept in a uniform magnetic field of field of 0.4 T. Initially, the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the field and is
0.4 T. The plane of the coil is inclined at an angle of 30 o to the field. Calculate the then rotated through an angle of 180o. If the resistance of the coil is 35 Ω, find
the amount of charge flowing through the coil.
magnetic flux through the coil.
Solution : 𝐴 = 6 𝑐𝑚2 = 6 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝑁 = 3500 ; 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑇 ; 𝜃𝑖 = 90° − 90° = 0°
Solution : 𝑁 = 500 ; 𝑎 = 30 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝐴 = 𝑎2 = 900 𝑐𝑚2 = 900 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ;
𝜃𝑓 = 180° − 90° = 90° ; 𝑅 = 35Ω ; 𝑞 = ?
𝜃 = 90° − 30° = 60 ° ; 𝐵 = 0.4 T ; N Φ𝐵 = ?
 Initial magnetic flux ; 𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃𝑖 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 0° = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴
 Total Magnetic flux through the coil,
 Final magnetic flux ; 𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃𝑓 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 180° = − 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴
𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃
𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 500 X 0.4 X 900 𝑋 10−4 cos 60°  Change in magnetic flux ; 𝑑 (𝑁 Φ𝐵 ) = 𝑁 𝐴 𝐵 − (− 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴) = 2 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴
1 1  Hence rate of change in magnetic flux (i.e.) induced emf;
𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 180000 X 10−4 X = 18 X = 𝟗 𝑾𝒃 𝑑 (𝑁 Φ𝐵 )
2 2 ∈ = = 2𝑁𝐵𝐴
2. A straight metal wire crosses a magnetic field of flux 4 mWb in a time 0.4 s. Find 𝑑𝑡
the magnitude of the emf induced in the wire. ∈ = 2 𝑋 3500 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−4 = 16800 𝑋 10−4
Solution : dΦ𝐵 = 4 𝑚𝑊𝑏 = 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.4 𝑇 ; ∈ = ? ∈ = 168 𝑋 10−2 𝑉
 Magnitude of the emf induced in the wire,  Thus induced current (rate of flow of electric charge).
∈ 168 𝑋 10−2
𝑑 Φ𝐵 4 𝑋 10−3 𝒊 = = = 𝟒. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝑨
∈= = = 𝟏𝟎 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑽 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝑽 𝑅 35
𝑑𝑡 0.4  So the amount of charge flowing through the coil,
3. The magnetic flux passing through a coil perpendicular to its plane is a function
𝑞 = 𝑖 𝑡 = 4. 8 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 1 = 𝟒. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝑪
of time and is given by 𝚽𝑩 = (𝟐 𝒕𝟑 + 𝟒 𝒕𝟐 + 𝟖 𝒕 + 𝟖 ) Wb. If the resistance of the
6. An induced current of 2.5 mA flows through a single conductor of resistance
coil is 5 Ω, determine the induced current through the coil at a time t = 3 second. 100 Ω. Find out the rate at which the magnetic flux is cut by the conductor.
Solution : 𝑑 Φ𝐵
Solution : 𝑅 = 100  ; 𝑖 = 2.5 𝑚𝐴 = 2.5 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 ; =?
 Magnitude of the induced emf, 𝑑𝑡
𝑑 Φ𝐵 𝑑  The rate of change in magnetic flux (i.e.) induced emf

∈= = (2 𝑡 3 + 4 𝑡 2 + 8 𝑡 + 8 ) 𝒅 𝚽𝑩
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 = ∈ = 𝑖 𝑅 = 2.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 100 = 250 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝒎 𝑾𝒃 𝒔−𝟏
∈ = 2 𝑋 3𝑡 2 + 4 𝑋 2 𝑡 + 8 + 0 = 6 𝑡 2 + 8 𝑡 + 8 𝒅𝒕
7. A fan of metal blades of length 0.4 m rotates normal to a magnetic field of
If t = 3 s , ∈ = 6 (3)2 + 8 (3) + 8 = 54 + 24 + 8 = 𝟖𝟔 𝑽
𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑻. If the induced emf between the centre and edge of the blade is
 Then the induced current through the coil, 0.02 V, determine the rate of rotation of the blade.
∈ 86
𝑖= = = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟐 𝑨 Solution : 𝑙 = 0.4 m ; A = π 𝑙 2 = 0.16 𝜋 ; B = 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑇 ; ∈𝒎 = 0.02 𝑉 ; 𝜔 =?
𝑅 5  Maximum value of induced emf,
4. A closely wound circular coil of radius 0.02 m is placed perpendicular to the
magnetic field. When the magnetic field is changed from 8000 T to 2000 T in ∈𝑚 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔
∈𝑚 0.02
6 s, an emf of 44 V is induced in it. Calculate the number of turns in the coil. ∴ 𝜔= =
𝑁𝐵𝐴 1 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.16 𝜋
Solution : 𝑟 = 0.02 m ; dt = 6 s ; 𝑑𝐵 = 8000 − 2000 = 6000 𝑇 ; ∈ = 44 𝑉 0.02
𝜃 = 90° − 90° = 0° ; 𝑁 = ? 𝜔=
0.64 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 3.14
 Magnitude of the induced emf ; 0.02
𝑑 Φ𝐵 𝑑 𝑑𝐵 𝜔=
0.64 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 3.14
∈= 𝑁 =𝑁 (𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃) = 𝑁 𝐴 cos 𝜃 ( )
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 0.02 𝑋 103
∈ ∈ 44 𝜔=
2.0096
∴ 𝑁= = = 𝜔 = 9.954 𝑋 10−3 𝑋103
𝑑𝐵 𝑑𝐵 22 6000
𝐴 cos 𝜃 ( ) 𝜋 𝑟 2 cos 𝜃 ( ) 𝑋 (0.02)2 cos 0° ( ) 𝝎 = 𝟗. 𝟗𝟓𝟒 revolutions/second
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 7 6
44 𝑋 7 𝑋 6 84 840
𝑁= = = = 35 𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑛𝑠
22 𝑋 0.0004 𝑋 1 𝑋 6000 2.4 24
8. A bicycle wheel with metal spokes of 1 m long rotates in Earth’s magnetic field. 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 200002 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 0.022
The plane of the wheel is perpendicular to the horizontal component of Earth’s Φ𝐵 = 𝑋1
0.5
field of 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟓 𝑻.If the emf induced across the spokes is 31.4 mV, calculate the −7 8
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10 𝑋 4 𝑋 10 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 0.0004
rate of revolution of the wheel. Φ𝐵 = 𝑋1
0.5
Solution : 𝑙 = 1 𝑚 ; 𝐵𝐻 = 4 𝑋 10−5 𝑇 ; ∈ = 31.4 𝑚 𝑉 = 31.4 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 ; 𝜔 = ? 64 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10 −3
 Maximum value of induced emf, Φ𝐵 =

0.5
∈𝑚 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 = 𝑁 𝐵 (𝜋 𝑙 2 )𝜔 Φ𝐵 = 128 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−3
∈𝑚 31.4 𝑋 10−3 Φ𝐵 = 1.262 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟔𝟐 𝑾𝒃
∴ 𝜔= =  Hence magnetic flux linked with each turn
𝑁 𝐵 𝜋 𝑙2 1 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 3.14 𝑋12
10 𝑋 102 1000 𝚽𝑩 1. 262
𝜔= = = = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟑𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝑾𝒃
4 4 𝑁 20000
𝝎 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎 revolutions/second 12. A coil of 200 turns carries a current of 0.4 A. If the magnetic flux of 4 mWb is
9. Determine the self-inductance of 4000 turn air-core solenoid of length 2m and linked with each turn of the coil, find the inductance of the coil.
diameter 0.04 m. Solution : 𝑁 = 200 ; 𝐼 = 0.4 𝐴 ; Φ𝐵 = 4 𝑚𝑊𝑏 = 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝐿 = ?
Solution : : 𝑙 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑑 = 0.04 𝑚 ; 𝑟 = 0.02 𝑚 ; 𝑁 = 4000 ; 𝐿 = ?  Self inductance of the coil,
 Self inductance of air core solenoid, 𝑁 Φ𝐵 200 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−3
𝐿= = = 2000 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟐 𝑯
𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝐴 𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝜋 𝑟 2 𝐼 0.4
𝐿= == 13. Two air core solenoids have the same length of 80 cm and same cross–sectional
𝑙 𝑙
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 40002 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 0.02 𝑋 0.02 area 5 cm2. Find the mutual inductance between them if the number of turns in
𝐿 = the first coil is 1200 turns and that in the second coil is 400 turns.
2
𝐿 = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 16 𝑋106 𝑋 0.02 𝑋 0.02 Solution : 𝑙 = 80 𝑐𝑚 = 80 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝐴 = 5 𝑐𝑚2 = 5 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ;
𝐿 = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 16 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−5 𝑁1 = 1200 ; 𝑁2 = 400 ; 𝑀 = ?
𝐿 = 128 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5  Mutual inductance between the coils,
𝐿 = 1.262 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−5 = 1.262 𝑋 10−2 𝐻 = 12.62 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋1200 𝑋 400 𝑋 5 𝑋 10−4
𝑀= =
𝑳 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟔𝟐 𝒎 𝑯 𝑙 80 𝑋 10−2
10. A coil of 200 turns carries a current of 4 A. If the magnetic flux through the coil 𝑀 = 4 𝜋 𝑋15 𝑋 400 𝑋 5 𝑋 10−9 = 3.14 𝑋 12 𝑋10−5
is 6 × 10–5 Wb, find the magnetic energy stored in the medium surrounding the 𝑀 = 37.68 𝑋10−5 𝐻 = 0.3768 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟕𝟔𝟖 𝒎 𝑯
coil. 14. A long solenoid having 400 turns per cm carries a current 2A. A 100 turn coil of
Solution : 𝑁 = 200 ; 𝐼 = 4 𝐴 ; Φ𝐵 = 6 𝑋 10−5 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝑈𝐵 = ? cross-sectional area 4 cm2 is placed co-axially inside the solenoid so that the
 Magnetic energy stored, coil is in the field produced by the solenoid. Find the emf induced in the coil if
1 1 𝑁 Φ𝐵 2 1 the current through the solenoid reverses its direction in 0.04 sec.
𝑈𝐵 = 𝐿 𝐼 2 = [ ] 𝐼 = 𝑁 Φ𝐵 𝐼 Solution : : 𝑛1 = 400 ; 𝑁1 = 400 𝑋 100 = 4 𝑋 104 ; 𝑁2 = 100 ;
2 2 𝐼 2
1 𝐴 = 4 𝑐𝑚2 = 4 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐼1 = 2 𝐴 ; 𝑡 = 0.04 𝑠
𝑈𝐵 = 𝑋 200 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 4  Mutual inductance,
2
𝑈𝐵 = 100 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 4 = 2400 𝑋10−5 𝐽 𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 4 𝑋 104 𝑋 100 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−4
𝑼𝑩 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟐𝟒 𝑱 𝑀= =
𝑙 1
11. A 50 cm long solenoid has 400 turns per cm. The diameter of the solenoid is 𝑀 = 64 𝜋 𝑋 10−5 = 64 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5
0.04 m. Find the magnetic flux linked with each turn when it carries a current 𝑀 = 200.96 𝑋 10−5 = 2.0096 𝑋 10−3
of 1 A. 𝑴 ≅ 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑯
Solution : 𝑙 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 0.5 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 400 ; 𝑁 = 𝑛 𝑙 = 400 𝑋 50 = 20000 ;  If the current through the solenoid is reversed its direction, the emf inuced in the
𝑑 = 0.04 𝑚 ; 𝑟 = 0.02 𝑚 ; 𝐼 = 1 𝐴 ; Φ𝐵 = ? coil is,
 Let ‘L’ be the self inductance of the solenoid, magnetic flux is, 𝑑𝐼1 2 − (−2) 4
𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝐴 𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝜋 𝑟 2 ∈2 = 𝑀 = 2 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 = 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋
𝑑𝑡 0.04 0.04
Φ𝐵 = 𝐿 𝐼 = 𝐼= 𝐼 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
∈2 = 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 100 = 2 𝑋 10−1 𝑉 = 𝟎. 𝟐 𝑽
𝑙 𝑙
15. A 200 turn circular coil of radius 2 cm is placed co-axially within a long solenoid 18. A 200V/120V step-down transformer of 90% efficiency is connected to an
of 3 cm radius. If the turn density of the solenoid is 90 turns per cm, then induction stove of resistance 40 Ω. Find the current drawn by the primary of the
calculate mutual inductance of the coil and the solenoid. transformer.
Solution : 𝑟 = 2 𝑐𝑚 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑁1 = 200 ; 𝑁2 = 90 𝑋100 = 9000 Solution : 𝜂 = 90 % ; 𝑉𝑃 = 200 𝑉 ; 𝑉𝑆 = 120 𝑉 ; 𝑅 = 40 
 Mutual inductance of the coil and the solenoid,  Output power ; 𝑃𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆
𝑉𝑆
=
𝑉𝑆2
=
1202
=
120 𝑋 120
= 360 𝑊
𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝜋 𝑟 2 𝑅
𝑃𝑆
𝑅
360
40 40
𝑀= =  Thus secondary current is; 𝐼𝑆 = = = 𝟑𝑨
𝑙 𝑙 𝑉𝑆 120
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 200 𝑋 9000 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (2 𝑋 10−2 )2  We know, the efficiency of the transformer ; 𝜂 = 𝑆 = 𝑆 𝑆
𝑃 𝑉 𝐼
𝑀= 𝑃𝑃 𝑉𝑃 𝐼 𝑃
1 90 360
𝑀 = 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 288 𝑋 10−6 = 2.839 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−6 =
𝑴 = 𝟐. 𝟖𝟑𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑯 = 𝟐. 𝟖𝟑𝟗 𝒎 𝑯 100 200 𝑋 𝐼𝑃
16. The solenoids S1 and S2 are wound on an iron-core of relative permeability 900.  The current drawn by the primary of the transformer
Their areas of their cross-section and their lengths are the same and are 4 cm 2 360 𝑋 100 36000
𝐼𝑃 = = = 𝟐𝑨
and 0.04 m respectively. If the number of turns in S1 is 200 and that in S2 is 800, 200 𝑋 90 18000
calculate the mutual inductance between the solenoids. If the current in 19. The 300 turn primary of a transformer has resistance 0.82 Ω and the resistance
solenoid 1 is increased form 2A to 8A in 0.04 second, calculate the induced emf of its secondary of 1200 turns is 6.2 Ω. Find the voltage across the primary if the
in solenoid 2. power output from the secondary at 1600V is 32 kW. Calculate the power losses
Solution : 𝜇𝑟 = 900 ; 𝐴 = 4 𝑐𝑚2 = 4 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝑙 = 0.04 𝑚 ; 𝑁1 = 200 ; in both coils when the transformer efficiency is 80%.
𝑁2 = 800 ; 𝑑𝐼1 = 8 − 2 = 6 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.04 𝑠 ; 𝑀 =? ; ∈2 = ? Solution : 𝑁𝑃 = 300 ; 𝑁𝑆 = 1200 ; 𝑅𝑃 = 0.82  ; 𝑅𝑆 = 6.2  ; 𝑉𝑆 = 1600 𝑉
80
 Mutual inductance, 𝑃𝑆 = 32 𝑘𝑊 = 32 𝑋 103 𝑊 ; 𝜂 = 80 % =
𝜇𝑜 𝜇𝑟 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 900 𝑋 200 𝑋 800 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−4 100
𝑀= = 𝑃𝑆 32 𝑋 103 32000
𝑙 0.04  Output power ; 𝑃𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑺 = = = = 𝟐𝟎 𝑨
𝑉𝑆 1600 1600
𝑀 = 100 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 900 𝑋 200 𝑋 800 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−4 𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑆 𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑃 1600 𝑋 300 4800
 Transformer equation ; = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑽𝑷 = = = = 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝑽
𝑀 = 3.14 𝑋 576 𝑋 10−3 𝑉𝑃 𝑁𝑃 𝑁𝑆 1200 12
𝑃𝑆 𝑃𝑆
𝑴 = 1.808 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−3 ≅ 𝟏. 𝟖𝟏 𝑯  Efficiency ; 𝜂= =
𝑃𝑃 𝑉𝑃 𝐼𝑃
 The induced emf in solenoid 2 is,
80 32 𝑋 103
𝑑𝐼1 6 600 =
∈2 = − 𝑀 = −1.81 𝑋 = −1.81 𝑋 100 400 𝑋 𝐼𝑃
𝑑𝑡 0.04 4
∈2 = −1.81 𝑋 150 = −𝟐𝟕𝟏. 𝟓 𝑽 32 𝑋 103 𝑋 100 3200
𝑰𝑷 = = = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝑨
17. A step-down transformer connected to main supply of 220 V is used to operate 400 𝑋 80 32
11V, 88 W lamp. Calculate (a) Voltage transformation ratio and (b) Current in  Power loss in primary coil = 𝐼𝑃 𝑅𝑃 = 100 𝑋 0.82 = 8200 𝑊 = 𝟖. 𝟐 𝒌𝑾
2 2
the primary.  Power loss in secondary coil = 𝐼𝑆2 𝑅𝑆 = 202 𝑋 6.2 = 2480 𝑊 = 𝟐. 𝟒𝟖 𝒌𝑾
Solution : 𝑉𝑃 = 220 𝑉 ; 𝑉𝑆 = 11 𝑉 ; 𝑃𝑆 = 88 𝑊 ; 𝐾 = ? ; 𝐼𝑃 = ? 20. Calculate the instantaneous value at 60o, average value and RMS value of an
𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑆 𝐼𝑃 alternating current whose peak value is 20 A.
(a) Voltage transformation ratio ; 𝐾 = = =
𝑉𝑃 𝑁𝑃 𝐼𝑆 Solution : 𝐼𝑚 = 20 𝐴 ; 𝜔𝑡 = 60° ; 𝑖 = ? ; 𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑔 = ? ; 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = ?
𝑉𝑆 11 𝟏  Alternating current at any instant,
∴ 𝑲= = =
𝑉𝑃 220 𝟐𝟎 √3
(b) We know the output power ; 𝑃𝑆 = 88 𝑊 𝑖 = 𝐼𝑚 sin 𝜔𝑡 = 20 sin 60° = 20 𝑋 = 10 𝑋 1.732 = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟑𝟐 𝑨
(𝑖. 𝑒) 2
𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 = 88 𝑊
 Average value of alternating current,
Hence, the secondary current ;
2 𝐼𝑚
88 88 𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑔 = = 0.637 𝐼𝑚 = 0.637 𝑋 20 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟕𝟒 𝑨
𝐼𝑆 = = =8𝐴 𝜋
𝑉𝑆 11  RMS value of alternating current,
 Thus, current in the primary 𝐼𝑚
1 4 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = = 0.707 𝐼𝑚 = 0.707 𝑋 20 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝑨
𝐼𝑃 = 𝐾 𝐼𝑆 = 𝑋8= = 𝟎. 𝟒 𝑨 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
√2
20 10
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -5
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
GBHSS, kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 5 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 4. A magnetron in a microwave oven emits electromagnetic waves (em waves)
1. Consider a parallel plate capacitor which is connected to an 230 V RMS value with frequency f = 2450 MHz. What magnetic field strength is required for
and 50 Hz frequency. If the separation distance between the plates of the electrons to move in circular paths with this frequency?
capacitor and area of the plates are 1 mm and 20 cm 2 respectively. Calculate the :Solution :- 𝑓 = 2450 𝑀𝐻𝑧 = 2450 𝑋 106 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1`. 6 𝑋 10−9 𝐶 ;
displacement current at t = 1 s. 𝑚 = 9.11 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝐵 =?
:Solution :- 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 230 𝑉 ; 𝑑 = 1 𝑚𝑚 = 1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐴 = 20 𝑐𝑚2 = 20 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ❖ Angular frequency of the circular motion,,
𝑓 = 50𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑡 = 1 𝑠 ; 𝐼𝑑 = ? 𝐵𝑞
𝜔=
❖ Potential difference between the plates ; 𝑚
𝐵𝑞
𝑉 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔𝑡 = 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 √2 sin 2𝜋𝑓𝑡 (𝑜𝑟) 2𝜋 𝑓 =
𝑉 = 230 𝑋1.414 𝑋 sin(2𝜋 𝑋 50 𝑡) 𝑚
❖ Therefore, the magnetic field required is,
𝑉 = 325 sin(100 𝜋 𝑡) 2𝜋𝑓𝑚
❖ Hence the displacement current, 𝐵=
𝑑Φ𝐸 𝑑 𝑞
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜 = 𝜀𝑜 (𝐸𝐴) [∵ Φ𝐸 = 𝐸𝐴] 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2450 𝑋 106 𝑋 9.11 𝑋 10−31
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝐵=
𝑑 𝑉 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝑑𝑉 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜 ( ) 𝐴= [ ] 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2450 𝑋 9.11 𝑋 10−6
𝑑𝑡 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑𝑡 𝐵=
𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝑑 1.6
𝐼𝑑 = [ (325 sin100 𝜋 𝑡)] 𝐵 = 8.76 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−6
𝑑 𝑑𝑡 𝑩 = 𝟖. 𝟕𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟖𝟕𝟔 𝑻
𝜀𝑜 𝐴
𝐼𝑑 = [325 𝑋100 𝜋 𝑋 cos100 𝜋 𝑡 ]
𝑑
8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 20 𝑋 10−4
𝐼𝑑 = 𝑋 325 𝑋 100 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 cos100 𝜋(1)
1 𝑋 10−3
𝐼𝑑 = 825 𝑋 20 𝑋 325 𝑋 314 𝑋 10−13 𝑋 (1) [∵ cos100 𝜋 = 1]
𝑰𝒅 = 1. 806 𝑋 107 𝑋 10−13 = 1. 806 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 𝟏. 𝟖𝟎𝟔 𝝁 𝑨
2. The relative magnetic permeability of the medium is 2.5 and the relative
electrical permittivity of the medium is 2.25. Compute the refractive index of
the medium.
:Solution :- 𝜇𝑟 = 2.5 ; 𝜀𝑟 = 2.25 ; 𝑛=?
❖ The refractive index of the medium,
𝑛 = √𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟
𝑛 = √2.5 𝑋 2.25 = √5.625
𝒏 = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟕𝟐 (𝒏𝒐 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕)
3. Compute the speed of the electromagnetic wave in a medium if the amplitude of
electric and magnetic fields are 3 × 104 N C–1 and 2 × 10–4 T, respectively.
:Solution :- 𝐸𝑜 = 3 𝑋 104 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝐵𝑜 = 2 𝑋 10−4 𝑇 ; 𝑣 = ?
❖ The speed of the electromagnetic wave
𝐸𝑜 3 𝑋 104 3
𝑣= = −4
= 𝑋 108
𝐵𝑜 2 𝑋 10 2
𝒗 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 4. Let an electromagnetic wave propagate along the x - direction, the magnetic
1. Consider a parallel plate capacitor whose plates are closely spaced. Let R be the field oscillates at a frequency of 1010 Hz and has an amplitude of 10−5 T, acting
radius of the plates and the current in the wire connected to the plates is 5 A, along the y - direction. Then, compute the wavelength of the wave. Also write
calculate the displacement current through the surface passing between the down the expression for electric field in this case.
plates by directly calculating the rate of change of flux of electric field through :Solution :- 𝒇 = 1010 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝐵𝑜 = 10−5 𝑇 ; 𝜆 = ? ; ⃗⃗⃗𝐸 (𝑥, 𝑡) = ?
the surface. ❖ Wavelength of electromagnetic waves,
:Solution :- 𝐼𝐶 = 5 𝐴 ; 𝐼𝑑 =? 𝐶 3 𝑋 108
𝝀= = = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝒎
❖ Electric flux, 𝑓 1010
❖ Expression for electric field,
Φ𝐸 = ∮ 𝐸 𝑑𝐴 cos 0°
𝐸 (𝑥, 𝑡) = 𝐸𝑜 sin(𝑘𝑥 − 𝜔𝑡) − − − − − − − − (1)
𝜎 𝑞 ❖ We know that, the velocity of electromagnetic waves,
Φ𝐸 = 𝐸 𝐴 = 𝐴=
𝜀𝑜 𝜀𝑜 𝐸𝑜
❖ Hence displacement current, 𝐶=
𝐵𝑜
𝑑Φ𝐸 𝑑 𝑞 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑬𝒐 = 𝐵𝑜 𝐶 = 10−5 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜 = 𝜀𝑜 ( )
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝜀𝑜 ❖ Angular frequency,
1 𝑑𝑞 𝝎 = 2 𝜋 𝑓 = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1010 = 𝟔. 𝟐𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒓𝒂𝒅 𝒔−𝟏
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜
𝜀𝑜 𝑑𝑡 ❖ And wave number,
𝑑𝑞 𝜔 6.28 𝑋 1010
𝐼𝑑 = 𝒌= = = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒓𝒂𝒅 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑡 𝐶 3 𝑋 108
𝑰𝒅 = 𝑰𝑪 = 𝟓 𝑨 ❖ Put this in equation (1),
2. A transmitter consists of LC circuit with an inductance of 1 μH and a capacitance 𝑬 (𝒙, 𝒕) = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟐. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒙 − 𝟔. 𝟐𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒕) 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
of 1 μF. What is the wavelength of the electromagnetic waves it emits? ❖ Since the electric field oscillates along z -axis,
:Solution :- 𝐿 = 1 𝜇 𝐻 = 1 𝑋 10−6 𝐻 ; 𝐶 = 1 𝜇 𝐹 = 1 𝑋 10−6 𝐹 ; 𝜆 = ? ⃗⃗⃗𝑬 (𝒙, 𝒕) = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟐. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒙 − 𝟔. 𝟐𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒕) 𝒌 ̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
❖ Wavelength of electromagnetic waves,
𝐶 𝐶 5. If the relative permeability and relative permittivity of a medium are 1.0 and
𝜆= = 2.25 respectively, find the speed of the electromagnetic wave in this medium.
𝑓 1
( ) :Solution :- : 𝜇𝑟 = 1.0 ; 𝜀𝑟 = 2.25 ; 𝑣 = ?
2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶
❖ Refractive index of the medium,
𝜆 = 𝐶 (2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶)
𝜇 = √𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟
𝜆 = 3 𝑋 108 (2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 √1 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 ) 𝐶
(𝑜𝑟) = √𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟
𝜆 = 3 𝑋 108 𝑋 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑣
𝝀 = 𝟏𝟖. 𝟖𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟖𝟖𝟒 𝒎 𝐶 3 𝑋 108
3. A pulse of light of duration 10−6 s is absorbed completely by a small object ∴ 𝑣= =
√𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟 √1.0 𝑋 2.25
initially at rest. If the power of the pulse is 60 × 10 −3 W, calculate the final 3 𝑋 108
momentum of the object. 𝑣=
1.5
:Solution :- 𝑡 = 10−6 𝑠 ; 𝑃 = 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑊 ; 𝑝 = ? 𝒗 = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
❖ Final momentum,
𝐸
𝑝= [ 𝐸 = 𝑚 𝐶 2 = 𝑝 𝐶]
𝐶
𝑃𝑋𝑡 𝑊 𝐸
𝑝= [𝑃 = = ]
𝐶 𝑡 𝑡
60 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10−6
𝑝=
3 𝑋 108
𝒑 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟕 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -6
RAY OPTICS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 6 RAY OPTICS PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS-  By the law of reflection, the angle of incidence and angle of reflection are the same
1. Prove that for the same incident light when a reflecting surface is tilted by an for the two extreme reflections. The normals are now the bisectors of the angles
angle θ, the reflected light will be tilted by an angle 2θ. between the incident and the reflected rays at the two points.
-Solution :-  By geometry, the height of the mirror needed is only half of the height of the
 𝐴𝐵 − reflecting surface person. (i.e.)
𝐼𝑂 − incident ray ℎ1 ℎ2 ℎ1 + ℎ2 𝒉
+ = =
𝑂𝑅1 − reflected ray 2 2 2 𝟐
𝑂𝑁 − normal 3. An object is placed at a distance of 20.0 cm from a concave mirror of
∠𝐼𝑂𝑁 − angle of incidence (𝑖) focal length 15.0 cm. (a) What distance from the mirror a screen should be
∠𝑁𝑂𝑅1 − angle of reflection (r) placed to get a sharp image? (b) What is the nature of the image?
 From law of refraction ; -Solution :- 𝑓 = −15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢 = −20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑣 = ?
∠𝐼𝑂𝑁 = ∠𝑁𝑂𝑅1 = 𝑖 (a) From the mirror equation,
1 1 1
 When the surface AB is tilted to 𝐴1 𝐵1 by an angle θ, the normal N is also is tilted = +
to 𝑂𝑁 1 by the same angle θ 𝑓 𝑢 𝑣
1 1 1 𝑢−𝑓
 Now, in the tilted system, (𝑜𝑟) = − =
the angle of incidence ; ∠𝐼𝑂𝑁 1 = 𝑖 + 𝜃 𝑣 𝑓 𝑢 𝑓𝑢
the angle of reflection ; ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅2 = 𝑖 + 𝜃 𝑓𝑢
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑣 =
 The angle between 𝑂𝑁 1 and OR1 is ; ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅1 𝑢−𝑓
 The angle tilted on the reflected light is the angle between OR1 and OR2 which is, (−15)(−20) 300 300
∴ 𝑣 = = =
∠𝑅1 𝑂𝑅2 = ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅2 − ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅1 (−20 ) − (−15) −20 + 15 −5
∠𝑅1 𝑂𝑅2 = (𝑖 + 𝜃) − (𝑖 − 𝜃) = 𝑖 + 𝜃 − 𝑖 + 𝜃 𝒗 = −𝟔𝟎 𝒄𝒎
∠𝑹𝟏 𝑶𝑹𝟐 = 𝟐 𝜽  The screen is to be placed at distance 60.0 cm to the left of the concave mirror.
2. What is the height of the mirror needed for a person to see his/her image fully (b) Magnification,
on the mirror? ℎ1 𝑣
-Solution :- 𝑚= =−
ℎ 𝑢
(−60)
𝒎= − = −𝟑
(−20)
 As the sign of magnification is negative, the image is inverted.
 As the magnitude of magnification is 3, the image is enlarged three times.
 As the image is formed to the left of the concave mirror, the image is real.
4. A thin rod of length f/3 is placed along the optical axis of a concave mirror of
focal length f such that one end of image which is real and elongated just touches
the respective end of the rod. Calculate the longitudinal magnification.
𝑓
-Solution :- Object length = 𝑙 = ; image length = 𝑙1
3
 By definition,
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
𝐿𝑜𝑛𝑔𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =
𝑜𝑏𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
 Let us assume a person of height h is standing in front of a vertical plane mirror. 𝑙1 𝑙1 3 𝑙1
 The person could see his/her head when light from the head falls on the mirror 𝑚= = =
𝑙 𝑓 𝑓
and gets reflected to the eyes. Same way, light from the feet falls on the mirror and 3
gets reflected to the eyes. (𝑜𝑟) 𝑙1 =
𝑚𝑓
−−−−−−−−− (1)
 Let the distance between his head H and eye E is h1 and distance between his feet 3
 Image of one end coincides with the respective end of object. Thus, the coinciding
F and eye E is h2. The person’s total height is ; h = h1 + h2 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
end must be at centre of curvature. Thus, 𝑢1 = 𝑅 = 2 𝑓
 From figure, (b) Let ‘t’ be the time taken by light to travel through the glass slab,
𝑓 𝑑 50 𝑋 10−2
𝑢1 = 𝑢 + 𝑡= = = 25 𝑋 10−10 𝑠 = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝒔
3 𝑣 2 𝑋108
𝑓 (c) Optical path ; 𝑑1 = 𝑛 𝑑 = 1.5 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−2 = 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟕𝟓 𝒄𝒎
2𝑓 = 𝑢+
3  Light would have travelled an additional 25 cm (75 cm – 50 cm) in vacuum at
𝑓 5𝑓 the same time had there been no glass slab in its path.
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑢 = 2𝑓 − =
3 3 7. Light travelling through transparent oil enters in to glass of refractive index 1.5.
𝑓 1 If the refractive index of glass with respect to the oil is 1.25, what is the
& 𝑣 =𝑢+ +𝑙
3 refractive index of the oil?
5𝑓 𝑓 𝑚𝑓 5𝑓+𝑓+𝑚𝑓 𝑓 𝑓 -Solution : 𝑛𝑔 = 1.5 ; 𝑛𝑔𝑂 = 1.25 ; 𝑛𝑂 = ?
𝑣= + + = = (5 + 1 + 𝑚) = (6 + 𝑚) 𝑛𝑔
3 3 3 3 3 3  Refractive index of glass with respect to oil ; 𝑛𝑔𝑂 =
1 1 1 𝑛𝑂
 From mirror ; = + 𝑛𝑔 1.5 150
𝑓 𝑢 𝑣 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑛𝑂 = = = = 𝟏. 𝟐
1 1 1 𝑛𝑔𝑂 1.25 125
 For concave mirror ; = 5𝑓 + 𝑓
[− 𝑓] [− ]
3
[− (6+𝑚)]
3
8. A coin is at the bottom of a trough containing three immiscible liquids of
3 3 refractive indices 1.3, 1.4 and 1.5 poured one above the other of heights 30 cm,
(𝑜𝑟) 1= + 16 cm, and 20 cm respectively. What is the apparent depth at which the coin
5 (6 + 𝑚)
3 3 appears to be when seen from air medium outside? In which medium the coin
(𝑜𝑟) 1− = will appear?
5 6+𝑚
2 3 -Solution : 𝑑1 = 30 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑑2 = 16 𝑐𝑚 ∶ 𝑑3 = 20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑛1 = 1.3 ; 𝑛2 = 1.4 ∶ 𝑛3 = 1.5
(𝑜𝑟) =  The equations for apparent depth for each medium is,,
5 6+𝑚
12 + 2 𝑚 = 15 𝑑1 30
2 𝑚 = 15 − 12 = 3 𝑑11 = = = 23. 1 𝑐𝑚
𝑛1 1.3
𝟑 𝑑2 16
𝒎 = = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝑑21 = = = 11.4 𝑐𝑚
𝟐 𝑛2 1.4
5. Pure water has refractive index 1.33. What is the speed of light through it?
𝑑3 20
-Solution : 𝑛 = 1.33 ; 𝑣 = ? 𝑑31 = = = 13.3 𝑐𝑚
𝑐 𝑛3 1.5
𝑛=  Total depth of three medium,,
𝑣
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 108 9 𝑋 108 𝑑 = 𝑑1 + 𝑑2 + 𝑑3
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑣= = = =
𝑛 1.33 4 4 𝑑 = 30 + 16 + 20 = 66 𝑐𝑚
( )
3  Total apparent depth of three medium,
𝒗 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 𝑑1 = 𝑑11 + 𝑑21 + 𝑑31 = 23.1 + 11.4 + 13.3 = 𝟒𝟕. 𝟖 𝒄𝒎
 Light travels with a speed of 2.26 × 108 m s-1 through pure water. 9. What is the radius of the illumination when seen above from inside a swimming
6. Light travels from air into a glass slab of thickness 50 cm and refractive index pool from a depth of 10 m on a sunny day? What is the total angle of view? [Given,
1.5. refractive index of water is 4/3]
(a) What is the speed of light in the glass slab? -Solution : 𝑛=
4
; 𝑑 = 10 𝑚
(b) What is the time taken by the light to travel through the glass slab? 3
(c) What is the optical path of the glass slab? (a) Radius of illumination,
𝑑 10 10
-Solution : 𝑑 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 50 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5 ; 𝑣 = ? ; 𝑡 = ? ; 𝑑1 =? 𝑅= = =
𝑐 √𝑛2 −1 2 16
(a) Refractive index of the medium ; 𝑛 = √(4) −1 √ −1
3 9
𝑣
10 10 𝑋 3 30
 Speed of light in the glass slab is 𝑅= = =
16−9 √16−9 √7
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 √
𝑣= = = 𝟐 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 9
𝑛 1.5 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝑹 = 𝟏𝟏. 𝟑𝟒 𝒎
(b) Critical angle, 12. Locate the image of the point object O in the situation shown. The point C
1 1 3 denotes the centre of curvature of the separating surface.
𝑖𝐶 = sin−1 [ ] = sin−1 [ ] = sin−1 [ ] = sin−1 [0.75] = 𝟒𝟖. 𝟔 ° -Solution : 𝑛1 = 1 ; 𝑛2 = 1.5 𝑢 = −15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅 = 30 𝑐𝑚
𝑛 4⁄ 4
3  Equation for single spherical surface is
(c) The total angle of view of the cone =2 𝑖𝐶 = 2 𝑋 48.6 ° = 𝟗𝟕. 𝟐 ° 𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 − 𝑛1
− =
10. A optical fibre is made up of a core material with refractive index 1.68 and a 𝑣 𝑢 𝑅
cladding material of refractive index 1.44. What is the acceptance angle of the 1.5 1 1.5 − 1
− =
fibre if it is kept in air medium without any cladding? 𝑣 − 15 30
-Solution : 𝑛1 = 1.68 ; 𝑛2 = 1.44 1.5 1 0.5
+ =
 If there is cladding, then acceptance angle ; 𝑣 15 30
1.5 0.5 1 0.5 − 2 1.5
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √𝑛12 − 𝑛22 = − = =−
𝑣 30 15 30 30
1 1
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √1.682 − 1.442 = − (𝑜𝑟) 𝒗 = − 𝟑𝟎 𝒄𝒎
𝑣 30
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √2.8224 − 2.0736  The image is a virtual image formed 30 cm to the left of the spherical surface.
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √0.7488 13. A biconvex lens has radii of curvature 20 cm and 15 cm for the two curved
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 (0.8653) surfaces. The refractive index of the material of the lens is 1.5.
𝒊𝒂 ≈ 𝟔𝟎° (a) What is its focal length?
 If there is no cladding then, n2 = 1. Then acceptance angle (b) Will the focal length change if the lens is flipped by the side?
-Solution : 𝑅1 = 20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅2 = −15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √𝑛12 − 1  From lens makers formula,
1 1 1
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √1.682 − 1 = (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √2.8224 − 1 = sin−1 √1.8224 𝑓 𝑅1 𝑅2
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 (1.349) 1 1 1
= (1.5 − 1) [ − ]
−1
Here sin (> 1) is not possible. But, this includes the range 0o to 90o. Hence, all 𝑓 20 − 15
the rays entering the core from flat surface will undergo total internal reflection. 1 1 1 3+4 7 7
= 0.5 𝑋 [ + ] = 0.5 𝑋 [ ] = 0.5 𝑋 [ ] =
11. The thickness of a glass slab is 0.25 m. It has a refractive index of 1.5. A ray of 𝑓 20 15 60 60 120
light is incident on the surface of the slab at an angle of 60 o. Find the lateral 𝟏𝟐𝟎
displacement of the light when it emerges from the other side of the glass slab. ∴ 𝒇= = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟏𝟒 𝒄𝒎
𝟕
-Solution : 𝑡 = 0.25 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5 ; 𝑖 = 60°  As the focal length is positive the lens is a converging lens.
 By Snell’s law ,  When the lens is flipped by the side;𝑅1 = 15 𝑐𝑚, 𝑅2 = −20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5
√3 1 1 1
( ) = (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
sin 𝑖 sin 𝑖 sin 60° 2 √3 1 𝑓 𝑅1 𝑅2
𝑛= (𝑜𝑟) sin 𝑟 = = = = = = 0.58
sin 𝑟 𝑛 1.5 1.5 3 √3 1 1 1 1 1
= (1.5 − 1) [ − ] = 0.5 𝑋 [ + ]
𝑟 = sin−1 (0.58) = 35.25° 𝑓 15 − 20 20 15
 Hence the lateral displacement, 𝟏𝟐𝟎
sin(𝑖 − 𝑟) ∴ 𝒇= = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟏𝟒 𝒄𝒎
𝟕
𝐿=𝑡 [ ]
cos 𝑟  Thus, it is concluded that the focal length of the lens will not change if it is flipped
sin(60° − 35.25°) sin 24.75° by the side. This is true for any lens.
𝐿 = 0.25 𝑋 [ ] = 0.25 𝑋 [ ]  The focal length is positive the lens is a converging lens.
cos 35.25° cos 35.25°
0.4187
𝐿 = 0.25 𝑋 [ ]
0.8166
𝑳 = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟐𝟖𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟖𝟐 𝒄𝒎 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
14. Determine the focal length of the lens made up 17. An object of 5 mm height is placed at a
of a material of refractive index 1.52 as shown in distance of 15 cm from a convex lens of
the diagram. (Points C1 and C2 are the centers of focal length 10 cm. A second lens of focal
curvature of the first and second surfaces length 5 cm is placed 40 cm from the first
respectively.) lens and 55 cm from the object. Find (a) the
-Solution : 𝑛 = 1.52 ; 𝑅1 = 10 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅2 = 20 𝑐𝑚 position of the final image, (b) its nature
 From lens makers formula, and (c) its size.
1 1 1 -Solution :ℎ1 = 5 𝑚𝑚 = 0.5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢1 = − 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓1 = 10 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓2 = 5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑑 = 40 𝑐𝑚
= (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
𝑓 𝑅1 𝑅2  For the first lens, the lens equation is,
1 1 1 1 1 1
= (1.52 − 1) [ − ] − =
𝑓 10 20 𝑣1 𝑢1 𝑓1
1 2−1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
= 0.52 𝑋 [ ] = 0.52 𝑋 (𝑜𝑟) = + = + = −
𝑓 20 20 𝑣1 𝑓1 𝑢1 10 − 15 10 15
𝟐𝟎 1 15 − 10 5 1
∴ 𝒇= = 𝟑𝟖. 𝟒𝟔 𝒄𝒎 = = ==
𝟎. 𝟓𝟐 𝑣1 150 150 30
 As the focal length is positive, the lens is a converging lens ∴ 𝒗𝟏 = 𝟑𝟎 𝒄𝒎
15. If the focal length is 150 cm for a lens, what is the power of the lens?  Equation for magnification of first lens,
-Solution : 𝑓 = 150 𝑐𝑚 = 1.5 𝑚 ℎ2 𝑣1
𝑚= =
 Power of the lens, ℎ1 𝑢1
1 1 10 𝑣1 30 15
𝑃= = = = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟕 𝒅𝒊𝒐𝒑𝒕𝒆𝒓 ∴ ℎ2 = ℎ1 = 0.5 𝑋 = −
𝑓 1.5 15 𝑢1 − 15 15
 As the power is positive, it is a converging lens. 𝒉𝟐 = − 𝟏 𝒄𝒎
16. What is the focal length of the combination if the lenses of focal lengths –70 cm  As the height of the image is negative, the image is inverted and real.
and 150 cm are in contact? What is the power of the combination?  This image acts as object for second lens. The object distance for second lenses
-Solution : 𝑓1 = −70 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓2 = 150 𝑐𝑚 𝑢2 = −(40 − 30) = −10 𝑐𝑚. For the second lens, the lens equation is
 The focal length of the combination lens, 1 1 1
− =
1 1 1 𝑣2 𝑢2 𝑓2
= + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
𝐹 𝑓1 𝑓2 (𝑜𝑟) = + = + = −
1 1 1 1 1 𝑣2 𝑓2 𝑢2 5 − 10 5 10
= + =− + 1 10 − 5 5 1
𝐹 − 70 150 70 150 = = =
1 − 150 + 70 80 8 𝑣2 50 50 10
= = − = −
𝐹 10500 10500 1050 ∴ 𝒗𝟐 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒄𝒎
1050  Let the height of the final image formed by the second lens is ℎ21 and we have
∴ 𝐹=−
8 height of the object for the second lens is ℎ2 . Then Equation for magnification 𝑚1
𝑭 = − 𝟏𝟑𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 𝒄𝒎 = −𝟏. 𝟑𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝒎 for the second lens is,
 As the final focal length is negative, the combination of two lenses is a diverging ℎ21 𝑣2
system of lenses. 𝑚1 = =
ℎ2 𝑢2
 The power of the combination , 𝑣2 10
1 𝟏
𝒉𝟐 = ℎ2 = (−1) 𝑋 = 𝟏 𝒄𝒎 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑃= 𝑢2 (−10)
𝑓 (a) Thus the final image is formed 10 cm to the right of the second lens.
1
𝑃= (b) As the height of the image is positive, the image is erect and real.
− 1.3125 (c) The size (i.e.) height of the final image is10 mm
𝑷 = − 𝟎. 𝟕𝟔𝟏𝟔 𝑫 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
18. A thin biconvex lens is made up of a glass of 19. A monochromatic light is incident on an equilateral prism at an angle 30o and is
refractive index 1.5. The two surfaces have emergent at an angle of 75o. What is the angle of deviation produced by the
equal radii of curvature of 30 cm each. One prism?
of its surfaces is made reflecting by -Solution : 𝐴 = 60° ; 𝑖1 = 30° ; 𝑖2 = 75°
silvering it from outside. (a) What is the  Equation for angle of deviation,
focal length and power of this silvered 𝑑 = 𝑖1 + 𝑖2 − 𝐴
lens? (b) Where should an object be placed 𝑑 = (30° + 75°) − 60° = 105 − 60 = 𝟒𝟓
in front of this lens so that the image is 20. Light ray falls at normal incidence on the first face
formed on the object itself? and emerges gracing the second face for an
-Solution : n = 1.5; R1 = 30 cm; R2 = –30 cm; equilateral prism.
(a) By Lens makers formula,focal length of (a) What is the angle of deviation produced?
lens ; (b) What is the refractive index of the material of
1 1 1 the prism?
= (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
𝑓𝑙 𝑅1 𝑅2 -Solution : 𝐴 = 60° ; 𝑖1 = 0° ; 𝑖2 = 90°
1 1 1 2 1 2 1 (a) Equation for angle of deviation,
= (1.5 − 1) [ − ] = (0.5) [ ] = [ ] =
𝑓𝑙 30 (−30) 30 2 30 30 𝑑 = 𝑖1 + 𝑖2 − 𝐴
∴ 𝒇𝒍 = 𝟑𝟎 𝒄𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟑 𝒎 𝑑 = (0° + 90°) − 60° = 90 − 60
 And focal length of mirror ; 𝒅 = 𝟑𝟎
𝑅2 −30 (b) The light inside the prism must be falling on the second face at critical angle as it
𝒇𝒎 = = = −15 𝑐𝑚 = −𝟎. 𝟏𝟓 𝒎
2 2 graces the boundary. ic = 90° – 30° = 60°
 Now the focal length of the silvered lens is,  Critical angle and refractive index are related as
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 2 2 1 1
=[ + ]= [ + ]=[ + ]= = = 𝑛= =
−𝑓 𝑓𝑙 − 𝑓𝑚 30 −(−15) 30 15 30 15 7.5 sin 𝑖𝐶 sin 60
∴ 𝒇 = −𝟕. 𝟓 𝒄𝒎 = −𝟎. 𝟎𝟕𝟓 𝒎 1 2 1
𝑛 = √3 = = 2 𝑋 0.577 [∵ = 0.577]
 The silvered mirror behaves as a concave mirror with its focal length on left ( ) √3 √3
2
side. 𝒏 = 𝟏. 𝟏𝟓𝟒
 The power of the silvered lens, 21. The angle of minimum deviation for an equilateral prism is 37o. Find the
𝑃 = 2 𝑃1 + 𝑃𝑚 refractive index of the material of the prism.
2 1 4 400 40
𝑃= + = = = = 13.33𝐷 -Solution : 𝐴 = 60° ; 𝐷 = 37°
𝑓𝑙 − 𝑓𝑚 30 𝑋 10−2 30 3  Equation for refractive index is
 As the power is positive it is a converging system. 𝐴+𝐷
Note: sin ( )
𝑛= 2
 Here, we come across a silvered lens which has negative focal length and 𝐴
sin ( )
positive power. Which implies that the focal length is to the left and the 2
60 + 37 97
system is a converging one. Such situations are possible in silvered lenses
2 = sin(48.5) = 0.75 = 75
sin ( ) sin ( )
2
because a silvered lens is basically a modified mirror. 𝑛=
60
=
60
sin ( ) sin ( ) sin(30) 0.5 5
(b) Here both 𝑢 and 𝑣 are sane (𝑣 = 𝑢) as the image coincides with the object.From 2 2
the mirror formula ; 𝒏 = 𝟏. 𝟓
1 1 1 1 1 2 22. Find the dispersive power of a prism if the refractive indices of flint glass for
= + = + =
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢 𝑢 𝑢 𝑢 red, green and violet colours are 1.613, 1.620 and 1.632 respectively.
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑢 = 2𝑓 = 2(−7.5) = −15 𝑐𝑚 = −0.15𝑚 -Solution : 𝑛𝑉 = 1.632 ; 𝑛𝐺 = 1.620 ; 𝑛𝑅 = 1.613
 The object is to be placed to the left of the silvered lens.  The dispersive power
𝑛𝑉 − 𝑛𝑅 1.632 − 1.613 0.019
𝜔= = = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟔𝟓
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑛𝐺 − 1 1.620 − 1 0.620
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. A beam of light consisting of red, green and blue is incident
1. An object of 4 cm height is placed at 6 cm in front of a concave mirror of radius on a right-angled prism as shown in figure. The refractive
of curvature 24 cm. Find the position, height, magnification and nature of the index of the material of the prism for the above red, green
and blue colours are 1.39, 1.44 and 1.47 respectively.
image.
What are the colours suffer total internal reflection?
-Solution : ℎ = 4 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅 = −24 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢 = −6 𝑐𝑚
-Solution : : 𝒊 = 45°; 𝑛𝑅 = 1.39 ; 𝑛𝐺 = 1.44 ; 𝑛𝐵 = 1.47
(i) Position of the image:
 Condition for total internal reflection, 𝒊 > 𝒊𝒄
 From the relation between focal length (f) and radius of curvature (R),
𝑅 − 24  From Snell’s law, 𝑛1 sin 𝑖 = 𝑛2 sin 𝑟
𝑅 = 2𝑓 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓= = = −12 𝑐𝑚  When 𝒊 = 𝒊𝒄 𝒕𝒉𝒆𝒏 𝒓 = 𝟗𝟎° Hence ,
2 2 𝑛
1 1 1 𝑛1 sin 𝑖𝑐 = 𝑛2 sin 90° (or) 𝑛1 sin 𝑖𝑐 = 𝑛2 (or) sin 𝑖𝑐 = 2
 From mirror equation ; = + 𝑛1
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 + 2 1 1
 Here,, 𝑛1 = 𝑛 and 𝑛2 = 1 So, sin 𝑖𝑐 = (or)
∴ = − = − =− + = = 𝑛
𝑣 𝑓 𝑢 (−12) (−6) 12 6 12 12 1 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝒗 = +𝟏𝟐 𝒄𝒎 𝑛= = = √2 = 1.414
sin 45° 1/√2
(ii) Magnificantion :
𝑣 12  Hence, 𝑛𝑅 < 𝑛 So red colour will emerge out of the prism
 Magnification is given by ; 𝒎= − = − = +𝟐  But, 𝑛𝐺 > 𝑛 and 𝑛𝐵 > 𝑛 So green and blue undergo total internal reflection
𝑢 (−6)
(iii) Height of the image: 4. An object is placed at a certain distance from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm.
𝒉𝟏 Find the object distance if the image obtained is magnified 4 times.
 Magnification; 𝒎 = Hence height of the image ; 𝒉𝟏 = 𝑚 ℎ = 2 𝑋 4 = 𝟖 𝒄𝒎 -Solution : 𝑓 = 20 𝑐𝑚 = 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑚 = 4
𝒉
 Thus the imageis erect, virtual, twice the height of object formed on right side  If u be the object distance, then magnification,
of mirror ℎ2 𝑓 𝑓
𝑚= = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓+𝑢 =
2. An object is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal length 20 cm. The image ℎ1 𝑓+𝑢 𝑚
formed is three times the size of the object. Calculate two possible distances of 𝑓 20
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑢= − 𝑓= − 20 = 5 − 20 = −𝟏𝟓 𝒄𝒎
the object from the mirror. 𝑚 4
5. Obtain the lens maker’s formula for a lens of
-Solution : 𝑓 = − 20 𝑐𝑚 = − 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
refractive index n2 which is separating two
 From the equation of magnification,
𝑓 𝑓 media of refractive indices n1 and n3 on the left
𝑚= (𝑜𝑟) 𝑢= 𝑓− and right respectively.
𝑓−𝑢 𝑚 -Solution :
 For real image, = −3 . Hence the distance of the object
 For the refracting surface , the light goes
(−20) 20 −60 − 20
𝑢 = (−20) − = −20 − = from n1 to n2, then
(−3) 3 3 𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 − 𝑛1
𝟖𝟎 − = − − − − − (1)
𝒖= − 𝒄𝒎 𝑣1 𝑢 𝑅1
𝟑  For the refracting surface , the light goes from n2 to n3, then
 For virtual image, = +3 . Hence the distance of the object 𝑛3 𝑛2 𝑛3 − 𝑛2
(−20) 20 −60 + 20 − 1= − − − − − (2)
𝑢 = (−20) − = −20 + = 𝑣 𝑣 𝑅1
3 3 3  Adding equations (1) and (2)
𝟒𝟎 𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛3 𝑛2 𝑛2 − 𝑛1 𝑛3 − 𝑛2
𝒖= − 𝒄𝒎 − + − 1= +
𝟑 𝑣1 𝑢 𝑣 𝑣 𝑅1 𝑅1
𝒏𝟑 𝒏𝟏 (𝒏𝟐 − 𝒏𝟏 ) (𝒏𝟑 − 𝒏𝟐 )
− = +
𝒗 𝒖 𝑹𝟏 𝑹𝟏
6. A thin converging lens of refractive index 1.5 has a power of + 5.0 D. When this  From figure,
lens is immersed in a liquid of refractive index n, it acts as a divergent lens of 𝐷 =𝑢+𝑣 − − − − − − (1)
focal length 100 cm. What must be the value of n? 𝑑 =𝑣−𝑢 − − − − − − (2)
-Solution : 𝑛𝑔 = 1.5 ; 𝑃𝑔 = + 5.0 𝐷 ; 𝑓 = − 100 𝑐𝑚 = − 1𝑚 ; 𝑛𝑎 = 1  (1) + (2) 𝐷+𝑑 =𝑢+𝑣+𝑣−𝑢 =2𝑣
 Power of lens placed in water, 𝐷+𝑑
1 1 𝑣=
𝑃𝑙 = = = = − 1 .0 𝐷 2
𝑓 (− 1)  (1) - (2) 𝐷−𝑑 = 𝑢+𝑣−𝑣+𝑢 = 2𝑢
 When glass lens place in air 𝐷−𝑑
𝑛𝑔 𝑢=
1 1 2
𝑃𝑔 = ( − 1) [ − ] − − − − − (1)  If ‘f’ is the focal length of convex lens,,
𝑛𝑎 𝑅1 𝑅2
 When glass lens immersed in liqiud 1 1 1 1 1 𝑢+𝑣
= − = + =
𝑛𝑔 1 1 𝑓 𝑣 (−𝑢) 𝑣 𝑢 𝑢𝑣
𝑃𝑙 = ( − 1) [ − ] − − − − − (2) 𝑢𝑣
𝑛 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑓=
𝑛𝑔 1 1 𝑛𝑔 𝑢+𝑣
(1) 𝑃𝑔 ( − 1) [ − ] ( − 1)  𝑃𝑢𝑡 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑢 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑣,
𝑛𝑎 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑛𝑎
⇒ = 𝑛 = 𝑛 (𝐷 + 𝑑)(𝐷 − 𝑑)
(2) 𝑃𝑙 𝑔 1 1 𝑔 𝐷−𝑑 𝐷+𝑑 [ ]
( − 1) [ − ] ( − 1) ( )( ) 4
𝑛 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑛 2 2
1.5 𝑓= =
𝐷+𝑑 𝐷−𝑑 𝐷+𝑑+𝐷−𝑑
5.0 ( − 1) + [ ]
= 1 2 2
(𝑫 + 𝒅)(𝑫 − 𝒅)
2
(−1.0) 1.5
( − 1) 𝒇=
𝑛 𝟒𝑫
(1.5 − 1) (0.5) 𝑫𝟐 − 𝒅𝟐
−5 = = 𝒇=
1.5 1.5 𝟒𝑫
( − 1) ( − 1)
𝑛 𝑛 8. Prove that a convex mirror can only form a virtual, erect and diminished image.
1.5 (0.5)
−1 = = −0.1 -Solution :
𝑛 −5
1.5
= −0.1 + 1 = 0.9
𝑛
1 0.9 9 3
= = =
𝑛 1.5 15 5
𝟓
𝒏 =
𝟑
7. If the distance D between an object and screen is greater than 4 times the focal
length f of a convex lens, then there are two positions for which the lens forms
an enlarged image and a diminished image respectively. This method is called Figure (i):
conjugate foci method. If d is the distance between the two positions of the lens,  Position of object - At infinity
obtain the equation for focal length of the convex lens.  Position of image- At F, right side of convex mirror
-Solution :
 Size of the image - Point image
 Nature of the image = Erect, diminished and virtual image
Figure (ii):
 Position of object - Between pole (P) and infinity
 Position of image- Between Pole (P) and Focus (F) on right side of convex mirror
 Size of the image - very small
9. A point object is placed at 20 cm from a thin plano-

convex lens of focal length 15 cm whose plane
surface is silvered. Locate the position and nature of
the final image.
-Solution : : 𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 = 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢 = 20 𝑐𝑚
 The light from’O’undergoes two refractions (1,3)
and one reflection (2) and forms final image at ‘I’
 Hence the equivalent power of this combination,
𝑃𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 = 2𝑃𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 + 𝑃𝑚𝑖𝑟𝑟𝑜𝑟
1 2 1
− = +
𝑓𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑓𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑥 𝑓𝑚𝑖𝑟𝑟𝑜𝑟
1 2 1 2 1
− = + =− [∵ = 0]
𝑓𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 15 ∞ 15 ∞
𝟏𝟓
∴ 𝒇𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 = − 𝒄𝒎
𝟐
1 1 1
 From mirror equation; + =
𝑣 𝑢 𝒇𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡
1 1 1 2 1 2 1 −8 + 3 − 5 1
∴ = − =− − =− + = = = −
𝑣 𝒇𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑢 15 (− 20) 15 20 60 60 12
𝒗 = −𝟏𝟐 𝒄𝒎
 Hence final image will form at 12 cm left side of the system.
10. Find the ratio of the intensities of lights with wavelengths 500 nm and 300 nm
which undergo Rayleigh scattering.
-Solution : 𝜆1 = 500 𝑛𝑚 = 500 𝑋10−9 𝑚 ; 𝜆2 = 300 𝑛𝑚 = 300 𝑋10−9 𝑚
1
 From Rayleigh’s scattering law, the intensity of scattered light ; 𝐼 ∝
𝜆4
1 1
 Hence, 𝐼1 ∝ and 𝐼2 ∝ 𝜆 4
𝜆14 2
 From this,
𝐼1 𝜆24
4
300 𝑋10−9 3 4 81
= 4=( ) = ( ) =
𝐼2 𝜆 1 500 𝑋10 −9 5 625
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝟏 : 𝑰𝟐 = 𝟖𝟏: 𝟔𝟐𝟓
11. Refractive index of material of the prism is 1.541. Find the critical angle?
-Solution : 𝒏 = 𝟏. 𝟓𝟒𝟏
 Let 𝑖𝐶 be the critical angle, then
1 1
sin 𝑖𝐶 = = = 0.6489
𝑛 1.541
∴ 𝒊𝑪 = sin (0.6489) = 𝟒𝟐°𝟐𝟕
−1
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -7
WAVE OPTICS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 7 WAVE OPTICS PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 3. Two light sources of equal amplitudes interfere with each other. Calculate the
1. The wavelength of light from sodium source in vacuum is 5893Å.What are its (a) ratio of maximum and minimum intensities.
wavelength, (b) speed and (c) frequency when this light travels in water which -Solution :-
has a refractive index of 1.33.  Let ‘a’ be the amplitude ,then equation for intensity
-Solution :- 𝑛1 = 1 ; 𝑛2 = 1.33 ; 1 = 5893 A ; 𝜙
𝐼 ∝ 4 𝑎2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ]
 Refractive index of water, 2
𝑐 1  1 𝜙
 When, 𝜙 = 0 (𝑜𝑟) cos ( ) = 1 then, intensity will be maximum.
𝑛= = = 2
𝑣 2  2 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 ∝ 4 𝑎2
1 5893 𝑋 10−10 𝜙
 When 𝜙 = 180 (𝑜𝑟) cos ( ) = 0 then, intensity will be minimum.
2 = = 2
𝑛 1.33 𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0
𝟐 = 𝟒𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 = 𝟒𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝐀
𝑐  Hence the ratio of maximum and minimum ,
 Since, 𝑛 = , velocity of light in water,
𝑣 𝑰𝒎𝒂𝒙 ∶ 𝑰𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟒 𝒂𝟐 ∶ 𝟎
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 108 9 𝑋 108 4. Two light sources have intensity of light as I0. What is the resultant intensity at
𝑣= = = = = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝑛 1.33 4 4 a point where the two light waves have a phase difference of π/3?
( ) 𝝅
3 -Solution :- 𝜙=
 Frequency is same in both air and water medium, then 𝟑
𝜙
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 1018  Resultant intensity, 𝐼 ∝ 4 𝑎2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ] [∵ 𝐼𝑂 ∝ 𝑎2 ]
 =
2
= =
1 5893 𝑋 10−10 5893 𝜙
𝜋
( ) 𝜋 √3
2
3
𝐼 = 4 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ] = 4 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ 3
] = 4 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ] = 4 𝐼𝑂 [ ] = 4 𝐼𝑂 [ ]
 = 5. 090 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 1018 = 𝟓. 𝟎𝟗𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯𝒛 2 2 6 2 4
2. Two light sources with amplitudes 5 units and 3 units respectively interfere 𝑰 = 𝟑 𝑰𝑶
with each other. Calculate the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities. 5. The wavelength of a light is 450 nm. How much phase it will differ for a path of
-Solution :- 𝑎1 = 5 ; 𝑎2 = 3 3 mm?
 Resultant amplitude, -Solution :- 𝜆 = 450 𝑛𝑚 = 450 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝛿 = 3 𝑚𝑚 = 3 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
 Phase difference,
A = √𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2 𝑎1 𝑎2 cos 𝜙
2𝜋 2𝜋 𝝅
 When 𝜙 = 0 (𝑜𝑟) cos 𝜙 = 1 , then resultant amplitude will be maximum. 𝜙= 𝛿= 𝑋 3 𝑋 10−3 = 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒓𝒂𝒅 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 𝒓𝒂𝒅
𝜆 450 𝑋 10−9 𝟕𝟓
6. In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits are 0.15 mm apart. The light
A𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2 𝑎1 𝑎2 (1)
source has a wavelength of 450 nm. The screen is 2 m away from the slits.
A𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √( 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 )2 = 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 = 5 + 3 (a) Find the distance of the second bright fringe and also third dark fringe from
𝐀𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟖 units the central maximum.
 When 𝜙 = 180° (𝑜𝑟) cos 𝜙 = − 1 then resultant amplitude will be (b) Find the fringe width.
minimum. (c) How will the fringe pattern change if the screen is moved away from the
 A𝑚𝑖𝑛 = √𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2 𝑎1 𝑎2 (−1) slits?
(d) What will happen to the fringe width if the whole setup is immersed in
A𝑚𝑖𝑛 = √( 𝑎1 − 𝑎2 )2 = 𝑎1 − 𝑎2 = 5 − 3 waterof refractive index 4/3.
𝐀𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟐 units -Solution :- 𝑑 = 0.15 𝑚𝑚 = 0.15 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝜆 = 450 𝑛𝑚 = 450 𝑋 10−9 𝑚
 Intensity is directly proportional to the square of the amplitude (𝐼 ∝ 𝐴2 ) 𝐷
2 (a) Distance of nth bright fringe from centre, 𝑦𝑛 = 𝑛 𝜆
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝐴𝑚𝑎𝑥 82 64 16 𝑑
= 2 = 2= = 𝐷 𝜆
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝐴𝑚𝑖𝑛 2 4 1 Distance of nth dark fringe centre, 𝑦𝑛 = (2𝑛 − 1)
𝑑 2
𝑰𝒎𝒂𝒙 ∶ 𝑰𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟏𝟔 ∶ 𝟏 Hencedistance of 2 bright fringe,
nd
𝐷 2
𝑦2 = 𝑛𝜆= 𝑋 2 𝑋 450 𝑋 10−9 = 2 𝑋 2 𝑋 3000 𝑋 10−6
𝑑 0.15 𝑋 10−3
𝒚𝟐 = 12000 𝑋 10−6 = 𝟏𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟐 𝒎𝒎
And distance of 3rd dark fringe, 8. Find the minimum thickness of a film of refractive index 1.25, which will
𝐷 5𝜆 2 5 𝑋 450 𝑋 10−9 strongly reflect the light of wavelength 589 nm. Also find the minimum
𝑦3 = = 𝑋 = 5 𝑋 3000 𝑋 10−6 thickness of the film to be anti-reflecting.
𝑑 2 0.15 𝑋 10−3 2
𝒚𝟑 = 15000 𝑋 10−6 = 𝟏𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟓 𝒎𝒎 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 589 𝑛𝑚 = 589 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝜇 = 1.25
(b) Fringe width,  For the film to have strong reflection, the reflected waves should interfere
𝜆𝐷 450 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 2 constructively. Hence the path difference,
𝛽= = = 3000 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 2 = 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟔 𝒎𝒎 𝜆
𝑑 0.15 𝑋 10−3 2 𝜇 𝑡 = (2𝑛 − 1)
(c) Since, 𝜷 ∝ 𝑫 , when distance (D) between slit and screen increases, the fringe 2
width (𝜷) also increases.  The least optical path difference, 𝑛 = 1, then
4 𝜆
(d) When, 𝑛 = ,then fringe width (𝛽1 ) in water 2𝜇𝑡 =
3 2
1
𝜆 𝐷 𝜆𝐷 𝛽 6 𝑋 10−3 3 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−3 18 𝑋 10−3 𝜆 𝜆 589 𝑋 10−9 589 𝑋 10−9
𝛽1 = = = = = = [∵ 𝜆1 = ] ∴ 𝑡= = =
𝑑 𝑛𝑑 𝑛 4 4 4 𝑛 4𝜇 4 𝑋 1.25 5
( )
3 𝒕 = 𝟏𝟏𝟕. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟏𝟕. 𝟖 𝒏𝒎
𝜷𝟏 = 𝟒. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟒. 𝟓 𝒎𝒎  For the film to be anti-reflecting, the reflected rays should interfere destructively.
7. Lights of two wavelengths 560 nm and 420 nm are used in Young’s double slit Hence the path difference,
experiment. Find the least distance from the central fringe where the bright 2𝜇𝑡 =𝑛𝜆
fringes of the two wavelengths coincide.  The least optical path difference, 𝑛 = 1, then
-Solution :- 𝝀𝟏 = 560 𝑛𝑚 = 560 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝝀𝟐 = 420 𝑛𝑚 = 420 𝑋 10−9 𝑚
𝟏 2𝜇𝑡 =𝜆
 Here for given ‘y’, 𝝀 ∝ .Here, nth order bright fringe of longer wavelength λ1 𝜆 589 𝑋 10−9 589 𝑋 10−9 5890 𝑋 10−9
𝒏
coincides with (n+1)th order bright fringe of shorter wavelength λ2, ∴ 𝑡= = = =
2𝜇 2 𝑋 1.25 2.5 25
𝐷
 Distance of nth bright fringe ; 𝑦𝑛 = 𝑛𝜆 𝒕 = 𝟐𝟑𝟓. 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟑𝟓. 𝟔 𝒏𝒎
𝑑
𝐷 𝐷 9. Light of wavelength 500 nm passes through a slit of 0.2 mm wide. The diffraction
 Hence, 𝑛 𝜆1 = (𝑛 + 1) 𝜆2
𝑑 𝑑 pattern is formed on a screen 60 cm away. Determine the,
𝑛 𝜆1 = (𝑛 + 1) 𝜆2 (a) angular spread of central maximum
(𝑛 + 1) 𝜆1 (b) the distance between the central maximum and the second minimum.
(𝑜𝑟) =
𝑛 𝜆2 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 500 𝑛𝑚 = 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑎 = 0.2 𝑚𝑚 = 0.2 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
1 𝜆1 𝐷 = 60 𝑐𝑚 = 60 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
(𝑜𝑟) 1+ =
𝑛 𝜆2 (a) Equation for diffraction minimum is, 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛 𝜆
1 𝜆1 The central maximum is spread up to the first minimum. Hence, n = 1
= −1 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆
𝑛 𝜆2
1 560 𝑋 10−9 𝜆 500 𝑋 10−9 5000 𝑋 10−6
= −1 (𝑜𝑟) sin 𝜃 = = −3
= = 2500 𝑋10−6
𝑛 420 𝑋 10−9 𝑎 0.2 𝑋 10 2
1 4 1 (𝑜𝑟) sin 𝜃 = 0.0025
= −1= (𝑜𝑟) 𝜽 = 𝐬𝐢𝐧−𝟏 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟓 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟓 𝒓𝒂𝒅
𝑛 3 3
∴ 𝒏=𝟑 From the figure, for first mininmum
 Thus, the 3rd bright fringe of λ1 and 4th bright fringe of λ2 coincide at the least 𝑦1
tan 𝜃 =
distance y. 𝐷
 The least distance from the central fringe where the bright fringes of the two As 𝜃 is small, sin 𝜃 ≈ tan 𝜃 For first minimum
wavelengths coincides is 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆
𝑦1
𝐷 1 𝑎 =𝜆
𝑦𝑛 = 𝑛𝜆= 𝑋 3 𝑋 560 𝑋 10−9 𝐷
𝑑 3 𝑋 10−3 𝜆𝐷 500 𝑋 10 𝑋60 𝑋 10−2
−9
5000 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 60 𝑋 10−2
𝒚𝒏 = 𝟓𝟔𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 𝒎𝒎 ∴ 𝑦1 = = = = 150000 𝑋10−8
𝑎 0.2 𝑋 10−3
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 2 𝑋 10−3
𝒚𝟏 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝒎
For second minimum (𝑛 = 2) 13. A monochromatic light of wavelength of 500 nm strikes a grating and produces
𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 2 𝜆 fourth order maximum at an angle of 30°. Find the number of slits per
𝑦2 centimeter.
𝑎 = 2𝜆
𝐷 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 500 𝑛𝑚 = 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ;  = 30 ; 𝑚 = 4
2𝜆𝐷 2 𝑋 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑋60 𝑋 10−2  Equation for diffraction maximum for grating is ; sin 𝜃 = 𝑁 𝑚 𝜆
∴ 𝑦2 = =
𝑎 0.2 𝑋 10−3 1
20 𝑋 500 𝑋10−9 𝑋 60 𝑋 10−2 sin 𝜃 sin 30° ( ) 1
∴ 𝑁= = = 2 = 𝑋 106 = 0.25 𝑋 106
𝑦2 = = 300000 𝑋10−8 𝜆𝑚 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 4 2000 𝑋 10−9 4
2 𝑋 10−3
𝒚𝟐 = 𝟑. 𝟎 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟑 𝒎𝒎 𝑵 = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒍𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔⁄𝒎 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝒍𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔⁄𝒄𝒎
(b) The distance between the central maximum and second minimum is, 14. The optical telescope in the Vainu Bappu observatory at Kavalur has an
𝒚𝟐 − 𝒚𝟏 = 𝟑 − 𝟏. 𝟓 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝒎 objective lens of diameter 2.3 m. What is its angular resolution if the wavelength
10. A monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 Å passes through a single slit of light used is 589 nm?
producing diffraction pattern for the central maximum as shown in the figure. -Solution :- 𝜆 = 589 𝑛𝑚 = 589 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑎 = 2.3 𝑚
Determine the width of the slit.  Equation for angular resolution,
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 5000 𝐀 = 5000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ;  = 30 ; 𝑛 = 1 1.22 𝜆 1.22 𝑋 589 𝑋 10−9
 Equation for diffraction minimum is,  = =
𝑎 2.3
𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛 𝜆  = 3. 125 𝑋 102 𝑋 10−9 = 𝟑. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒓𝒂𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏 ≈ 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟏𝟏
 For first minimum (𝑛 = 1) 15. Two polaroids are kept with their transmission axes inclined at 30 o.
𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆 Unpolarised light of intensity I falls on the first polaroid. Find out the intensity
𝜆 of light emerging from the second polaroid.
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑎= -Solution :-
sin 𝜃
5000 𝑋 10−10 5000 𝑋 10−10  As the intensity of the unpolarised light falling on the first polaroid is I, the
𝑎= = intensity of polarized light emerging from it will be,
sin 30° 1
( ) 𝑰
2 𝑰𝑶 =
𝟐
𝑎 = 10000 𝑋 10−10 = 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑚 = 0.001 𝑋 10−3  Let 𝐼1 be the intensity of light emerging from the second polaroid.
𝒂 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟏 𝒎𝒎 𝐼1 = 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃
11. Calculate the distance upto which ray optics is a good approximation for light of 2
𝐼 𝐼 √3 𝐼 3
wavelength 500 nm falls on an aperture of width 0.5 mm. 𝐼 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 30° =
1
( ) = 𝑋
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 500 𝐧𝐦 = 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑎 = 0.5 𝑚𝑚 = 0.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 2 2 2 2 4
𝑎2 𝟏
𝟑
 Fresnel distance, 𝑧 = 𝑰 = ( )𝑰
𝟖
2𝜆
(0.5 𝑋 10−3 )2 0.25 𝑋 10−6 0.25 𝑋 10−6 16. Two polaroids are kept crossed (transmission axes at 90o) to each other.
𝑧= −9
= −9
= (a) What will be the intensity of the light coming out from the second polaroid
2 𝑋 500 𝑋 10 1000 𝑋 10 10−6
𝒛 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟓 𝒄𝒎 when an unpolarised light of intensity I falls on the first polaroid?
12. A diffraction grating consists of 4000 slits per centimeter. It is illuminated by a (b) What will be the intensity of light coming out from the second polaroid if a
monochromatic light. The second order diffraction maximum is produced at an third polaroid is kept in between at 45o inclination to both of them.
angle of 30°. What is the wavelength of the light used? -Solution :-
-Solution :- 𝑁 = 4000 𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑠 ⁄𝑐𝑚 = 400000 𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑠 ⁄𝑚 ;  = 30 ; 𝑚 = 2 (a) As the intensity of the unpolarised light falling on the first polaroid 𝑃1 is I, the
 Equation for diffraction maximum for grating is, 𝑰
intensity of polarized light emerging from it will be ; 𝑰𝑶 =
sin 𝜃 = 𝑁 𝑚 𝜆 𝟐
1 Let 𝐼1 , be the intensity of light emerging from the second polaroid 𝑃2 . From
sin 𝜃 sin 30° ( ) 1 Malus’ law
𝜆= = = 2 = 𝑋 10−5
𝑁𝑚 400000 𝑋 2 8 𝑋 10 5 16 𝐼
𝐼1 = 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 90° = 0
𝝀 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟔𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟓 = 𝟔𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝑨° 2
No light comes out from the second polaroid.
(b) If third polaroid 𝑃3 kept between 𝑃1 & 𝑃2 at 45o, the intensity of emergent (b) Magnification in near point focusing,
light from 𝑃3 𝐷 25
2 𝒎= 1+ = 1+ =1+5=𝟔
𝐼 𝐼 1 𝐼 1 𝐈 𝑓 5
𝐼1 = 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 45° = ( 2) = 𝑋 =
2 2 √ 2 2 𝟒 Magnification in normal focusing,
Finally, the intensity of emergent light from 𝑃2 , 𝐷 25
𝒎= = =𝟓
I I 1 2 I 1 𝐈 𝑓 5
𝐼11 = 𝐼1 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 45° = ( ) = 𝑋 = 20. A microscope has an objective and eyepiece of focal lengths 5 cm and 50 cm
4 4 √2 4 2 𝟖
17. Find the polarizing angles for (i) glass of refractive index 1.5 and (ii) water of respectively with tube length 30 cm. Find the magnification of the microscope
refractive index 1.33. in the (a) near point and (b) normal focusing.
-Solution :- -Solution :- 𝑓𝑂 = 5 𝑐𝑚 = 5 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑓𝑒 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 50 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
(i) When, 𝑛 = 1.5 , from Brewster’s law ; tan 𝑖𝑃 = 𝑛 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑖𝑃 = tan−1 𝑛 𝐿 = 30 𝑐𝑚 = 30 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 25 𝑐𝑚 = 25 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
𝒊𝑷 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 𝟏. 𝟓 = 𝟓𝟔. 𝟑° (a) Magnification of the microscope in near point focusing,
𝐿 𝐷
(ii) When, 𝑛 = 1.33 from Brewster’s law ;, tan 𝑖𝑃 = 𝑛 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑖𝑃 = tan−1 𝑛 𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ] [1 + ]
𝑓𝑂 𝑓𝑒
𝒊𝑷 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 𝟏. 𝟑𝟑 = 𝟓𝟑. 𝟏°
30 𝑋 10−2 25 𝑋 10−2
18. What is the angle at which a glass plate of refractive index 1.65 is to be kept with 𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ] [1 + ]
respect to the horizontal surface so that an unpolarised light travelling 5 𝑋 10−2 50 𝑋 10−2
horizontal after reflection from the glass plate is found to be plane polarised? 1 3 18
𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [6] [1 + ] = 6 𝑋 = =𝟗
-Solution :- 𝑛 = 1.65 2 2 2
 From Brewster’s law ; tan 𝑖𝑃 = 𝑛 (b) Magnification of the microscope in normal focusing,
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑖𝑃 = tan−1 𝑛 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 𝟏. 𝟔𝟓 = 𝟓𝟖. 𝟖° 𝐿 𝐷
𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ] [ ]
 The angle at which a glass plate to be kept with respect to the horizontal surface 𝑓𝑂 𝑓𝑒
= 𝟗𝟎° − 𝟓𝟖. 𝟖° = 𝟑𝟏. 𝟐° 30 𝑋 10−2 25 𝑋 10−2
𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ][ ]
19. A man with a near point of 25 cm reads a book which has small print using a 5 𝑋 10−2 50 𝑋 10−2
magnifying lens of focal length 5 cm. 1 6
(a) What are the closest and the farthest distances at which he should keep the 𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [6] [ ] = =𝟑
2 2
lens from the book? 21. A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 125 cm and an eyepiece
(b) What are the maximum and the minimum magnification possible? of focal length 2 cm. (a) What is the magnification of the telescope? (b) What is
-Solution :- 𝐷 = 25 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓 = 5 𝑐𝑚 the separation between the objective and the eyepiece?(c) What is the angular
 Closest distance of object =𝑢 separation between two stars when viewed through this telescope if they
Image distance (near point focusing) = 𝑣 = −25 𝑐𝑚 subtend 1 ' for bare eye?
 Farthest distance of object = 𝑢1 -Solution :- 𝑓𝑂 = 125 𝑐𝑚 = 125 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑓𝑒 = 2 𝑐𝑚 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
Image distance (normal focusing) = 𝑣1 = ∞ (a) Magnification of telescope,
(a) Lens equation for near point focusing, 𝑓𝑂 125 𝑋 10−2 125
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 − 5 6 𝑚= = =
− = (𝑜𝑟) = − = − =− − = = − 𝑓𝑒 2 𝑋 10−2 2
𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝑢 𝑣 𝑓 (−25) 5 25 5 25 25 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓
𝟐𝟓 (b) Equation for approximate length of telescope,
𝒖= − = −𝟒. 𝟏𝟔𝟕 𝒄𝒎
𝟔 𝐿 = 𝑓𝑂 + 𝑓𝑒
Lens equation for normal focusing, 𝐿 = (125 𝑋 10−2 ) + (2 𝑋 10−2 ) = (125 + 2) 𝑋 10−2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 𝑳 = 𝟏𝟐𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟕 𝒎
− 1 = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 1 = 1 − 1 = − = −0− =−
𝑣 1 𝑢 𝑓 𝑢 𝑣 𝑓 ∞ 5 5 5 (c) The angular separation,
𝒖𝟏 = − 𝟓 𝒄𝒎 𝜃𝑖
𝑚= (𝑜𝑟) 𝜃𝑖 = 𝑚 𝜃𝑜
The closest distance between the lens and the book is, u = −𝟒. 𝟏𝟔𝟕 𝒄𝒎 𝜃𝑜
The farthest distance at which the person can keep the book is = −𝟓𝒄𝒎 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓
𝜽𝒊 = 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏 = 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓 = = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟒°
𝟔𝟎
22. Calculate the power of the lens of the spectacles needed to rectify the defect of EXERCISE PROBLEMS
nearsightedness for a person who could see clearly up to a distance of 1.8 m. 1. The ratio of maximum and minimum intensities in an interference pattern is
-Solution :- 𝑥 = 1.8 𝑚 36 : 1. What is the ratio of the amplitudes of the two interfering waves?
 The lens should have a focal length of 𝒇 = −𝒙 = −𝟏. 𝟖 𝒎 -Solution :- 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 ∶ 𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 36 ∶ 1
 It is a concave (or) diverging lens. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 (𝑎1 +𝑎2 )2 𝑎1 +𝑎2 𝐼 36
 The power of the lens is,  We have, = (𝑜𝑟) = √ 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √ 1 = 6
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 (𝑎1 −𝑎2 )2 𝑎1 −𝑎2 𝑚𝑖𝑛
1 1
𝑃 = =−  Hence, 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 = 6 (𝑎1 − 𝑎2 )
𝑓 1.8 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 = 6 𝑎1 − 6 𝑎2
𝑷 = −𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 diopter 𝑎2 + 6 𝑎2 = 6 𝑎1 − 𝑎1
23. A person has farsightedness with the far distance he could see clearly is 75 cm. 7 𝑎2 = 5 𝑎1
Calculate the power of the lens of the spectacles needed to rectify the defect. 𝑎1 7
-Solution :- 𝑦 = 75 𝑐𝑚 = 75 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 =
𝑎2 5
 The lens should have a focal length of 𝑓, 𝒂𝟏 ∶ 𝒂𝟐 = 𝟕 ∶ 𝟓
𝑦 𝑋 25 𝑐𝑚
𝑓= 2. In Young’s double slit experiment, 62 fringes are seen on a screen for sodium
𝑦 − 25 𝑐𝑚 light of wavelength 5893 Å. If violet light of wavelength 4359 Å is used in place
75 𝑐𝑚 𝑋 25 𝑐𝑚 1875 of sodium light, how many fringes will be seen?
𝑓= = 𝑐𝑚
75 𝑐𝑚 − 25 𝑐𝑚 50 -Solution :- 𝜆1 = 5893 A ; 𝜆2 = 4359 A ; 𝑛1 = 62
𝟏𝟖𝟕𝟓 𝜆𝐷
𝒇= 𝒄𝒎 = 𝟑𝟕. 𝟓 𝒄𝒎  Equation of fringe width ; 𝛽 =
𝟓𝟎 𝑑
 It is a convex lens (or) converging lens.  Hence fringe width of n-fringes , 𝑛 𝛽 = 𝑛 .Thus
𝜆𝐷
𝑑
 The power of the lens is, 𝜆1 𝐷 𝜆2 𝐷
1 1 10−2 100 𝑛1 = 𝑛2
𝑃 = =− = = 𝑑 𝑑
𝑓 37.5 𝑋 10 −2 37.5 37.5 𝑛1 𝜆1 = 𝑛2 𝜆2
𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟕 diopter 𝑛1 𝜆1
𝑛2 =
𝜆2
62 𝑋 5893 𝑋 10−10 62 𝑋 5893
𝑛2 = −10
=
4359 𝑋 10 4359
𝒏𝟐 = 𝟖𝟑. 𝟖𝟏 ≈ 𝟖𝟒
3. Light of wavelength 600 nm that falls on a pair of slits producing interference
pattern on a screen in which the bright fringes are separated by 7.2 mm. What
must be the wavelength of another light which produces bright fringes
separated by 8.1 mm with the same apparatus?
-Solution :- 𝜆1 = 600 𝑛𝑚 = 600 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝛽1 = 7.2𝑚𝑚 = 7.2 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ;
𝛽2 = 8.1 𝑚𝑚 = 8.1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
𝜆𝐷
 Equation of fringe width ; 𝛽= 𝑑
 Hence,
𝛽1 𝜆1 𝛽2
= (or) 𝜆2 = 𝜆1
𝛽2 𝜆2 𝛽1
8.1 𝑋 10−3 4860
𝜆2 = 600 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 −3
= 𝑋 10−9 = 675 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 = 675 𝑛𝑚
7.2 𝑋 10 7.2
4. A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source falls on a single slit 𝐼𝑜
𝐼3 = cos 2 𝜃 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃)
1 mm wide and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m 2
away. What is the distance between the first dark fringes on either side of the 𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2 𝜃 2
central bright fringe? 𝐼3 = cos 2 𝜃 sin2 𝜃 = [𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃]2 = [ ]
2 2 2 2
-Solution :- 𝑎 = 1𝑚𝑚 = 1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐼𝑜 sin2 2𝜃 𝐼𝑜
𝜆 = 600 𝑛𝑚 = 600 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 2 𝑚 𝐼3 = [ ]= sin2 2𝜃
2 4 8
 Equation for diffraction minimum,  When sin2 2𝜃 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 , then 𝐼3 will bemaximum. (i.e.)
𝑦
𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑛 𝜆 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑎 = 𝑛 𝜆 sin2 2𝜃 = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2𝜃 = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 2𝜃 = 90°
𝐷
 Condition for 1st minimum (n=1) ∴ 𝜽 = 𝟒𝟓°
𝑦 7. An unpolarised light of intensity 32 Wm –2 passes through three Polaroids such
𝑎 =𝜆
𝐷 that the axes of the first and the last Polaroids are at 90°. What is the angle
𝐷𝜆 2 𝑋 600 𝑋 10−9 between the axes of the first and middle Polaroids so that the emerging light
∴ 𝑦 = = = 1200 𝑋 10−6 𝑚 = 1.2 𝑋10−3 𝑚 = 1.2 𝑚𝑚
𝑎 1 𝑋 10−3 has an intensity of only 3 Wm–2?
 Hence distance between the first fringe on either side of the central bright fringe
-Solution :- : 𝐼𝑜 = 32 𝑊𝑚−2 ; 𝐼3 = 3 𝑊𝑚−2
𝒀 = 2 𝑦 = 2 𝑋1.2 = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝒎𝒎
5. Light of wavelength of 5000 Å produces diffraction pattern of the single slit of  If the intensity of the unpolarised light is I then the intensity of polarised light will
width 2.5 μm. What is the maximum order of diffraction possible? be I/2. The other half of intensity is restricted by the polariser.
-Solution :- 𝑎 = 2.5 𝜇𝑚 = 2.5 𝑋 10−6 𝑚 ; 𝜆 = 5000 Å = 5000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚
 Equation for diffraction minimum : 𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝜽 = 𝒏 𝝀
 For maximum order ; 𝜃 = 90° (𝑜𝑟) 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 1 . Hence
𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝜽 2.5 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1
𝒏= = = 0.5 𝑋 101 = 𝟓
𝝀 5000 𝑋 10−10
6. I0 is the intensity of light existing between two cross Polaroids kept with their
axes perpendicular to each other. A third polaroid is introduced between them.
What must be the angle between the axes of first and the newly introduced  Intensity of incident light on 𝑃1 = 𝐼𝑜
polaroid to get the maximum light from the whole arrangement? 𝐼
 Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃1 ; 𝐼1 = 𝑜
-Solution :- 2
𝐼𝑜
 If the intensity of the unpolarised light is I then the intensity of polarised light will  Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃2 ; 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 cos 2 𝜃 = cos 2 𝜃
2
be I/2. The other half of intensity is restricted by the polariser.  Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃3 ; 𝐼3 = 𝐼2 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃)
𝐼𝑜
cos 2 𝜃 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃)
𝐼3 =
2
𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2 𝜃 2
𝐼3 = cos 2 𝜃 sin2 𝜃 = [𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃]2 = [ ]
2 2 2 2
2
𝐼𝑜 sin 2𝜃 𝐼𝑜
𝐼3 = [ ]= sin2 2𝜃
2 4 8
32
3= sin2 2𝜃
8
 Intensity of incident light on 𝑃1 = 𝐼𝑜 24 3

𝐼
Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃1 ; 𝐼1 = 𝑜 (𝑜𝑟) sin2 2𝜃 = =
2 32 4
𝐼 √3
 Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃2 ; 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 cos 2 𝜃 = 𝑜 cos 2 𝜃 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2𝜃 =
2
2
 Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃3 ; 𝐼3 = 𝐼2 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃) √3
(𝑜𝑟) 2𝜃 = sin−1 [ ] = 60°
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 2
∴ 𝜽 = 𝟑𝟎°
8. The reflected light is found to be plane polarised when an unpolarized light falls 10. A compound microscope has a magnifying power of 100 when the image is
on a denser medium at 60° with the normal. Find the angle of refraction and formed at infinity. The objective has a focal length of 0.5 cm and the tube length
critical angle of incidence for total internal reflection in the denser to rarer is 6.5 cm. What is the focal length of the eyepiece.
medium reflection. Solution :- 𝑚 = 100 ; 𝑓𝑜 = 0.5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝐿 = 6.5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 25𝑐𝑚
Solution :-  When the image is formed at infinity, the real image produced by objective lens is
 The angle of incidence at which the reflected ray get completely plane polarized formed at the focus of the eyepiece, then 𝑣𝑜 + 𝑓𝑒 = 𝐿
is called angle of polarization (𝑖𝑃 ). Hence 𝒊𝑷 = 𝟔𝟎° 𝑣𝑜 + 𝑓𝑒 = 6.5 − − − − − (1)
 At polarizing angle, the angle of refraction ,
𝐫 = 90° − 𝑖𝑃 = 90° − 60° = 𝟑𝟎°
 Magnification of compound microscope ;
 From Brewster’s law, 𝑛 = tan 𝑖𝑃 = tan 60° = √3
𝑣𝑜 𝐷 𝑣𝑜 𝐷 𝑣𝑜 25
 Let 𝑖𝐶 be the critical angle, then 𝑚= 𝑋 = − [1 − ] = − [1 − ]
𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒 𝑓𝑜 𝑓𝑒 𝑓𝑜 𝑓𝑒
1 1
sin 𝑖𝐶 = = = 0.5774 𝑣𝑜 25
𝑛 √3 100 = − [1 − ]
0.5 𝑓𝑒
𝒊𝑪 = sin (0.5774) = 𝟑𝟓. 𝟐𝟔° = 𝟑𝟓°𝟏𝟔𝐈
−1
𝑣𝑜 1
9. The near point and the far point for a person are 50 cm and 500 cm, 4 = − [1 − ]
0.5 𝑓𝑒
respectively. Calculate the power of the lens the person should wear to read a 𝑣𝑜
book held in hand at 25 cm. What maximum distance is clearly visible for the 4 𝑓𝑒 = − 1 + = −1 + 2 𝑣𝑜
0.5
person with this lens on the eye? (𝑜𝑟) 2 𝑣𝑜 − 4 𝑓𝑒 = 1 − − − − − (2)
Solution :-𝑢 = −25 𝑐𝑚 = −0.25 𝑚 ; 𝑣𝑛 = −50𝑐𝑚 = −0.5 𝑚 ; 𝑣𝑓 = −500𝑐𝑚 = −5𝑚 (1)𝑋 2 ⟹ 2 𝑣𝑜 + 2 𝑓𝑒 = 13 − − − − − (3)
 Power of lens ; (3) − (2) ⟹ 6 𝑓𝑒 = 12
1 1 1 12
𝑷= = − 𝒇𝒆 = = 𝟐 𝒄𝒎
𝑓 𝑣𝑛 𝑢 6
1 1 1 1
𝑷= − =− + = −2 + 4 = 𝟐 𝑫
(−0.5) (−0.25) 0.5 0.25
 Let 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 be the maximum distance, then
1 1 1
𝑷= = −
𝑓 𝑣𝑓 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥
1 1 1 1
𝟐= − =− −
(−5) 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 5 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥
1 1 11
=− −2=−
𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 5 5
5
𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 = − = − 0.454 𝑚 = − 45.45 𝑐𝑚
11
 The maximum distance that clearly visible for the person with this lens on the eye
will be = 45.45 𝑐𝑚
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT - 8
DUAL NATURE OF
RADIATON AND MATTER

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 8 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 2. A radiation of wavelength 300 nm is incident on a silver surface. Will

1. For the photoelectric emission from cesium, show that wave theory predicts photoelectrons be observed? [work function of silver = 4.7 eV]
that (i) maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons (Kmax) depends on the -Solution :- : 𝜆 = 300 𝑛𝑚 = 300 𝑋 10−9 𝑚
intensity I of the incident light (ii) Kmax does not depend on the frequency of the  Energy of the incident photon is
incident light and (iii) the time interval between the incidence of light and the ℎ𝑐
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= (𝑗𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒)
ejection of photoelectrons is very long. (Given : The work function for cesium is 𝜆
2.14 eV and the power absorbed per unit area is 𝟏. 𝟔𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑾 𝒎−𝟐 which ℎ𝑐
𝐸= (𝑒𝑉)
produces a measurable photocurrent in cesium.) 𝜆𝑒
-Solution :- 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
𝐸=
For the sake of simplicity, the following standard assumptions can be made when light 300 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
is incident on the given material. 6.626 𝑋 10−26 6.626 66.26
(a) Light is absorbed in the top atomic layer of the metal 𝐸= = =
100 𝑋 10−28 𝑋 1.6 1.6 16
(b) For a given element, each atom absorbs an equal amount of energy and this 𝑬 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝒆𝑽
energy is proportional to its cross-sectional area A  The work function of silver = 4.7 eV. Since the energy of the incident photon is less
(c) Each atom gives this energy to one of the electrons. than the work function of silver, photoelectrons are not observed in this case.
(i) According to wave theory, the energy in a light wave is spread out uniformly and 3. When light of wavelength 2200Å falls on Cu, photo electrons are emitted from it.
continuously over the wavefront. Find (i) the threshold wavelength and (ii) the stopping potential. Given: the work
 The energy absorbed by each electron in time t is given by E = I A t function for Cu is ϕ0 = 4.65 eV.
 With this energy absorbed, the most energetic electron is released with Kmax -Solution :- 𝜆 = 2200 𝐴° = 2200 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜙𝑂 = 4.65 𝑒𝑉 = 4.65 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
by overcoming the surface energy barrier or work function ϕ0 and this is (i) Work function ; 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈𝑂 =
ℎ𝑐
expressed as ; 𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝑰 𝑨 𝒕 − 𝝓𝑶 𝜆𝑂
 Thus, wave theory predicts that for a unit time, at low light intensities when Hence threshold wavelength,
𝑰 𝑨 < 𝝓𝑶 , no electrons are emitted. At higher intensities, when 𝑰 𝑨 ≥ 𝝓𝑶 , ℎ𝑐 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−26
𝜆𝑂 = = =
electrons are emitted. This implies that higher the light intensity, greater will 𝜙𝑂 4.65 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 7.44 𝑋 10−19
−7
be Kmax. 19.878 𝑋 10
𝜆𝑂 =
 Kmax is dependent only on the intensity under given conditions – that is, by 7.44
suitably increasing the intensity, one can produce photoelectric effect even if 𝝀𝑶 = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟕𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟔𝟕𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟔𝟕𝟐 𝑨°
the frequency is less than the threshold frequency. So the concept of (ii) By Einstein’s photo electric equation; 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
ℎ𝑐
threshold frequency does not even exist in wave theory.  Energy of incident photon; 𝐸 = ℎ 𝜈 =
𝜆
(ii) According to wave theory, the intensity of a light wave is proportional to the
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−16
square of the amplitude of the electric field (𝐸 2𝑂 ). The amplitude of this electric 𝐸= =
field increases with increasing intensity and imparts an increasing acceleration 2200 𝑋 10−10 2200
and kinetic energy to an electron. This means that Kmax should not depend at all 𝐸 = 9. 036 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10−16 = 9. 036 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
on the frequency of the classical light wave which again contradicts the  and working function,
experimental results. 𝜙𝑂 = 4. 65 𝑒𝑉 = 4.65 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 = 7.44 𝑋10−19 𝐽
(iii) If an electron accumulates light energy just enough to overcome the work  Hence, 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
function, then it is ejected out of the atom with zero kinetic energy. Therefore, 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = 9. 036 𝑋 10−19 − 7.44 𝑋10−19 = 1.596 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
0 = 𝐼 𝐴 𝑡 − 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐼 𝐴 𝑡 = 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = 1. 6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
𝜙𝑂 𝜙𝑂 2.14 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19  Then stopping potential,
∴ 𝑡= = = 2 = 𝟔. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒔 ≈ 𝟕𝟗 𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔
𝐼𝐴 𝐼 𝜋 𝑟2 1.60 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (1 𝑋 10−10 ) 1. 6 𝑋 10−19 1. 6 𝑋 10−19
𝑉𝑂 = =
 Thus, wave theory predicts that there is a large time gap between the 𝑒 1. 6 𝑋 10−19
incidence of light and the ejection of photoelectrons but the experiments 𝑽𝑶 = 𝟏 𝑽
show that photo emission is an instantaneous process
4. The work function of potassium is 2.30 eV. UV light of wavelength 3000 Å and (ii) Threshold wavelength ;
intensity 2 Wm–2 is incident on the potassium surface. (i) Determine the ℎ𝑐 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
maximum kinetic energy of the photo electrons (ii) If 40% of incident photons 𝜆 𝑂 = =
𝜙𝑂 3.337 𝑋 10−19
produce photo electrons, how many electrons are emitted per second if the area 19.878 𝑋 10−26 19.878 𝑋 10−7
of the potassium surface is 2 cm2 ? 𝜆𝑂 = =
3.337 𝑋 10−19 3.337
-Solution :-𝜆 = 3000 𝐴° = 3000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜙𝑂 = 2.30 𝑒𝑉 ; 𝐴 = 2 𝑐𝑚2 = 2 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 𝝀𝑶 = 𝟓. 𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒎 = 𝟓𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟓𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝑨°
ℎ𝑐
(i) Energy of incident photon; 𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= 6. Calculate the momentum and the de Broglie wavelength in the following cases:
𝜆
6.626 𝑋 10 −34
𝑋 3 𝑋 10 8
6.626 𝑋 10 −36 (i) an electron with kinetic energy 2 eV.
𝐸= −10
= −10
= 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟗 𝑱 (ii) a bullet of 50 g fired from rifle with a speed of 200 m/s
3000 𝑋 10 1000 𝑋 10
6.626 𝑋 10 −19
6.626 66.26 (iii) a 4000 kg car moving along the highways at 50 m/s
𝐸= −19
𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝒆𝑽 Hence show that the wave nature of matter is important at the atomic level but
1.6 𝑋 10 1.6 16
By Einstien’s photo electric equation, the maximum kinetic energy is, is not really relevant at macroscopic level.
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 -Solution :-
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 4.14 − 2.30 = 𝟏. 𝟖𝟒 𝒆 𝑽 [∵ 1 𝑒𝑉 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽] (i) 𝐾 = 2 𝑒𝑉 = 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 ; 𝑚 = 9.1` 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔
(𝒐𝒓) 𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟐. 𝟗𝟒𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 −𝟏𝟗 Momentum of electron,
𝑃 𝑝 = √2 𝑚 𝐾
(ii) Number of photons reaches the surface per second; 𝑛𝑃 = 𝑋 𝐴
𝐸
2 −4
4 15
𝑝 = √2 𝑋 9.1` 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝑛𝑃 = 𝑋 2 𝑋 10 = 𝑋 10
6.626 𝑋 10−19 6.626 𝑝 = √58.24 𝑋 10−50 = 𝟕. 𝟔𝟑𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟓 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝑛𝑃 = 6.037 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1015 = 𝟔. 𝟎𝟑𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄 Hence de Broglie wavelength of electron,
Hence rate of emission of photons, ℎ 6.626 𝑋 10−34
𝑛 = 40% 𝑛𝑃 = 0.40 𝑋 𝑛𝑃 = 0.4 𝑋 6.037 𝑋 1014 𝜆= =
𝑝 7. 631 𝑋 10−25
𝒏 = 𝟐. 𝟒𝟏𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄
6.626 𝑋 10−9
5. Light of wavelength 390 nm is directed at a metal electrode. To find the energy 𝜆=
of electrons ejected, an opposing potential difference is established between it 7. 631
𝜆 = 8. 684 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 10−9 = 8. 684 𝑋 10−10 𝑚
and another electrode. The current of photoelectrons from one to the other is
𝝀 = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟖𝟒 𝑨
stopped completely when the potential difference is 1.10 V. Determine (i) the
(ii) 𝑚 = 50 𝑔 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑣 = 200 𝑚𝑠 −1 , then momentum of bullet,
work function of the metal and (ii) the maximum wavelength of light that can
eject electrons from this metal. 𝑝 = 𝑚 𝑣 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 200 = 10000 𝑋 10−3
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 390 𝑛𝑚 = 390 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑉𝑂 = 1.10 𝑉 𝒑 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
(i) By Einstien’s photo electric equation,, Hence de Broglie wavelength of bullet,
ℎ 6.626 𝑋 10−34
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 𝜆= = = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟓 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
 Hence working function, 𝑝 10
ℎ𝑐 (iii) 𝑚 = 4000 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑣 = 50 𝑚𝑠 −1 then momentum of car,
𝜙𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝑒𝑉𝑂 = − 𝑒𝑉𝑂 𝑝 = 𝑚 𝑣 = 4000 𝑋 50 = 200000
𝜆
6.626 𝑋 10 −34
𝑋 3 𝑋 10 8 𝒑 = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
−19
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [1.6 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.10] Hence de Broglie wavelength of car,
390 𝑋 10−9
−17 ℎ 6.626 𝑋 10−34
19.878 𝑋 10 −19 𝜆= = = 𝟑. 𝟑𝟏𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟗 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [1.76 𝑋 10 ] 𝑝 2 𝑋 105
390
 From these calculations, we notice that electron has significant value of de Broglie
𝜙𝑂 = [5.097 𝑋 10−19 ] − [1.76 𝑋 10−19 ] = [5.097 − 1.76] 𝑋 10−19
wavelength (≈10–9m which can be measured from diffraction studies) but moving
𝝓𝑶 = 𝟑. 𝟑𝟑𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟗 𝑱 bullet and car have negligibly small de Broglie wavelengths associated with them
3.337 𝑋 10−19 33.37 (≈10–33m and 10–39m respectively, which are not measurable by any experiment).
(𝒐𝒓) 𝝓𝑶 = 𝑒𝑉 =
1.6 𝑋 10−19 16  This implies that the wave nature of matter is important at the atomic level but it
𝝓𝑶 = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟖𝟓 𝒆𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
is not really relevant at the macroscopic level.
7. Find the de Broglie wavelength associated with an alpha particle which is 9. Calculate the cut-off wavelength and cut-off frequency of x-rays from an x –ray
accelerated through a potential difference of 400 V. Given that the mass of the tube of accelerating potential 20,000 V.
proton is 1.67 × 10–27 kg. -Solution :- 𝑉 = 20000 𝑉
-Solution :- 𝑉 = 400 𝑉 ; 𝑚𝑃 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔  The cut-off wavelength of the x-rays in the continuous spectrum is given by,
 An alpha particle contains 2 protons and 2 neutrons. It is represented by 42𝐻𝑒 12400
𝜆𝑂 = 𝐴°
 Hence ; 𝑞 = 2𝑒 = 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 = 3.2 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 𝑉
𝑀 = 4 𝑚𝑃 = 4 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27 = 6.68 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 12400 12400
𝜆𝑂 = 𝐴° = 𝐴° = 6200 𝑋 10−4 𝐴°
 The de Broglie wavelength associated with it is, 20000 2 𝑋 104
ℎ 𝝀𝑶 = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟐 𝑨°
𝜆=  The corresponding frequency is
√2 𝑀 𝑞 𝑉 𝑐
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝜈𝑂 =
𝜆= 𝜆𝑂
√2 𝑋 6.68 𝑋 10−27 𝑋 3.2 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 400 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 1018
6.626 𝑋 10−34 6.626 𝑋 10−11 𝜈𝑂 = =
𝜆= = 0.62 𝑋 10−10 0.62
√17100.8 𝑋 10−46 √17100.8 𝝂𝑶 = 𝟒. 𝟖𝟑𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟖 𝑯𝒛
𝜆 = 5. 068 𝑋 10−2 𝑋10−11
𝝀 = 𝟓. 𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑨°
8. A proton and an electron have same de Broglie wavelength. Which of them moves
faster and which possesses more kinetic energy?
Solution :-
ℎ
 de Broglie wavelength of proton ; 𝜆𝑃 =
√2 𝑚𝑃 𝐾𝑃
ℎ
 de Broglie wavelength of electron ; 𝜆𝑒 =
√2 𝑚𝑒 𝐾𝑒
 Since proton and electron have same de Broglie wavelength (𝜆𝑃 = 𝜆𝑒 ), we get,
ℎ ℎ
=
√2 𝑚𝑃 𝐾𝑃 √2 𝑚𝑒 𝐾𝑒
𝐾𝑃 𝑚𝑒
(𝑜𝑟) = − − − − − − − − (1)
𝐾𝑒 𝑚𝑃
Since 𝒎𝒆 < 𝒎𝑷 ; 𝑲𝑷 < 𝑲𝒆 (𝑖. 𝑒. ) the electron has more kinetic energy than the
proton.
1
 Also kinetic energy of proton ; 𝐾𝑃 = 𝑚𝑃 𝑣𝑃2
2
1
 And kinetic energy of eletron ; 𝐾𝑒 = 𝑚𝑒 𝑣𝑒2
2
1
𝐾𝑃 𝑚 𝑣2
2 𝑃 𝑃
 Then ratio of the kinetic energies ; = 1
𝐾𝑒 𝑚 𝑣2
2 𝑒 𝑒
𝑣𝑃2 𝐾𝑃 𝑚𝑒 𝑣𝑃 𝐾𝑃 𝑚𝑒
= (𝑜𝑟) = √
𝑣𝑒2 𝐾𝑒 𝑚𝑃 𝑣𝑒 𝐾𝑒 𝑚𝑃
𝑣𝑃 𝑚 𝑚𝑒 𝑚2 𝒎𝒆
 Put equation (1), = √ 𝑒 = √ 𝑒2 =
𝑣𝑒 𝑚 𝑃 𝑚𝑃 𝑚 𝑃 𝒎𝑷
Since 𝒎𝒆 < 𝒎𝑷 ; 𝒗𝑷 < 𝒗𝒆 (𝑖. 𝑒. ) the electron moves faster than the proton.
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- (ii) If 𝜆 = 0.1 𝑛𝑚 = 0.1 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 then, energy of X-ray photon,
1. How many photons per second emanate from a 50 mW laser of 640 nm? ℎ𝑐
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈=
-Solution :- 𝑃 = 50 𝑚𝑊 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑊 ; 𝜆 = 640 𝑛𝑚 = 640 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 𝜆
 Number of photons per second, 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−36
𝐸= =
𝑃 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃𝜆 0.1 𝑋 10−9 1 𝑋 10−10
−16
𝑛𝑃 = = = = 𝐸 = 19.878 𝑋 10 𝐽
𝐸 ℎ𝜈 (ℎ 𝑐⁄𝜆) ℎ𝑐 19.878 𝑋 10−17 19.878 𝑋 102 198.78 𝑋 102
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
50 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 640 𝑋 10−9 32000 𝑋 10−12 1.6 𝑋 10−19 1.6 16
𝑛𝑃 = −34 8
= 2
𝐸 = 12.42 𝑋 10 𝒆𝑽 = 𝟏𝟐𝟒𝟐 𝒆𝑽
6.626 𝑋 10 𝑋 3 𝑋 10 19.878 𝑋 10−26
32000 𝑋 10 14 (iii) If 𝜆 = 10 𝑚 then, energy of radio waves,
𝑛𝑃 = = 1.610 𝑋 103 𝑋 1014 = 𝟏. 𝟔𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟕 ℎ𝑐
19.878 𝐸 =ℎ𝜈=
2. Calculate the maximum kinetic energy and maximum velocity of the 𝜆
photoelectrons emitted when the stopping potential is 81V for the photoelectric 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−36
𝐸= =
emission experiment. 10
−27
10
-Solution :- 𝑉𝑂 = 81 𝑉 𝐸 = 19.878 𝑋 10 𝐽
19.878 𝑋 10−27 19.878 𝑋 10−8 198.78 𝑋 10−8
 The maximum kinetic energy of photo electrons is equal to stopping potential (𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
energy. (i.e.) 1.6 𝑋 10−19 1.6 16
−8 −𝟕
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 𝐸 = 12.42 𝑋 10 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟒𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒆𝑽
4. A 150 W lamp emits light of mean wavelength of 5500 Å . If the efficiency is 12%,
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 81 = 129.6 𝑋 10−19
find out the number of photons emitted by the lamp in one second.
𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟗𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟕 𝑱 12
 But kinetic energy is given by -Solution :- 𝑃 = 150 𝑊 ; 𝜆 = 5500 𝐴° = 5500 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜂 = 12% =
100
1 2  Number of photons emitted per second,
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑚𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥
2 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃𝜆
1 𝑛𝑃 = = = =
1.296 𝑋 10−17 = 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 2 𝐸 ℎ𝜈 ℎ 𝑐
( ⁄𝜆) ℎ𝑐
2
2
2 𝑋 1.296 𝑋 10−17 2. 592 𝑋 1014 150 𝑋 5500 𝑋 10−10
𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 = = 𝑛𝑃 =
9.1 𝑋 10−31 9.1 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
825000 𝑋 10−10 825 𝑋 1019
2. 592 𝑋 1014 259.2 𝑋 1012 𝑛𝑃 = = = 4.150 𝑋 101 𝑋 1019
∴ 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √ = √ 19.878 𝑋 10−26 19.878
9.1 9.1 𝒏𝑷 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄
𝒗𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟓. 𝟑𝟑𝟕 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏  The number of photons emitted by the lamp in one second,
3. Calculate the energies of the photons associated with the following radiation: (i) 12
violet light of 413 nm (ii) X-rays of 0.1 nm (iii) radio waves of 10 m. 𝑛 = 𝜂 𝑛𝑃 = 𝑋 4.150 𝑋 1020 = 12 𝑋 4.150 𝑋 1018 = 49.8 𝑋 1018
100
-Solution :- 𝒏 = 𝟒. 𝟗𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟗 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄
(i) If 𝜆 = 413 𝑛𝑚 = 413 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 , then energy of violet light photon, 5. How many photons of frequency 1014 Hz will make up 19.86 J of energy?
ℎ𝑐 𝑈
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= -Solution :- 𝜈 = 1014 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑃 = = 19.86 𝐽
𝑡
𝜆 Number of photons emitted per second,
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−36 𝑃 𝑃
𝐸= = 𝑛𝑃 = =
413 𝑋 10−9 413 𝑋 10−9 𝐸 ℎ𝜈
−17
19.878 𝑋 10 19.86
𝐸= 𝐽 𝑛𝑃 =
413 6.626 𝑋10−34 𝑋 1014
−17
19.878 𝑋 10 19.878 𝑋 102 19.86 𝑋1020
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
413 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 660.8 𝑛𝑃 =
−2 2 6.626
𝐸 = 3.008 𝑋 10 𝑋 10 = 𝟑. 𝟎𝟎𝟖 𝒆𝑽 ≈ 𝟑 𝒆𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝒏𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟗𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 ≈ 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎
6. What should be the velocity of the electron so that its momentum equals that of (iii) By Einstein’s photo electric equation,
4000 Å wavelength photon. 1 2
ℎ 𝜈 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥
-Solution :- 𝑝𝑒 = 𝑝𝑃 ; 𝜆𝑃 = 4000 𝐴° = 4000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 2
 de Broglie wavelength of photon, 1 2
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥
ℎ ℎ ℎ 2
𝜆𝑃 = = = (𝑜𝑟) 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝑒 𝑉𝑂
𝑝𝑃 𝑝𝑒 𝑚 𝑣𝑒
𝜙𝑂 = (33.13 𝑋 10−20 ) − (1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 0.8)
ℎ 6.626 𝑋10−34
∴ 𝑣𝑒 = = 𝜙𝑂 = (33.13 𝑋 10−20 ) − (1.28 𝑋 10−19 )
𝑚 𝜆𝑃 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 4000 𝑋 10−10 𝜙𝑂 = (3.313 𝑋 10−19 ) − (1.28 𝑋 10−19 )
6.626 𝑋107 6.626 𝑋104 𝜙𝑂 = (3.313 − 1.28 ) 𝑋 10−19
𝑣𝑒 = = = 1.821 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 104
9.1 𝑋 4000 36.4 𝝓𝑶 = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟑𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟗 𝑱
𝒗𝒆 = 𝟏𝟖𝟐𝟏 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 2.033 𝑋 10−19 20.33
7. When a light of frequency 9 X 1014 Hz is incident on a metal surface, (𝑜𝑟) 𝜙𝑂 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
1.6 𝑋 10−19 16
photoelectrons are emitted with a maximum speed of 8 X10 5 ms-1. Determine (𝑜𝑟) 𝝓𝑶 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟕𝟎 𝒆𝑽
the threshold frequency of the surface. (iv) Work function,
-Solution :- : 𝜈 = 9 𝑋 1014 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 8 𝑋 105 𝑚 𝑠 −1 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈𝑂
 By Einstein’s photo electric equation, 𝜙𝑂 2.033 𝑋 10−19 2.033 𝑋 1015
1 2 (𝑜𝑟) 𝜈𝑂 = = =
ℎ 𝜈 = ℎ 𝜈𝑂 + 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 ℎ 6.626 𝑋10−34 6.626
2 𝝂𝑶 = 3. 068 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1015 = 𝟑. 𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯
1 2
(𝑜𝑟) ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 (v) Net energy of the electron after it leaves the surface is nothing but its kinetic
2
1 energy which is given by,
ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [6.626 𝑋10−34 𝑋9 𝑋 1014 ] − [ 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 64 𝑋 1010 ] 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
2
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 2.071 − 1.270
ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [59.634 𝑋10−20 ] − [291.2 𝑋 10−21 ]
𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟎. 𝟖𝟎𝟏 𝒆𝑽
(𝑜𝑟) ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [59.634 𝑋10−20 ] − [29.12 𝑋 10−20 ]
9. A 3310 Å photon liberates an electron from a material with energy 3 X 10 -19 J
ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [59.634 − 29.12] 𝑋10−20 = 30.514 𝑋10−20 while another 5000 Å photon ejects an electron with energy 0.972 X 10-19 J from
30.514 𝑋10−20 30.514 𝑋10−20 30.514 𝑋1014 the same material. Determine the value of Planck’s constant and the threshold
∴ 𝜈𝑂 = = =
ℎ 6.626 𝑋10 −34 6.626 wavelength of the material.
𝝂𝑶 = 𝟒. 𝟔𝟎𝟑 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯𝒛 -Solution :- 𝜆1 = 3310 𝐴° = 3310 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝐾1 = 3 X 10−19 J
−10
8. When a 6000Å light falls on the cathode of a photo cell, photoemission takes 𝜆2 = 5000 𝐴° = 5000 𝑋 10 𝑚 ; 𝐾2 = 0.972 X 10−19 J
place. If a potential of 0.8 V is required to stop emission of electron, then  By Einstein’s photo electric equation,
determine the (i) frequency of the light (ii) energy of the incident photon (iii) ℎ 𝜈 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥
work function of the cathode material (iv) threshold frequency and (v) net ℎ𝑐
(𝑜𝑟) = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥
energy of the electron after it leaves the surface. 𝜆
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 6000 𝐴° = 6000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝑉𝑂 = 0.8 𝑉  For given material, work function is constant ,
(i) Frequency of light , ℎ𝑐
= 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾1 − − − − − − (1)
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 1 𝑋 1015 𝜆1
𝜈= = = = 0.5 𝑋 1015 ℎ𝑐
𝜆 6000 𝑋 10−10 2 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾2 − − − − − − (2)
𝝂 = 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯𝒛 𝜆2
(ii) Energy of incident photon, ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐
(1) − (2) ⟹ − = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾1 − 𝜙𝑂 − 𝐾2
𝐸 = ℎ 𝜈 = 6.626 𝑋10−34 𝑋 5 𝑋 1014 = 33.13 𝑋 10−20 𝐽 𝜆1 𝜆2
33.13 𝑋 10−20 331.3 𝑋 10−1 1 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 20. 71 𝑋 10−1 𝑒𝑉 ℎ 𝑐 [ − ] = 𝐾1 − 𝐾2
1.6 𝑋 10−19 16 𝜆1 𝜆2
𝑬 = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟕𝟏 𝒆𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝜆2 − 𝜆1 11. UV light of wavelength 1800Å is incident on a lithium surface whose threshold

ℎ𝑐 [ ] = 𝐾1 − 𝐾2
𝜆1 𝜆2 wavelength is 4965Å. Determine the maximum energy of the electron emitted.
5000 − 3310 1 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 1800 𝐴° = 1800 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜆𝑂 = 4965 𝐴° = 4965 𝑋 10−10 𝑚
ℎ (3𝑋108 ) [ ] = (3 − 0.972) 𝑋 10−19  By Einstein’s photo electric equation,
3310 𝑋 5000 10−10
1690 ℎ 𝜈 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥
ℎ (3𝑋108 ) [ ] = 2.028 𝑋10−19
16550 𝑋 10−7 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
2.028 𝑋10−19 𝑋 16550 𝑋 10−7 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ 𝜈 − ℎ 𝜈 𝑂
ℎ = ℎ 𝑐 ℎ𝑐 1 1
1690 𝑋 3𝑋108
2.028 𝑋16550 𝑋 10−34 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = − =ℎ𝑐 [ − ]
ℎ = 𝜆 𝜆𝑂 𝜆 𝜆𝑂
5070 𝜆𝑂 − 𝜆
𝒉 = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟒 𝑱 𝒔 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ 𝑐 [ ]
𝜆 𝜆𝑂
 From equation (2), Work function is, 4965 − 1800 1
ℎ𝑐 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 [ ] 𝑋 −10
𝜙𝑂 = − 𝐾2 4965 𝑋 1800 10
𝜆2 3165
6.621 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3𝑋108 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 19.878 𝑋 10−19 [ ] 𝐽
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [0.972 𝑋 10−19 ] 8937
−19
5000 𝑋 10−10 19.878 𝑋 10 3165
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = [ ] 𝑒𝑉
19.863 𝑋 10−19 1.6 𝑋 10 −19 8937
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [ 0.972 𝑋 10−19 ] 198.78 3165
5 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = [ ] [ ] 𝑒𝑉
𝜙𝑂 = [3.972 𝑋 10−19 ] − [0.972 𝑋 10−19 ] 16 8937
12.42 𝑋 3165
𝜙𝑂 = [3.972 − 0.972 ] 𝑋 10−19 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑒𝑉
𝜙𝑂 = 3 𝑋 10−19 8937
ℎ𝑐 𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟒. 𝟑𝟗𝟖 𝒆𝑽 ≈ 𝟒. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
(𝑜𝑟) = 3 𝑋 10−19 12. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of a proton whose kinetic energy is equal to
𝜆𝑂
81.9 × 10–15 J. (Given: mass of proton is 1836 times that of electron).
ℎ𝑐 6.621 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
∴ 𝜆𝑂 = = -Solution :- 𝐾𝑃 = 81.9 X 10−15 J ; 𝑚𝑃 = 1836 𝑚𝑒
3 𝑋 10−19 3 𝑋 10−19  de Broglie wavelength of proton,
𝝀𝑶 = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑨°
ℎ ℎ
10. At the given point of time,the earth receives energy from sun at 4 cal cm–2 min–1 𝜆𝑃 = =
Determine the number of photons received on the surface of the Earth per cm 2 √2 𝑚𝑃 𝐾𝑃 √2 (1836 𝑚𝑒 ) 𝐾𝑃
per minute. (Given : Mean wavelength of sun light = 5500 Å ) 6.621 𝑋 10−34
-Solution :- 𝑃 = 4 𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑚−2 𝑚𝑖𝑛 −1 = 4 𝑋 4.2 = 16.8 𝐽 𝑐𝑚−2 𝑚𝑖𝑛−1 𝜆𝑃 =
√2 𝑋 1836 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 81.9 X 10−15
𝜆 = 5500 𝐴° = 5500 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 6.621 𝑋 10−11
 The number of photons received on the surface of the Earth per cm2 per minute , 𝜆𝑃 =
√2 𝑋 1836 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 81.9
𝑃 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃𝜆 𝜆𝑃 = 4. 005 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10−11
𝑛𝑃 = = = =
𝐸 ℎ𝜈 ℎ 𝑐
( ⁄𝜆) ℎ𝑐 𝝀𝑷 ≈ 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟒 𝒎
16.8 𝑋 5500 𝑋 10−10 13. A deuteron and an alpha particle are accelerated with the same potential. Which
𝑛𝑃 = one of the two has (i) greater value of de Broglie wavelength associated with it
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 and (ii) less kinetic energy? Explain.
924 𝑋 1018
𝑛𝑃 = = 4.648 𝑋 101 𝑋1018 -Solution :- 𝑚𝑁 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶
19.878
𝒏𝑷 = 𝟒. 𝟔𝟒𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟗  For deuteron ; 𝑚𝑑 = 2 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝑑 = 𝑒
For alpha particle ; 𝑚𝛼 = 4 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝛼 = 2 𝑒
(i) de Broglie wavelength of deuteron,
ℎ ℎ ℎ ℎ
𝜆𝑑 =
√2 𝑚𝑑 𝑞𝑑 𝑉
=
√2 (2 𝑚𝑁 ) 𝑒 𝑉
=
√4 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉
=
2 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉
de Broglie wavelength of alpha particle, 15. The ratio between the de Broglie wavelength associated with proton,
ℎ ℎ ℎ ℎ accelerated through a potential of 512 V and that of alpha particle accelerated
𝜆𝛼 = = = =
√2 𝑚𝛼 𝑞𝛼 𝑉 √2 (4 𝑚𝑁 ) (2 𝑒) 𝑉 √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 4 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 through a potential of X volts is found to be one. Find the value of X.
ℎ -Solution :- 𝑉𝑃 = 512 𝑉 ; 𝜆𝑃 ∶ 𝜆𝛼 = 1 ; 𝑉𝛼 = 𝑋
[ ] 1
( )  For proton ; 𝑚𝑃 = 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝑃 = 𝑒
𝜆𝑑 2 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 4
= = 2 = =2 For alpha particle ; 𝑚𝛼 = 4 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝛼 = 2 𝑒
𝜆𝛼 ℎ 1 2
[ ] ( )  de Broglie wavelength of proton,
4
4 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 ℎ ℎ
𝝀𝒅 = 𝟐 𝝀𝜶 𝜆𝑃 = =
(ii) de Broglie wavelength of deuteron , √2 𝑚𝑃 𝑞𝑃 𝑉𝑃 √2 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉𝑃
ℎ ℎ ℎ de Broglie wavelength of alpha particle,
𝜆𝑑 = = = ℎ ℎ ℎ
√2 𝑚𝑑 𝐾𝑑 √2 (2 𝑚𝑁 ) 𝐾𝑑 √4 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝑑 𝜆𝛼 = = =
ℎ 2 √2 𝑚𝛼 𝑞𝛼 𝑉𝛼 √2 (4 𝑚𝑁 ) (2 𝑒) 𝑋 √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑋
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜆𝑑2 = ℎ
4 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝑑 [ ]
ℎ2 𝜆𝑃 √2 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉𝑃 ℎ √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑋 8𝑋
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑑 = = = 𝑋 = √
4 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝑑2 𝜆𝛼 ℎ √2 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉𝑃 ℎ 𝑉𝑃
[ ]
de Broglie wavelength of alpha particle, √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑋
ℎ ℎ ℎ 𝜆𝑃 2 8𝑋
𝜆𝛼 = = = (𝑜𝑟) ( ) =
√2 𝑚𝛼 𝐾𝛼 √2 (4 𝑚𝑁 ) 𝐾𝛼 √8 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝛼 𝜆𝛼 𝑉𝑃
ℎ 2
𝜆𝑃 2 𝑉𝑃
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜆𝛼2 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑋 = ( )
8 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝛼 𝜆𝛼 8
ℎ2 512
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝛼 = 𝑋 = (1)2
8 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝛼2 8
ℎ2 𝑿 = 𝟔𝟒 𝑽
[ ]
𝐾𝑑 4 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝑑2 ℎ2 8 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝛼2 𝜆𝛼2 𝜆𝛼 2
∴ = 2 = 2 𝑋 = 2 2 = 2 ( )
𝐾𝛼 ℎ 4 𝑚 𝑁 𝜆𝑑 ℎ2 𝜆𝑑 𝜆𝑑
[ 2 ]
8 𝑚 𝑁 𝜆𝛼
𝐾𝑑 𝜆𝛼 2 1 1
∴ = 2( ) = 2𝑋 =
𝐾𝛼 2 𝜆𝛼 4 2
𝑲𝜶
𝑲𝒅 =
𝟐
14. An electron is accelerated through a potential difference of 81V. What is the
de Broglie wavelength associated with it? To which part of electromagnetic
spectrum does this wavelength correspond?
-Solution :- 𝑉 = 81 𝑉
 de Broglie wavelength of electron,
12. 27
𝜆= 𝐴
√𝑉
12. 27 12. 27
𝜆= 𝐴 = 𝐴
√81 9
𝝀 = 𝟏. 𝟑𝟔 𝑨
 It lies in X -ray region of electromagnetic spectrum.. kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT - 9
ATOMIC PHYSICS
AND
NUCLEAR PHYSICS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 9 ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- • For hydrogen atom ; 𝑍 = 1 , and for first orbit ; 𝑛 = 1. Hence
1. The radius of the 5th orbit of hydrogen atom is 13.25 Å. Calculate the de Broglie 𝑣𝑛 𝑒2 (1.6 𝑋 10−19 )2
= 𝛼= =
wavelength of the electron orbiting in the 5th orbit. 𝑐 2𝜀𝑜 ℎ 𝑐 2 𝑋 8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
𝒐
𝑣𝑛 1.6 𝑋 1.6 1
-Solution :- 𝒓 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟐𝟒 𝑨 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 ; 𝒏 = 𝟓 = 𝛼= =
• From quantum mechanics ; 2 𝜋 𝑟 = 𝑛 𝜆 𝑐 2 𝑋 8.85 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 3 136.9
2𝜋𝑟 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 13.24 𝑋 10−10 𝑣𝑛 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜆 = = = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.648 𝑋 10−10 = 𝛼≈
𝑛 5 𝑜 𝑐 137
• It is dimensionless number.
𝜆 = 16.63 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 = 16.63 𝐴 (b) From equation (1) ,
2. Find the (i) angular momentum (ii) velocity of the electron revolving in the 5 th 𝑍
orbit of hydrogen atom. (h = 6.6 × 10–34 Js, m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg) 𝑣𝑛 = 𝛼 [ ] 𝑐
𝑛
-Solution :- 𝒏 = 𝟓 ; 𝒉 = 𝟔. 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟒 𝑱𝒔, 𝒎 = 𝟗. 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟏 𝒌𝒈 • For hydrogen atom ; 𝑍 = 1 Hence.
(i) According to Bohr’s atom model, the angular momentum 1
𝑛ℎ 5 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 10−34 5 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 7 𝑣𝑛 = 𝛼 𝑐 [ ]
𝑙 =𝑛ℏ= = = 𝑛
2𝜋 22 2 𝑋 22 • For first orbit (i.e.) ground state ; 𝒏 = 𝟏
2𝑋
7 1
𝑙 = 2.5 𝑋 0.3 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 7 𝑣1 = 𝛼 𝑐 = 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 = 2.19 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 108
137
𝒍 = 𝟓. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟒 𝒌𝒈 𝒎𝟐 𝒔−𝟏 𝒗𝟏 = 𝟐. 𝟏𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
(ii) By definition, angular momentum is given by; = 𝑚 𝑣 𝑟𝑛 .
• For second orbit (i.e.) first excited state ; 𝒏 = 𝟐
Hence velocity, 1 1 1 1
𝑙 𝑙 𝑣2 = 𝛼 𝑐 [ ] = 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 [ ] = 2.19 𝑋 106 𝑋 [ ]
𝑣= = 2 137 2 2
𝑚 𝑟𝑛 𝑚 𝑛2 𝑟1 𝒗𝟐 = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟗𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
5.25 𝑋 10−34 • For third orbit (i.e.) second excited state ; 𝒏 = 𝟑
𝑣 =
9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 25 𝑋 0.53 𝑋 10−10 1 1 1 1
5.25 𝑋 107 𝑣3 = 𝛼 𝑐 [ ] = 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 [ ] = 2.19 𝑋 106 𝑋 [ ]
𝑣 = 3 137 3 3
9.1 𝑋 25 𝑋 0.53 𝒗𝟑 = 𝟎. 𝟕𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝒗 = 4.355 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 107 = 𝟒. 𝟑𝟓𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 • Here ; 𝒗𝟏 > 𝒗𝟐 > 𝒗𝟑
3. (a) Show that the ratio of velocity of an electron in the first Bohr orbit to the 4. The Bohr atom model is derived with the assumption that the nucleus of the
speed of light c is a dimensionless number. (b) Compute the velocity of electrons atom is stationary and only electrons revolve around the nucleus. Suppose the
in ground state, first excited state and second excited state in Bohr atom model nucleus is also in motion, then calculate the energy of this new system.
for hydrogen atom. -Solution :-
-Solution :- • Let the mass of the electron be m and mass of the nucleus be M. Since there is no
ℎ 𝑍
(a) Velocity of electron in nth orbit ; 𝑣𝑛 = [𝑛] external force acting on the system, the
2𝜋𝑚𝑎𝑜
𝑜 centre of mass of hydrogen atom
𝜀𝑜 ℎ2
• Where, 𝑎𝑜 = = 0.53 𝐴 → Bohr radius remains at rest. Hence, both nucleus and
𝜋𝑚𝑒2
ℎ 𝑍 ℎ 𝜋𝑚𝑒 2 𝑍 𝑒2 𝑍 electron move about the centre of mass
• Hence ; 𝑣𝑛 = 𝜀 ℎ2
[𝑛 ] = [𝑛 ] = [𝑛 ] as shown in figure.
2𝜋𝑚( 𝑜 2 ) 2𝜋𝑚𝜀𝑜 ℎ 2 2𝜀𝑜 ℎ
𝜋𝑚𝑒 • Let V be the velocity of the nuclear
• If ‘c’ be the velocity of light, then motion and υ be the velocity of electron
𝑣𝑛 𝑒2 𝑍 𝑍 motion. Since the total linear
= [ ] = 𝛼 [ ] − − − − (1)
𝑐 2𝜀𝑜 ℎ 𝑐 𝑛 𝑛 momentum of the system is zero ;
𝑒2 ⃗𝑝𝑒 + ⃗𝑝𝑛 = ⃗0 (or) |⃗𝑝𝑒 | = |⃗⃗𝑝𝑛 | = 𝑝
• Where, = 𝛼 → fine structure constant
2𝜀𝑜 ℎ 𝑐
• Hence kinetic energy of the system, First excitation energy,

𝑝𝑒2 𝑝𝑛2 𝑝2 1 1 𝑝2 𝑚 + 𝑀 𝑬𝒆𝒙𝒄𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = 𝐸2 − 𝐸1 = −13.6 − (−54.4) = −13.6 + 54.4 = 𝟒𝟎. 𝟖 𝒆𝑽
𝐾𝐸 = + = [ + ]= [ ] Hence first excitation potential,
2𝑚 2𝑀 2 𝑚 𝑀 2 𝑚𝑀
𝑝 2
1 4
𝜇𝑚 𝑒 1 𝑬 40.8 𝑒𝑉
𝐾𝐸 = [ ]= 𝑽𝒆𝒙𝒄𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = = = 𝟒𝟎. 𝟖 𝑽
2 𝜇𝑚 8 𝜀𝑜2 ℎ2 𝑛2 𝑒 𝑒
𝑚𝑀 Similarly, first ionization energy
Where, 𝜇𝑚 = → reduced mass 𝑬𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = 𝐸∞ − 𝐸1 = 0 − (−54.4) = 𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
𝑚+ 𝑀
• Potential energy of the system, and first ionization potential,
𝜇𝑚 𝑒 4 1 𝑬𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 54.4 𝑒𝑉
𝑈 = − 𝑽𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = = = 𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 𝑽
4 𝜀𝑜2 ℎ2 𝑛2 𝑒 𝑒
• Hence total energy of the system, (c) Consider two photons to be A and B. Given that photon A with energy 42 eV and
𝜇𝑚 𝑒 4 1 photon B with energy 51 eV From Bohr assumption, difference in energy levels is
𝐸𝑛 = − equal to the energy photon absorbed, then atom will absorb energy, otherwise,
8 𝜀𝑜2 ℎ2 𝑛2
not.
• Since the nucleus is very heavy compared to the electron, the reduced mass is
closer to the mass of the electron 𝐸2 − 𝐸1 = −13.6 − (−54.4) = −13.6 + 54.4 = 𝟒𝟎. 𝟖 𝒆𝑽
5. Suppose the energy of an electron in hydrogen–like atom is given as 𝐸3 − 𝐸1 = −6.04 − (−54.4) = −6.04 + 54.4 = 𝟒𝟖. 𝟑𝟔 𝒆𝑽
𝟓𝟒.𝟒 𝐸4 − 𝐸1 = −3.4 − (−54.4) = −3.4 + 54.4 = 𝟓𝟏 𝒆𝑽
𝑬𝒏 = − 𝒆𝑽 where ∈ ℕ . Calculate the following: 𝐸3 − 𝐸2 = −6.04 − (−13.6) = −6.04 + 13.6 = 𝟕. 𝟓𝟔 𝒆𝑽
𝒏𝟐
(a) Sketch the energy levels for this atom and compute its atomic number. • For all possibilities, no difference in energy is an integer multiple of photon
(b) If the atom is in ground state, compute its first excitation potential and also energy. Hence, photon A is not absorbed by this atom. But for Photon B,
its ionization potential E4 – E1 = 51 eV, which means, Photon B can be absorbed by this atom.
(c) When a photon with energy 42 eV and another photon with energy 56 eV 𝑎𝑜 𝑛 2
(d) The radius of Bohr orbit is ; 𝑟𝑛 =
are made to collide with this atom, does this atom absorb these photons? 𝑧
(d) Determine the radius of its first Bohr orbit. Here, 𝑛 = 1 , 𝑧 = 2
(e) Calculate the kinetic and potential energies of electron in the ground state. 𝑎 0.529 𝑋 10−10
Hence, ; 𝑟1 = 𝑜 = = 0.264𝑋10−10 𝑚 = 0.2648 Å
-Solution :- 2 2
(e) Since, total energy is equal to negative of kinetic energy in Bohr atom model, we
(a) Given energy ;
𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 get
𝑬𝒏 = − 𝒆𝑽 54.4 54.4
𝒏𝟐 𝐾𝐸𝑛 = − 𝐸𝑛 = − (− 2 𝑒𝑉) = 𝑒𝑉
• If 𝒏 = 𝟏 then, 𝐸1 = − 54.4 𝑒𝑉 𝑛 𝑛2
For ground state (𝑛 = 1) ; 𝑲𝑬𝟏 = 𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
• If 𝒏 = 𝟐 then, 𝐸2 = − 13.6 𝑒𝑉
And potential energy,
• If 𝒏 = 𝟑 then, 𝐸3 = − 6.04 𝑒𝑉 54.4 108.8
• If 𝒏 = 𝟒 then, 𝐸4 = − 3.4 𝑒𝑉 𝑈𝑛 = −2 𝐾𝐸𝑛 = − 2 ( 2 𝑒𝑉) = − 𝑒𝑉
𝑛 𝑛2
• If 𝒏 = ∞ then, 𝐸∞ = 0 𝑒𝑉 For ground state (𝑛 = 1) ; 𝑼𝟏 = − 𝟏𝟎𝟖. 𝟖 𝒆𝑽
(b) From Bohr’s atom model, total energy of an atom ; 6. Calculate the average atomic mass of chlorine if no distinction is made between
𝟏𝟑. 𝟔 𝒁𝟐 its different isotopes?
𝑬𝒏 = − 𝒆𝑽 -Solution :
𝒏𝟐
Compare it with the given equation, • The element chlorine is a mixture of 75.77% of 35 37
17𝑐𝑙 and 24.23% of 17𝑐𝑙. So the
13.6 𝑍 2 = 54.4 average atomic mass will be
54.4 75.77 24.23
𝑍2 = = 4 = 𝑋 34.96885 𝑢 + 𝑋 36.96593 𝑢 = 𝟑𝟓. 𝟒𝟓 𝒖
13.6 100 100
𝑍 = ±2
Since, atomic number cannot be negative number, Z = 2
7. Calculate the radius of 𝟏𝟗𝟕

𝟕𝟗 𝑨𝒖 nucleus. 11. (a) Calculate the disintegration energy when stationary 𝟐𝟑𝟐 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 nucleus decays to
-Solution : 𝑍 = 79 ; 𝐴 = 197 thorium 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 with the emission of α particle. The atomic masses are of
1 𝟐𝟑𝟐 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟒
𝑅 = 𝑅𝑜 𝐴3 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 = 𝟐𝟑𝟐. 𝟎𝟑𝟕𝟏𝟓𝟔 𝒖, 𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 = 𝟐𝟐𝟖. 𝟎𝟐𝟖𝟕𝟒𝟏 𝒖, 𝟐 𝑯𝒆 = 𝟒. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟑 𝒖
1 (b) Calculate kinetic energies of 𝟐𝟐𝟖𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 and α-particle and their ratio.
𝑅 = 1.2 𝑋 10−15 𝑋 (197)3
-Solution :
𝑅 = 1.2 𝑋 10−15 𝑋 5.818 𝟐𝟐𝟖
𝑅 = 6.9816 𝑋 10−15 𝑚 = 6.9816 𝐹 (a) The equation is given by ; 𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟗𝟐 𝑼 → 𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 + 𝜶
8. Calculate the density of the nucleus with mass number A. • Hence the mass defect,
-Solution : ∆𝑚 = Total mass before decay - Total mass after decay
• The total mass of the nucleus having mass number A is equal to 𝐴 𝑚 where m is ∆𝑚 = 𝑚𝑈 − (𝑚 𝑇ℎ + 𝑚𝛼 ) = 232.037156 − (228.028741 + 4.002603)
mass of the proton and is equal to 1.6726 x 10-27 kg ∆𝑚 = 232.037156 − 232.031344 = 0.005812
• Hence the nuclear density, • Energy equivalent to 𝟏 𝒖 is 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽. Hence the binding energy is,
Nuclear mass 𝐴𝑚 𝐴𝑚 𝑸 = ∆𝒎 𝑿 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽 = 0.005812 𝑋 931 = 𝟓. 𝟒𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽
𝜌= = 4 = 1 3
Nuclear volume 𝜋 𝑅3
3 4
𝜋 (𝑅0 𝐴3 ) • This disintegration energy Q appears as the kinetic energy of α particle and
3
the daughter nucleus.
𝐴𝑚 𝑚 3 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27
𝜌= = = (b) In any decay, the total linear momentum must be conserved. (i.e.)
4 4 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (1.2 𝑋 10−15 )3 • Total linear momentum of the parent nucleus = total linear momentum of
𝜋 𝑅𝑜3 𝐴 𝜋 𝑅𝑜3
3 3
3 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10 18
5.01 𝑋 1018 the daughter nucleus and α particle
𝜌= = = 2.308 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1018 𝑚𝑈 (0) = 𝑚𝜶 ⃗⃗𝑣𝜶 + 𝑚𝑇ℎ ⃗⃗𝑣𝑇ℎ
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1.728 21.70368
0 = 𝑚𝜶 ⃗⃗⃗𝑣𝜶 + 𝑚 𝑇ℎ ⃗⃗⃗𝑣 𝑇ℎ
𝝆 = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟎𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟕 𝒌𝒈 𝒎−𝟑
𝑚𝜶 ⃗⃗⃗𝑣𝜶 = − 𝑚 𝑇ℎ ⃗⃗⃗𝑣 𝑇ℎ
• It implies that nucleons are extremely tightly packed or compressed state in the
• It implies that the alpha particle and daughter nucleus move in opposite
nucleus and compare this density with the density of water which is 103 kg m-3.
directions.
9. Compute the binding energy of 𝟒𝟐 𝑯𝒆 nucleus using the following data: Atomic
• In magnitude, 𝑚𝜶 𝑣𝜶 = 𝑚𝑻𝒉 𝑣𝑻𝒉 . Hence the velocity of 𝛼-particle,
mass of Helium atom, 𝑴𝑨(𝑯𝒆) = 𝟒. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟔𝟎 𝒖 and that of hydrogen atom, 𝑚 𝑇ℎ
𝒎𝑯 = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟎𝟕𝟖𝟓 𝒖 . 𝑣𝜶 = 𝑣 − − − − − (1)
𝑚𝜶 𝑻𝒉
-Solution : 𝑍 = 2 ; 𝐴 = 4 ; 𝑁 = 𝐴 − 𝑍 = 2 ; 𝑀𝐴(𝐻𝑒) = 4.00260 𝑢 ; 𝑚𝐻 = 1.00785 𝑢 • The ratio of the kinetic energy of α particle to that of the daughter nucleus
• Mass defect , ∆𝑚 = 𝑍 𝑚𝐻 + 𝑁 𝑚𝑛 − 𝑀𝐴(𝐻𝑒) 1
𝐾𝐸𝛼 𝑚𝛼 𝑣𝛼2 𝑚𝛼 𝑣𝛼2
∆𝑚 = (2 𝑋 1.00785) + (2 𝑋 1.008665) − 4.00260
= 2 =
∆𝑚 = 2.0157 + 2.01733 − 4.00260 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ 1 2 𝑚𝑇ℎ 𝑣𝑇ℎ 2
𝑚𝑇ℎ 𝑣𝑇ℎ
∆𝑚 = 4.03303 − 4.00260 2
∆𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟒𝟑 𝒖 • Put equation (1) , we get,
𝐾𝐸𝛼 𝑚𝛼 𝑚𝑇ℎ 2
• The energy equivalent to this mass defect is called binding energy.
= ( 𝑣𝑻𝒉 )
• Energy equivalent to 𝟏 𝒖 is 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽. Hence the binding energy is, 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ 𝑚𝑇ℎ 𝑣𝑇ℎ 2
𝑚𝜶
𝑩𝑬 = ∆𝒎 𝑿 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽 = 0.03043 𝑋 931 = 𝟐𝟖. 𝟑𝟑 𝑴𝒆𝑽 𝐾𝐸𝛼 𝑚 𝑇ℎ 228.02871
= = = 57
10. Compute the binding energy per nucleon of 𝟒𝟐 𝑯𝒆 nucleus. 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ 𝑚𝜶 4.002603
-Solution : 𝑍 = 2 ; 𝐴 = 4 𝐾𝐸𝛼 = 57 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ − − − − (2)
• Mass defect of helium nucleus, ∆𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟒𝟑 𝒖 • The kinetic energy of products
• Binding energy of helium nucleus, 𝐾𝐸𝛼 + 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ = 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
𝑩𝑬 = ∆𝒎 𝑿 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽 = 0.03043 𝑋 931 = 𝟐𝟖 𝑴𝒆𝑽 57 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ + 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ = 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
• Hence Binding energy per nucleon, 58 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ = 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
𝐵𝐸 28 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
̅̅̅̅ =
𝑩𝑬 = = 𝟕 𝑴𝒆𝑽 𝑲𝑬𝑻𝒉 = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑴𝒆𝑽
𝐴 4 58
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑲𝑬𝜶 = 57 𝑋 0.093 = 𝟓. 𝟑𝟎𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽
12. Calculate the number of nuclei of carbon-14 un decayed after 22,920 years if the 14. Keezhadi (கீழடி), a small hamlet, has become one of the very important
initial number of carbon-14 atoms is 10,000. The half-life of carbon-14 is 5730 archeological places of Tamilnadu. It is located in Sivagangai district. A lot of
years. artefacts (gold coins, pottery, beads, iron tools, jewellery and charcoal, etc.)
-Solution : 𝑁𝑜 = 10000 ; 𝑡 = 22920 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 ; 𝑇1/2 = 5730 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 have been unearthed in Keezhadi which have given substantial evidence that an
• Number of half life periods, ancient urban civilization had thrived on the banks of river Vaigai. To determine
𝑡 22920 the age of those materials, the charcoal of 200 g sent for carbon dating is given
𝑛= = =4 in the following figure (b). The activity of 𝟏𝟒𝟔 𝑪 is found to be 38 decays/s.
𝑇1/2 5730
• The number of nuclei remaining un decayed after 22,920 years (i.e.) 4 half life Calculate the age of charcoal.
periods, -Solution : 𝑅 = 38 𝑑𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑦𝑠/𝑠
1 𝑛 1 4 10000
𝑵 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = ( ) 𝑋 10000 = = 𝟔𝟐𝟓
2 2 16
𝟏𝟑
13. A radioactive sample has 26.μg of pure 𝟕 𝑵 which has a half-life of 10 minutes.
(a) How many nuclei are present initially? (b) What is the activity initially?
(c) What is the activity after 2 hours? (d) Calculate mean life of this sample.
-Solution : : 𝑇1/2 = 10 min = 600 𝑠 ; 𝑚 = 2.6 𝜇𝑔 = 2.6 𝑋 10−6 𝑔 ; 𝐴 = 13
(a) The atomic mass of nitrogen is 13. Therefore, 13 g of 𝟏𝟑𝟕 𝑵 contains Avogadro
number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms. • The atomic mass of carbon is 12. Therefore, 12 g of 𝟏𝟐
𝟔 𝑪 contains Avogadro
6.02 𝑋 1023 number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms.
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟏𝟑𝟕 𝑵 atoms present = 6.02 𝑋 1023
13
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟏𝟐𝟔 𝑪 atoms present =
• So the number of 𝟏𝟑𝟕 𝑵 atoms present in 2.6 μg is 12
6.02 𝑋 10 23
15.652 • So the number of 𝟏𝟐𝟔 𝑪 atoms present in 200 𝑔 is
𝑁𝑜 = 𝑋 2.6 𝑋 10−6 = 𝑋 10−17 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟎𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟕 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔 6.02 𝑋 1023 12.04
13 13 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑋 200 = 𝑋 1025 = 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟓 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔
(b) The initial activity R0 12 12
0.6931 0.6931 • When the tree(sample) was alive, 146 𝐶 : 126 𝐶 = 1.3 𝑋 10−12 ∶ 1
𝑅𝑜 = 𝜆 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑋 1.204 𝑋 1017
𝑇1 600 • So the total number of carbon-14 atoms is given by
2 𝑵𝒐 = 1 𝑋 1025 𝑋 1.3 𝑋 10−12 = 𝟏. 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟑 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔
𝑅𝑜 = 0.6931𝑋 0.2006 𝑋1017 𝑋1017 = 0.1390 𝑋 1017 𝑋 10−2 • Decay constant,
𝑹𝒐 = 𝟏. 𝟑𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏/ 𝒔 = 𝟏. 𝟑𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑩𝒒 0.6931 0.6931
Since , 1 𝐶𝑖 = 3.7 𝑋 1010 𝐵𝑞 we have, 𝜆 = =
𝑇1 5730 𝑋 365.24 𝑋 24 𝑋 60 𝑋 60
1.39 𝑋 1014 13900 139000 2
𝑅𝑜 = 10
𝐶𝑖 = = = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝑪𝒊 𝜆 = 𝟑. 𝟖𝟑𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟐 𝒔−𝟏
3.7 𝑋 10 3.7 37
(c) Activity after 2 hours • The initial activity ,
𝑛
𝑡 2𝑋3600
12 𝑅𝑜 = 𝜆 𝑁𝑜 = 3.832 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 1.3 𝑋 1013
1 1 𝑇1/2 1 600 1
𝑅 = ( ) 𝑅𝑜 = ( ) 𝑋 𝑅𝑜 = ( ) 𝑋 3.756 𝑋 103 = ( ) 𝑋 3.756 𝑋 103 𝑅𝑜 = 4.9816 𝑋 10 = 49.816 ≈ 50 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏/ 𝒔
2 2 2 2 𝑹𝒐 = 𝟓𝟎 𝑩𝒒
1
𝑹= 𝑋 3756 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟏𝟔𝟗 𝑪𝒊 • Activity of the sample ; 𝑅 = 𝑅𝑜 𝑒 − 𝜆 𝑡
4096 𝑅 𝑅𝑜
(d) Mean life, = 𝑒− 𝜆 𝑡 (𝑜𝑟) = 𝑒𝜆𝑡
𝑇1 𝑅𝑜 𝑅
𝜏= 2 • Taking log on both sides, we get
0.6931 𝑅𝑜 𝑅𝑜
600 ln ( ) = 𝜆 𝑡 (𝑜𝑟) 2.303 log10 ( ) = 𝜆 𝑡
𝜏= = 865.8 𝑠 𝑅 𝑅
0.6931 1 𝑅𝑜
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑡= 2.303 log10 ( )
𝜆 𝑅
𝑡=
1 50
2.303 log10 ( ) EXERCISE PROBLEMS-
3.832 𝑋 10 −12 38 1. Consider two hydrogen atoms HA and HB in ground state. Assume that hydrogen
1
𝑡= 2.303 log10 (1.316) atom HA is at rest and hydrogen atom HB is moving with a speed and make head-
3.832 𝑋 10−12 on collision with the stationary hydrogen atom H A. After the collision, both of
1
𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.1193 them move together. What is minimum value of the kinetic energy of the moving
3.832 𝑋 10−12 hydrogen atom HB, such that any one of the hydrogen atoms reaches first
2.303 𝑋 0.1193 𝑋 1012
𝑡= excitation state.
3.832 -Solution :
𝑡 = 7.170 𝑋 10−2 𝑋1012 = 7.170 𝑋 1010 𝑠 • The collision between atom is elastic and during elastic collision, there is no loss
• In years, in kinetic energy. (i.e.)
7.170 𝑋 1010 Total K. E before collision = Total K.E after collision
𝑡= 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 1 1 1 1
365.24 𝑋 24 𝑋 60 𝑋 60
7.170 𝑋 1010 𝑚𝐴 𝑢𝐴2 + 𝑚𝐵 𝑢𝐵2 = 𝑚𝐴 𝑣𝐴2 + 𝑚𝐵 𝑣𝐵2
𝑡= 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 2 2 2 2
3.156 𝑋 107 • Here, 𝑚𝐴 = 𝑚𝐵 = 𝑚 ; 𝑢𝐴 = 0 ; 𝑢𝐵 = 𝑢𝑖 ; 𝑣𝐴 = 𝑣𝐵 = 𝑣𝑓 . Then
3
7.170 𝑋 10 1 1 1
𝑡= 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 0 + 𝑚𝑢𝑖2 = 𝑚𝑣𝑓2 + 𝑚𝑣𝑓2
3.156 2 2 2
3
𝑡 = 2.272 𝑋 10 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 1 1
2 2
𝒕 = 𝟐𝟐𝟕𝟐 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔 ≈ 𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔 𝑚𝑢𝑖 = 2 ( 𝑚𝑣𝑓 )
𝟐𝟑𝟓
2 2
15. Calculate the amount of energy released when 1 kg of 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 undergoes fission 𝐸𝑖 = 2 𝐸𝑓 − − − − − − − − − (1)
reaction. • We know that, for hydrogen atom
-Solution : Energy of electron in Ground state (n=1) = −13.6 𝑒𝑉
• The atomic mass of 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 is 235. Therefore, 235 g of
𝟐𝟑𝟓
𝟗𝟐 𝑼 contains Avogadro Energy of electron in First excited state (n=2) = −3.4 𝑒𝑉
number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms. Hence first excitation energy ; 𝐸𝑓 = −3.4 − (−13.6) = 10.2 𝑒𝑉
6.02 𝑋 1023
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟐𝟑𝟓
𝟗𝟐 𝑼 atoms present =
• The minimum value of the kinetic energy of the moving hydrogen atom HB
235
𝑬𝒊 = 2 𝐸𝑓 = 2 𝑋 10.2 = 𝟐𝟎. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
• So the number of 𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟗𝟐 𝑼 atoms present in 235 𝑔 is
2. In the Bohr atom model, the frequency of transitions is given by the following
6.02 𝑋 1023 6.02 𝑋 1026 𝟏 𝟏
𝑁= 𝑋 1000 = 𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑚𝑠 expression 𝝂 = 𝑹 𝒄 [ 𝟐 − 𝟐] 𝐰𝐡𝐞𝐫𝐞 𝒏 < 𝒎.
235 235 𝒏 𝒎
• 𝟐𝟑𝟓
Each 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 nucleus releases 200 MeV of energy during the fission. The total Consider the following transitions: Show that the
energy released by 1kg of 𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟗𝟐 𝑼 is
frequency of these transitions obey sum rule
6.02 𝑋 1026 1204 𝑋 1026 (which is known as Ritz combination principle)
𝑄= 𝑋 200 𝑀𝑒𝑉 = 𝑀𝑒𝑉 -Solution :
235 235
𝑸 = 𝟓. 𝟏𝟐𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑴𝒆𝑽𝟐𝟔 • For transition 3 → 2 ; 𝒎 = 𝟑 ; 𝒏 = 𝟐 . Hence
• In terms of joule, [1 𝑒𝑉 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 ] the frequency.
𝑄 = 5.123 𝑋 1026 𝑋 106 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 1 1 1 1 5𝑅𝑐
𝜈3 →2 = 𝑅 𝑐 [ 2 − 2 ] = 𝑅 𝑐 [ − ] =
𝑸 = 𝟖. 𝟏𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟑 𝑱 2 3 4 9 36
• In terms of joules [1 𝑘𝑊ℎ = 3.6 𝑋 106 𝐽 ] • For transition 2 → 1 ; 𝒎 = 𝟐 ; 𝒏 = 𝟏 . Hence the
8. 197 𝑋 1013 81.97 frequency
𝑄 = = 𝑋 107 1 1 1 3𝑅𝑐
3.6 𝑋 106 36 𝜈2 →1 = 𝑅 𝑐 [ 2 − 2 ] = 𝑅 𝑐 [1 − ] =
𝑸 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟕𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟕 𝒌𝑾𝒉 1 2 4 4
• For transition 3 → 1 ; 𝒎 = 𝟑 ; 𝒏 = 𝟏 . Hence the frequency,
1 1 1 8𝑅𝑐
𝜈3 →1 = 𝑅 𝑐 [ 2 − 2 ] = 𝑅 𝑐 [1 − ] =
1 3 9 9
• From additive law, 4. Calculate the radius of the earth if density of the earth is equal to the density of
5𝑅𝑐 3𝑅𝑐 the nucleus. [mass of earth 𝟓. 𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟒 𝒌𝒈].
𝜈3 →2 + 𝜈2 →1 = + -Solution :- 𝑀𝐸 = 5.97 𝑋 1024 𝑘𝑔
36 4
5 𝑅 𝑐 + 27 𝑅 𝑐 32 𝑅 𝑐 • Given, 𝜌𝐸 = 𝜌𝑁 = 2.3 𝑋 1017 𝑘𝑔 𝑚−3
𝜈3 →2 + 𝜈2 →1 = =
36 36 • Density of earth,
8 𝑅𝑐 𝑀𝐸 𝑀𝐸
𝜈3 →2 + 𝜈2 →1 = 𝜌𝐸 = =
9 𝑉𝐸 4
𝝂𝟑 →𝟐 + 𝝂𝟐 →𝟏 = 𝝂𝟑 →𝟏 𝜋 𝑅𝐸3
3
3. (a) A hydrogen atom is excited by radiation of wavelength 97.5 nm. Find the 𝑀𝐸 𝑀𝐸
∴ 𝑅𝐸3 = =
principal quantum number of the excited state. (b) Show that the total number 4 4
𝜋 𝜌𝐸 𝜋 𝜌𝑁
of lines in emission spectrum is
𝒏(𝒏−𝟏)
Compute the total number of possible 3 3
𝟐 5.97 𝑋 1024 3 𝑋 5.97 𝑋 1024
lines in emission spectrum as given in (a). 𝑅𝐸3 = =
4 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.3 𝑋 1017
-Solution : 𝜆 = 97.5 𝑛𝑚 = 97.5 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.3 𝑋 1017
3
(a) Energy required to excite the atom to nth level, 3 𝑋 5.97 𝑋 1024 17.91 𝑋107 179.1 𝑋106
ℎ𝑐 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 𝑅𝐸3 = 17
= =
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= = 𝐽 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.3 𝑋 10 28.888 28.888
1 1
𝜆 97.5 𝑋 10−9 179.1 𝑋106 3 179.1 3
−34 8
6.626 𝑋 10 𝑋 3 𝑋 10 ∴ 𝑅𝐸 = [ ] = [ ] 𝑋 102
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 21.888 21.888
97.5 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
−9
19.878 𝑋 10 2
1987.8 𝑅𝐸 = 1. 837𝑋 102 = 183.7 𝑚
𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 𝑹𝑬 = 𝟏𝟖𝟒 𝒎
156 156
𝐸 = 12.74 𝑒𝑉 5. Calculate the mass defect and the binding energy per nucleon of the 𝟏𝟎𝟖
𝟒𝟕
𝑨𝒈
• For hydrogen atom, the ground state energy ; 𝐸1 = − 13.6 𝑒𝑉 nucleus. [atomic mass of Ag =107.905949 u]
• If 𝐸𝑛 be the energy of nth state, then the excitation energy -Solution :- 𝑍 = 47 ; 𝐴 = 108 ; 𝑁 = 𝐴 − 𝑍 = 61 ; 𝑀𝐻𝑔 = 107.905949
𝐸 = 𝐸𝑛 − 𝐸1 • In terms of this atomic mass unit,
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸𝑛 = 𝐸 + 𝐸1 = 12.74 + (−13.6) = 12.74 − 13.6 the mass of the neutron = 1.008665 u,
𝐸𝑛 = − 0.86 𝑒𝑉 the mass of the proton = 1.007276 u,
• From Bohr’s postulate, the energy of hydrogen atom in nth state, the mass of the hydrogen atom = 1.007825 u
13.6 • Mass defect ,
𝐸𝑛 = − 2 𝑒𝑉
𝑛 ∆𝑚 = 𝑍 𝑚𝐻 + 𝑁𝑚𝑛 − 𝑀𝐻𝑔
2
13.6 13.6 ∆𝑚 = (47 𝑋 1.007825) + (61𝑋1.008665) − 107.905949
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑛 = − 𝑒𝑉 = − 𝑒𝑉
𝐸𝑛 (− 0.86 𝑒𝑉) ∆𝑚 = 47.367775 + 61.528565 − 107.905949
13.6 ∆𝑚 = 108.89634 − 107.905949
𝑛2 = = 15.81 ≈ 16
0.86 ∆𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟗𝟎𝟑𝟗𝟏 𝒖
∴ 𝒏=𝟒 • Binding energy,
(b) Total number of possible transitions, 𝐵𝐸 = ∆𝑚 𝑋 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉 = 0.990391 𝑋 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉
𝑛(𝑛 − 1) 4(4 − 1) 4 𝑋 3 12
= = = =6 𝑩𝑬 = 𝟗𝟐𝟐. 𝟎𝟓𝟒𝟎𝟐𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽
2 2 2 2 • Binding energy per nucleon,
Thus the possible transitions, 𝐵𝐸 922.054021
1) 4 → 3 ̅̅̅̅
𝐵𝐸 = =
2) 4 → 2 𝐴 108
̅̅̅̅ = 𝟖. 𝟓𝟑𝟗 𝑴𝒆𝑽
𝑩𝑬
3) 4 → 1
4) 3 → 2
5) 3 → 1
6) 2 → 1 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
6. Half lives of two radioactive elements A and B are 20 minutes and 40 minutes (c) Mean life period,
respectively. Initially, the samples have equal number of nuclei. Calculate the 𝑇1/2 5.01
𝜏= =
ratio of decayed numbers of A and B nuclei after 80 minutes. 0.6931 0.6931
-Solution :- 𝐴
𝑇1/2 𝐵
= 20 min ; 𝑇1/2 = 40 min ; 𝑡 = 80 𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝝉 = 𝟕. 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔
• Let the initial number of nuclei in sample A and B be = 𝑁𝑜 (d) If 𝑁𝑜 be the number of atoms present in the sample initially,
𝑡 80 𝑅𝑜 = 𝜆 𝑁𝑜
• Number of half lives for sample A ; 𝑛𝐴 = 𝐴 = =4
𝑇1/2 20 𝑅𝑜 1 𝜇 𝐶𝑖
𝑡 80 ∴ 𝑁𝑜 = =
Number of half lives for sample B ; 𝑛𝐵 = = =2 𝜆 1.601 𝑋 10−6
𝑇𝐵
1/2 40 1𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3.7 𝑋1010
• Then the number of nuclei remains undecayed in the samples after 80 minutes, 𝑁𝑜 =
1.601 𝑋 10−6
1 𝑛𝐴 1 4 𝑁𝑜 3.7 𝑋1010
𝑁𝐴 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑁𝑜 =
2 2 16 1.601
1 𝑛𝐵 1 2 𝑁𝑜 𝑵𝒐 = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟏𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔
𝑁𝐵 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 =
2 2 4 8. Calculate the time required for 60% of a sample of radon undergo decay.
• Thus the number of nuclei decayed in the samples after 80 minutes, Given T1/2 of radon =3.8 days
𝑁𝑜 16 𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝑜 15 𝑁𝑜 -Solution : 𝑁𝑜 = 100 % ; 𝑁 = 100 − 60 = 40 % ; 𝑇1/2 = 3.8 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐴 = 𝑁𝑜 − = =
16 16 16 • From law of disintegration, the amount of sample left un decayed,
𝑁𝑜 4 𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝑜 3 𝑁𝑜
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐵 = 𝑁𝑜 − = = 𝑁 = 𝑁𝑜 𝑒 − 𝜆 𝑡
4 4 4 40 = 100 𝑒 − 𝜆 𝑡
• Hence the ratio of the number of nuclei decayed in the samples A and B , 4
15 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑒− 𝜆 𝑡
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐴 ( ) 15 𝑁𝑜 4 5 10
16 10
= = 𝑋 =
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐵 3𝑁 16 3 𝑁𝑜 4 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒𝜆𝑡 = = 2.5
( 𝑜) 4
4
(𝑵𝒐 − 𝑵𝑨 ) ∶ (𝑵𝒐 − 𝑵𝑩 ) = 𝟓 ∶ 𝟒 • Taking log on both sides,
7. On your birthday, you measure the activity of the sample 210Bi which has a half- 𝜆 𝑡 = log 𝑒 2.5
life of 5.01 days. The initial activity that you measure is 1μCi . (a) What is the (𝑜𝑟) 𝜆 𝑡 = 2.303 𝑋 log10 2.5
1
approximate activity of the sample on your next birthday? Calculate (b) the 𝑡 = 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
decay constant (c) the mean life (d) initial number of atoms. 𝜆
1
-Solution :- 𝑇1/2 = 5.01 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 1 𝜇 𝐶𝑖 ; 𝑡 = 1 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟 = 365 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
0.6931
• Number of half-life periods, (
𝑇1/2
)
𝑡 365
𝑛= = ≈ 73 𝑇1
𝑇1/2 5.01 𝑡= 2
𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
(a) The activity of given sample after 73 half-life periods (i.e.) after 1 years 0.6931
3.8
1 𝑛 1 73 1 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
𝑅 = ( ) 𝑅𝑜 = ( ) 1 𝜇 𝐶𝑖 = 73 𝜇 𝐶𝑖 0.6931
2 2 2 𝒕 = 𝟓. 𝟎𝟐𝟓 𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔
𝑅 = 1.064 𝑋 10−22
9. Assuming that energy released by the fission of a single 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 nucleus is 200MeV,
𝑹 ≈ 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟐 𝝁 𝑪𝒊
calculate the number of fissions per second required to produce 1 watt power.
(b) Decay constant,
-Solution :-
0.6931 0.6931 0.6931
𝜆 = = 𝑑𝑎𝑦 −1 = 𝑠 −1 • Energy released per fission = 200 MeV = 200 X 106 X 1.6 X 10−19 J
𝑇1/2 5.01 5.01 𝑋 24 𝑋 60 𝑋 60
• Energy produced per second (i.e.) power = 1W = 1 J/s
0.6931 −1
𝜆 = 𝑠 • Let Number of fissions per second f = N (say)
432864
𝝀 = 𝟏. 𝟔𝟎𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝒔−𝟏 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
• Hence. • Taking log on both sides,

Energy released per fission X N = Energy produced per second (power) 100
log 𝑒 ( ) = 𝜆𝑡
200 X 106 X 1.6 X 10−19 X N = 1 17.5
1 1 100
N = = 𝑋 1013 2.303 𝑋 log10 ( )= 𝜆𝑡
6
200 X 10 X 1.6 X 10 −19 320 17.5
N = 3.125 𝑋10−3 𝑋1013 1 100
∴ 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 log10 ( )
𝑵 = 𝟑. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔 𝜆 17.5
10. Show that the mass of radium ( 𝟐𝟐𝟔 1
𝟖𝟖𝑹𝒂 ) with an activity of 1 curie is almost a 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 ( log10 100 − log10 17.5)
gram. Given T1/2 =1600 years. 0.6931
-Solution :- 𝑅 = 1 𝐶𝑖 = 3.7 𝑋 1010 disintegration/s ( )
𝑇1
• From law of disintegration, 2
𝑇1/2
dN 𝑡 = 𝑋 2.303 𝑋(2.000 − 1.2430)
= λN (or) 𝑅 = λ N 0.6931
dt 5730
R R T1/2 𝑡 = 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.757
N = = = 𝑋𝑅 0.6931
λ 0.6931 0.6931
(
T1/2
) 𝒕 = 𝟏. 𝟒𝟒𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 years
1600 X 365 X 24 X 60 X 60
N= X 3.7 X 1010
0.6931
N = 2.694 X 1011 X 1010
N = 2.694 X 1021 atoms
• The atomic mass of 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑚 is 226. Therefore, 226 g of 𝟐𝟐𝟔 𝟖𝟖𝑹𝒂 contains Avogadro
number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms.
(i.e.) mass of 6.02 𝑋 1023 atoms = 226 g
226
Hence, mass of one atom = 𝑔
6.023 X 1023
6.02 𝑋 1023
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟐𝟐𝟔
𝟖𝟖𝑹𝒂 atoms present = 235
• Hence, total mass of 2.694 X 1021 atoms with an activity of 1 𝐶𝑖 is,
226
𝑚 = 𝑋 2.694 𝑋 1021
6.023 X 1023
226 𝑋 2.694 𝑋 10−2
𝑚 =
6.023
𝑚 = 1.012 𝑋 102 𝑋 10−2 = 1.012 𝑔
𝒎 ≈𝟏𝒈
11. Charcoal pieces of tree is found from an archeological site. The carbon-14
content of this charcoal is only 17.5% that of equivalent sample of carbon from
a living tree. What is the age of tree?
-Solution :- 𝑇1 = 5730 years, 𝑁𝑜 = 100 % ; 𝑁 = 17.5 %
2
• From law of disintegration,
𝑁 = 𝑁𝑂 𝑒 −𝜆𝑡
17.5 = 100 𝑒 −𝜆𝑡
17.5
= 𝑒− 𝜆 𝑡
100
100 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
(𝑜𝑟) = 𝑒 𝜆𝑡
17.5
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT - 10
ELECTRONICS
AND
COMMUNICATIONS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
12 PHYSICS UNIT - 10 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 4. Determine the wavelength of light emitted from LED which is made up of GaAsP
1. An ideal diode and a 5 Ω resistor are semiconductor whose forbidden energy gap is 1.875 eV. Mention the colour of
connected in series with a 15 V power the light emitted (Take h = 6.6 × 10–34 Js).
supply as shown in figure below. -Solution :- 𝐸𝑔 = 1.875 𝑒𝑉 = 1.875 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑱 ; ℎ = 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝐽 𝑠
Calculate the current that flows through • By definition,
the diode. ℎ𝑐
𝐸𝑔 = ℎ 𝜈 =
-Solution :- 𝜆
• The diode is forward biased and it is an ideal one. Hence, it acts like a closed switch ℎ𝑐 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.8 𝑋 10−7
∴ 𝜆 = = =
with no barrier voltage. Therefore, current that flows through the diode can be 𝐸𝑔 1.875 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 3
calculated using Ohm’s law. 𝜆 = 6.6 𝑋 10−7 𝑚 = 660 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 = 𝟔𝟔𝟎 𝒏𝒎
𝑉=𝐼𝑅 • The wavelength 660 nm corresponds to red colour light.
𝑉 15 5. In a transistor connected in the common base configuration
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰= = =𝟑𝑨
𝑅 5 𝜶 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟓 , 𝑰𝑬 = 𝟏 𝒎𝑨. Calculate the values of IC and IB.
2. A silicon diode is connected with 1kΩ -Solution :- 𝛼 = 0.95 , 𝐼𝐸 = 1 𝑚𝐴
resistor as shown. Find the value of 𝐼𝐶
current flowing through AB. • Current gain in common base mode ; 𝛼= 𝐼𝐸
-Solution :- 𝑅 = 1 𝑘 Ω = 1000 Ω • Hence, 𝑰𝑪 = 𝛼 𝐼𝐸 = 0.95 𝑋 1 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟓 𝒎𝑨
• The barrier voltage for silicon diode ; 𝑉𝑏 (𝑆𝑖) = 0.7 𝑉 • Also, 𝐼𝐸 = 𝐼𝐵 + 𝐼𝐶 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑩 = 𝐼𝐸 − 𝐼𝐶 = 1 − 0.95 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟓 𝒎𝑨
• The P.D. between A and B is given by ; 6. In the circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage Vi is 20 V, VBE = 0 V and
𝑉 = [𝑉𝐴 − 𝑉𝐵 ] − 𝑉𝑏 (𝑆𝑖) = [3.3 − (−7.4)] − 0.7 = 10.7 − 0.7 = 𝟏𝟎 𝑽 VCE = 0 V. What are the values of IB , IC , β?
• The value of current flowing through AB can be obtained using Ohm’s law. -Solution :- 𝑅𝐵 = 500 𝑘 Ω ; 𝑅𝐶 = 4 𝑘 Ω
𝑉=𝐼𝑅 • Voltage across 𝑅𝐵 ; 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝑖 − 𝑉𝐵𝐸
𝑉 10 1 Since, 𝑉𝐵𝐸 = 0 𝑉 we have, 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝑖 Hence
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰= = = = 10−2 𝐴 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎 𝑨
𝑅 1000 100 𝑉𝐵 𝑉𝑖 20
3. Find the current through the Zener diode when the load resistance is 2 kΩ. Use 𝑰𝑩 = = = = 0.04 𝑋 10−3
diode approximation. 𝑅𝐵 𝑅𝐵 500 𝑋 103
-Solution :- 𝑉 = 15 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝑆 = 1 𝑘 Ω = 1000 Ω 𝑰𝑩 = 40 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 𝟒𝟎 𝝁 𝑨
𝑉𝑍 = 9 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐿 = 2 𝑘 Ω = 2000 Ω • Similarly, voltage across 𝑅𝐶 ; 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸
• From figure, 𝑉𝑅 = 𝑉 − 𝑉𝑍 = 15 − 9 = 6 𝑉 Since, 𝑉𝐶𝐸 = 0 𝑉 we have, 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 Hence
• From Ohm’s law, current through ‘𝑅𝑆 ’ 𝑉𝐶 𝑉𝐶𝐶 20
𝑉𝑅 6 𝑰𝑪 = = = = 5 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟓 𝒎 𝑨
𝑅𝐶 𝑅𝐶 4 𝑋 103
𝑰= = = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟔 𝒎 𝑨
𝑅𝑆 1000 • And current gain,
• And current through load resistance 𝑅𝐿 𝑰𝑪 5 𝑋 10−3
𝑉𝐿 𝑉𝑍 9 4.5 𝜷= = = 0.125 𝑋 103 = 𝟏𝟐𝟓
𝑰𝑳 = = = = = 4.5 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟒. 𝟓 𝒎 𝑨 𝑰𝑩 40 𝑋 10−6
𝑅𝐿 𝑅𝐿 2000 1000 7. The current gain of a common emitter transistor
• If 𝑰𝒁 be the current through Zener diode, then using Kirchoff’s current law at circuit shown in figure is 120. Draw the DC load line
junction A gives, and mark the Q point on it. (VBE to be ignored).
𝐼 = 𝐼𝐿 + 𝐼𝑍 -Solution :- 𝛽 = 120 ; 𝑉𝐶𝐶 = 25 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐵 = 1 𝑀Ω ;
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐼𝑍 = 𝐼 − 𝐼𝐿 = 6 − 4.5 𝑅𝐶 = 5 𝑘Ω
𝑰𝒁 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝑨 • Voltage across 𝑅𝐵 ; 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐵𝐸
Since, 𝑉𝐵𝐸 = 0 𝑉 we have, 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 Hence
𝑉𝐵 𝑉𝐶𝐶 25 −6
𝑰𝑩 = = = 6 = 25 𝑋 10 𝐴 = 𝟐𝟓 𝝁 𝑨
𝑅𝐵 𝑅𝐵 1 𝑋 10
• By definition, current gain ; 𝛽 =

𝐼𝐶 10. In the combination of the following gates,
𝐼𝐵 write the Boolean equation for output Y in
• Hence collector current, terms of inputs A and B.
𝐼𝐶 = 𝛽 𝐼𝐵 = 120 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−6 = 3000 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 -Solution :-
𝑰𝑪 = 3 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟑 𝒎 𝑨 • The output at the 1st AND gate = 𝑨 . 𝑩 ̅
• From figure, 𝑉𝐶𝐸 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 • The output at the 2nd AND gate = 𝑨 . 𝑩
̅
𝑉𝐶𝐸 = 25 − (3 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 5𝑋 103 ) • The output at the OR gate ; 𝒀 = 𝑨 . 𝑩 ̅ .𝑩
̅+ 𝑨
𝑽𝑪𝑬 = 25 − 15 = 𝟏𝟎 𝑽 11. Prove the Boolean identity AC + ABC = AC and give its circuit description.
8. Calculate the range of the variable capacitor that is to be used in a tuned- -Solution :-
collector oscillator which has a fixed inductance of 150 μH. The frequency band 𝐴 𝐶 + 𝐴 𝐵 𝐶 = 𝐴 𝐶. (1 + 𝐵) [OR law-2]
is from 500 kHz to 1500 kHz. = 𝐴 𝐶 .1 [AND law – 2]
-Solution :- 𝐿 = 150 𝜇 𝐻 𝑨𝑪+𝑨𝑩𝑪= 𝑨𝑪
1 1
• Resonance frequency ; 𝑓𝑜 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓𝑜2 = • Thus the Boolean identity is proved.
2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶 4 𝜋2 𝐿 𝐶
1 Circuit description:
• Hence capacitance ; 𝐶 =
4 𝜋2 𝐿 𝑓𝑜2
• When, 𝑓𝑜 = 500 𝑘𝐻𝑧 ,
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 (3.14 )2 𝑋 150 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (500 𝑋 103 )2
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 9.8596 𝑋 150 𝑋 250000
𝐶 = 6.761 𝑋 10−10 𝐹 = 676.1 𝑋 10−12 𝐹 12. A transmitting antenna has a height of 40 m and the height of the receiving
𝑪 ≈ 𝟔𝟕𝟔 𝒑𝑭 antenna is 30 m. What is the maximum distance between them for line-of-sight
• When, 𝑓𝑜 = 1500 𝑘𝐻𝑧 communication? The radius of the earth is 6.4×106 m.
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 (3.14 )2 𝑋 150 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (1500 𝑋 103 )2
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 9.8596 𝑋 150 𝑋 2250000
𝐶 = 7.511 𝑋 10−11 𝐹 = 75.11 𝑋 10−12 𝐹
𝑪 ≈ 𝟕𝟓 𝒑𝑭
• Therefore, the capacitor range is 𝟕𝟓 𝒑𝑭 - 𝟔𝟕𝟔 𝒑𝑭
9. What is the output Y in the following -Solution :-
circuit, when all the three inputs A, B, and • The total distance d between the transmitting and receiving antennas will be the
C are first 0 and then 1? sum of the individual distances of coverage.
-Solution :-
𝑑 = 𝑑1 + 𝑑2 = √2 𝑅 ℎ1 + √2 𝑅 ℎ2 = √2 𝑅 (√ℎ1 + √ℎ2 )
• Out put of 𝐴𝑁𝐷 gate P : 𝑿 = 𝑨 . 𝑩
• Out put of 𝑁𝐴𝑁𝐷 gate Q : 𝒀 = ̅̅̅̅̅̅ 𝑿 .𝑩 𝑑 = √2 𝑋 6.4 𝑋 106 (√40 + √30)
A B C 𝑿 = 𝑨.𝑩 𝒀 = ̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑿 .𝑩 𝑑 = √2 𝑋 6.4 𝑋 106 𝑋 √10 (√4 + √3)
0 0 0 0 1 𝑑 = √2 𝑋 6.4 𝑋 107 (√4 + √3)
1 1 1 1 0 √2 𝑋 64 𝑋 106 (√4 + √3)
𝑑=
𝑑= 1.414 𝑋 8 𝑋 103 (2 + 1.732)
𝑑= 1.414 𝑋 8 𝑋 103 𝑋 3.732
𝒅= 𝟒𝟐. 𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟒𝟐. 𝟐𝟏 𝒌𝒎
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. Assuming VCEsat = 0.2 V and β = 50, find the minimum
1. The given circuit has two ideal diodes connected as shown in figure below. base current (IB) required to drive the transistor
Calculate the current flowing through the resistance R1. given in the figure to saturation.
-Solution :- 𝑉𝐶𝐶 = 3 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐶 = 1 𝑘Ω = 1000 Ω
• From figure, 𝑉𝐶𝐶 = 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 + 𝑉𝐶𝐸
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸
𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸 3 − 0.2
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑪 = =
𝑅𝐶 1000
𝑰𝑪 = 𝟐. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑨
𝐼
• Then current gain ; 𝛽 = 𝐶 . Hence,
𝐼𝐵
-Solution :- 𝐼𝐶 2.8 𝑋 10−3
• Here diode 𝑫𝟏 is reverse biased. So it acts as open switch (OFF) and hence it does 𝑰𝑩 = = = 0.056 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 56 𝑋 10−6 = 𝟓𝟔 𝝁 𝑨
𝛽 50
not allows current to pass through it. 4. A transistor of α = 0.99 and VBE = 0.7 V is connected in the common emitter
• But diode 𝑫𝟐 is forward biased. So it acts as closed switch (ON) and hence it allows configuration as shown in the figure. If the transistor is in saturation region, find
current to pass through it. the value of collector current.
• From Ohm’s law, 𝑉 = 𝐼 𝑅𝑆 -Solution :-
𝑉 10 10 • If 𝛼 = 0.99 then,
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰= = = = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑨
𝑅𝑆 (2 + 2) 4 𝛼 0.99 0.99
𝛽 = 1− 𝛼 = = = 99
2. Four silicon diodes and a 10 Ω resistor are connected as shown in figure below. 1−0.99 0.01
Each diode has a resistance of 1Ω. Find the current flows through the 10Ω • By definition. current gain,
resistor. 𝐼𝐶 𝐼𝐶 𝐼𝐶
𝛽= (𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑩 = =
-Solution :- 𝐼𝐵 𝛽 90
• Here diode 𝑫𝟏 & 𝑫𝟒 is reverse biased. So it • Here one thing must be remember that,
acts as open switch (OFF) and hence it does transistor in saturation region have,
not allows current to pass through it. 𝑉𝐵𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡 = 0.8 𝑉 and 𝑉𝐶𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡 = 0.2 𝑉
• But diode 𝑫𝟐 & 𝑫𝟑 is forward biased. So it • From figure, for input applying Kirchoff’s voltage law
acts as closed switch (ON) and hence it allows 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉3 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐵𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡
current to pass through it. 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) + 10000 𝐼𝐵 + 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) = 12 − 0.8
• Hence the given circuit is simplified as shown. 2000 𝐼𝐶 + 12000 𝐼𝐵 = 11.2 − − − − − − (1)
• Since the barrier voltage of silicon is 0.7 V and • Similarly for output applying Kirchoff’s voltage law
hence voltage across 𝟏𝟎 𝛀 resistor, 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉3 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡
𝑉10 = 3 − 0.7 − 0.7 = 𝟏. 𝟔 𝐕 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) + 10000 𝐼𝐵 + 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) = 12 − 0.2
• Total resistance of the circuit, 3000 𝐼𝐶 + 2000 𝐼𝐵 = 11.8 − − − − − − (2)
𝑅𝑆 = 1 + 10 + 1 = 𝟏𝟐 𝛀 • (2) X 6  18000 𝐼𝐶 + 12000 𝐼𝐵 = 70.8 − − − − − − (3)
• Then the current through 𝟏𝟎 𝛀 resistor, • (3) - (1)  16000 𝐼𝐶 = 59.6
𝑉10 1.6 59.6
𝐼= = = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟑𝟑 𝑨 𝐼𝐶 = = 3. 724 𝑋 10−3 𝐴
𝑅𝑆 12 16000
−𝟑
𝑰𝑪 = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑨 = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟐𝟒 𝒎𝑨
5. In the circuit shown in the figure, the BJT has a ̅ B = A + B using truth table.
8. Verify the given Boolean equation A + 𝑨
current gain (β) of 50. For an emitter – base Solution :-
voltage VEB = 600 mV, calculate the emitter – ̅ ̅𝑩 ̅𝑩
A B 𝑨 𝑨 𝑨+𝑨 A+B
collector voltage VEC (in volts).
Solution :- 𝑉𝐸 = 3 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐵 = 60𝐾Ω ; 𝑅𝐶 = 500 Ω 0 0 1 0 0 0
• From figure, , 𝑉𝐸 = 𝑉𝐸𝐵 + 𝑉𝐵 0 1 1 1 1 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝐸 − 𝑉𝐸𝐵 1 0 0 0 1 1
60000 𝐼𝐵 = 3 − 600 𝑋 10−3 1 1 0 0 1 1
60 𝑋 103 𝐼𝐵 = 3 − 0.6 = 2.4
2.4 9. In the given figure of a voltage
𝐼𝐵 = = 0.04 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 regulator, a Zener diode of breakdown
60 𝑋 103 voltage 15V is employed. Determine the
= 40 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 𝟒𝟎 𝝁 𝑨
𝐼𝐶 current through the load resistance, the
• By definition, current gain 𝛽= total current and the current through
𝐼𝐵
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑪 = 𝛽 𝐼𝐵 = 50 𝑋 40 𝑋 10−6 = 2000 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 2 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟐 𝒎 𝑨 the diode. Use diode approximation.
• Hence, 𝑉𝐸𝐶 = 𝑉𝐸 − 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐸 − 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 = 3 − (2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 103 ) Solution :- 𝑉 = 25 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝑆 = 500 Ω ; 𝑉𝑍 = 15 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐿 = 3 𝑘 Ω = 3000 Ω
𝑽𝑬𝑪 = 𝟑 − 𝟏 = 𝟐 𝑽 • From the figure, 𝑽𝑹𝑺 = 𝑉 − 𝑉𝑍 = 25 − 15 = 10 𝑉
6. Determine the current flowing through 3Ω and 4Ω • From Ohm’s law Current through load resistance 𝑅𝐿 ,
resistors of the circuit given below. Assume that diodes 𝑉
𝑰𝑳 = 𝐿 = 𝑍 =
𝑉 15
= 5 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟓 𝒎 𝑨
D1 and D2 are ideal diodes. 𝑅 𝐿 𝑅 𝐿 3000
Solution :- • And, current through 𝑅𝑆 (i.e.) total current
• Here diode D1 is forward biased (closed switch) and D2 𝑽𝑹 10 1
𝑰 = 𝑅 𝑺 = 500 = 50 = 0.02 𝐴 = 20 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒎 𝑨
is reverse biased (open switch) 𝑆
• So D1 conducts while D2 do not conduct the current. • If 𝑰𝒁 be the current through Zener diode, then from Kirchoff’s current law,
• For ideal diode, there is no barrier voltage (i.e.) VB = 0 𝐼 = 𝐼𝐿 + 𝐼𝑍
(𝑜𝑟) −3 −3 −3
• Let ‘I’ be the current through D1,then by Ohm’s Kirchoff’s voltage law, 𝐼𝑍 = 𝐼 − 𝐼𝐿 = (20 𝑋 10 ) − (5 𝑋 10 ) = 15 𝑋 10 𝐴
𝟐 𝑰 + 𝟒 𝑰 = 𝟏𝟐 (𝒐𝒓) 𝟔 𝑰 = 𝟏𝟐 (𝒐𝒓) 𝑰 = 𝟐 𝑨 𝑰𝒁 = 𝟏𝟓 𝒎𝑨
• Since D2 will not conduct, no current flows through diode D2 10. Write down Boolean equation for the output
• Thus current flowing through 3Ω and 4Ω resistors of the circuit are 0 and 2 A Y of the given circuit and give its truth table.
Respectively. Solution :-
7. Prove the following Boolean expressions using the laws and theorems of • Output of AND gate= 𝐴. 𝐵
̅ ̅
Boolean algebra. (i) (A+B) (A+𝑩) = A (ii) A(𝑨+B) = AB (iii) (A+B) (A+C) = A+BC • Output of NOR gate = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝐴+𝐵
Solution :- • Thus the final output of OR gate ;
̅ ̅
(i) (𝐴 + 𝐵)(𝐴 + 𝐵 ) = 𝐴 𝐴 + 𝐴 𝐵 + 𝐵 𝐴 + 𝐵 𝐵 ̅ ̅
[ By AND laws; 𝐴 𝐴 = 𝐴 & 𝐵 𝐵 = 0] 𝒀 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
= (𝑨. 𝑩) + (𝑨 + 𝑩)
̅
= 𝐴 + 𝐴 ( 𝐵 + 𝐵) + 0 ̅
[ By OR laws ; 𝐵 + 𝐵 = 1 & A +0 =0] A B A.B A+B ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑨+𝑩 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝒀 = (𝑨. 𝑩) + (𝑨 + 𝑩)
= 𝐴 + 𝐴 (1) [ By AND laws ; 𝐴. 1 = 𝐴 ]
(𝑨 + 𝑩)(𝑨 + 𝑩 ̅) = 𝑨 [ By OR laws ; 𝐴 + 𝐴 = 𝐴 ] 0 0 0 0 1 1
(ii) 𝐴 ( ̅𝐴 + 𝐵) = 𝐴 𝐴̅ + 𝐴 𝐵 [ By AND laws ; 𝐴 𝐴̅ = 0] 0 1 0 1 0 1
= 0+𝐴𝐵 [ By OR laws ; 0 + 𝐴 = 𝐴 ] 1 0 0 1 0 1
𝑨 (̅𝑨 + 𝑩) = 𝑨 𝑩 1 1 1 1 0 1
(iii) (𝐴 + 𝐵)( 𝐴 + 𝐶) = 𝐴𝐴 + 𝐴 𝐶 + 𝐵 𝐴 + 𝐵 𝐶
=𝐴+𝐴𝐶+𝐵𝐴+𝐵𝐶
= 𝐴(1 + 𝐶 + 𝐵) + 𝐵 𝐶 [ By OR laws ; 1 + 𝐴 = 1]
= 𝐴(1) + 𝐵 𝐶 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
(𝑨 + 𝑩)( 𝑨 + 𝑪) = 𝑨 + 𝑩 𝑪
HIGHER SECONDARY
SEDOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -1
ELECTROSTATICS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
GBHSS, PARANGIPETTAI - 608 502
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS. 3. Two small-sized identical equally charged spheres, each

1. Calculate the number of electrons in one coulomb of negative charge. having mass 1 g are hanging in equilibrium as shown in the
Solution :- q = 1 C ; e = 1.6 X 10-19 C ; n=? figure. The length of each string is 10 cm and the angle
▪ According to the quantisation of charge ; 𝑞 = 𝑛 𝑒 θ is 30° with the vertical. Calculate the magnitude of the
𝑞 1 1019 charge in each sphere.(Take g = 10 ms−2)
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑛= = −19
= Solution:-: 𝑚 = 1 g = 10−3 𝑘g ; 𝜃 = 30 ;
𝑒 1.6 𝑋 10 1.6
𝒏 = 𝟔. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟖 electrons 𝑔 = 10 𝑚𝑠 −2 ; 𝐿 = 10 𝑐𝑚 = 0.1 ; 𝑞 = ?
2. Consider two point charges q1 and q2 at rest as shown in the ▪ Since they are positively charged spheres, there will be a repulsive force between
figure. They are separated by a distance of 1m. Calculate the them and they will be at equilibrium with each other at an angle of 30° with the
force experienced by the two charges for the following vertical.
cases: ▪ At equilibrium, each charge experiences zero
(a) q1 = +2 μC and q2 = +3 μC net force in each direction. We can draw a free
(b) q1 = +2 μC and q2 = –3 μC body diagram for one of the charged spheres
(c) q1= +2 μC and q2 = –3 μC kept in water (𝜺𝒓 = 𝟖𝟎) and apply Newton’s second law for both
Solution :- vertical and horizontal directions.
(a) 𝑞1 = +2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑞2 = +3 𝜇𝐶 ; r = 1 m then , ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = ? & ⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = ? ▪ In the x-direction, the acceleration of the
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 3 𝑋 10−6 charged sphere is zero.
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂ 𝑇 sin 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹𝑒 (− ̂)
𝑖 =0
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 12 12 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 sin 𝜃 ̂𝑖 = 𝐹𝑒 ̂𝑖
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟐𝟏 = 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑵 𝒊̂ ( along + X axis) (𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 sin 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑒 − − − (1)
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 3 𝑋 10−6 ▪ In the y-direction also, the net acceleration experienced by the charge is
& ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 (− 𝑖̂)
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 21 12 zero. 𝑇 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑗 + 𝑚 𝑔 (−̂) 𝑗 =0
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟏𝟐 = − 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑵 𝒊̂ (along - X axis) (𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑗 = 𝑚 𝑔 ̂𝑗
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑇 cos 𝜃 = 𝑚 𝑔 − − − (2)
(b) 𝑞1 = +2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑞2 = −3 𝜇𝐶 ; r = 1 m then, ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = ? & ⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = ?
▪ Divide equation (1) by 92)
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 (−3) 𝑋 10−6 𝑇 sin 𝜃 𝐹𝑒
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 12 12 =
𝑇 cos 𝜃 𝑚𝑔
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟐𝟏 = − 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑵 𝒊̂ (along - X axis) 𝐹𝑒 1 1 𝑞2
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 2 𝑋10−6 𝑋 (−3) 𝑋 10−6 tan  = = [ ] [∵ 𝑎 = 𝐿 sin 𝜃]
& ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = 𝑟̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 (− 𝑖̂) 𝑚𝑔 𝑚 𝑔 4 𝜋 𝜀0 (2𝑎)2
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 21 12 1 1 𝑞2
tan  = [ ]
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟏𝟐 = 𝟓𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑵 𝒊̂ (along + X axis) 𝑚𝑔 4 𝜋 𝜀0 (2 𝐿 sin 𝜃)2
∴ 𝑞 = 𝑚 𝑔 [4 𝜋 𝜀0 ](2 𝐿 sin 𝜃)2 tan 𝜃
2
(c) 𝑞1 = +2 𝜇𝐶 and 𝑞2 = −3 𝜇𝐶 placed in water (𝜀𝑟 = 80), ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 = ? & ⃗⃗⃗𝐹21 = ? 1
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑞 = 2 𝐿 sin 𝜃 √𝑚 𝑔 [4 𝜋 𝜀0 ] tan 𝜃 [∵ = 9 𝑋 109 ]
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 − 54 𝑋 10−3 4 𝜋 𝜀0
⃗⃗⃗𝐹21
𝑊
= 𝑟̂12 = = ̂𝒊
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝜀𝑟 𝑟 2 𝜀𝑟 80 10−3 𝑋 10 𝑋 tan 30
𝑞 = 2 𝑋 0.1 𝑋 sin 30 𝑋 √ 9 𝑋 109
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝑾
𝟐𝟏 = − 𝟔. 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎
−𝟒
𝑵 ̂𝒊 (along - X axis)
1 𝑞 𝑞 ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 54 𝑋 10−3 1 10−3 𝑋 10 𝑋 0.5774 5.774 𝑋 10−12
⃗⃗⃗𝐹12
𝑊
=
1 2
𝑟̂ = = ̂𝒊 𝑞 = 0.2 𝑋 2 𝑋 √ 9 𝑋 109
= 0.1 𝑋 √ 9
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝜀𝑟 𝑟 2 21 𝜀𝑟 80 0. 1
⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝑾
𝟐𝟏 = 𝟔. 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎
−𝟒
𝑵 ̂𝒊 (along + X axis) 𝑞 = 𝑋 √5.774 𝑋 10−6
3
NOTE : All three cases obeys Newton’s third law of motion (𝑖. 𝑒) ⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟏𝟐 = − ⃗⃗⃗𝑭𝟐𝟏 𝑞 = 0.0333 𝑋 √5.774 𝑋 10−6
𝑞 = 8.001 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10−6 = 8.001 𝑋 10−8 𝐶
𝑞 = 80. 01 𝑋 10−8 𝐶 = 80.01 𝑛 𝐶
4. Calculate the electrostatic force and gravitational force between the proton and ▪ Since, 𝑟 = 1 𝑚 From figure, 𝑟12 = 𝑟14 = √2 𝑟2 = 𝑟√2 = √2 𝑚 ; 𝑟13 = 2 𝑟 = 2 𝑚
the electron in a hydrogen atom. They are separated by a distance of ▪ Magnitude of the forces,
5.3 × 10–11 m. The magnitude of charges on the electron and proton are
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 9 𝑋 10−3
1.6 × 10–19 C. Mass of the electron is me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg and mass of proton is 𝐹12 = = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 = = 4.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑁
mp = 1.6 × 10–27 kg. 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟122 (√2)
2 2
Solution :- 𝑟 = 5.3 𝑋 10−11 𝑚 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 1 𝑞1 𝑞3 9
1 𝑋 10 −6
𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 9 𝑋 10−3
𝑚𝑒 = 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑚𝑝 = 1,6 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝐺 = 6.67 𝑋 10−11 𝑁 𝑚2 𝐶 −2 𝐹13 = 2 = 9 𝑋 10 𝑋 = = 2.25 𝑋 10−3 𝑁
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟13 (2)2 4
▪ The magnitude of the electrostatic force between electron and proton 1 𝑞1 𝑞4 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 9 𝑋 10−3
9
1 𝑒 2 (1.6 𝑋 10 −19 )2 𝐹14 = = 9 𝑋 10 𝑋 = = 4.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑁
𝐹𝐸 = = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟142 (√2)
2
2
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 (5.3 𝑋 10−11 )2
9
9 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10 −38 ▪ From the figure, 𝜃 = 45°, then the total force on 𝑞1
𝐹𝐸 = 𝐹1 = ⃗⃗⃗𝐹12 + ⃗⃗⃗𝐹13 + ⃗⃗⃗𝐹14
𝑡𝑜𝑡
5.3 𝑋 5.3 𝑋 10−22
9 𝑋 2.56 𝑋 10−7 23.04 𝑋 10−7 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = [𝐹12 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹12 sin 𝜃 (− 𝑗̂)] + 𝐹13 ̂𝑖 + [𝐹14 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹14 sin 𝜃 𝑗̂]
𝐹𝐸 = = = 8.202 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 10−7
28.09 29.09 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 𝐹12 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 − 𝐹12 sin 𝜃 𝑗̂ + 𝐹13 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹14 cos 𝜃 ̂𝑖 + 𝐹14 sin 𝜃 𝑗̂
−𝟖
𝑭𝑬 = 𝟖. 𝟐𝟎𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑵 ▪ Since 𝐹12 = 𝐹14 , we have
▪ The magnitude of the gravitational force between electron and proton 𝑡𝑜𝑡
⃗ 1 = 𝐹12 cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + 𝐹13 𝑖̂ + 𝐹14 cos 𝜃 𝑖̂
−11 −27 −31 𝐹
𝐺 𝑚𝑃 𝑚𝑒 6.67 𝑋 10 𝑋 1,6 𝑋 10 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10
𝐹𝐺 = = 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 2 𝐹12 cos 𝜃 𝑖̂ + 𝐹13 𝑖̂
𝑟2 (5.3 𝑋 10−11 )2 𝑡𝑜𝑡
6.67 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−69 6.67 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−47 ⃗ 1 = 2 (4.5 𝑋 10−3 ) cos 45° 𝑖̂ + 2.25 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂
𝐹
𝐹𝐺 = = 1
28.09 𝑋 10−22 28.09 𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 2 (4.5 𝑋 10−3 ) 𝑖̂ + 2.25 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂
−𝟒𝟕
𝑭𝑮 = 𝟑. 𝟒𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑵 √2
▪ The ratio of the two forces, ⃗⃗⃗𝐹1𝑡𝑜𝑡 = [4.5 √2 + 2.25] 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂ = [6.363 + 2.25] 𝑋 10−3 𝑖̂
−8
𝐹𝐸 8.202 𝑋 10 ⃗𝑭𝒕𝒐𝒕
𝟏 = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟏𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎
−𝟑
𝒊̂
= ≈ 2.4 𝑋 1039
𝐹𝐺 3. 456 𝑋 10 −47 6. Calculate the electric field at points P, Q for the following two cases, as shown in
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑭𝑬 ≈ 𝟏𝟎𝟑𝟗 𝑭𝑮 the figure.
∴ 𝑭𝑬 ≫ 𝑭𝑮 (a) A positive point charge +1 μC is placed at the origin
5. Consider four equal charges q1, q2, q3 and q4 = q = +1 μC (b) A negative point charge –2 μC is placed at the origin
located at four different points on a circle of radius 1m, as Solution :-
shown in the figure. Calculate the total force acting on the
(a) = +1 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟𝑃 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝑄 = 4 𝑚 ⃗𝐸𝑃 = ? ⃗𝐸𝑄 = ?
charge q1 due to all the other charges.
Solution :- Electric field at P,
𝑡𝑜𝑡 1 𝑞 1 𝑋 10−6
𝑞1 = 𝑞2 = 𝑞3 = 𝑞4 = 𝑞 = +1 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟 = 1 𝑚 ; ⃗𝐹1 = ? ⃗𝐸𝑃 = 𝑖 ̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑃2 (2)2
▪ Figure shows forces and its components act on charge 𝑞1
9 𝑋 103
𝐸⃗𝑃 = 𝑖̂
4
⃗𝑬𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝒊̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
Electric field at Q ,
1 𝑞 1 𝑋 10−6
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 2 𝑗̂ = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑗̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑄 (4)2
9 𝑋 103
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 𝑗̂
16
⃗𝑬𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝒋̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
(b) = − 2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟𝑃 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝑄 = 6𝑚 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑃 =? 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑄 =? ▪ Its magnitude, |⃗⃗⃗𝐸𝐴 | = 2.25 𝑋 109 √12 + 12 = 2.25 𝑋 109 √2

Electric field at P ▪ Then the direction of 𝐸 ⃗𝐴,
1 𝑞 2 𝑋 10−6 ⃗𝐸𝐴 2.25 𝑋 109 (𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂) (𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂)
⃗𝐸𝑃 = (−𝑖 ̂ ) = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 (−𝑖̂) 𝐸̂𝐴 = = =
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑃2 (2)2 ⃗⃗⃗
| 𝐸𝐴 | 9
2.25 𝑋 10 √2 √2
18 𝑋 103
𝐸⃗𝑃 = − 𝑖̂ ▪ Acceleration experienced by the electron placed at A,
4
⃗ 𝑷 = − 𝟒. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
𝟑 𝐹 𝑞 𝐸⃗𝐴
𝑬 𝑎𝐴 = =
Electric field at Q 𝑚 𝑚
1 𝑞 2 𝑋 10−6 − 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 2.25 𝑋 109 ( 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ )
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 𝑖̂ = 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑋 𝑖̂ 𝑎𝐴 =
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑄2 (6)2 9.1 𝑋 10−31
− 1.6 𝑋 2.25 𝑋 1021 ( 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ )
18 𝑋 103 𝑎𝐴 =
𝐸⃗𝑄 = 𝑖̂ 9.1
36 𝑎𝐴 = − 3.956 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1021 ( 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ )
⃗ 𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
𝑬 𝟑
⃗ 𝑨 = − 𝟑. 𝟗𝟓𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 ( 𝒊̂ + 𝒋̂ )𝑵 𝒌𝒈−𝟏
𝒂
7. Consider the charge configuration as shown in the ▪ The electron is accelerated in a direction exactly opposite to 𝐸 ⃗𝐴
figure. Calculate the electric field at point A. If an 8. A block of mass m carrying a positive charge q is placed on
electron is placed at points A, what is the acceleration an insulated frictionless inclined plane as shown in the
experienced by this electron? figure. A uniform electric field E is applied parallel to the
(mass of the electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg and charge of inclined surface such that the block is at rest. Calculate the
electron = −1.6 × 10–19 C) magnitude of the electric field E.
Solution :- 𝑞1 = 𝑞2 = + 1 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟1 = 𝑟2 = 2 𝑚𝑚 ; ⃗𝐸𝐴 = ? Solution :-
▪ The free body diagram for the mass m is drawn below.
1 𝑞1
𝐸⃗1 = 𝑗̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟12
1 𝑋 10−6
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑗̂
(2 𝑋 10−3 )2
−6
1 𝑋 10
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑗̂
4 𝑋 10−6
⃗𝑬𝟏 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝒋̂
1 𝑞2
𝐸⃗2 = 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟22 There are three forces that acts on the mass m:
▪
1 𝑋 10−6 (i) The downward gravitational force exerted by the Earth (mg)
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑖̂
(2 𝑋 10−3 )2 (ii) The normal force exerted by the inclined surface (N)
−6
1 𝑋 10 (iii) The Coulomb force given by uniform electric field (qE)
= 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 𝑖̂
4 𝑋 10−6 ▪ Along x-direction, applying Newton’s second law, we have
⃗ 𝟐 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂
𝑬 𝟗
𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 𝑖̂ + 𝑞 𝐸 (− 𝑖̂) = 0
▪ Hence the resultant electric field at A, 𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 𝑖̂ − 𝑞 𝐸 𝑖̂ = 0
⃗⃗⃗𝐸𝐴 = 𝐸⃗1 + 𝐸⃗2 𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 − 𝑞 𝐸 = 0
= 2.25 𝑋 109 𝑗̂ + 2.25 𝑋 109 𝑖̂ 𝑚𝑔 sin 𝜃 = 𝑞 𝐸
⃗ 𝑨 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 ( 𝒊̂ + 𝒋̂ ) 𝒎𝒈 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝜽 𝒎𝒈 𝒉
𝑬
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑬 = 𝒒
=
𝒒𝑳
9. The following pictures depict electric field lines for various charge (iii) In the figure (c), the electric field lines start at q1 and q3 and end at q2. This implies
configurations. that q1 and q3 are positive charges. The ratio of the number of field lines
𝑞1 𝑁1 8 1
| |= = =
𝑞2 𝑁2 16 2
|𝑞2 | 20
|𝑞1 | = = = 10
2 2
𝑞3 𝑁3 8 1
& | |= = =
𝑞2 𝑁2 16 2
|𝑞2 | 20
|𝑞3 | = = = 10
2 2
𝒒 ∴ 𝒒𝟏 = 𝒒𝟑 = + 𝟏𝟎 𝒏𝑪
(i) In figure (a) identify the signs of two charges and find the ratio | 𝟏 | 10. Calculate the electric dipole moment for the following charge configurations.
𝒒𝟐
(ii) In figure (b), calculate the ratio of two positive charges and identify the
strength the electric field at three points A, B, and C
(iii) Figure (c) represents the electric field lines for three charges. If q2 = –20 nC,
then calculate the values of q1 and q3
Solution :-
(i) The electric field lines start at q2 and end at q1. In figure (a), q2 is positive and q1
is negative.
The number of the lines ending at q1 ; 𝑁1 = 6
The number of the lines starting from q2 ; 𝑁2 = 18 Solution :-
𝑞1
𝑁1 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑞1 = 𝑁1 𝜀𝑜 Figure (a) :
𝜀𝑜 Position vector for the +q on the positive x-axis = 𝑎 𝑖̂
𝑞2
𝑁2 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑞2 = 𝑁2 𝜀𝑜 Position vector for the +q charge the negative x axis = 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂)
𝜀𝑜 So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = (+𝑞) 𝑎 𝑖̂ + (+𝑞) 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂) = 0
𝑞1 𝑁1 𝜀𝑜 Figure (b) :
∴ =
𝑞2 𝑁2 𝜀𝑜 Position vector charge +𝑞 placed at the origin = 0
𝑞1 𝑁1 6 1 Position vector for the +q on the positive x-axis = 𝑎 𝑖̂
| |= = =
𝑞2 𝑁2 18 3 So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = 0 + (+𝑞) 𝑎 𝑖̂ = 𝑞 𝑎 𝑖̂
|𝒒𝟐 | = 𝟑 |𝒒𝟏 | Figure (c) :
(ii) In figure (b), Position vector for the −2𝑞 on the positive y-axis = 𝑎 𝑗̂
The number of field lines emanating from 𝒒𝟏 ; 𝑁1 = 18 Position vector for the +q charge on the negative y axis = 2 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂)
The number of field lines emanating from 𝒒𝟐 ; 𝑁2 = 18 So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = (−2𝑞) 𝑎 𝑗̂ + (+𝑞) 2 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂) = −4𝑞𝑎 𝑗̂
𝑞1 𝑁1 18 Figure (d) :
∴ = = = 1 Position vector for the −2𝑞 on the negative x axis = 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂)
𝑞2 𝑁2 18
𝒒𝟏 = 𝒒𝟐 Position vector for the +q charge on the positive y axis = 𝑎 𝑗̂
At point A, the electric field lines are denser compared to the lines at point B. Position vector for the +q charge on the negative y axis = 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂)
So the electric field at t A is greater in magnitude compared to the field at t B. So the dipole moment is ; ⃗𝑝 = (−2𝑞) 𝑎 (− 𝑖̂) + (+𝑞) 𝑎 𝑗̂ + (+𝑞) 𝑎 (− 𝑗̂) = 2 𝑞 𝑎 𝑖̂
Further, no electric field line passes through C, which implies that the resultant (e.g) The water molecule (H2O) has this charge configuration.
electric field at C due to these two charges is zero. The water molecule has three atoms (two H atom and one O atom). The
centres of positive (H) and negative (O) charges of a water molecule lie
at different points, hence it possess permanent dipole moment.
The electric dipole moment ; ⃗𝒑 = 𝟔. 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟎 𝑪 𝒎
11. A sample of HCl gas is placed in a uniform electric field of magnitude 13. Consider a point charge +q placed at the origin and another point charge -2q
3 × 104 N C–1. The dipole moment of each HCl molecule is 3.4 × 10–30 Cm. placed at a distance of 9 m from the charge +q. Determine the point between the
Calculate the maximum torque experienced by each HCl molecule. two charges at which electric potential is zero.
Solution :- 𝐸 = 3𝑋 104 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝑝 = 3.4 𝑋 1030 𝐶 𝑚 ; 𝜏𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ? Solution :-
▪ The maximum torque experienced by the dipole is when it is aligned ▪ According to the superposition principle, the total electric potential at a point is
perpendicular ( = 90) to the applied field. So equal to the sum of the potentials due to each charge at that point.
𝜏𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑝 𝐸 sin 90 = 3.4 𝑋 1030 𝑋 3𝑋 104 𝑋 1 ▪ Consider the point at which
𝝉𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟏𝟎. 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟔 𝑵 𝒎 the total potential zero is
12. (a) Calculate the electric potential at points P and Q as shown in the figure located at a distance 𝑥 from
below. the charge +q as shown in
(b) Suppose the charge +9 μC is replaced by –9 μC find the electrostatic the figure.
potentials at points P and Q 𝑉+𝑞 + 𝑉−2𝑞 = 0
(c) Calculate the work done to bring a test charge +2 μC from infinity to the 1 𝑞 1 (−2𝑞)
+ =0
point Q. Assume the charge +9 μC is held fixed at origin and +2 μC is brought 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑥 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 9 − 𝑥
from infinity to P. 1 𝑞 1 2𝑞
=
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑥 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 9 − 𝑥
1 2
=
𝑥 9−𝑥
9−𝑥 =2𝑥
9= 2𝑥+𝑥 =3𝑥
Solution :- ∴ 𝑥 =3𝑚
(a) Electric potential at point P is given by 14. The following figure represents the electric potential as a function of
1 𝑞 9 𝑋 10−6 81 𝑋 103 x – coordinate. Plot the corresponding electric field as a function of x.
𝑉𝑃 = = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = = 8.1 𝑋 103 = 8100 𝑉 Solution :-
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑃 10 10
Electric potential at point Q is given by ▪ The electric field is the negative gradient of the electric potential. In vector form
1 𝑞 9 𝑋 10−6 81 𝑋 103 𝜕𝑉 𝜕𝑉 𝜕𝑉
𝑉𝑄 = = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = = 5.06 𝑋 103 = 5060 𝑉 ⃗𝐸 = − [ 𝑖̂ + 𝑗̂ + 𝑘̂ ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟𝑄 16 16 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑧
Here , 𝑉𝑃 < 𝑉𝑄 .The potential difference between the points P and Q is given by ▪ In the given problem, since the potential depends
𝜕𝑉 𝜕𝑉
∆𝑉 = 𝑉𝑃 − 𝑉𝑄 = 8100 − 5060 = 3040 𝑉 = 3.04 𝑋 103 𝑉 only on x, we have = = 0. Thus,
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦
(b) Suppose we replace the charge +9 μC by –9 μC, then the corresponding potentials 𝜕𝑉
at the points P and Q are, ⃗𝐸 = −𝑖̂
𝜕𝑥
𝑉𝑃 = − 8.1 𝑋 103 = − 8100 𝑉 (i) From 0 to 1 cm, the slope is constant and
𝑉𝑄 = − 5.06 𝑋 103 = − 5060 𝑉 𝜕𝑉
= 25 So, ⃗𝑬 = −𝟐𝟓 𝒊̂ 𝑽 𝒄𝒎−𝟏
Here , 𝑉𝑃 < 𝑉𝑄 . The potential difference between the points P and Q is given by 𝜕𝑥
(ii) From 1 to 4 cm, the potential is constant,
∆𝑉 = 𝑉𝑃 − 𝑉𝑄 = − 8100 − (−5060) = − 3040 𝑉 = −3.04 𝑋 103 𝑉 𝜕𝑉
V = 25 V and ⃗ = 𝟎
= 0 . So 𝑬
(c) The electric potential V at a point Q due to some charge is defined as the workdone 𝜕𝑥
by an external force to bring a unit positive charge from infinity to Q. So to bring (iii) From 4 to 5 cm, the slope constant and
𝜕𝑉
the q amount of charge from infinity to the point Q, work done is given as follows. = − 25 . So ⃗𝑬 = + 𝟐𝟓 𝒊̂ 𝑽 𝒄𝒎−𝟏
𝜕𝑥
𝑊𝑄 = 𝑞 𝑉𝑄 = 2 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 5.06 𝑋 103 = 10.12 𝑋 10−3 𝐽 ▪ The plot of electric field for the various points along
the x axis is given below.
15. Four charges are arranged at the corners of the square 16. A water molecule has an electric dipole moment of 6.3 × 10 –30 Cm. A sample
PQRS of side a as shown in the figure.(a) Find the work contains 1022 water molecules, with all the dipole moments aligned parallel to
required to assemble these charges in the given the external electric field of magnitude 3 × 105 N C–1. How much work is
configuration. (b) Suppose a charge q′ is brought to the required to rotate all the water molecules from θ = 0o to 90o?
centre of the square, by keeping the four charges fixed at Solution :- 𝜃𝑖 = 0° ; 𝜃𝑓 = 90° ; 𝐸 = 3 𝑋 105 𝑁 𝐶−1 ; 𝑝 = 6.3 𝑋 10−30 𝐶 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1022
the corners, how much extra work is required for this? ▪ When the water molecules are aligned in the direction of the electric field, it has
Solution :- minimum potential energy.
(a) The work done to arrange the charges in the corners of the square is independent ▪ The work done to rotate the dipole from θ = 0o to 90o is equal to the potential
of the way they are arranged. We can follow any order. energy difference between these two configurations.
(i) First, the charge +q is brought to the corner P. This requires no work since no 𝑊 = 𝑈 (𝜃𝑓 ) − 𝑈 ( 𝜃𝑖 )
charge is already present, WP = 0
𝑊 = − 𝑝 𝐸 cos 𝜃𝑓 + 𝑝 𝐸 cos 𝜃𝑖 = 𝑝 𝐸 (cos 𝜃𝑖 − cos 𝜃𝑓 )
(ii) Let 𝑉𝑄 be the potential at a point Q due to +q located at a point P, then Work
𝑊 = 𝑝 𝐸 (cos 0° − cos 90°) = 𝑝 𝐸 (1 − 0) = 𝑝 𝐸
required to bring the charge –q to the corner Q 𝑊 = 6.3 𝑋 10−30 𝑋 3 𝑋 105 = 18.9 𝑋 10−25 𝐽
1 𝑞
𝑊𝑄 = (−𝑞) 𝑉𝑄 = (−𝑞) ▪ Hence for 10 water molecules, the total work done is
22
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑃𝑄 𝑊𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 1022 𝑋 18.9 𝑋 10−25
1 𝑞2 𝑾𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝟏𝟖. 𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑱
𝑊𝑄 = −
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 17. Calculate the electric flux through the rectangle of sides 5 cm and 10 cm kept in
(iii) Let 𝑉𝑅 be the potential at the point R due to charges at the point P and Q, the region of a uniform electric field 100 NC –1. The angle θ is 60o. If θ becomes
then Work required to bring the charge +q to the corner R zero, what is the electric flux?
1 𝑞 1 (−𝑞) Solution :- E = 100 N C-1 ; 𝐴 = 𝑙 𝑏 = 5 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−2 = 50 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝜃 = 60°
𝑊𝑅 = 𝑞 𝑉𝑅 = 𝑞 [ + ] ▪ The electric flux through the rectangular area
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑃𝑅 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑄𝑅
1 𝑞 1 𝑞 Φ𝐸 = 𝐸⃗ . 𝐴 = 𝐸 𝐴 cos 𝜃 = 100 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 cos 60°
𝑊𝑅 = 𝑞 [ − ] 1
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎√2 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 Φ𝐸 = 5000 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 = 2500 𝑋 10−4
𝟏 𝒒𝟐 𝟏 2
𝑾𝑹 = [ − 𝟏] 𝚽𝑬 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
𝟒 𝝅 𝜺𝒐 𝒂 √𝟐
▪ For 𝜽 = 𝟎° Φ𝐸 = 𝐸⃗ . 𝐴 = 𝐸 𝐴 cos 𝜃 = 100 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 cos 0°
(iv) Let 𝑉𝑠 be the potential at the centre point O due to all the four charges in the
Φ𝐸 = 5000 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 1
four corners, then Work required to bring the fourth charge –q at the
𝚽𝑬 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
position S
18. (i) In figure (a), calculate the electric flux through the closed areas A1 and A2.
1 𝑞 1 (−𝑞) 1 𝑞 (ii) In figure (b), calculate the electric flux through the cube
𝑊𝑆 = (−𝑞)𝑉𝑆 = (−𝑞) [ + + ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑃𝑆 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑄𝑆 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅𝑆
1 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 1 𝑞2 1
𝑊𝑆 = (−𝑞) [ − + ]= − [1 − + 1]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 𝑎√2 𝑎 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑎 √2
𝟐
𝟏 𝒒 𝟏
𝑾𝑺 = − [𝟐 − ]
𝟒 𝝅 𝜺𝒐 𝒂 √𝟐
(b) The potential created by the two +q charges are canceled by the potential created
by the –q charges which are located in the opposite corners. Therefore the net
electric potential at the centre O due to all the charges in the corners is zero.
Hence no work is required to bring any charge to the point O. Physically this
Solution :-
implies that if any charge q′ when brought close to O, then it moves to the point
(i) In figure (a), the area A1 encloses the charge +𝑄. So electric flux through this
O without any external force. 𝑄
closed surface A1 is Φ𝐸 = . But the closed surface A2 contains no charges
𝜀𝑜
inside, so electric flux through A2 is zero.
(ii) In figure (b), the net charge inside the cube is ; 𝑄 = +5𝑞 − 2𝑞 = +3𝑞 and the 20. A parallel plate capacitor has square plates of side 5 cm and separated by a
𝑸 𝟑𝒒
total electric flux in the cube is therefore, 𝚽𝑬 = = distance of 1 mm. (a) Calculate the capacitance of this capacitor. (b) If a 10 V
𝜺𝒐 𝜺𝒐
battery is connected to the capacitor, what is the charge stored in any one of the
Note that the charge -10 q lies outside the cube and it will not contribute the total
flux through the surface of the cube. plates? (The value of o = 8.85 × 10–12 N–1m–2 C2)
19. A small ball of conducting material having a charge Solution :- a = 5 cm = 5 X 10-2 m ; A = a2 = 25 X 10-4 m2 ; d = 1 mm =10-3 m ; V = 10 V
𝜺𝒐 𝑨
+q and mass m is thrown upward at an angle θ to (a) Capacitance of the capacitor ; 𝑪 =
𝒅
horizontal surface with an initial speed vo as shown 8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−4
in the figure. There exists an uniform electric field 𝐶= = 221.2 𝑋 10−13 𝐹 = 𝟐𝟐. 𝟏𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟐 𝑭 = 𝟐𝟐. 𝟏𝟐 𝒑𝑭
10−3
E downward along with the gravitational field g. (b) Charge stored in any one of the plate ; 𝑸 = 𝑪 𝑽
Calculate the range, maximum height and time of 𝑄 = 22.12 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 10 = 221.2 𝑋 10−12 𝐶 = 𝟐𝟐𝟏. 𝟐 𝒑𝑪
flight in the motion of this charged ball. Neglect the 21. A parallel plate capacitor filled with mica having εr = 5 is connected to a 10 V
effect of air and treat the ball as a point mass.
battery. The area of each parallel plate is 6 cm2 and separation distance is 6 mm.
Solution :-
(a) Find the capacitance and stored charge. (b) After the capacitor is fully
▪ If the conductor has no net charge, then its motion is the same as usual projectile
charged, the battery is disconnected and the dielectric is removed carefully.
motion of a mass m
Calculate the new values of capacitance, stored energy and charge.
▪ Here, in this problem, in addition to downward gravitational force, the charge
Solution :- 𝜀𝑟 = 5 ; 𝑉 = 10 𝑉 ; 𝐴 = 6 𝑐𝑚2 = 6 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝑑 = 6 𝑚𝑚 = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
also will experience a downward uniform electrostatic force. 𝜀𝑜 𝜺𝒓 𝐴
▪ The acceleration of the charged ball due to gravity = −𝑔 𝑗̂ (a) The capacitance of the capacitor in the presence of dielectric is ; 𝐶 =
𝑑
𝑞𝐸 8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 5 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−4
▪ The acceleration of the charged ball due to uniform electric field = − 𝑗̂ 𝐶 = = 44.25 𝑋 10−13 𝐹 = 4.425𝑋 10−12 𝐹 = 𝟒. 𝟒𝟐𝟓 𝒑𝑭
𝑚 6 𝑋 10−3
𝒒𝑬
▪ The total acceleration of charged ball in downward direction; 𝒂
⃗ = − [𝒈 + ] 𝒋̂ The stored charge ; 𝑄 = 𝐶 𝑉
𝒎
𝒒𝑬 𝑄 = 4.425 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 10 = 44.25 𝑋 10−12 𝐶 = 𝟒𝟒. 𝟐𝟓 𝒑𝑪
▪ Its magnitude ; 𝒂 = 𝒈 + 1
𝒎 The stored charge ; 𝑈 = 𝐶 𝑉 2
▪ Galileo’s conclusion that all objects fall 2
1
at the same rate towards the Earth is 𝑼 = 𝑋 4.425 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 10 𝑋 10 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟏𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝑱
true only in a uniform gravitational 2
(b) After the removal of the dielectric, since the battery is already disconnected the
field. When a uniform electric field is
total charge will not change. But the potential difference between the plates
included, the acceleration of a charged
increases. As a result, the capacitance is decreased. New capacitance is
object depends on both mass and
charge. 𝐶 4.425 𝑋 10−12
𝑪𝒐 = = = 0.885 𝑋 10−12 𝐹 = 0. 𝟖𝟖𝟓 𝒑𝑭
▪ But still the acceleration is constant 𝜺𝒓 5
throughout the motion. In fact we can The stored charge remains same and 44.25 pC. Hence newly stored energy is
simply replace g by (𝒈 + )
𝒒𝑬
1 1 𝑄2 1 𝑄2 𝜀𝑟
𝒎 𝑈𝑜 = 𝐶𝑜 𝑉2 = = = 𝜀𝑟 𝑈
Expression for without charge with charge +q 2 2 𝐶𝑜 2 𝐶
(i) Time of flight 2 𝑣𝑂 sin 𝜃 𝟐 𝒗𝑶 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝜽 𝑼𝒐 = 5 𝑋 2.213 𝑋 10−10 = 𝟏𝟏. 𝟎𝟔𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝑱
𝑇𝑓 = [𝑻𝒇 ] = 𝒒𝑬
𝑔
𝑬 [𝒈+ ]
𝒎
The increased energy is,
(ii) Maximum height 2 2
𝑣𝑜 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝒗 𝟐 𝒔𝒊𝒏𝟐 𝜽 ∆𝑼 = 𝑈𝑜 − 𝑈 = (11.065 − 2.213) 𝑋 10−10 = 𝟖. 𝟖𝟓𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝑱
ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑥 = [𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ]𝑬 = 𝒐 𝒒 𝑬 ▪ When the dielectric is removed, it experiences an inward pulling force due to the
2𝑔 𝟐 [𝒈+ ]
𝒎 plates. To remove the dielectric, an external agency has to do work on the
(iii) Range 𝑣𝑜2 sin 2𝜃 𝒗𝒐𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝜽 dielectric which is stored as additional energy. This is the source for the extra
𝑅= [𝑹]𝑬 = 𝒒𝑬
𝑔 [𝒈+ ]
𝒎
energy 8.84 × 10–10 J.
▪ For +𝒒 , we have [𝑻𝒇 ] < 𝑻𝒇 ; [𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ]𝑬 < 𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ; [𝑹]𝑬 < 𝑹
𝑬
▪ For −𝒒 , we have [𝑻𝒇 ] > 𝑻𝒇 ; [𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ]𝑬 > 𝒉𝒎𝒂𝒙 ; [𝑹]𝑬 > 𝑹
𝑬 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
22. Find the equivalent capacitance between P and Q ▪ Total charge ; 𝑄 = 𝑞1 + 𝑞2

for the configuration shown below in the figure. 𝑟1
𝑄 = 𝑞2 + 𝑞2
Solution :- 𝑟2
▪ In fig (i), 1 F, 3 F and 6 F, 2 F are in 𝑟1 + 𝑟2
𝑄 = 𝑞2 [ ]
parallel connection, then 𝑟2
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = 1 + 3 = 4 F 𝑟2 2 200 𝑋 10−9
∴ 𝑞2 = 𝑄 [ ] = 100 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 [ ]=
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = 6 + 2 = 8 F 𝑟1 + 𝑟2 8+2 10
▪ In fig (ii), 4 F, 4 F and 8 F, 8 F are in series connection, then 𝒒𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝑪 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒏𝑪
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 ▪ Thus, 𝑞1 = 𝑄 − 𝑞2 = 100𝑋10−9 − 20𝑋10−9 = (100 − 20)𝑋 10−9
= + = + = = ⟹ 𝐶𝑆 = 2 F ∴ 𝒒𝟏 = 𝟖𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝑪 = 𝟖𝟎 𝒏𝑪
𝐶𝑆 𝐶1 𝐶2 4 4 4 2
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 ▪ The electric charge density on sphere A is
= + = + = = ⟹ 𝐶𝑆 = 2 F 𝑞1 𝑞1 80 𝑋 10−9
𝐶𝑆 𝐶1 𝐶2 4 4 4 2 𝜎1 = = =
𝐴1 4 𝜋 𝑟12 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (8 𝑋10−2 )2
▪ In fig (iii), 2 F, 4 F are in parallel connection, then
80 𝑋 10−9 10 𝑋10−5
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = 2 + 4 = 6 F 𝜎1 = = = 9.96 𝑋10−2 𝑋10−5
So the equivalent capacitance between P and Q is = 𝟔 𝐅 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 64 𝑋 10−4 100.48
𝝈𝟏 = 𝟗. 𝟗𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝑪 𝒎−𝟐 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟗𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝒎−𝟐
▪ Thus the combination of capacitances in figure can be replaced by a single ▪ The electric charge density on sphere B is,
capacitance 6 μF as shown in fig (iv) 𝑞2 𝑞2 20 𝑋 10−9
𝜎2 = = =
𝐴2 4 𝜋 𝑟22 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (2 𝑋10−2 )2
20 𝑋10−9 20 𝑋10−5
𝜎2 = = = 3. 981 𝑋10−1 𝑋10−5
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 4 𝑋10−4 50.24
𝝈𝟐 = 𝟑. 𝟗𝟖𝟏 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝒎−𝟐
▪ Note that the surface charge density is greater on the smaller sphere compared
1
to the larger sphere (σ2 ≈ 4 σ1) which confirms that ; 𝜎 ∝
𝑟
▪ Since the potential on both spheres is the same, we have
1 𝑞1 80 𝑋 10−9
23. Two conducting spheres of radius r1 = 8 cm and r2 = 2 cm are separated by a 𝑽𝑨 = 𝑽𝑩 = = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = 90 𝑋 102 = 9000 𝑉 = 𝟗 𝒌𝑽
distance much larger than 8 cm and are 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 8 𝑋 10−2
connected by a thin conducting wire as 24. Dielectric strength of air is 3 × 106 V m–1. Suppose the radius of a hollow sphere
shown in the figure. A total charge of in the Van de Graff generator is R = 0.5 m, calculate the maximum potential
Q = +100 nC is placed on one of the difference created by this Van de Graaff generator.
spheres. After a fraction of a second, the Solution :- 𝐸𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑉 𝑚−1 ; 𝑅 = 0.5 𝑚 ; 𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ?
charge Q is redistributed and both the ▪ The electric field on the surface of the sphere is given by (by Gauss law)
spheres attain electrostatic equilibrium. 1 𝑄
𝑬𝒎𝒂𝒙 =
(a) Calculate the charge and surface charge density on each sphere. 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅2
(b) Calculate the potential at the surface of each sphere. ▪ So the maximum potential difference created is given by,
Solution :- 1 𝑄 1 𝑄 𝑅
(a) At electrostatic equilibrium, 𝑉𝐴 = 𝑉𝐵 𝑽𝒎𝒂𝒙 = = = 𝑬𝒎𝒂𝒙 𝑅
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅 𝑅
1 𝑞1 1 𝑞2 𝑽𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 3 𝑋 10 𝑋 0.5 = 1.5 𝑋 106 𝑉
6
=
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟2 𝑽𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕
𝑞1 𝑞2
=
𝑟1 𝑟2
𝑟1
𝑞1 = 𝑞2 − − − − − − (1) kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝑟2
EXERCISE PROBLEMS. ▪ Resultant force on ‘q’ along Y- axis

1. When two objects are rubbed with each other, approximately a charge of 50 nC 𝐹𝑦 = 𝐹1 (− 𝑗̂) + 𝐹2 s𝑖𝑛 45° (− 𝑗̂ ) + 𝐹5 𝑗̂ + 𝐹4 sin 45° 𝑗̂
can be produced in each object. Calculate the number of electrons that must be 1 1
transferred to produce this charge. 𝐹𝑦 = 𝐹1 𝑗̂ − 𝐹2 𝑗̂ + +𝐹5 𝑗̂ + 𝐹4 𝑗̂
√2 √2
Solution :- q = 50 nC = 50 X 10-9 C ; e = 1.6 X 10-19 C ; n=?
▪ Since, 𝐹1 = 𝐹2 = 𝐹4 = 𝐹5 = 𝐹, we get ⃗𝐹𝑦 = ⃗⃗0
▪ According to quantization of electric charges,
𝑞 =𝑛𝑒 ▪ Simillarly resultant force on ‘q’ along X- axis,
𝑞 50 𝑋 10−9 50 𝑋 1010 ⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹3 𝑖̂ + 𝐹2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 45° 𝑖̂ + 𝐹4 cos 45° 𝑖̂
∴ 𝑛= = = 1 1
𝑒 1.6 𝑋 10−19 1.6 ⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹3 𝑖̂ + 𝐹2 𝑖̂ + 𝐹4 𝑖̂
𝑛 = 3.125 𝑋 101 𝑋 1010 √2 √2
𝒏 = 𝟑𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒆𝒍𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 1 1
⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹3 𝑖̂ + 2 𝐹2 𝑖̂ = 𝐹 [1 + 2 ] 𝑖̂
√2 √2
2. The total number of electrons in the human body is typically in the order of ⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹 [1 + √2 ]𝑖̂
1028. Suppose, due to some reason, you and your friend lost 1% of this number
of electrons. Calculate the electrostatic force between you and your friend ▪ Thus total force on charge ‘q’,
separated at a distance of 1m. Compare this with your weight. Assume mass of 𝐹𝑡𝑜𝑡 = ⃗⃗⃗𝐹𝑋 = 𝐹 [1 + √2 ] 𝑖̂
each person is 60 kg and use point charge approximation. 𝟏 𝑸𝒒
⃗𝑭𝒕𝒐𝒕 = [𝟏 + √𝟐 ]𝒊̂
1 𝟒 𝝅 𝜺 𝒐 𝑹𝟐
Solution :- 𝑁 = 1028 ; 𝑛 = 1028 𝑋 1% = 1028 𝑋 = 1026 ; 𝑟 = 1 𝑚 ; 𝑚 = 60 𝑘𝑔
100
▪ Hence, total force on the charge ‘q’ acts along X-axis whose magnitude is,
▪ Charge on each person ; 𝑞 = 𝑛 𝑒 = 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 1019 = 1.6 𝑋 107 𝐶
28
𝟏 𝑸𝒒
▪ Then electrostatic force between them, 𝑭𝒕𝒐𝒕 = [𝟏 + √𝟐 ] 𝑵
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 1 𝑞2 𝟒 𝝅 𝜺 𝒐 𝑹𝟐
𝐹𝐸 = = 4. Suppose a charge +q on Earth’s surface and another +q charge is placed on the
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟 2 surface of the Moon. (a) Calculate the value of q required to balance the
(1.6 𝑋 107 )2 gravitational attraction between Earth and Moon (b) Suppose the distance
𝐹𝐸 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 2.56 𝑋 1014
1 between the Moon and Earth is halved, would the charge q change?
𝐹𝐸 = 𝟐𝟑. 𝟎𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 𝑵 (Take mE = 5.9 × 1024 kg, mM = 7.9 × 1022 kg)
▪ Weight of the person ; ; 𝑊 = 𝑚 𝑔 = 60 𝑋 9.8 = 588 𝑁 Solution :- 𝐺 = 6.67 𝑋 10−11 𝑁 𝑚2 𝑘𝑔−2 ; 𝑞 =?
▪ Hence the ratio of the force and the weight, , ▪ Let ‘R’ be the distance between earth and moon.
𝐹𝐸 23.04 𝑋 1023 ▪ Since the gravitational attraction is balanced by electrostatic force, 𝐹𝐸 = 𝐹𝐺
= = 3.918 𝑋10−2 𝑋1023 1 𝑞2 𝑚𝐸 𝑚𝑀 𝐺 𝑚𝐸 𝑚𝑀
𝑊 588
𝑭𝑬 =𝐺 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑞2 =
= 𝟑. 𝟗𝟏𝟖 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟏 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑅 2 𝑅 2 1
[ ]
𝑾 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜
3. Five identical charges Q are placed equidistant on a
semicircle as shown in the figure. Another point charge 𝐺 𝑚𝐸 𝑚𝑀 6.67 𝑋 10−11 𝑋 5.9 𝑋 1024 𝑋 7.9 𝑋 1022
∴ 𝑞= √ = √
q is kept at the centre of the circle of radius R. Calculate 1 9 𝑋 109
[ ]
the electrostatic force experienced by the charge q. 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜
Solution :-
6.67 𝑋 5.9 𝑋 7.9 𝑋 1026
▪ Let the forces acts on ‘q’ be ⃗𝐹1 , ⃗𝐹2 , ⃗𝐹3 , ⃗𝐹4 , ⃗𝐹5 𝑞= √
▪ Here the magnitudes of these forces must be same. (i.e) 9
𝐹1 = 𝐹2 = 𝐹3 = 𝐹4 = 𝐹5 = 𝐹 𝒒 = 𝟓. 𝟖𝟕𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟑 𝑪
▪ Here ⃗⃗𝐹2 and ⃗⃗𝐹4 are resolved into two perpendicular components. (i.e.) ▪ When the distance between earth and moon is halved, the
(1) 𝐹2 cos 45° 𝑖̂ & 𝐹2 s𝑖𝑛 45° (− 𝑗̂ ) charge ‘q’ remains the same, because the value of charge is
(2) 𝐹4 cos 45° 𝑖̂ & 𝐹4 sin 45° 𝑗̂ independent of the distance.
5. Draw the free body diagram for the following charges as shown in the figure (a), 7. A closed triangular box is kept in an
(b) and (c). electric field of magnitude
E = 2 × 103 N C–1 as shown in the
figure. Calculate the electric flux
through the (a) vertical rectangular
surface (b) slanted surface and (c)
entire surface.
Solution :-
(a) Vertical rectangular surface : (𝑙 = 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑏 = 5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝜃 = 0°)
Solution :-
Φ𝐸 = ∮ 𝐸 𝑑𝑠 cos 𝜃 = 𝐸 ∮ 𝑑𝑠 cos 0°
Φ𝐸 = 𝐸 𝐴 = 𝐸 𝑙 𝑏
Φ𝐸 = 2 𝑋 103 𝑋 15 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10−2 = 150 𝑋 10−1
𝚽𝑬 = 𝟏𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
(b) Slanted surface : (𝑙 = 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑥 ; 𝜃 = 60°)
5 5 5
sin 30 ° = ⟹ 𝑥 = = = 10 𝑐𝑚
𝑥 𝑠𝑖𝑛 30° 1
( )
2
1
Φ𝐸 = ∮ 𝐸 𝑑𝑠 cos 𝜃 = 𝐸 ∮ 𝑑𝑠 cos 60° = 𝐸 𝐴 [ ]
6. Consider an electron travelling with a 2
speed 𝒗𝟎 and entering into a uniform 1
Φ𝐸 = 𝐸𝑙𝑥
electric field ⃗𝑬 which is perpendicular 2
to 𝒗⃗⃗⃗ 𝟎 as shown in the Figure. Ignoring 2 𝑋 103 𝑋 15 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−2
Φ𝐸 =
gravity, obtain the electron’s 2
acceleration, velocity and position as 𝚽𝑬 = 𝟏𝟓 𝑵 𝒎𝟐 𝑪−𝟏
functions of time. (c) Entire surface :
Solution :- ▪ In the figure electric field lines enters through the vertical rectangular
(i) Acceleration : surface and leaves through the slanted surface. Also the closed surface
▪ From Newton’s second law ; ⃗𝐹 = 𝑚 𝑎 ⃗ contains no charge inside.
▪ In general the electric flux is negative if the electric field lines enter the closed
▪ Force experienced by the electron in the electric field ; 𝐹
⃗ = 𝑒𝐸
⃗
surface and positive if the electric field lines leave the closed surface. Thus the
▪ Thus 𝑚𝑎 = 𝑒𝐸 ⃗
total electric flux through entire surface is zero (i.e.) 𝚽𝑬 = − 𝟏𝟓 + 𝟏𝟓 = 𝟎
𝑒 𝐸⃗ 𝑒𝐸 8. The electrostatic potential is given as a function of x in figure (a) and (b).
𝑎 = = (−𝑗̂)
𝑚 𝑚 Calculate the corresponding electric fields in regions A, B, C and D. Plot the
𝒆𝑬 electric field as a function of x for the figure (b).
⃗ = −
𝒂 𝒋̂
𝒎
(ii) Velocity :
▪ From equation of motion ; ⃗𝑣 = ⃗⃗𝑢 + ⃗𝑎 𝑡
𝒆𝑬
⃗ = 𝒗𝟎 𝒊̂ −
𝒗 𝒕 𝒋̂
𝒎
(iii) Position :
1
▪ From equation of motion ; 𝑆 = 𝑢 ⃗ 𝑡 + 𝑎 𝑡2
2
𝟏 𝒆𝑬 𝟐
⃗𝑺 = 𝒗𝟎 𝒕 𝒊̂ −
𝟐 𝒎
𝒕 𝒋̂ kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
Solution :- Solution :-
Figure (a) : According to the relation between E and V we have ; 𝐸= −
𝑑𝑉 𝑑 = 0.6 𝑚𝑚 = 0.6 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐸 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑉 𝑚−1 ; 𝑑  = 1 𝑚𝑚 = 1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
𝑑𝑥 𝑉
▪ In region - A ; 𝑑𝑉 = 5 − 8 = − 3 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.2 − 0 = 0.2 (a) Let ‘V’ be the required potential difference, then ; 𝐸 =
𝑑
𝑑𝑉 (−3) 30 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑋 0.6 𝑋 10−3 = 1.8 𝑋 103
∴ 𝑬𝑨 = − = − = + = +𝟏𝟓 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏 𝑽 = 𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝑽
𝑑𝑥 0.2 2
▪ In region - B ; 𝑑𝑉 = 5 − 5 = 0 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.4 − 0.2 = 0.2 (b) Since potential difference is directly proportional to the separation (𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑), if
𝑑𝑉 0 separation increases, potential difference also increases.
∴ 𝑬𝑩 = − = − = 𝟎 𝑉
𝑑𝑥 0.2 (c) Let 𝑉 be the new potential difference, then ; 𝐸 =
▪ In region - C ; 𝑑𝑉 = 7 − 5 = 2 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.6 − 0.4 = 0.2 𝑑
𝑑𝑉 2 20 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−3 = 3 𝑋 103
∴ 𝑬𝑪 = − = − = − = − 𝟏𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏 𝑽 = 𝟑𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝑽
𝑑𝑥 0.2 2
▪ In region - D ; 𝑑𝑉 = 1 − 7 = − 6 ; 𝑑𝑥 = 0.8 − 0.6 = 0.2 10. A point charge of +10 μC is placed at a
𝑑𝑉 (−6) 60 distance of 20 cm from another identical
∴ 𝑬𝑫 = − = − = + = +𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏 point charge of +10 μC. A point charge of -2 μC
𝑑𝑥 0.2 2
Figure (b) : is moved from point a to b as shown in the
𝑑𝑉 30 figure. Calculate the change in potential
𝑑𝑥 = 1 − 0 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 30 − 0 = 30 ; 𝑬=− = − = −𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1 energy of the system? Interpret your result.
𝑑𝑉 (−30) Solution :-
𝑑𝑥 = 2 − 1 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 0 − 30 = −30 ; 𝑬=− = − = +𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1
𝑑𝑉
𝑑𝑥 = 3 − 2 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 0 − 0 = 0 ; 𝑬=− = 𝟎
𝑑𝑥
𝑑𝑉 (−30)
𝑑𝑥 = 4 − 3 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = −30 − 0 = −30 ; 𝑬 = − = − = +𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1
𝑑𝑉 30
𝑑𝑥 = 5 − 4 = 1 ; 𝑑𝑉 = 0 − (−3)0 = +30 ; 𝑬 = − = − = −𝟑𝟎 𝑽 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑥 1
𝑞1 = 𝑞2 = +10 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑞 = −2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟1 = 5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑟2 = 15 𝑐𝑚
𝑟1! = √52 + 52 = √50 = 5√2 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑟2!= √152 + 52 = √250 = 5√10 𝑐𝑚
▪ Initial potential energy, when −2 𝜇𝐶 is at ‘a’
1 𝑞1 𝑞 1 𝑞2 𝑞 1 𝑞1 𝑞 𝑞2 𝑞
𝑈𝑖 = + = [ + ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟2 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 𝑟2
1 1 1
𝑈𝑖 = 𝑞1 𝑞 [ + ] [∵ 𝑞1 = 𝑞2 ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1 𝑟2
1 1
𝑈𝑖 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (−2)𝑋 10−6 𝑋 [ −2
+ ]
5 𝑋 10 15 𝑋 10−2
9. A spark plug in a bike or a car is used to ignite the air-fuel mixture in the engine. 1 1 1
𝑈𝑖 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 [ + ] 𝑋
It consists of two electrodes separated by a gap of around 5 15 10−2
0.6 mm gap as shown in the figure. To create the spark, an 3+1 4 24
𝑈𝑖 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 [ ] = −18 𝑋 = −
electric field of magnitude 3 × 106 V m–1 is required. 15 15 5
(a) What potential difference must be applied to produce 𝑼𝒊 = − 𝟒. 𝟖 𝑱
the spark? (b) If the gap is increased, does the potential ▪ Final potential energy, when −2 𝜇𝐶 is at ‘b’
difference increase, decrease or remains the same? ▪ −2 𝜇𝐶 ä‹JfŸ b -æš cŸsnghJ ÏWÂ bkh¤j ä‹dG¤j M‰wš,
(c) find the potential difference if the gap is 1 mm. kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
1 𝑞1 𝑞 1 𝑞2 𝑞 1 𝑞1 𝑞 𝑞2 𝑞 Figure (c):
𝑈𝑓 = + = [ + ! ]
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1! 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟2! 4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 𝑟1!1 𝑟2 ▪ Since 𝐶𝑂 , 𝐶𝑂 and 𝐶𝑂 are in parallel,
1 1 1 𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂
𝑈𝑓 = 𝑞 𝑞 [ ! + !] [∵ 𝑞1 = 𝑞2 ] 𝑪𝑷 = 𝟑 𝑪𝑶
4 𝜋 𝜀𝑜 1 𝑟1 𝑟2
1 1 Figure (d):
𝑈𝑓 = 9 𝑋 109 𝑋 10 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (−2)𝑋 10−6 𝑋 [ + ] (1) Resultant capacitors across P and Q :
5√2 𝑋 10 −2 5√10 𝑋 10−2
1 1 1
𝑈𝑓 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 [ + ]𝑋
√2 √10 5 𝑋 10−2
1 1.023
𝑈𝑓 = − 9 𝑋 2 𝑋 [0.707 + 0.316] 𝑋 = −18 𝑋 = −18 𝑋 0.2046
5 5
𝑼𝒇 = − 𝟑. 𝟔𝟖𝟑 𝑱
▪ The change in potential energy ;
∆ 𝑈 = 𝑈𝑓 − 𝑈𝑓 = −3.683 − (−4.8) = −3. 683 + 4.8 = +𝟏. 𝟏𝟏𝟕 𝑱 ≈ +𝟏. 𝟏𝟐 𝑱
Here, 𝐶1 and 𝐶3 are in series,
▪ Positive sign implies that to move the charge –2μC external work is required. 1 1 1 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 𝐶1 𝐶3
11. Calculate the resultant capacitances for each of the following combinations of = + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆1 =
𝐶𝑆1 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶1 + 𝐶3
capacitors.
𝐶2 and 𝐶4 are in series,
1 1 1 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 𝐶2 𝐶4
= + = ⇒ 𝐶 𝑆2 =
𝐶 𝑆2 𝐶2 𝐶4 𝐶2 𝐶4 𝐶2 + 𝐶4
𝐶𝑆1 and 𝐶𝑆2 are in parallel
𝐶𝑃𝑄 = 𝐶𝑆1 + 𝐶𝑆2
𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶2 𝐶4
𝐶𝑃𝑄 = +
Solution :- 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 𝐶2 + 𝐶4
▪ Effective capacitance of capacitors in series, ( 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 ) 𝐶1 𝐶3 + ( 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 ) 𝐶2 𝐶4
1 1 1 1 𝐶𝑃𝑄 =
( 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 ) ( 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 )
= + + +⋯
𝐶𝑆 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 + 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶4 + 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶4 + 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶4
𝐶𝑃𝑄 =
▪ Effective capacitance of capacitors in series, ( 𝐶1 + 𝐶3 ) ( 𝐶2 + 𝐶4 )
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 + 𝐶 3 + ⋯ (2) Resultant capacitors across R and S :
Figure (a) :
▪ Since 𝐶𝑂 and 𝐶𝑂 are in parallel,
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂 = 2 𝐶𝑂
▪ Also, 𝐶𝑂 and 2 𝐶𝑂 are in series,
1 1 1 3 𝟐 𝑪𝒐
= + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑪𝑺 =
𝐶𝑆 𝐶𝑂 2 𝐶𝑜 2 𝐶𝑜 𝟑
Figure (b):
▪ Since 𝐶𝑂 and 𝐶𝑂 are in parallel, Here, 𝐶1 and 𝐶2 are in series,
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐶𝑂 = 2 𝐶𝑂 1 1 1 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 𝐶1 𝐶2
= + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆1 =
▪ Also, 2 𝐶𝑂 and 2 𝐶𝑂 are in series, 𝐶𝑆1 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶1 + 𝐶2
1 1 1 2 1 𝐶3 and 𝐶4 are in series,
= + = = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑪𝑺 = 𝑪𝒐 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 𝐶3 𝐶4
𝐶𝑆 2 𝐶𝑂 2 𝐶𝑜 2 𝐶𝑜 𝐶𝑜 1 1 1
= + = ⇒ 𝐶 𝑆2 =
𝐶 𝑆2 𝐶3
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝐶4 𝐶3 𝐶4 𝐶3 + 𝐶4
Thus 𝐶𝑆1 and 𝐶𝑆2 are in parallel ℎ =0+

1 𝑒𝐸 2
𝑡𝑒 =
1 𝑒𝐸 2
𝑡
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = 𝐶𝑆1 + 𝐶𝑆2 2 𝑚 2 𝑚 𝑒
𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶4 2𝑚ℎ
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = + (𝑜𝑟) 𝑡𝑒 2 =
𝐶1 + 𝐶2 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 𝑒𝐸
( 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 ) 𝐶1 𝐶2 + ( 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 ) 𝐶3 𝐶4 2𝑚ℎ 2 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 1 X 10−3
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = ∴ 𝑡𝑒 = √ = √
( 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 ) ( 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 ) 𝑒𝐸 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 5 𝑋 103
𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶3 + 𝐶1 𝐶2 𝐶4 + 𝐶1 𝐶3 𝐶4 + 𝐶2 𝐶3 𝐶4
𝐶𝑅𝑆 = 18.2 𝑋 10−18
( 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 ) ( 𝐶3 + 𝐶4 )
𝒕𝒆 = √ = √2. 275 𝑋 10−18 = 1.508 𝑋 10−9 𝑠
Figure (e) : 8
𝒕𝒆 ≈ 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒏 𝒔
𝐹 𝑒𝐸
Time of flight of proton : 𝑡 = 𝑡𝑃 ; 𝑆 = h ; u = 0 ; a = =
𝑚 𝑚
1 2
𝑆=𝑢𝑡+ 𝑎𝑡
2
1 𝑒𝐸 2 1 𝑒𝐸 2
ℎ=0+ 𝑡𝑃 = 𝑡
2 𝑚 2 𝑚 𝑒
2𝑚ℎ
∴ 𝑡𝑃 2 =
Here, 𝐶0 and 𝐶0 are in series, 𝑒𝐸
1 1 1 2 𝐶𝑂
= + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆1 = 2𝑚ℎ 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−27 𝑋 1 X 10−3
𝐶𝑆1 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 2 𝑡𝑃 = √ = √
𝑒𝐸 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 5 𝑋 103
Also, 𝐶0 and 𝐶0 are in series,
1 1 1 2 𝐶𝑂
= + = ⇒ 𝐶𝑆2 = 2 𝑋 10−14
𝐶𝑆2 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 2 𝑡𝑃 = √ = √0.4 𝑋 10−14
5
Thus, 𝐶𝑆1 , 𝐶𝑆2 and 𝐶0 are in parallel,
𝐶𝑂 𝐶𝑂 𝑡𝑃 = √40 𝑋 10−16
𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶𝑆1 + 𝐶𝑆2 + 𝐶𝑂 = + + 𝐶𝑂 𝑡𝑃 = 6. 325 𝑋 10−8 = 63.25 𝑋 10−9 𝑠
2 2
𝑪𝑷 = 𝟐 𝑪𝑶 𝒕𝑷 ≈ 𝟔𝟑 𝒏 𝒔
12. An electron and a proton are allowed to fall through the separation between the (b) Time of flight of neutron ; 𝑡 = 𝑡𝑛 ; 𝑆 = h ; u = 0 ; a = 𝑔
plates of a parallel plate capacitor of voltage 5 V and separation distance 1
𝑆 = 𝑢 𝑡 + 𝑎 𝑡2
h = 1 mm as shown in the figure. (a) Calculate the time of flight for both electron 2
and proton (b) Suppose if a neutron is allowed to fall, what is the time of flight? 1 1
ℎ=0+ 𝑔 𝑡𝑛 2 = 𝑔 𝑡𝑛 2
(c) Among the three, which one will reach the bottom first? 2 2
2ℎ
∴ 𝑡𝑛 2 =
𝑔
2ℎ 2 𝑋 1 X 10−3
𝑡𝑛 = √ = √
𝑔 10
2 𝑋 10−3
(Take mp = 1.6 × 10–27 kg, me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg and g = 10 m s–2) 𝑡𝑛 = √ = √2 𝑋 10−4 = 1. 414 𝑋 10−2
𝑉 5
10
Solution :- h = 1 mm = 1 X 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝑉 = 5 𝑉 ; 𝐸 = = −3 = 5 𝑋 103 𝑁𝐶 −1
ℎ 10 𝒕𝒏 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒔 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝒎 𝒔
𝐹 𝑒𝐸
(a) Time of flight of electron ; 𝑡 = 𝑡𝑒 ; 𝑆 = h ; u=0 ; a= = (c) Since, 𝒕𝒆 < 𝒕𝑷 < 𝒕𝒏 , out of three, electron reach first..
𝑚 𝑚
1
𝑆 = 𝑢 𝑡 + 𝑎 𝑡2 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
2
13. During a thunder storm, the movement (b) Potential difference across each capacitor :
of water molecules within the clouds 𝑉 9 𝑉 9
creates friction, partially causing the 𝑽𝒂 = = = 𝟑 𝑽 ; 𝑽𝒃 = = = 𝟑 𝑽
3 3 3 3
bottom part of the clouds to become 𝑉 9 𝑉 9
negatively charged. This implies that the 𝑽𝒄 = = =𝟑𝑽 ; 𝑽𝒅 = = = 𝟑 𝑽
3 3 3 3
bottom of the cloud and the ground act as (c) Energy stored in each capacitor ;
a parallel plate capacitor. If the electric 1 1
field between the cloud and ground 𝑼𝒂 = 𝐶𝑎 𝑉𝑎2 = 𝑋 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 36 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟑𝟔 𝝁 𝑱
2 2
exceeds the dielectric breakdown of the 1 1
2
air (3 × 10 Vm ), lightning will occur.
6 –1 𝑼𝒃 = 𝐶𝑏 𝑉𝑏 = 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 27 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟐𝟕 𝝁 𝑱
2 2
(a) If the bottom part of the cloud is 1000 m above the ground, determine 1 1
the electric potential difference that exists between the cloud and 𝑼𝒄 = 𝐶𝑐 𝑉𝑐 = 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 9 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟗 𝝁 𝑱
2
2 2
ground. 1 1
2
(b) In a typical lightning phenomenon, around 25 C of electrons are 𝑼𝒅 = 𝐶𝑑 𝑉𝑑 = 𝑋 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 32 = 36 𝑋 10−6 𝐽 = 𝟑𝟔 𝝁 𝑱
2 2
transferred from cloud to ground. How much electrostatic potential 15. Capacitors P and Q have identical
energy is transferred to the ground? cross sectional areas A and
Solution :- 𝑬 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑉 𝑚−1 ; 𝑑 = 1000 𝑚 ; 𝑞 = 25 𝐶 separation d. The space between
𝑉
(a) Formula for electric field ; 𝐸 = the capacitors is filled with a
𝑑
Hence the potential difference ; 𝑉 = 𝐸 𝑑 = 3 𝑋 106 𝑋 1000 = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑽 dielectric of dielectric constant er
(b) Since the electrostatic potential energy is the amount of work done, then as shown in the figure. Calculate the
9
𝑊 = 𝑞 𝑉 = 25 𝑋 3 𝑋 10 = 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑱 𝟗 capacitance of capacitors P and Q.
14. For the given capacitor configuration (a) Find the Solution :-
charges on each capacitor (b) potential difference
across them (c) energy stored in each capacitor.
Solution :- 𝐶𝑎 = 8 𝜇𝐹 ; 𝐶𝑏 = 6 𝜇𝐹 ; 𝐶𝑐 = 2 𝜇𝐹 ;
𝐶𝑑 = 8 𝜇𝐹 ; 𝑉 = 9 𝑉
▪ Here, 𝐶𝑏 and 𝐶𝑐 are in parellel,
𝐶𝑏𝑐 = 𝐶𝑏 + 𝐶𝑐 = 6 + 2 = 8 𝜇 𝐹 (1) Capacitor 𝑷 : Here two capacitors are connected in parallel. They are,
▪ Effective capacitance of this series connection, 𝐴 𝐴
1 1 1 1 3 8 𝜀𝑜 [ ] 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 [ ]
= + + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝐶𝑠 = 𝜇𝐹 𝐶1 = 2 = & 𝐶2 = 2 = 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴
𝐶𝑠 8 8 8 8 3 𝑑 2𝑑 𝑑 2𝑑
▪ Net charge on this series ciruit ; ▪ Thus effective capacitance in parallel combination,
8 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜺𝒐 𝑨
𝑄 = 𝐶𝑠 𝑉 = 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 9 = 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝐶𝑃 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = + = (𝟏 + 𝜺𝒓 )
3 2𝑑 2𝑑 𝟐𝒅
(a) Charges on each capacitor : (2) Capacitor 𝑸 : Here two capacitors are connected in series. They are
▪ Since 𝐶𝑎 = 𝐶𝑏𝑐 = 𝐶𝑑 , potential difference across them also equal (i.e.) 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀𝑟 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀𝑜 𝐴
𝐶1 = = & 𝐶2 = =
𝑉 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑
𝑉𝑎 = 𝑉𝑏𝑐 = 𝑉𝑑 = 3 = 3 𝑉 [ ]
2
[ ]
2
▪ Thus charges on each capacitor ; ▪ Thus effective capacitance in series combination,
𝒒𝒂 = 𝐶𝑎 𝑉𝑎 = 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3 = 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 1 1 1 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 1 𝑑 1 + 𝜀𝑟
−6 −𝟔
= + = + = [ + 1] = [ ]
𝒒𝒃 = 𝐶𝑏 𝑉𝑏𝑐 = 6 𝑋 10 𝑋 3 = 𝟏𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑪 𝐶 𝑄 𝐶 1 𝐶 2 2 𝜀 𝜀
𝑟 𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀 𝑜 𝐴 2 𝜀 𝑜 𝐴 𝜀 𝑟 2 𝜀 𝑜 𝐴 𝜀𝑟
𝒒𝒄 = 𝐶𝑐 𝑉𝑏𝑐 = 2 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3 = 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝟐 𝜺𝒐 𝑨 𝜺𝒓
∴ 𝑪𝑸 = [
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com ]
𝒒𝒅 = 𝐶𝑑 𝑉𝑑 = 8 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3 = 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑪 𝒅 𝟏 + 𝜺𝒓
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -2
CURRENT ELECTRICITY

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 6. The resistance of a wire is 20 Ω. What will be new resistance, if it is stretched
1. Compute the current in the wire if a charge of 120 C is flowing through a copper uniformly 8 times its original length?
wire in 1 minute. Solution :- 𝑅1 = 20 Ω ; 𝑙1 = 𝑙 ; 𝑙2 = 8 𝑙 ; 𝑅2 = ?
Solution :- 𝑡 = 1 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 60 𝑠 ; 𝑞 = 120 𝐶 ; 𝐼 = ?  Though the wire is stretched, its volume remains unchanged.(i.e.)
 By definition, electric current (i.e.) rate of flow of charge is given by, Initial volume = final volume
𝑞 120 𝐴1 𝑙1 = 𝐴2 𝑙2
𝐼= = =𝟐𝑨 𝐴1 𝑙 = 𝐴2 (8 𝑙)
𝑡 60
2. If an electric field of magnitude 570 N C–1, is applied in the copper wire, find the 𝐴2 1
= − − − − − − (1)
acceleration experienced by the electron. 𝐴1 8
Solution :- 𝐸 = 570 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 𝑚 = 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑎 = ? 𝑙1
 Initial resistance ; 𝑅1 = 𝜌
 From Newton’s second law, force is given by ; 𝐹 = 𝑚 𝑎 𝐴1
 Hence the acceleration,  New resistance ; 𝑅2 = 𝜌 2
𝑙
𝐹 𝑒𝐸 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 570 912 𝐴2
𝑎= = = −31
= 𝑋 1012 = 100.1 𝑋 1012  Hence the ratio ;
𝑅1
=
𝑙1 𝐴2
=
𝐴1 𝑙1
=
1
𝑋
𝑙
=
1
𝑚 𝑚 9.1 𝑋 10 9.1 𝑅2 𝐴1 𝑙2 𝐴1 𝑙2 8 8𝑙 64
𝒂 = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟎𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒎 𝒔−𝟐 ∴ 𝑅2 = 64 𝑅1 = 64 𝑋 20 = 𝟏𝟐𝟖𝟎 𝛀
3. A copper wire of cross-sectional area 0.5 mm2 carries a current of 0.2 A. If the
 Hence, stretching the length of the wire has increased its resistance.
free electron density of copper is 8.4 × 1028 m–3 then compute the drift velocity
7. Consider a rectangular block of metal of height A, width B and length C as shown
of free electrons.
in the figure. If a potential difference of V is
Solution :- 𝐴 = 0.5 𝑚𝑚2 = 0.5 𝑋 10−6 𝑚2 ; 𝐼 = 0.2 𝐴 ; 𝑛 = 8.4 𝑋 1028 𝑚−3 applied between the two faces A and B of the
 The relation between drift velocity of electrons and current in a wire of cross- block [figure (a)], the current IAB is observed.
sectional area A is ; 𝐼 = 𝑛 𝐴 𝑒 𝑣𝑑 Find the current that flows if the same
𝐼
 Hence, the drift velocity ; 𝑣𝑑 = potential difference V is applied between the
𝑛𝐴𝑒
0.2 0.2 𝑋 10−3 two faces B and C of the block [figure (b)].
𝑣𝑑 = = Give your answers in terms of IAB.
8.4 𝑋 1028 𝑋 0.5 𝑋10−6 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 6.72
Solution :-
𝒗𝒅 = 2.976 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 10−3 = 2.976 𝑋 10−5 𝑚 𝑠−1
 ln first case ; length =C and area = AB. Hence resistance and current
𝒗𝒅 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟐𝟗𝟕𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 ≈ 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝐶
4. Determine the number of electrons flowing per second through a conductor, 𝑅𝐴𝐵 = 𝜌 = 𝜌
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝐴𝐵
when a current of 32 A flows through it. 𝑉 𝑉 𝑉 (𝐴𝐵)
Solution :- 𝐼 = 32 𝐴 ; 𝑡 = 1 𝑠 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 ; 𝑛 = ? 𝐼𝐴𝐵 = =
𝐶
= − − − − (1)
𝑞 𝑛𝑒 𝑅𝐴𝐵 [𝜌 ] 𝜌𝐶
 By definition, current (rate of flow of charge) is given by ; 𝐼 = = 𝐴𝐵
𝑡 𝑡
 Hence the number of electrons flowing per second ;  ln second case ; length =A and area = BC. Hence resistance and current
𝐼𝑡 32 𝑋 1 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝐴
𝒏= = = 20 𝑋 1019 = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 𝒆𝒍𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝑅𝐵𝐶 = 𝜌 = 𝜌
𝑒 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝐵𝐶
𝑉 𝑉 𝑉 (𝐵𝐶)
5. A potential difference across 24 Ω resistor is 12 V. What is the current through 𝐼𝐵𝐶 = = = − − − − (2)
the resistor? 𝑅𝐵𝐶 𝐴 𝜌𝐴
[𝜌 ]
𝐵𝐶
Solution :- R = 24  ; V = 12 V ; I=?  Divide equation (2) by (1), we get
 From Ohm’s law; 𝐼𝐵𝐶 [𝑉 (𝐵𝐶)/𝜌 𝐴] 𝑉 (𝐵𝐶) 𝜌𝐶 𝐶2
𝑉 12 1 = = 𝑋 = 2
𝐼= = = 𝐼𝐴𝐵 [𝑉 (𝐴𝐵)/𝜌 𝐶] 𝜌𝐴 𝑉 (𝐴𝐵) 𝐴
𝑅 24 2 𝑪𝟐
𝑰 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨 𝑰𝑩𝑪 = 𝟐 𝑰𝑨𝑩
𝑨
 Since 𝐶 > 𝐴 , the current 𝑰𝑩𝑪 > 𝑰𝑨𝑩
8. Calculate the equivalent resistance for the circuit 11. Calculate the equivalent resistance between A and B in the given circuit.
which is connected to 24 V battery and also find the
potential difference across each resistors in the
circuit.
Solution :- 𝑅1 = 4 Ω ; 𝑅2 = 6 Ω ; V = 24 V
 Effective resistance in series circuit,
𝑹𝑺 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 = 4 + 6 = 𝟏𝟎 𝛀
𝑉 24 Solution :- 𝑅𝐴𝐵 = ?
 From Ohm’s law, current in the circuit ; 𝐼= = = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝑨
𝑹𝑺 10  Here, 2  and 2  , 4  and 4 , 6  and 6  are in parallel, then
 Hence voltage across the resistors, 1 1 1
= + = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃1 = 1 Ω
𝑉1 = 𝐼 𝑅1 = 2.4 𝑋 4 = 𝟗. 𝟔 𝑽 𝑅𝑃1 2 2
𝑉2 = 𝐼 𝑅2 = 2.4 𝑋 6 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟒 𝑽 1 1 1 1
= + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃2 = 2 Ω
9. Calculate the equivalent resistance in the following 𝑅𝑃2 4 4 2
circuit and also find the values of current I, I1 and I2 in 1 1 1 2 6
the given circuit. = + = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃2 = = 3 Ω
𝑅𝑃3 6 6 6 2
Solution :- 𝑅1 = 4 Ω ; 𝑅2 = 6 Ω ; V = 24 V  Thus the above circuit becomes,
 Effective resistance in parallel circuit,
1 1 1 1 1 6+4 10 1
= + = + = = =
𝑅𝑃 𝑅1 𝑅2 4 6 24 24 2.4
(or) 𝑹𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝛀  Here, 1 , 2  and 3  are in series, then the
 Then current flows through the resistors, effective resistance becomes,
𝑉 24 𝑅𝐴𝐵 = 𝑅𝑃1 + 𝑅𝑃2 + 𝑅𝑃3 = 1 + 2 + 3
𝐼1 = = =𝟔𝑨
𝑹𝟏 4 𝑹𝑨𝑩 = 𝟔 𝛀
𝑉 24 12. Five resistors are connected in the configuration as shown in the figure.
𝐼2 = = = 𝟒𝑨
𝑹𝟐 6 Calculate the equivalent resistance between the points a and b.
 The current I is the sum of the currents in the two branches. Then Solution :-
𝑰 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 = 6 + 4 = 𝟏𝟎 𝑨  Let us assume that a current is entering
10. Two resistors when connected in series and parallel, their equivalent the junction at a.
resistances are 15 Ω and
𝟓𝟔
Ω respectively. Find the values of the resistances.  Since all the resistances in the outside
𝟏𝟓 loop are the same (1Ω), the current in the
56
Solution :- 𝑅𝑆 = 15 Ω ; 𝑅𝑃 = Ω ; 𝑅1 = ? ; 𝑅2 = ? branches ac and ad must be equal. Hence
15
 Effective resistance in series circuit ; 𝑹𝑺 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 the points C and D are at the same
15 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 − − − − − − − − − (1) potential and no current through 5 Ω.
1 1 1 𝑅 +𝑅  It implies that the 5 Ω has no role in
 Effective resistance in parallel circuit ; = + = 1 2
𝑅𝑃 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑅1 𝑅2 determining the equivalent resistance
15 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 15 and it can be removed. So the circuit is
= = [∵ 𝑏𝑦 𝑒𝑞𝑛 (1)]
56 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑅1 𝑅2 simplified as shown in the figure.
∴ 56 = 𝑅1 𝑅2 − − − − − − − − (2)
 From equation (1) & (2) ; 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 = 15 and 𝑅1 𝑅2 = 56, we get
𝑅1 = 7 & 𝑅2 = 8 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅1 = 8 & 𝑅2 = 7
 If 𝑅1 = 7 then, 𝑅2 = 15 − 𝑅1 = 15 − 7 = 8 . So 𝑹𝟏 = 𝟕 𝛀 ; 𝑹𝟐 = 𝟖 𝛀
 If 𝑅1 = 8 then, 𝑅2 = 15 − 𝑅1 = 15 − 8 = 7 . So 𝑹𝟏 = 𝟖 𝛀 ; 𝑹𝟐 = 𝟕 𝛀
 Effective resistance in series connection is, 16. Two electric bulbs marked 20 W – 220 V and 100
𝑹𝑺𝟏 = 𝑅𝑎𝑐 + 𝑅𝑐𝑏 = 1 + 1 = 2 Ω W – 220 V are connected in series to 440 V supply.
𝑹𝑺𝟐 = 𝑅𝑎𝑑 + 𝑅𝑑𝑏 = 1 + 1 = 2 Ω Which bulb will get fused?
 Effective resistance in parallel connection is, Solution :-
1 1 1 1 1  To check which bulb will get fused, the voltage
= + = + =1
𝑅𝑎𝑏 𝑅𝑆1 𝑅𝑆2 2 2 drop across each bulb has to be calculated.
𝑹𝒂𝒃 = 𝟏 𝛀 𝑉2
13. If the resistance of coil is 3 Ω at 200 C and α = 0.004/0C then determine its  The power delivered by the battery ; 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 =
𝑅
resistance at 100 0C.  Hence the resistance of the bulbs,
Solution :- 𝑇𝑜 = 20 𝐶 ; 𝑇 = 100  𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 3 Ω ; 𝑅𝑇 = ? 𝑉1 2 2202 48400
𝑅1 = = = = 2420 Ω
 Resistance at 𝑇 𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅𝑜 [1 + 𝛼 (𝑇 − 𝑇𝑜 )] 𝑃1 20 20
𝑅𝑇 = 3 [ 1 + 0.004 (100 − 20)] = 3 [1 + 0.004 𝑋 80] 𝑉2 2 2202 48400
𝑅2 = = = = 484 Ω
𝑅𝑇 = 3 [ 1 + 0.32] = 3 𝑋 1.32 𝑃2 100 100
𝑹𝑻 = 𝟑. 𝟗𝟔 𝛀  The two bulbs are connected in series, effective resistance
14. Resistance of a material at 200C and 400C are 45 Ω and 85 Ω respectively. Find 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 2420 + 484 = 2904 Ω
its temperature coefficient of resistivity.  When the bulbs are connected in series, the current passing
Solution :- 𝑇𝑜 = 20 𝐶 ; 𝑇 = 40 𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 45 Ω ; 𝑅𝑇 = 85 Ω ; α = ? through each bulb is the same and it is given by,
 The temperature coefficient of resistivity is 𝑉 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 220 + 220 440
𝐼= = = = 𝐴
1 Δ𝑅 1 (𝑅𝑇 − 𝑅𝑜 ) 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 2904 2904
𝛼 = 𝑅 Δ 𝑇 = 𝑅 ( 𝑇− 𝑇 ) −1
𝑜 𝑜 𝑜 𝐼 = 1.515 𝑋 10 𝐴 = 0. 1515 𝐴
𝛼=
1 (85−45)
𝑋 (40−20) =
1
𝑋
40
=
1
𝑋2  The voltage drop across the 20W bulb is
45 45 20 45 𝑉1 = 𝐼 𝑅1 = 0.1515 𝑋 2420 = 3.667 𝑋 102 = 𝟑𝟔𝟔. 𝟕 𝑽
𝜶 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟒𝟒 / 𝑪  The voltage drop across the 100W bulb is
15. A battery of voltage V is connected to 30 W bulb and 𝑉2 = 0.1515 𝑋 484 = 7. 333 𝑋 101 = 𝟕𝟑. 𝟑𝟑 𝑽
60 W bulb as shown in the figure. (a) Identify  The 20 W bulb will get fused because the voltage across it is more than the
brightest bulb (b) which bulb has greater voltage rating.
resistance? (c) Suppose the two bulbs are connected 17. A battery has an emf of 12 V and connected to a resistor of 3 Ω. The current in
in series, which bulb will glow brighter?
the circuit is 3.93 A. Calculate (a) terminal voltage and the internal resistance
Solution :- 𝑃1 = 30 𝑊 ; 𝑃2 = 60 𝑊
of the battery (b) power delivered by the battery and power delivered to the
(a) The power delivered by the battery ; 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 .
resistor
Since the bulbs are connected in parallel, the voltage
Solution :- I = 3.93 A ; 𝜖 = 12 V ; R = 3 Ω
drop across each bulb is the same. If the voltage is kept fixed, then the power is
(a) The terminal voltage of the battery is equal to voltage drop across the resistor
directly proportional to current (P ∝ I). Since 𝑃1 < 𝑃2 , we have 𝐼1 < 𝐼2 . So 60
𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 3.93 𝑋 3 = 𝟏𝟏. 𝟕𝟗 𝑽
W bulb draws twice as much as current as 30 W and hence 60 W bulb will glow
Internal resistance of the battery,
brighter than 30 W bulb. 𝜖−𝑉 12 − 11.79
𝑉2 1 𝑟= [ ]𝑅 = [ ] 𝑋3
(b) The power delivered by the battery ; 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 = . Hence 𝑃  𝑉 11.79
𝑅 𝑅 0.21𝑋 3 0.63
Since 𝑃1 < 𝑃2 , we have 𝑅1 > 𝑅2 . It implies that, the 30W has twice as much as 𝒓 = = = 5.341 𝑋 10−2 Ω = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟓𝟑𝟒𝟏 𝛀
11.79 11.79
resistance as 60 W bulb. (b) The power delivered by the battery,
(c) When the bulbs are connected in series, the current passing through each bulb is 𝑃 = ∈ 𝐼 = 12 𝑋 3.93 = 47.16 𝑊
the same. It is equivalent to two resistors connected in series. The bulb which has The power delivered to the resistor
higher resistance has higher voltage drop. So 30W bulb will glow brighter than 𝑃 = 𝑉 𝐼 = 11.79 𝑋 3.93 = 46.33 𝑊
60W bulb. So the higher power rating does not always imply more brightness and The remaining power P = 47.16 − 46.33 = 𝟎. 𝟖𝟑 𝑾 is delivered to the internal
it depends whether bulbs are connected in series or parallel. kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
resistance and cannot be used to do useful work. (It is equal to 𝐼2 𝑟).
18. From the given circuit, Find 21. The following figure shows a complex network of
(a) Equivalent emf of the combination conductors which can be divided into two closed
(b) Equivalent internal resistance loops like EACE and ABCA.
(c) Total current Solution :-
(d) Potential difference across external  Apply Kirchhoff’s voltage rule (KVR) in EACE
resistance ∑𝐼 𝑅 = ∑ ∈
(e) Potential difference across each cell 𝐼1 𝑅1 + 𝐼2 𝑅2 + 𝐼3 𝑅3 = ∈
Solution :- 𝑛 = 4; ∈= 9𝑉; 𝑟 = 0.1 Ω  Apply Kirchhoff’s voltage rule (KVR) in ABCA
∑𝐼 𝑅 = ∑ ∈
(a) Equivalent emf of the combination ; ∈𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑛 ∈ = 4 𝑋 9 = 𝟑𝟔 𝑽
𝐼4 𝑅4 + 𝐼5 𝑅5 − 𝐼3 𝑅3 = 0
(b) Equivalent internal resistance ; 𝒓𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑛 𝑟 = 4 𝑋 0.1 = 𝟎. 𝟒 𝛀 22. Calculate the current that flows in the 1 Ω resistor in the following circuit.
(c) Total current ;
𝑛 ∈ 4𝑋9
𝐼= =
𝑅+𝑛𝑟 10 + 4 𝑋 0.1
36 36
𝑰 = = = 𝟑. 𝟒𝟔𝟐 𝑨
10 + 0.4 10.4
(d) Potential difference across external resistance ; 𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 3.462 𝑋 10 = 𝟑𝟒. 𝟔𝟐 𝑽
𝑉 34.62
(e) Potential difference across each cell ; 𝐯 = = = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟓𝟓 𝑽
4 4
19. From the given circuit. Find Solution :-
(a) Equivalent emf  We can denote the current that flows from 9V battery as I1 and it splits up into I2
(b) Equivalent internal resistance and (I1 – I2) at the junction E according Kirchhoff ’s current rule (KCR).
(c) Total current (I)  Now consider the loop EADFE and apply KVR, we get
(d) Potential difference across each cell ∑𝐼𝑅 = ∑ ∈
(e) Current from each cell 3 (𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) − 𝐼2 = 6
Solution :- 3 𝐼1 − 3 𝐼2 − 𝐼2 = 6
(a) Equivalent emf ; ∈𝒕𝒐𝒕 = ∈ = 𝟓 𝑽 3 𝐼1 − 4 𝐼2 = 6 − − − − − − (1)
𝑟 0.5  Now consider the loop EFCBE and apply KVR, we get
(b) Equivalent internal resistance ; 𝒓𝒕𝒐𝒕 = = = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝛀
𝑛 4 ∑𝐼𝑅 = ∑ ∈
∈ 5
(c) Total current ; 𝐼 = 𝑟 = 0.5 𝐼2 + 3 𝐼1 + 2 𝐼1 = 9
𝑅+ 10+
𝑛 4 5 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 = 9 − − − − − − (2)
5 5 (2) 𝑋 4 ⇒ 20 𝐼1 + 4 𝐼2 = 36 − − − − − − (3)
𝐼= =
10 + 0.125 10.125  (1) + (3) ⇒ 23 𝐼1 = 42
𝑰 = 4. 939 𝑋 10−1 𝐴 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟗𝟑𝟗 𝑨 ≈ 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨 42
(d) Potential difference across each cell ; 𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 0.5 𝑋 10 = 𝟓 𝑽 𝑰𝟏 = = 𝟏. 𝟖𝟐𝟔 𝑨
23
I
(e) Current from each cell ; 𝑰𝟏 = =
0.5
= 𝟎. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑨  Put , 𝐼1 = 1.826 in equation (1)
n 4 3 (1.826) − 4 𝐼2 = 6
20. For the given circuit find the value of I. 5.478 − 4 𝐼2 = 6
Solution :- −4 𝐼2 = 6 − 5.478 = 0.522
▪ From Kirchoff’s first law, at junction P ; ∑ 𝐼 = 0 (𝑜𝑟) 4 𝐼2 = −0.522
0.2 + (−0.4) + 0.6 + (−0.5) + 0.7 + (−𝐼) = 0 0.522
0.2 − 0.4 + 0.6 − 0.5 + 0.7 − 𝐼 = 0 𝑰𝟐 = − = − 𝟎. 𝟏𝟑𝟎𝟓 𝑨
4
∴ 𝐼 = 0.2 − 0.4 + 0.6 − 0.5 + 0.7  It implies that the current in the 1  resistor flows from F to E.
𝑰 = 𝟏. 𝟓 − 𝟎. 𝟗 = 𝟎. 𝟔 𝑨
23. In a Wheatstone’s bridge P = 100 Ω, Q = 1000 Ω and R = 40 Ω. If the galvanometer 28. An electric heater of resistance 10 Ω connected to 220 V power supply is
shows zero deflection, determine the value of S. immersed in the water of 1 kg. How long the electrical heater has to be switched
Solution :- on to increase its temperature from 30°C to 60°C. (Specific heat capacity of
 From the balanced condition of Wheatstone’s bridge, water is s = 4200 J kg–1 K–1)
𝑃 𝑅 Solution :- R = 10 Ω ; V = 220 V ; m = 1 kg ; 𝑇1 = 30C ; 𝑇2 = 60C ; t = ?
= 𝑉2
𝑄 𝑆  From Joule’s law of heating ; 𝐻 = 𝐼2 𝑅 𝑡 = 𝑡
𝑅
𝑅𝑄 40 𝑋 1000
𝑺= = = 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝛀  Heat absorbed by the water ; 𝐻 = 𝑚 𝑠 Δ𝑇 = 𝑚 𝑠 (𝑇2 − 𝑇1 )
𝑃 100  Here, heat produced by the heater in time ‘t’ is equal to the heat absorbed by the
24. What is the value of x when the Wheatstone’s network is balanced?
water to increase its temperature (i.e.)
Solution :- P = 500 Ω, Q = 800 Ω, R = x + 400, S = 1000 Ω
𝑉2
 From the balanced condition of Wheatstone’s bridge, 𝑡 = 𝑚 𝑠 (𝑇2 − 𝑇1 )
𝑃 𝑅 𝑅
= 𝑅
𝑄 𝑆 𝑡 = 2 𝑚 𝑠 (𝑇2 − 𝑇1 )
𝑉
500 𝑥 + 400 10
= 𝑡= 𝑋 1 𝑋 4200 𝑋 (60 − 30)
800 1000 2202
5 𝑥 + 400 10
= 𝑡= 𝑋 4200 𝑋 30
8 1000 220 𝑋 220
5000 = 8 (𝑥 + 400) 4200 𝑋 3 12600
5000 = 8 𝑥 + 3200 𝑡= = = 2.604 𝑋 101
22 𝑋 22 484
8 𝑥 = 5000 − 3200 = 1800 𝒕 = 𝟐𝟔. 𝟎𝟒 𝒔
1800
𝒙 = = 𝟐𝟐𝟓 𝛀
8
25. In a meter bridge experiment with a standard resistance of 15 Ω in the right gap,
the ratio of balancing length is 3:2. Find the value of the other resistance.
Solution :- Q = 15 Ω ; 𝑙1 ∶ 𝑙2 = 3 ∶ 2 ; 𝑃 = ?
𝑃 𝑙1
𝑄 𝑙2
𝑙1 3 45
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑃=𝑄 = 15 𝑋 =
𝑙2 2 2
𝑷 = 𝟐𝟐. 𝟓 𝛀
26. In a meter bridge experiment, the value of resistance in the resistance box
connected in the right gap is 10 Ω. The balancing length is l1 = 55 cm. Find the
value of unknown resistance.
Solution :- Q = 10 Ω ; 𝑙1 = 55 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑙2 = 100 − 𝑙1 = 45 𝑐𝑚 ; P = ?
𝑃 𝑙1
𝑄 𝑙2
𝑙1 55 550
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑃=𝑄 = 10 𝑋 =
𝑙2 45 45
𝑷 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟐𝟐 𝛀
27. Find the heat energy produced in a resistance of 10 Ω when 5 A current flows
through it for 5 minutes.
Solution :- R = 10 Ω ; 𝐼 = 5 𝐴 ; 𝑡 = 5 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 300 𝑠 ; 𝐻 = ?
 From Joule’s law of heating,
𝐻 = 𝐼 2 𝑅 𝑡 = 52 𝑋 10 𝑋 300 = 25 𝑋 3000 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝑯 = 𝟕𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝑱 = 𝟕𝟓 𝒌 𝑱
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. A copper wire of 10–6 m2 area of cross section, carries a current of 2 A. If the
1. The following graphs represent the current versus voltage and voltage versus number of free electrons per cubic meter in the wire is 8 × 10 28, calculate the
current for the six conductors A,B,C,D,E and F. Which conductor has least current density and average drift velocity of electrons.
resistance and which has maximum resistance? Solution :- 𝐴 = 10−6 𝑚2 ; 𝐼 = 2 𝐴 ; 𝑛 = 8 𝑋 1028 ; 𝐽 = ? ; 𝑣𝑑 = ?
 Current density ;
𝐼 2
𝑱= = = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝑨 𝒎−𝟐
𝐴 10−6
 Aveage drift velocity ;
𝐼 𝐽
𝑣𝑑 = =
𝑛𝐴𝑒 𝑛𝑒
2 𝑋 106 1
𝑣𝑑 = 28 −19
= 𝑋 10−3
8 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10 6.4
𝒗𝒅 = 𝟏. 𝟓𝟔𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟔𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟓 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
Solution :- 4. The resistance of a nichrome wire at 200C is 10 Ω. If its temperature coefficient
Figure (1) : of resistivity of nichrome is 0.004/0C, find the resistance of the wire at boiling
Δ𝑉 2
 Resistance of conductor - A ; 𝑅𝐴 = = = 0.5 Ω point of water. Comment on the result.
Δ𝐼 4
Δ𝑉 4 Solution :- 𝑇𝑜 = 0 𝐶 ; 𝑇 = 100  𝐶 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 10 Ω ; 𝑅𝑇 = ?
Resistance of conductor - B ; 𝑅𝐵 = = = 1.33 Ω
Δ𝐼 3  Resistance of the conducting wire at T 0C is,
Δ𝑉 5 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅𝑜 [1 + 𝛼 (𝑇 − 𝑇𝑜 )]
Resistance of conductor - C ; 𝑅𝐶 = = = 2.5 Ω
Δ𝐼 2 𝑅𝑇 = 10 [ 1 + 0.004 (100 − 0)]
Figure (2) : 𝑅𝑇 = 10 [1 + 0.004 𝑋 100]
Δ𝑉 4
 Resistance of conductor - D ; 𝑅𝐷 = = =2Ω 𝑅𝑇 = 10 [ 1 + 0.4] = 10 𝑋 1.4
Δ𝐼 2
Δ𝑉 3 𝑹𝑻 = 𝟏𝟒 𝛀
Resistance of conductor - E ; 𝑅𝐸 = = = 0.75 Ω  As the temperature increases the resistance of the wire also increases.
Δ𝐼 4
Resistance of conductor - F ; 𝑅𝐹 =
Δ𝑉
=
2
= 0.4 Ω 5. The rod given in the figure is made up of two different materials. Both have
Δ𝐼 5 square cross sections of 3 mm side. The resistivity of the first material is
 Thus conductor F has least resistance (i.e.) 𝑹𝑭 = 𝟎. 𝟒 𝛀 4 × 10–3 Ωm and that of second material has resistivity of 5 × 10–3 Ωm. What is
And conductor C has maximum resistance (i.e.) 𝑹𝑪 = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝛀 the resistance of rod between its ends?
2. Lightning is very good example of natural current. In
typical lightning, there is 109 J energy transfer across
the potential difference of 5 × 107 V during a time
interval of 0.2 s. Using this information, estimate the Solution :- 𝐴 = 3𝑚𝑚𝑋3𝑚𝑚 = 9 𝑚𝑚2 = 9 𝑋 10−6 𝑚2 ; 𝑙1 = 25 𝑐𝑚 = 25 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
following quantities 𝑙2 = 70 𝑐𝑚 = 70 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝜌1 = 4 𝑋 10−3 ; 𝜌2 = 5 𝑋 10−3
(a) total amount of charge transferred between cloud  Resistance of first material ;
and ground (b) the current in the lightning bolt (c) the 𝜌1 𝑙1 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−2 1000
𝑅1 = = = Ω
power delivered in 0.2 s. 𝐴 9 𝑋 10−6 9
Solution :- 𝑉 = 5 𝑋 107 𝑉 ; 𝑡 = 0.2 𝑠 ; 𝑈 = 109 𝐽  Resistance of second material ;
𝑈 109 1 𝜌2 𝑙2 5 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−2 3500
(a) Total charge ; 𝑸 =
𝑉
= 5 𝑋 107
= 5 𝑋 102 = 0.2 𝑋 102 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑪 𝑅2 = = −6
= Ω
𝐴 9 𝑋 10 9
𝑄 20 200  Since the two materials are in series, their effective resistance,
(b) Current ; 𝑰 = 𝑡 = 0.2 = 2 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝑨
1000 3500 1000 + 3500 4500
𝑈 109 𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 𝑅1 + 𝑅2 = + = =
(c) Power ; 𝑷= = = 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝑾 = 𝟓 𝑮 𝑾 9 9 9 9
𝑡 0.2
𝑹𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝛀
6. Three identical lamps each having a resistance R are connected to the battery of (d) Power delivered :
emf 𝝐 as shown in the figure Suddenly the switch S is closed. (a) Calculate the  When S is open,
current in the circuit when S is open 𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
and closed (b) What happens to the 𝑷𝑨 = 𝑉 𝐴 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
3 3𝑅 𝟗𝑹
intensities of the bulbs A,B and C. (c) 𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
Calculate the voltage across the 𝑷𝑩 = 𝑉𝐵 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
3 3𝑅 𝟗𝑹
three bulbs when S is open and 𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
closed (d) Calculate the power 𝑷 𝑪 = 𝑉𝐶 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
3 3𝑅 𝟗𝑹
delivered to the circuit when S is 𝝐𝟐 𝝐𝟐
Total power delivered; 𝑷𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑷𝑨 + 𝑷𝑩 + 𝑷𝑪 = 𝟑 ( ) =
𝟗𝑹 𝟑𝑹
opened and closed (e) Does the
 When S is closed,
power delivered to the circuit
𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
decrease, increase or remain same? 𝑷𝑨 = 𝑉𝐴 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
Solution :- 2 2𝑅 𝟒𝑹
𝜖 𝜖 𝝐𝟐
(a) Current : 𝑷𝑩 = 𝑉𝐵 𝐼 = 𝑋 =
 When S is open, all the bulbs A, B and C are in series, and hence their effective 2 2𝑅 𝟒𝑹
𝑷𝑪 = 0
resistance becomes ; 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅 + 𝑅 + 𝑅 = 3 𝑅 . Thus from Ohm’s law, 𝝐𝟐 𝝐𝟐
𝜖 𝝐 Total power delivered; 𝑷𝒕𝒐𝒕 = 𝑷𝑨 + 𝑷𝑩 + 𝑷𝑪 = 𝟐 ( ) =
𝟒𝑹 𝟐𝑹
𝑰= =
𝑅𝑇 𝟑𝑹 (e) When S is suddenly closed, the power delivered to the circuit will increases.
 When S is closed, only the bulbs A and B are in series and hence their effective 7. An electronics hobbyist is building a radio which requires 150 Ω in her circuit.
resistance becomes 𝑅𝑇 = 𝑅 + 𝑅 = 2 𝑅 and no current flows through bulb C. But she has only 220 Ω, 79 Ω and 92 Ω resistors available. How can she connect
Thus from Ohm’s law, the available resistors to get the desired value of resistance?
𝜖 𝝐 Solution :-
𝑰= =
𝑅𝑇 𝟑𝑹  The value of equivalent resistance in series connection will be greater than each
(b) Intensity : individual resistance. Similarly the value of equivalent resistance in parallel
 When S is open, all the bulbs A, B and C are in series. Here current through all connection will be lesser than each individual resistance.
the bulbs are same. So all the bulbs glow with equal intensity.  When all the three resistors are connected in series, their effective resistance will
 When S is closed, only the bulbs A and B are in series . The intensities of the be greater than 220 Ω and when all the three resistors are connected in parallel,
bulbs A and B equally increase. Bulb C will not glow since no current pass their effective resistance will be less than 79 Ω
through it.  Initially first two resistors 220 Ω and 79 Ω are connected in parallel and their
(c) Voltage (Potential difference) : effective value,
 When S is open, 1 1 1 220 + 79 299
𝜖 𝝐 = + = =
𝑽𝑨 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐴 = 𝑋𝑅 = 𝑅 𝑃 220 79 220 𝑋 79 17380
3𝑅 𝟑 17380
𝜖 𝝐 ∴ 𝑅𝑃 = = 5. 811 𝑋 101 Ω ≈ 𝟓𝟖 𝛀
𝑽𝑩 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐵 = 𝑋𝑅 = 299
3𝑅 𝟑  Now 58 Ω and third resistor 92 Ω are connected in series its effective value,
𝜖𝜖 𝝐
𝑽𝑪 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐶 = 𝑋𝑅 = 𝑅𝑺 = 58 + 92 = 150 Ω
3𝑅 𝟑
 When S is closed,  Thus in order to get 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝛀 resistance, 220 Ω and 79 Ω are connected in parallel
𝜖 𝝐 and this combination is connected in series with 9𝟐 𝛀
𝑽𝑨 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐴 = 𝑋𝑅 =
2𝑅 𝟐
𝜖 𝝐
𝑽𝑩 = 𝐼 𝑅𝐵 = 𝑋𝑅 =
2𝑅 𝟐
𝑽𝑪 = 0 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
8. A cell supplies a current of 0.9 A through a 2 Ω resistor and a current of 0.3 A 10. A potentiometer wire has a length of 4 m and resistance of 20 Ω. It is connected
through a 7 Ω resistor. Calculate the internal resistance of the cell. in series with resistance of 2980 Ω and a cell of emf 4 V. Calculate the potential
Solution :- 𝐼1 = 0.9 𝐴 ; 𝐼2 = 0.3 𝐴 ; 𝑅1 = 2 Ω ; 𝑅2 = 7 Ω ; r = ? gradient along the wire.
 From Ohm’s law (V = I R), Solution :- 𝑙 = 4 𝑚 ; 𝑅 = 20  ; 𝑅𝑒𝑥 = 2980  ; ϵ = 4 V ; 𝑉 = ?
20
𝜖 = 𝐼1 (𝑅1 + 𝑟) = 0.9 (2 + 𝑟) − − − − (1)  Resistance per unit length of the potentiometer wire, 𝑟 = = 5 Ω 𝑚−1
4
𝜖 = 𝐼2 (𝑅2 + 𝑟) = 0.3 (7 + 𝑟) − − − − (2) 𝜖 4 4
 From equation (1) and (2)  From Ohm’s law ; 𝐼 = = (20+2980) = 3000
(𝑅+ 𝑅𝑒𝑥 )
0.9 (2 + 𝑟) = 0.3 (7 + 𝑟) 𝐼=
4
= 1. 33 𝑋 10−3 𝐴
1.8 + 0.9 𝑟 = 2.1 + 0.3 𝑟 3 𝑋 103
0.9 𝑟 − 0.3 𝑟 = 2.1 − 1.8  Potential difference across the potentiometer wire
0.6 𝑟 = 0.3 𝑉 = 𝐼 𝑅 = 1.33 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 20 = 26.6 𝑋 10−3 𝑉
0.3 1  Then the potential gradient along the wire
𝑟= = 2 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝛀
0.6 𝑽 = 𝐼 𝑟 = 1.33 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 5 = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑽𝒎−𝟏
9. Calculate the currents in the following circuit. 11. Determine the current flowing through the galvanometer (G) as shown in the
figure.
Solution :-
 Apply Kirchoff’s current law at the junction P,
2 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 (𝑜𝑟)
𝐼2 = 2 − 𝐼1 − − − − − − (1)
 Apply Kirchoff’s voltage law to the closed loop
PQSP ,
5 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 15 𝐼2 = 0
Solution :- 5 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 15 (2 − 𝐼1 ) = 0
 Apply Kirchoff’s current law at the junction B, 5 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 30 + 15 𝐼1 = 0
𝐼1 = 𝐼2 + 𝐼3 − − − − − − (1) 20 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 − 30 = 0
 Apply Kirchoff’s voltage law to the closed loop ABEFA and BCDEB, 20 𝐼1 + 10 𝐼𝑔 = 30 − − − − − − (2)
100 𝐼3 + 100 𝐼1 = 15 − − − − − − (2)  Similarly Apply Kirchoff’s voltage law to the closed loop QRSQ,
and 100 𝐼2 − 100 𝐼3 = − 9 − − − − − − (3) 10 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑔 ) − 10 𝐼𝑔 − 20 (𝐼2 + 𝐼𝑔 ) = 0
 Put equation (1) in (2) 10 𝐼1 − 10 𝐼𝑔 − 10 𝐼𝑔 − 20 𝐼2 − 20 𝐼𝑔 = 0
100 𝐼3 + 100( 𝐼2 + 𝐼3 ) = 15 10 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 20 𝐼2 = 0
100 𝐼3 + 100 𝐼2 + 100 𝐼3 = 15
10 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 20 (2 − 𝐼1 ) = 0
100 𝐼2 + 200 𝐼3 = 15 − − − − − − (4)
(4) − (3) ⟹ 300 𝐼3 = 24 10 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 40 + 20 𝐼1 = 0
24 8 30 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 − 40 = 0
𝐼3 = = = 0.08 𝐴 30 𝐼1 − 40 𝐼𝑔 = 40 − − − − − − (3)
300 100
 Put this in equation (3) (2)𝑋 3 ⟹ 60 𝐼1 + 30 𝐼𝑔 = 90 − − − − − − (4)
100 𝐼2 − 100 (0.08) = − 9 (3)𝑋 2 ⟹ 60 𝐼1 − 80 𝐼𝑔 = 80 − − − − − − (5)
100 𝐼2 − 8 = − 9 (4) − (5) ⟹ 110 𝐼𝑔 = 10
100 𝐼2 = − 9 + 8 = − 1 11 𝐼𝑔 = 1
1 𝟏
𝐼2 = − = − 0.01 𝐴 𝑰𝒈 = 𝑨
100 𝟏𝟏
 Then equation(1) becomes,
𝐼1 = − 0.01 + 0.08 = 0.07 𝐴
 Thus , 𝑰𝟏 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟕 𝑨 ; 𝑰𝟐 = − 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏 𝑨 ; 𝑰𝟑 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟖 𝑨 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
12. Two cells each of 5V are connected in series with a 8 Ω resistor and three Solution :-
parallel resistors of 4 Ω, 6 Ω and 12 Ω. Draw a circuit diagram for the above
arrangement. Calculate (i) the current drawn from the cells (ii) current through
each resistor
Solution :-
 Circuit diagram for the above arrangement,
14. In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V gives a balance point at 35

(i) The current drawn from the cells : cm length of the wire. If the cell is replaced by another cell and the balance point
 Here, 4, 6  and 12  all are in parallel, their effective resistance, shifts to 63 cm, what is the emf of the second cell?
1 1 1 1 3+2+1 6 1 Solution :- : 𝜖1 = 1.25 𝑉 ; 𝑙1 = 35 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑙2 = 63 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝜖2 = ?
= + + = = = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑅𝑃 = 2 Ω
𝑅𝑃 4 6 12 12 12 2  The ratio of emf’s of two cells using potentiometer,
 Also, 8  and 2  are in series, their effective resistance, ‹ 𝜖1 𝑙1
𝑅𝑺 = 8 + 2 = 10  =
𝜖2 𝑙2
 Total potential difference(voltage) ; 𝑉 = 5 + 5 = 10 𝑉 𝑙2
 Then current in the circuit, 𝜖2 = 𝜖1
𝑙1
𝑉 10 63 𝑋 10−2 78.75
𝑰= = =𝟏𝑨 𝜖2 = 1.25 𝑋 =
𝑅𝑆 10 35 𝑋 10−2 35
 The potential difference across parallel combination of effective 𝝐𝟐 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑽
resistance 𝑅𝑃 = 2 Ω is ; 𝑉𝑃 = 𝐼 𝑅𝑃 = 1 𝑋 2 = 2 𝑉
(ii) Current through each resistor :
▪ Current through 8 Ω resistor ; 𝑰 = 𝟏 𝑨
𝑉𝑃 𝟐
▪ Current through 4 Ω resistor ; 𝑰𝟏 = = = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨
4 𝟒
𝑉𝑃 𝟐
▪ Current through 6 Ω resistor ; 𝑰𝟐 = = = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟑 𝑨
6 𝟔
𝑉𝑃 𝟐
▪ Current through 12 Ω resistor ; 𝑰𝟑 = = = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟕 𝑨
12 𝟏𝟐
13. Four bulbs P, Q, R, S are connected in a circuit of unknown arrangement. When
each bulb is removed one at a time and replaced, the following behavior is
observed. Draw the circuit diagram for these bulbs.
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -3
MAGNETISM
AND
MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF ELECTRIC CURRENT

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 3. Compute the magnetic length of a uniform bar

1. The horizontal component and vertical component of Earth’s magnetic field at a magnet if the geometrical length of the magnet is
place are 0.15 G and 0.26 G respectively. Calculate the angle of dip and resultant 12 cm. Mark the positions of magnetic pole points.
Solution :
magnetic field. (G-gauss, cgs unit for magnetic field 1G = 10–4 T)
 We know that, Magnetic length : Geometrical length = 5 : 6
Solution : 𝐵𝐻 = 0.15 𝐺 ; 𝐵𝑉 = 0.26 𝐺 ; 𝐼 = ? ; 𝐵 = ? 𝑀𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑒𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 5
 Angle of dip ‘I’ is given by, (i.e.) =6
𝐺𝑒𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
𝐵𝑉 0.26 26 5 5
tan 𝐼 = = = = 1. 733 𝑀𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑒𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 𝑋 𝐺𝑒𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 𝑋 12
𝐵𝐻 0.15 15 6 6
𝑰 = tan−1 (1.733) = 𝟔𝟎° 𝑀𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑒𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 10 𝑐𝑚
 Resultant magnetic field,  In this figure, the dot implies the pole points.
𝐵= √𝐵𝐻2 + 𝐵𝑉2 = √0.152 + 0.262
𝐵 = √0.0225 + 0.0676 = √0.0901
𝑩 = 𝟎. 𝟑 𝑮
2. Let the magnetic moment of a bar magnet be 𝒑 ⃗ 𝒎 whose magnetic length is d = 2l
and pole strength is 𝒒𝒎 . Compute the magnetic moment of the bar magnet when
it is cut into two pieces (a) along its length (b) perpendicular to its length. 4. Calculate the magnetic flux coming out from
Solution : closed surface containing magnetic dipole (say,
(a) Bar magnet cut into two pieces along its length : a bar magnet) as shown in figure.
Solution :
 The total flux emanating from the closed
surface S enclosing the dipole is zero. So,
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = 𝟎
⃗ . 𝒅𝑨
𝚽𝑩 = ∮ 𝑩
 When the bar magnet is cut along the axis into two pieces, the magnetic length  Here the integral is taken over closed surface. Since no isolated magnetic pole
does change , but magnetic pole strength becomes halved . So the new (called magnetic monopole) exists, this integral is always zero. This is similar to
𝑞
magnetic pole strength is ; 𝑞𝑚 = 𝑚 Gauss’s law in electrostatics.
2 5. The repulsive force between two magnetic poles in air is 9 × 10 –3 N. If the two
1 1
 Hence the magnetic moment ; 𝑝𝑚 = 𝑞𝑚 𝑑 = 𝑞𝑚 2 𝑙 = 𝑝𝑚 poles are equal in strength and are separated by a distance of 10 cm, calculate
2 2
 𝟏 the pole strength of each pole.
⃗𝒎= ⃗𝒎
𝒑 Solution : 𝐹 = 9 𝑋 10−3 𝑁 ; 𝑟 = 10 𝑐𝑚 = 10 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑞𝑚𝐴 = 𝑞𝑚𝐵 = 𝑞𝑚 = ?
𝟐
(b) Bar magnet cut into two pieces perpendicular to the axis :  The magnitude of the force between two poles is given by
𝜇𝑜 𝑞𝑚𝐴 𝑞𝑚𝐵
𝐹=
4𝜋 𝑟2
−7
4 𝜋 𝑋 10 𝑞𝑚2
9 𝑋 10−3 =
4𝜋 (10 𝑋 10−2 )2
2
𝑞𝑚
 When the bar magnet is cut perpendicular to the axis into two pieces, the 9 𝑋 10−3 = 10−7 𝑋
10−2
magnetic pole strength does change , but magnetic length becomes halved. So 9 𝑋 10−3
the new magneticlength is ;: 𝑑 =
𝑑
=𝑙 𝑞𝑚2 = = 900
2 10−5
−𝟏
 1 1 1 ∴ 𝒒𝒎 = 𝟑𝟎 𝑵 𝑻
 Hence magnetic moment ; 𝑝𝑚 = 𝑞𝑚 𝑑  = 𝑞𝑚 2
𝑑 = 2 𝑞𝑚 (2 𝑙) = 2
𝑝𝑚
 𝟏
⃗𝒎= 𝟐
⃗𝒎
𝒑 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
6. A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of 0.5 J T–1. Calculate magnitude and 8. Compute the intensity of magnetisation of the bar magnet whose mass,
direction of the magnetic field produced by the bar magnet which is kept at a magnetic moment and density are 200 g, 2 A m2 and 8 g cm–3, respectively.
distance of 0.1 m from the centre of the bar magnet along (a) axial line of the bar Solution : 𝑚 = 200g = 200 𝑋10−3 𝑘g ; 𝑝𝑚 = 2 𝐴𝑚2 ; 𝜌 = 8 𝑔𝑐𝑚−3 = 8 𝑋103 𝑘𝑔 𝑚−3
magnet and (b) normal bisector of the bar magnet.  Density of the bar magnet ;
Solution : 𝑝𝑚 = 0.5 𝐽 𝑇−1 ; 𝑟 = 0.1 𝑚 ; 𝐵𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = ? ; 𝐵𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = ? 𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑚
𝜌= =
(a) Magnetic field at a point on the axial line of the bar magnet, 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝑉
𝜇 2 𝑝𝑚  Hence the volume ;
𝐵 ⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 𝑜 𝑖̂
4 𝜋 𝑟3 𝑚 200 𝑋10−3
−7
4 𝜋 𝑋 10 2 𝑋 0.5 𝑉= = = 25 𝑋 10−6 𝑚3
𝐵⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 𝑖̂ 𝜌 8 𝑋103
4𝜋 (0.1)3  So the intensity of magnetization ;
1 1 𝑝𝑚 2 0. 08
𝐵⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂ = 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂ 𝑀= = = = 0.08 𝑋 106 𝐴 𝑚−1
0.001 10−3 𝑉 25 𝑋 10−6 10−6
⃗⃗ 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 = 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒊̂
𝑩 −𝟒 𝑴 = 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 𝑨 𝒎−𝟏
 Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field along axial is Baxis = 1 × 10–4 T and 9. Using the relation 𝑩⃗⃗ = 𝝁𝒐 (𝑯
⃗⃗⃗ + 𝑴
⃗⃗⃗ ), show that 𝝌 = 𝝁 − 𝟏 .
𝒎 𝒓
direction is towards South to North. Solution :
(b) Magnetic field at a point on the normal bisector of the bar magnet, ⃗⃗
𝑀
𝜇 𝑝  By definition, the magnetic susceptibility is ; 𝜒𝑚 =
𝐵⃗ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 𝑜 𝑚 𝑖̂ ⃗
𝐻
4 𝜋 𝑟3 (𝑜𝑟) ⃗⃗ = 𝜒𝑚 𝐻
𝑀 ⃗ − − − − − (1)
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 0.5
𝐵 ⃗ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 𝑖̂  By definition, the magnetic field is ; 𝐵 = 𝜇 ⃗𝐻
⃗ − − − − − (2)
4𝜋 (0.1)3
0.5 0.5  The given relation, 𝑩⃗⃗ = 𝝁𝒐 (𝑯⃗⃗⃗ + 𝑴
⃗⃗⃗ )
𝐵 ⃗ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂ = 10−7 𝑋 𝑖̂  put equation (1) and (2), we get
0.001 10−3
⃗⃗⃗𝐵𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 = − 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝒊̂ 𝜇𝐻 ⃗ = 𝜇𝑜 (𝐻 ⃗ + 𝜒𝑚 𝐻⃗)
 Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field along equatorial is Bequator 𝜇𝐻 ⃗ = 𝜇𝑜 𝐻 ⃗ (1 + 𝜒𝑚 )
= 0.5 × 10–4 T and direction is towards North to South. 𝜇 = 𝜇𝑜 (1 + 𝜒𝑚 )
𝜇
Note : The magnitude of Baxis is twice that of magnitude of Bequator and the direction of Baxis = (1 + 𝜒𝑚 )
and Bequator are opposite. 𝜇𝑜
7. Consider a magnetic dipole which on switching ON external magnetic field orient (𝑜𝑟) 𝜇𝑟 = 1 + 𝜒𝑚
only in two possible ways i.e., one along the direction of the magnetic field (𝑜𝑟) 𝝌 𝒎 = 𝝁𝒓 − 𝟏
(parallel to the field) and another anti-parallel to magnetic field. Compute the 10. Two materials X and Y are magnetised whose values of intensity of
energy for the possible orientation. magnetisation are 500 A m–1 and 2000 A m–1 respectively. If the magnetising
Solution : field is 1000 A m–1, then which one among these materials can be easily
 Let 𝒑𝒎 be the dipole and before switching ON the external magnetic field, there is magnetized?
Solution :
no orientation. Therefore, the energy U = 0.
 Susceptibility of material X,
 As soon as external magnetic field is switched ON, the magnetic dipole orient
|𝑀⃗⃗ | 500 1
parallel (θ = 0o ) to the magnetic field with energy, 𝜒𝑚𝑋 = = = = 0.5
𝑼𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒍 = − 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 𝐜𝒐𝒔 0𝑜 = − 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 = 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒎 |𝐻⃗| 1000 2
 Otherwise, the magnetic dipole orients anti-parallel (θ = 180o) to the magnetic  Susceptibility of material Y
field with energy, ⃗⃗ |
|𝑀 2000
𝑼𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒍 = − 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 𝐜𝒐𝒔 180𝑜 = + 𝒑𝒎 𝑩 = 𝒎𝒂𝒙𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒎 𝜒𝑚𝑌 = = = 2
⃗
|𝐻 | 1000
 Here 𝜒𝑚 < 𝜒𝑚 .. It implies that material Y can be easily magnetized.
𝑋 𝑌
11. The following figure shows the variation of 14. A coil of a tangent galvanometer of diameter 0.24 m has 100 turns. If the
intensity of magnetisation with the applied horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is 25 × 10–6 T then, calculate the
magnetic field intensity for three magnetic current which gives a deflection of 60o.
materials X, Y and Z. Identify the materials Solution : 𝑁 = 100 ; 𝑑 = 0.24 𝑚 ; 𝑟 = 0.12 𝑚 ; 𝐵𝐻 = 25 𝑋 10−6 𝑇 ; 𝜃 = 60°
X, Y and Z.  From the theory of TG, the current through the circular coil is,
Solution : 2 𝑟 𝐵𝐻
𝐼= tan 𝜃
 The slope of M-H graph is a measure of the 𝜇𝑜 𝑁
magnetic susceptibility, which is given by 2 𝑋 0.12 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−6
𝐼= tan 60
|⃗𝑀
⃗| 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 100
𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 = = 𝜒𝑚 6 𝑋 10 −6
|⃗𝐻| 𝐼= 𝑋 √3
(a) Material X : Slope is positive and larger value. So, it is a ferromagnetic 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5
−1
material. 6 𝑋 1.732 𝑋 10
𝐼=
(b) Material Y : Slope is positive and lesser value than X. So, it could be a 12.56
paramagnetic material. 𝐼 = 8. 274 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 10−1 = 8.274 𝑋 10−2 𝐴
(c) Material Z : Slope is negative and hence, it is a diamagnetic material. 𝑰 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟖𝟐𝟕𝟒 𝑨
12. The magnetic field shown in the figure is due to the current carrying wire. In 15. Compute the magnitude of the magnetic field of a long, straight wire carrying a
which direction does the current flow in the wire?. current of 1 A at distance of 1m from it. Compare it with Earth’s magnetic field.
Solution : Solution : 𝑰 = 1 𝐴 ; 𝑎 = 1 𝑚 ; 𝐵 = ? ; 𝐵 ∶ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑡ℎ = ?
 Magnetic field due to long straight current carrying wire,
𝜇𝑜 𝐼 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 1
𝐵= = = 2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
2𝜋𝑎 2𝜋𝑋1
 But the Earth’s magnetic field is ; 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑡ℎ ≈ 10−5 𝑇
 Thus, 𝑩 ∶ 𝑩𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒉 = 𝟏 ∶ 𝟏𝟎𝟎
(i.e.) Bstraightwire is one hundred times smaller than BEarth
16. Calculate the magnetic field inside a solenoid, when (a) the length of the
solenoid becomes twice with fixed number of turns (b) both the length of the
solenoid and number of turns are doubled (c) the number of turns becomes
twice for the fixed length of the solenoid
Solution :
 Using right hand rule, current flows upwards.
 The magnetic field inside a solenoid of length L and turns N is
13. What is the magnetic field at the centre of the loop shown in figure? 𝜇𝑜 𝑁 𝐼
𝐵𝐿,𝑁 = − − − − − − (1)
𝐿
𝜇 𝑁𝐼 𝐵
(a) If 𝐿 → 2𝐿 then ; 𝐵2𝐿,𝑁 = 𝑜 = 𝐿,𝑁
2𝐿 2
𝜇𝑜 2 𝑁 𝐼 𝜇 𝑁𝐼
(b) If 𝐿 → 2𝐿, 𝑁 → 2𝑁 then ; 𝐵2𝐿,2𝑁 = = 𝑜 = 𝐵𝐿,𝑁
2𝐿 𝐿
𝜇 2𝑁𝐼
(c) If 𝑁 → 2𝑁 then ; 𝐵𝐿,2𝑁 = 𝑜 = 2 𝐵𝐿,𝑁
𝐿
 Here 𝑩𝑳,𝟐𝑵 > 𝑩𝟐𝑳,𝟐𝑵 > 𝑩𝟐𝑳,𝑵 . Thus, strength of the magnetic field is increased
Solution :
 The magnetic field due to current in the upper semicircle and lower semicircle of when we pack more loops into the same length for a given current
the circular coil are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction.
 Hence, the net magnetic field at the centre of the loop (at point O) is zero
(i.e.) ⃗𝑩 = ⃗𝟎.
17. A particle of charge q moves with velocity 𝒗

⃗⃗ along positive y - direction in a 19. An electron moving perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field 0.500 T
magnetic field ⃗⃗⃗
𝑩 . Compute the Lorentz force experienced by the particle undergoes circular motion of radius 2.50 mm. What is the speed of electron?
(a) when magnetic field is along positive y-direction (b) when magnetic field Solution : 𝐵 = 0.500 𝑇 ; 𝑟 = 2.5 𝑚𝑚 = 2.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 𝑣 = ?
points in positive z - direction (c) when magnetic field is in zy - plane and  Lorentz force acts as centripetal force for the particle causing it to execute circular
𝑚𝑣
making an angle θ with velocity of the particle. Mark the direction of magnetic motion. The radius of the circular path is ; 𝑟 =
𝐵𝑒
force in each case..  Therefore the speed of the electron ; 𝑣 =
𝐵𝑒𝑟
𝑚
Solution : ⃗⃗𝑣 = 𝑣 𝑗̂ 0.5 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 2.5 𝑋 10−3
𝐵 = 𝐵 𝑗̂
(a) When magnetic field is along positive y - direction, then ⃗⃗⃗ 𝑣=
9.1 𝑋 10−31
Lorentz force ; 𝐹 ⃗ 𝑚 = 𝑞 (⃗𝑣 𝑋 𝐵⃗ ) = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝐵 𝑗̂) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑗̂) = 0 0.5 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 2.5 𝑋 109
𝑣 =
So, no force acts on the particle when it moves along the direction of 9.1
magnetic field. 𝑣 = 2. 197 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 109
⃗⃗⃗ = 𝐵 𝑘̂ 𝒗 = 𝟐. 𝟏𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
(b) When magnetic field is along positive z - direction, then 𝐵
20. A proton moves in a uniform magnetic field of strength 0.500 T magnetic field
Lorentz force ; 𝐹 ⃗ 𝑚 = 𝑞 (⃗𝑣 𝑋 𝐵⃗ ) = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝐵 𝑘̂ ) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑘̂ ) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 𝑖̂ is directed along the x-axis. At initial time, t = 0 s, the proton has velocity
Therefore, the magnitude of the Lorentz force is qvB and direction is along positive ⃗ = [𝟏. 𝟗𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒊̂ + 𝟐, 𝟎𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒌̂ ] 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 .Find
𝒗
x - direction.
(a) At initial time, what is the acceleration of the proton?
(c) When magnetic field is in zy -plane, then 𝐵 ⃗⃗⃗ = 𝐵 cos 𝜃 𝑗̂ + 𝐵 sin 𝜃 𝑘̂
(b) Is the path circular or helical? If helical, calculate the radius of helical
Lorentz force ; 𝐹𝑚 = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗ ) = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝐵[cos 𝜃 𝑗̂ + 𝐵 sin 𝜃 𝑘̂]) trajectory and also calculate the pitch of the helix (Note: Pitch of the helix is the
𝐹𝑚 = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 cos 𝜃 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑗̂) + 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 sin 𝜃 (𝑗̂ 𝑋 𝑘̂) = 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 sin 𝜃 𝑖 distance travelled along the helix axis per revolution).
Solution : ⃗𝐵 = 0.500 𝑖̂ ; ⃗𝑣 = [1.95 𝑋 105 𝑖̂ + 2.00 𝑋 105 𝑘̂ ] ; 𝑡 = 0 𝑠 ; 𝒂 = ? ; 𝑻 = ?
(a) Mass of proton ; 𝑚𝑝 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔
Charge of proton ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶
From Newton’s II law, acceleration is
𝐹𝐵 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗)
𝑎= =
𝑚𝑝 𝑚𝑝
1.6 𝑋 10−19 [(1.95 𝑋 105 𝑖̂ + 2.00 𝑋 105 𝑘̂ ) 𝑋 0.500 𝑖̂ ]
𝑎=
18. Compute the work done and power delivered by the Lorentz force on the particle 1.67 𝑋 10−27
1.6 𝑋 10−19 [1 𝑋 105 𝑗̂] 1.6 𝑋 10−14
of charge q moving with velocity 𝒗 ⃗ . Calculate the angle between Lorentz force 𝑎= = 𝑗̂
1.67 𝑋 10−27 1.67 𝑋 10−27
and velocity of the charged particle and also interpret the result. 1.6 𝑋 10 13
Solution : 𝑎= 𝑗̂ = 9. 581 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1013 𝑗̂
1.67
 Lorentz force on a charged particle moving on a magnetic field is, ⃗ = 𝟗. 𝟓𝟖𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟐 𝒋̂ (𝑜𝑟)
𝒂 𝒂 = 𝟗. 𝟓𝟖𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟐 𝒎 𝒔−𝟐
⃗⃗⃗𝐹𝑚 = 𝑞 (𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗) (b) Here this acceleration directed perpendicular to the magnetic field, due to the
 Work done by the magnetic field ; 𝑊 = ∫ 𝐹 . 𝑑𝑟 ⃗⃗⃗⃗ = 𝑞 ∫(⃗⃗𝑣 𝑋 𝐵 ⃗ ) . 𝑣 𝑑𝑡 = 0 Lorentz force, the velocity component 𝑣𝑧 = 2.00 𝑋 105 𝑘̂ along Z-axis alone
𝑑𝑊 continuously changed. Thus the path of proton is helical. The radius of helical
 And power is given by ; 𝑃 = =0 path is
𝑑𝑡
 Since, 𝐹 ⃗ . ⃗𝑣 = 0 we have 𝑭
⃗ ⊥ 𝒗 ⃗ . The angle between Lorentz force and velocity of 𝑚𝑝 𝑣𝑧 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑋 2.00 𝑋 105
𝑟 = =
the charged particle is 90o. 𝐵𝑒 0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
−3
 Thus Lorentz force changes the direction of the velocity but not the magnitude of 3.34 𝑋 10 33.4 𝑋 10−3
𝑟= =
the velocity. Hence Lorentz force does no work and also does not alter kinetic 0.8 8
𝒓 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟕𝟓 𝒎𝒎
energy of the particle.
Time period ; 22. Let E be the electric field of magnitude 6.0 × 106 N C–1 and B be the magnetic
2𝜋 2 𝜋 𝑚𝑝 field magnitude 0.83 T. Suppose an electron is accelerated with a potential of
𝑇= =
𝜔 𝐵𝑒 200 V, will it show zero deflection?. If not, at what potential will it show zero
2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27 10. 4876 𝑋 10−8 104. 876 𝑋 10−8 deflection?
𝑇= = =
0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 0.8 8 Solution : 𝐸 = 6.0 𝑋 106 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝐵 = 0.83 𝑇 ; 𝑉 = 200 𝑉 ; 𝑣 = ? ; 𝑣200 = ? ; 𝑉0 = ?
𝑻 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟏𝟎𝟗𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟖 𝒔 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟏𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟖 𝒔  At zero deflection, the velocity of electron,
Hence, pitch of the helix is 𝐸 6.0 𝑋 106
𝑋 = 𝑣𝑥 𝑇 = 1.95 𝑋 105 𝑋 13.11 𝑋 10−8 = 25.5645 𝑋 10−3 𝑣= = = 𝟕. 𝟐𝟐𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝐵 0.83
𝑿 = 𝟐𝟓. 𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟓. 𝟓𝟔 𝒎𝒎  Since the accelerating potential is 200 V, the electron acquires
The proton experiences appreciable acceleration in the magnetic field, hence the kinetic energy because of this accelerating potential. Hence
pitch of the helix is almost six times greater than the radius of the helix. 1 2
21. Two singly ionized isotopes of uranium 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐𝑼 and
𝑚 𝑣200 =𝑒𝑉
2
𝟐𝟑𝟖
𝟗𝟐𝑼 (isotopes have same atomic number but 2
2𝑒𝑉
𝑣200 =
different mass number) are sent with velocity 𝑚
1.00 × 105 m s–1 into a magnetic field of strength 2𝑒𝑉
0.500 T normally. Compute the distance between ∴ 𝑣200 = √
𝑚
the two isotopes after they complete a semi-circle.
Also compute the time taken by each isotope to 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 200 640 𝑋 1012
complete one semi-circular path. 𝑣200 = √ = √
9.1 𝑋 10−31 9.1
(Given: masses of the isotopes: m235 = 3.90 × 10–25 kg and m238 = 3.95 × 10–25 kg)
𝒗𝟐𝟎𝟎 = 𝟖. 𝟑𝟖𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
Solution : 𝐵 = 0.500 𝑇 ; 𝑣 = 1.00 𝑋 105 𝑚 𝑠 −1 ; 𝑚235 = 3.90 𝑋 10−25 𝑘𝑔 ;  Since the speed 𝒗𝟐𝟎𝟎 > 𝒗 , the electron is deflected towards direction of Lorentz
−25 −19
𝑚238 = 3.95 𝑋 10 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10 𝐶 ; 𝑑 =? force. So, in order to have null deflection, the potential 𝑉0 , we have to supply is
 Since isotopes are singly ionized, they have equal charge which is equal to the 1
charge of an electron 𝑚 𝑣 2 = 𝑒 𝑉0
2
 The radius of the path of 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐𝑼 is r235
𝑚 𝑣2 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 (7.229 𝑋 106 )2
∴ 𝑉0 = =
𝑚235 𝑣 3.90 𝑋 10−25 𝑋 1.00 𝑋 105 3.90 𝑋 10−1 3.90 2𝑒 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝑟235 = = = = 9.1 𝑋 7.229 𝑋 7.229 𝑋 100
𝐵𝑒 0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 0.8 8 𝑉0 =
𝑟235 = 0.4875 𝑚 3.2
Hence the diameter ; 𝑑235 = 2 𝑟235 = 2 𝑋 0.4875 = 0.975 𝑚 = 97.5 𝑐𝑚 𝑽𝟎 = 𝟏𝟒𝟖. 𝟔 𝑽
 The radius of the path of 𝟐𝟑𝟖 23. Suppose a cyclotron is operated to accelerate protons with a magnetic field of
𝟗𝟐𝑼 is r235
𝑚238 𝑣 3.95 𝑋 10−25 𝑋 1.00 𝑋 105 3.95 𝑋 10−1 3.95 strength 1 T. Calculate the frequency in which the electric field between two
𝑟238 = = −19
= = Dees could be reversed.
𝐵𝑒 0.500 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10 0.8 8
𝑟238 = 0.49375 𝑚 Solution : B = 1 T ; 𝑚𝑝 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 ; 𝑓 = ?
Hence the diameter ; 𝑑238 = 2 𝑟238 = 2 𝑋 0.49375 = 0.9875 𝑚 = 98.75 𝑐𝑚  The frequency is,
 Therefore the separation distance between the isotopes is ; 𝐵𝑞
𝑓=
∆𝒅 = 𝑑238 − 𝑑235 = 0.9875 = 0.975 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝒎 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 𝒄𝒎 2 𝜋 𝑚𝑝
 The time taken by each isotope to complete one semi-circular path are 1 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝑑235 0.975 𝑓=
𝑡235 = = = 0.975 𝑋 10−5 = 9.75 𝑋 10−6 𝑠 = 9.75 𝜇𝑠 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27
𝑣 1.00 𝑋 105 1.6 𝑋 108
𝑑238 0.9875 𝑓=
𝑡238 = = = 0.9875 𝑋 10−5 = 9.875 𝑋 10−6 𝑠 = 9.875 𝜇𝑠 10.4876
𝑣 1.00 𝑋 105 𝑓 = 1.525 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 108 = 1.525 𝑋 107 𝐻𝑧
𝒇 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝑯𝒛 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟐𝟓 𝑴𝑯𝒛
24. A metallic rod of linear density is 0.25 kg m–1 is lying horizontally on a smooth 26. The resistance of a moving coil galvanometer is made twice its original value in
inclined plane which makes an angle of 45o with the order to increase current sensitivity by 50%. Find the percentage change in
horizontal. The rod is not allowed to slide down by flowing a voltage sensitivity.
current through it when a magnetic field of strength 0.25 T is Solution :
acting on it in the vertical direction. Calculate the electric  Let 𝐼𝑆 be the initial current sensitivity. If current sensitivity is increased by 50%,
current flowing in the rod to keep it stationary. then new current sensitivity,
𝑚
Solution : = 0.25 𝑘𝑔 𝑚−1 ; 𝐵 = 0.25 𝑇 ; 𝐼 = ? 50 1 3
𝑙 𝑰𝑺 = 𝐼𝑆 + 50% 𝐼𝑆 = 𝐼𝑆 [1 + ] = 𝐼𝑆 [1 + ] = 𝑰𝑺 = 1.5 𝐼𝑆
 Magnetic Lorentz force experienced by the current carrying conductor placed in 100 2 2
magnetic field ; 𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 sin 90° = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙  Let 𝑉𝑆 be the initial Voltage sensitivity. When the resistance is doubled, then new
 The direction of this force 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 is given by Fleming’s left hand rule. voltage sensitivity is
 This force is resolved in to two perpendicular components 3

𝐼𝑆 ( ) 𝐼𝑆
2 3
1) 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠 45° − along the inclined plane 𝑽𝑺 =  = 2𝑅 = 𝑽𝑺 = 0.75 𝑉𝑆
𝑅𝑔 4
upwards 𝑔
2) 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛 45° − perpendicular to the  Hence the voltage sensitivity decreases. The percentage decrease in voltage
incline plane downwards sensitivity is
 Similarly, weight 𝑚𝑔 also resolved in to two 𝑽𝑺 − 𝑽𝑺 𝑽𝑺 − 𝟎. 𝟕𝟓 𝑽𝑺
𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟎 % = 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟎% = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟎% = 𝟐𝟓 %
perpendicular components. 𝑽𝑺 𝑽𝑺
1) 𝑚𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑠 45° − perpendicular to the
incline plane downwards
2) 𝑚𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 45° − along the inclined plane downwards
 For equilibrium of the rod ; 𝑚𝑔 sin 45 ° = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 cos 45 °
𝑚
𝑚𝑔 sin 45 ° ( )𝑔 0.25 𝑋 9.8
∴ 𝐼= = 𝑙 = = 𝟗. 𝟖 𝑨
𝐵 𝑙 cos 45 ° 𝐵 0.25
 So, we need to supply current of 9.8 A to keep the metallic rod stationary.
25. The coil of a moving coil galvanometer has 5 turns and each turn has an effective
area of 2 × 10–2 m2. It is suspended in a magnetic field whose strength is
4 × 10–2 Wb m–2. If the torsional constant K of the suspension fibre is
4 × 10–9 N m deg–1.
(a) Find its current sensitivity in division per micro - ampere.
(b) Calculate the voltage sensitivity of the galvanometer for it to have full scale
deflection of 50 divisions for 25 mV.
(c) Compute the resistance of the galvanometer.
Solution :𝑛 = 5 ; 𝐴 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 4 𝑋10−2 𝑊𝑏 𝑚−2 ; 𝐾 = 4 𝑋 10−9 𝑁 𝑚 𝑑𝑒𝑔−1
(a) Current sensitivity,
𝜃 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 5 𝑋 4 𝑋10−2 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2 1
𝑰𝑺 = = = −9
= −6 𝑑𝑒𝑔/𝐴 = 𝟏 𝒅𝒆𝒈/𝝁𝑨
𝐼 𝐾 4 𝑋 10 10
(b) Voltage sensitivity,
𝜃 50
𝑽𝑺 = = = 2 𝑋 103 𝑑𝑒𝑔/𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
𝑉 25 𝑋 10−3
(c) Resistance of the galvanometer,
1
𝑰𝑺 ( −6 ) 1
10 = 0.5 𝑋 103 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝛀 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝒌𝛀
𝑹𝒈 =
𝑽𝑺
= =
2 𝑋 103 2 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−6 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. A circular coil with cross-sectional area 0.1 cm2 is kept in a uniform magnetic
1. A bar magnet having a magnetic moment 𝒑 ⃗ 𝒎 is cut into four pieces i.e., first cut field of strength 0.2 T. If the current passing in the coil is 3 A and plane of the
loop is perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field. Calculate
into two pieces along the axis of the magnet and each piece is further cut along
(a) total torque on the coil
the axis into two pieces. Compute the magnetic moment of each piece.
(b) total force on the coil
Solution :
(c) average force on each electron in the coil due to the magnetic field. (The free
electron density for the material of the wire is 1028 m–3).
Solution : 𝑨 = 0.1 𝑐𝑚2 = 0.1 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 0.2 𝑇 ; 𝐼 = 3 𝐴 ; 𝑛 = 1028 𝑚−3 ; 𝜃 = 0°
(a) Total torque on the coil
 Initial magnetic moment of the magnet ; 𝒑 ⃗ 𝒎 = 𝒒𝒎 ⃗𝒅 = 𝒒𝒎 ⃗⃗⃗⃗𝟐𝒍 𝜏 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃 = 𝐼 𝐴 𝐵 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
 When it cut along the axis into four pieces, the pole strength of each piece becomes 𝜏 = 3 𝑋 0.1 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 0.2 𝑋 sin 0° [∵ sin 0° = 0]
𝑞𝑚 𝝉=𝟎
, but the magnetic length will not change. Hence magnetic moment of each piece, (b) Total force on the coil,
4
 𝑞 1 𝟏 𝐹 = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 sin 𝜃
⃗𝒑𝒎 = 𝑚 ⃗𝑑 = (𝑞𝑚 ⃗⃗⃗⃗ 2 𝑙) = ⃗𝒑𝒎
4 2 𝟒 𝑭=𝟎 [∵ sin 0° = 0]
2. A conductor of linear mass density 0.2 g m–1 suspended (c) Charge of electron ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶
by two flexible wire as shown in figure. Suppose the If 𝑙 is the length of the coil, the drift velocity ; 𝑣𝑑 =
𝑙
tension in the supporting wires is zero when it is kept 𝑡

Lorentz force on each electron,
inside the magnetic field of 1 T whose direction is into the 𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝑞 𝑣 = 𝐵 𝑒 𝑣𝑑 [∵ 𝐼 = 𝑛 𝐴 𝑒 𝑣𝑑 ]
page. Compute the current inside the conductor and also 𝐼 𝐵𝐼
the direction of the current. Assume g = 10 m s–2 𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝑒 =
𝒎
𝑛𝐴𝑒 𝑛𝐴
Solution : = 𝟎. 𝟐 𝒈 𝒎−𝟏 = 𝟎. 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒌𝒈 𝒎−𝟏 ; 𝑩 = 𝟏 𝑻 ; 𝒈 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎 𝒔−𝟐 0.2 𝑋 3 0.6
𝒍 𝐹𝐵 = 28 −4
= 𝑋 10−24 = 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟒 𝑵
10 𝑋 0.1 𝑋 10 0.1
4. A bar magnet is placed in a uniform magnetic field whose strength is 0.8 T.If the
bar magnet is oriented at an angle 30o with the external field experiences a
torque of 0.2 Nm. Calculate: (a) the magnetic moment of the magnet
(b) the work done by the magnetic field in moving it from most stable
configuration to the most unstable configuration and also compute the work
done by the applied magnetic field in this case.
Solution : 𝐵 = 0.8 𝑇 ; 𝜃 = 30° ; 𝜏 = 0.2 𝑁 𝑚
(a) We know that, the torque ; 𝜏 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃
Hence magnetic moment is given by,
 Weight of the conductor due to gravity in downward direction, 𝜏 0.2 0.2 0.2 2
𝐹𝑔 = 𝑚 𝑔 𝑝𝑚 = = = = =
𝐵 sin 𝜃 0.8 𝑋 sin 30° 1 0.4 4
 Magnetic Lorentz force acting perpendicular to conductor in upward direction, 0.8 𝑋
2
𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐼 𝑙 𝒑𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑨 𝒎𝟐
 When the tension of the supporting wire becomes zero, we have (b) For most stable configuration ; 𝜃 = 0° and energy 𝑈𝑆
𝐹𝐵 = 𝐹𝑔 For most unstable configuration ; 𝜃 = 180 and energy 𝑈𝑈𝑆
𝐵𝐼𝑙=𝑚𝑔
𝑚
𝑚𝑔 ( )𝑔 0.2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10
𝑰= = 𝑙 = = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑨 = 𝟐 𝒎 𝑨
𝐵𝑙 𝐵 1
 From the figure, 6. Calculate the magnetic field at the centre of a square loop which carries a current
𝑈𝑆 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 𝜃 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 0° = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 of 1.5 A, length of each side being 50 cm.
𝐿
( )
𝑈𝑈𝑆 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 𝜃 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 cos 180° = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 −1 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 Solution : 𝐿 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 50 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝐼 = 1.5 𝐴 𝑎 = = 25𝑐𝑚 = 25 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
2
 Hence the work done by the magnetic field in moving it from most stable 𝜙1 = 𝜙 = 45° ; 𝜙2 = 180° − 𝜙 ; 𝜃 = 45°
configuration to the most unstable configuration is,  Let the square loop is made up of four straight conductors AB, BD, DC and CA
𝑊𝐹 = 𝑈𝑈𝑆 − 𝑈𝑆 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 − (− 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 ) = 2 𝑝𝑚 𝐵  From Biot - Savart law, the magnetic field at a
𝑊𝐹 = 2 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 0.8 distance ‘a’ due to straigtht current carrying
𝑾𝑭 = 𝟎. 𝟖 𝑱 conductor AB is,
 Work done by the applied magnetic field, 𝜇𝑜 𝐼
𝐵𝐴𝐵 = [sin 𝜙1 + sin 𝜙2 ]
𝑊𝐵 = 𝑈𝑆 − 𝑈𝑈𝑆 = − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 − 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 = − 2 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 4𝜋𝑎
𝑊𝐵 = − 2 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 0.8 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 1.5
𝐵𝐴𝐵 = [sin 45° + sin 45° ]
𝑊𝐵 = − 𝟎. 𝟖 𝑱 4 𝜋 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−2
−5
5. A non - conducting sphere has a mass of 100 g and 10 𝑋 1.5
radius 20 cm. A flat compact coil of wire with turns 5 𝐵𝐴𝐵 = [2 sin 45° ]
25
is wrapped tightly around it with each turns 1
concentric with the sphere. This sphere is placed on 𝐵𝐴𝐵 = 0. 06 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 2 𝑋 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
√2
an inclined plane such that plane of coil is parallel to  Similarly, magnetic field due to BD, DC and CA
the inclined plane. A uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T
exists in the region in vertically upward direction. 𝐵𝐵𝐷 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
Compute the current I required to rest the sphere in 𝐵𝐷𝐶 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
equilibrium. 𝐵𝐶𝐴 = 6 √2 𝑋 10−7 𝑇
−2
Solution : 𝑀 = 100 g = 0.1 kg ; R = 20 cm =20 X 10 m ; N = 5 ; B = 0.5 T ; I = ?  From Fleming’s left hand rule, the magnetic field at the centre, due to all four
 Here sphere be at two types of equilibrium. They are, conductors is directed perpendicularly inwards to the plane of the paper. Hence
(i) Straight line equilibrium the total magnetic field
(ii) Rotational equilibrium 𝐵 = 𝐵𝐴𝐵 + 𝐵𝐵𝐷 + 𝐵𝐷𝐶 + 𝐵𝐶𝐴
 Under straight line equilibrium ; 𝑓𝑆 = 𝑀 𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 − − − − − − (1) 𝐵 = 4 𝑋 6 √2 𝑋 10−7
 Torque on the sphere due to magnetic field about its centre ; 𝐵 = 24 𝑋 1.414 𝑋 10−7
𝜏 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃 (anticlockwise direction) 𝐵 = 33. 936 𝑋 10−7 = 3.3936 𝑋 10−6 𝑇
Torque on the sphere due to friction about its centre ; 𝑩 = 𝟑. 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑻
𝜏 = 𝑓𝑆 𝑅 (clockwise direction)
Under rotational equilibrium ; 𝑓𝑆 𝑅 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃 − − − − − − (2)
 Put equation (1) in (2)
𝑀 𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑅 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 sin 𝜃
𝑀 𝑔 𝑅 = 𝑝𝑚 𝐵 [∵ 𝑝𝑚 = 𝑁 𝐼 𝐴]
𝑀𝑔𝑅 = 𝑁𝐼𝐴𝐵
𝑀 𝑔 𝑅 = 𝑁 𝐼 (𝜋 𝑅2 ) 𝐵
𝑀𝑔
𝐼 =
𝑁𝜋𝑅𝐵
0.1 𝑋 10
𝐼 =
5 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 0.5
102 100
𝐼 = =
50 𝑋 𝜋 50 𝑋 𝜋
𝟐
𝑰 = 𝑨 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝝅
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -4
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
AND
ALTERNATING CURRENT

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 4. A closed coil of 40 turns and of area 200 cm2, is rotated in a magnetic field of
1. A circular antenna of area 3 m2 is installed at a place in Madurai. The plane of flux density 2 Wb m–2. It rotates from a position where its plane makes an angle
the area of antenna is inclined at 47o with the direction of Earth’s magnetic field. of 30o with the field to a position perpendicular to the field in a time 0.2 s. Find
If the magnitude of Earth’s field at that place is 4.1 × 10–5 T find the magnetic flux the magnitude of the emf induced in the coil due to its rotation.
linked with the antenna. Solution : 𝐴 = 200 𝑐𝑚2 = 200 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 2 𝑇 ; 𝑁 = 40 ; 𝑡 = 0.2 𝑠
Solution : 𝑨 = 3 𝑚2 ; 𝜃 = 90° − 47° = 43 ° ; 𝐵 = 4.1 X 10−5 T  Initially, 𝜃 = 90° − 30° = 60 ; Hence initial magnetic flux
 Magnetic flux, Φ𝐵𝑖 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 Φ𝐵𝑖 = 2 𝑋 200 𝑋 10−4 X cos 60°
Φ𝐵 = 4.1 X 10−5 X 3 X cos 43° 1
Φ𝐵𝑖 = 400 𝑋 10−4 X = 200 𝑋 10−4
Φ𝐵 = 4.1 X 10−5 X 3 X 0.7314 2
Φ𝐵 = 8. 997 X 10−5 = Φ𝐵𝑖 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑊𝑏
𝚽𝑩 = 𝟖𝟗. 𝟗𝟕 𝐗 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑾𝒃 = 𝟖𝟗. 𝟗𝟕 𝝁 𝑾𝒃  Finally, 𝜃 = 90° − 90° = 0° ; Hence final magnetic flux
2. A circular loop of area 5 ×10–2 m2 rotates in a uniform Φ𝐵𝑓 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃
magnetic field of 0.2 T. If the loop rotates about its Φ𝐵𝑓 = 2 𝑋 200 𝑋 10−4 X cos 0°
diameter which is perpendicular to the magnetic field as Φ𝐵𝑓 = 400 𝑋 10−4 X 1 = 400 𝑋 10−4
shown in figure. Find the magnetic flux linked with the
Φ𝐵𝑓 = 4 𝑋 10−2 𝑊𝑏
loop when its plane is (a) normal to the field (b) inclined
60o to the field and (c) parallel to the field.  Since the magnetic flux changes, an emf is induced which is given by
Solution : 𝐴 = 5 𝑋 10−2 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 0.2 𝑇 𝑑Φ𝐵 Φ𝐵𝑓 − Φ𝐵𝑖
∈= 𝑁 = 𝑁
(a) When circular loop normal to the magnetic field, then 𝜽 = 𝟎°. The magnetic flux 𝑑𝑡 𝑡
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 4 𝑋 10−2 − 2 𝑋 10−2 40 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−2
−2 ∈ = 40 𝑋 =
Φ𝐵 = 0.2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10 X cos 0° 0.2 0.2
Φ𝐵 = 1 𝑋 10−2 X 1 = 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝐖𝐛 ∈ = 400 𝑋 10−2 = 𝟒 𝑽
(b) When circular loop inclined 𝟔𝟎° to the magnetic field, then 𝜽 = 𝟗𝟎° − 𝟔𝟎° = 𝟑𝟎° 5. A straight conducting wire is dropped horizontally from a certain height with
The magnetic flux its length along east – west direction. Will an emf be induced in it? Justify your
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 answer.
−2
Φ𝐵 = 0.2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10 X cos 30° Solution :
√3 1.732  Yes! An emf will be induced in the wire because it moves perpendicular to the
Φ𝐵 = 1 𝑋 10−2 X = 𝑋 10−2 horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field and hence it cuts the magnetic
2 2
−𝟐
𝚽𝑩 = 𝟎. 𝟖𝟔𝟔 𝑿𝟏𝟎 = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝐖𝐛 −𝟑 lines of Earth's magnetic filed.
(c) When circular loop parallel to the magnetic field, then 𝜽 = 𝟗𝟎°. The magnetic flux 6. If the current i flowing in the straight conducting wire as shown in the figure
Φ𝐵 = 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃 decreases, find out the direction of induced current in the metallic square loop
−2
Φ𝐵 = 0.2 𝑋 5 𝑋 10 X cos 90° placed near it.
−2
Φ𝐵 = 1 𝑋 10 X 0 = 𝟎 Solution :
3. A cylindrical bar magnet is kept along the axis of a circular solenoid. If the  From right hand rule, the magnetic field by the
magnet is rotated about its axis, find out whether an electric current is induced straight wire is directed into the plane of the square
in the coil. loop perpendicularly and its magnetic flux is
Solution : decreasing.
 The magnetic field of a cylindrical magnet is  The decrease in flux is opposed by the current
symmetrical about its axis. As the magnet is induced in the loop by producing a magnetic field in
rotated along the axis of the solenoid, there is the same direction as the magnetic field of the wire.
no induced current in the solenoid because  Again from right hand rule, for this inward magnetic
the flux linked with the solenoid does not field, the direction of the induced current in the loop
change due to the rotation of the magnet is clockwise.
7. The magnetic flux passes perpendicular to the plane of the circuit and is directed 9. A copper rod of length l rotates about one of its
into the paper. If the magnetic flux varies with respect to time as per the ends with an angular velocity ω in a magnetic
following relation: 𝚽𝑩 = (2t3 + 3t2 + 8t + 5) mWb , what is the magnitude of the field B as shown in the figure. The plane of
induced emf in the loop when t = 3 s? Find out the direction of current through rotation is perpendicular to the field. Find the
the circuit. emf induced between the two ends of the rod.
Solution : Φ𝐵 = 𝑡 + 3 𝑡 + 8 𝑡 + 5) 𝑋 10 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝑁 = 1 ; 𝑡 = 3 𝑠 ; ∈ = ? ; 𝑖 = ?
(2 3 2 −3
Solution :
 From laws of electromagnetic induction,  Consider a small element of length 𝑑𝑥 at a
𝑑Φ𝐵 𝑑 3 2 −3 distance 𝑥 from the centre O of the circle
∈= 𝑁 = (2 𝑡 + 3 𝑡 + 8 𝑡 + 5) 𝑋 10
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 described by the rod.
∈ = (2 𝑋 3 𝑡 2 + 3 𝑋 2 𝑡 + 8 + 0)𝑋 10−3  As this element moves perpendicular to the
∈ = (6 𝑡 2 + 6 𝑡 + 8) 𝑋 10−3
field with a linear velocity 𝑣 = 𝑥 𝜔, the emf
 At t = 3 s, the magnitude of induced emf
developed in the element 𝑑𝑥 is
∈ = [6 (3)2 + 6 (3) + 8]𝑋 10−3
𝑑 ∈ = 𝐵 𝑑𝑥 𝑣 = 𝐵 𝑑𝑥 (𝑥 𝜔)
∈ = [54 + 18 + 8]𝑋 10−3
𝑑 ∈ = 𝐵 𝜔 𝑥 𝑑𝑥
∈ = 𝟖𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑽 = 𝟖𝟎 𝒎 𝑽
 This rod is made up of many such elements, moving perpendicular to the field.
 As time passes, the magnetic flux linked with the
The emf developed across two ends is
loop increases. 𝑙 𝑙
 According to Lenz’s law, the direction of the 𝑥2
∈ = 𝐵 𝜔 ∫ 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝐵 𝜔 [ ]
induced current should be in a way so as to oppose 2 0
the flux increase. 𝟏
0
 So, the induced current flows in such a way to ∈ = 𝑩 𝝎 𝒍𝟐

𝟐
produce a magnetic field opposite to the given 10. A solenoid of 500 turns is wound on an iron core of relative permeability 800.
field. This magnetic field is perpendicularly
The length and radius of the solenoid are 40 cm and 3 cm respectively. Calculate
outwards.
the average emf induced in the solenoid if the current in it changes from
 Therefore, the induced current flows in anti-
0 to 3 A in 0.4 second.
clockwise direction.
8. A conducting rod of length 0.5 m falls freely from the top of a building of height Solution : : 𝜇𝑟 = 800 ; 𝑁 = 500 ; 𝑙 = 40 𝑐𝑚 = 40 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ;
7.2 m at a place in Chennai where the horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic 𝑟 = 3 𝑐𝑚 = 3 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑑𝑖 = 3 − 0 = 3 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.4 𝑠 ; ∈ = ?
field is 4.04 × 10–5 T. If the length of the rod is perpendicular to Earth’s horizontal  Self inductance,
magnetic field, find the emf induced across the conductor when the rod is about 𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 2 𝐴 𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 2 𝜋 𝑟 2
𝐿= =
to touch the ground. (Assume that the rod falls down with constant acceleration 𝑙 𝑙
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 800 𝑋 (500)2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (3 𝑋 10−2 )2
of 10 m s )–2
𝐿=
Solution : 𝐵𝐻 = 4.04 𝑋 10−5 𝑇 ; ℎ = 7.2 𝑚 ; 𝑙 = 0.5 𝑚 40 𝑋 10−2
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 800 𝑋 250000 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 9 𝑋 10−4
 From the equation of motion, the final velocity of the rod is 𝐿=
𝑣 2 = 𝑢2 + 2 𝑔 ℎ [∵ 𝑢 = 0] 40 𝑋 10−2
2 𝐿 = 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 20 𝑋 250000 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 9 𝑋 10−9
𝑣 = 0 + (2 𝑋 10 𝑋 7.2)
𝐿 = 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2 𝑋 25 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 9 𝑋 10−4
𝑣 2 = 144
𝐿 = 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1800 𝑋 10−4
𝒗 = 𝟏𝟐 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝐿 = 1.775 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−4
 The magnitude of the induced emf when the rod is about to touch the ground is 𝑳 = 𝟏. 𝟕𝟕𝟓 𝑯
∈ = 𝐵𝐻 𝑙 𝑣
∈ = 4.04 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 12
𝑑𝑖 3 30
∈ = 24.24 𝑋 10−5 𝑉 ∈=−𝐿 = − 1.775 𝑋 = −1.775 𝑋 = − 1.775 𝑋 7. 5
∈ = 𝟐𝟒𝟐. 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑽 = 𝟐𝟒𝟐. 𝟒 𝝁 𝑽 𝑑𝑡 0.4 4
∈ = − 𝟏𝟑. 𝟑𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑽
11. The self-inductance of an air-core solenoid is 4.8 mH. If its core is replaced by 13. Consider two coplanar, co-axial circular coils A
iron core, then its self-inductance becomes 1.8 H. Find out the relative and B as shown in figure. The radius of coil A is
permeability of iron. 20 cm while that of coil B is 2 cm. The number
Solution : 𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑟 = 4.8 𝑚𝐻 = 4.8 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 ; 𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 = 1.8 𝐻 ; 𝜇𝑟 = ? of turns in coils A and B are 200 and 1000
 Self inductance of air core solenoid ; respectively. Calculate the mutual inductance
𝜇0 𝑁 2 𝐴 between the coils. If the current in coil A
𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑒 =
𝑙 changes from 2 A to 6 A in 0.04 s, determine the
 Self inductance of iron core solenoid ; induced emf in coil B and the rate of change of
𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 2 𝐴 flux through the coil B at that instant.
𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 =
𝑙 Solution : 𝑁𝐴 = 200 ; 𝑁𝐵 = 1000 ; 𝑟𝐴 = 20𝑐𝑚 = 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝐵 = 2 𝑐𝑚 = 2 𝑋10−2 𝑚
 Hence, 𝑑𝑖𝐴 = 6 − 2 = 4 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.04 𝑠 ; 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = ? ; ∈𝐵 = ?
𝜇0 𝑁 2 𝐴  Mutual inductance between the coils,
𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑟 ( ) 1
𝑙 𝜇 𝑁 𝑖
= = 𝑁𝐵 ( 0 𝐴 𝐴 ) 𝜋 𝑟𝐵2
𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑁 𝐴2
𝜇𝑟 𝑁𝐵 Φ𝐵 𝑁𝐵 B𝐴 A𝐵 2 𝑟𝐴 𝑁𝐵 𝜇0 𝑁𝐴 𝑖𝐴 𝜋 𝑟𝐵2
( ) 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = = = =
𝑙 𝑖𝐴 𝑖𝐴 𝑖𝐴 2 𝑟𝐴 𝑖𝐴
𝐿𝑖𝑟𝑜𝑛 1.8 3 𝑋 103 3000 𝜇0 𝑁𝐴 𝑁𝐵 𝜋 𝑟𝐵2
∴ 𝜇𝑟 = = = = 𝑀𝐵𝐴 =
𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑟 4.8 𝑋 10−3 8 8 2 𝑟𝐴
𝝁𝒓 = 𝟑𝟕𝟓 (𝒏𝒐 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕) 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 200 𝑋 1000 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 (2 𝑋10−2 )2
12. The current flowing in the first coil changes from 2 A to 10 A in 0.4 s. Find the 𝑀𝐵𝐴 =
2 𝑋 20 𝑋 10−2
mutual inductance between two coils if an emf of 60 mV is induced in the second 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = 8 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5
coil. Also determine the magnitude of induced emf in the second coil if the 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = 7. 887 𝑋 101 𝑋 10−5 = 𝟕. 𝟖𝟖𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝑯
current in the first coil is changed from 4 A to 16 A in 0.03 s. Consider only the  Magnitude of the induced emf in the coil B,
magnitude of induced emf. 𝑑𝑖𝐴 4
Solution : ∈𝐵 = 𝑀𝐵𝐴 = 7. 887 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 = 7.887 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 100
𝑑𝑡 0.04
(i) 𝑑𝑖1 = 10 − 2 = 8 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.4 𝑠 ; ∈2 = 60 𝑚𝑉 = 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 ; 𝑀 = ? ∈𝑩 = 7.887 𝑋 10−2 𝑉 = 78.87 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 = 𝟕𝟖. 𝟖𝟕 𝒎𝑽
 Magnitude of mutual induced emf is ;  The rate of change of magnetic flux of coil B is
𝑑𝑖1 𝒅
∈2 = 𝑀21 (𝐍𝑩 𝚽𝑩 ) = ∈𝑩 = 78.87 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 = 𝟕𝟖. 𝟖𝟕 𝒎 𝑾𝒃 𝒔−𝟏
𝑑𝑡 𝒅𝒕
 Hence mutual inductance between the coils, 14. A circular metal of area 0.03 m2 rotates in a uniform magnetic field of 0.4 T. The
∈2 axis of rotation passes through the centre and perpendicular to its plane and is
𝑀21 = also parallel to the field. If the disc completes 20 revolutions in one second and
𝑑𝑖
( 1) the resistance of the disc is 4 Ω, calculate the induced emf between the axis and
𝑑𝑡
60 𝑋 10−3 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.4 the rim and induced current flowing in the disc.
𝑀21 = = = 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.05
8
( ) 8 Solution : : 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑇 ; 𝐴 = 0.3 𝑚2 ; 𝑓 = 20 𝑟𝑝𝑠 ; 𝑅 = 4  ; ∈ = ? ; 𝑖 = ?
0.4  Area swept out by the disc in unit time = Area of the disc × frequency
𝑴𝟐𝟏 = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑯 = 𝟑 𝒎 𝐻 𝑑𝐴
(ii) 𝑑𝑖1 = 16 − 4 = 12 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.03 𝑠 ; ∈2 = ? = 0.3 𝑋 20 = 0.6 𝑚2
 Magnitude of Induced emf in the second coil due to the rate of change of 𝑑𝑡
current in the first coil is 𝑑Φ𝐵 𝑑 (B A) 𝑑𝐴
𝑑𝑖1 ∈= = = 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑋 0.6 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟒 𝑽
∈2 = 𝑀21 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑡  Thus induced current,
12
∈2 = 3 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 = 100 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 12 ∈ 0.24
0.03 𝒊 = = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟔 𝑨
2 ∈ = 𝟏. 𝟐 𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑅 4
15. A rectangular coil of area 70 cm2 having 600 turns rotates about an axis 17. An inverter is common electrical device which we use in our homes. When there
perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.4 Wb m–2. If the coil completes 500 is no power in our house, inverter gives AC power to run a few electronic
revolutions in a minute, calculate the instantaneous emf when the plane of the appliances like fan or light. An inverter has inbuilt step-up transformer which
coil is (a) perpendicular to the field (b) parallel to the field and (c) inclined at converts 12 V AC to 240 V AC. The primary coil has 100 turns and the inverter
60o with the field. delivers 50 mA to the external circuit. Find the number of turns in the
Solution : 𝑁 = 600 ; 𝐴 = 70 𝑐𝑚2 = 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑇 ; secondary and the primary current.
500 50 Solution : 𝑉𝑃 = 12 𝑉 ; 𝑉𝑆 = 240 𝑉 ; 𝑁𝑃 = 100 𝑉 ; 𝐼𝑆 = 50 𝑚𝐴 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝐴
𝑓 = 500 𝑟𝑝𝑚 = = = 8.333 𝑟𝑝𝑠
60 6  By transformer equation;.
(a) When perpendicular to the field, 𝜃 = 𝜔 𝑡 = 0° 𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑆 𝐼𝑃
∈ = ∈𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 2 𝜋 𝑓 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = = =𝐾
𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑃 𝐼𝑆
50  Hence the transformation ratio ;
∈ = 600 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 2 𝜋 𝑋 𝑋 sin 0° = 𝟎
6 𝑉𝑆 240
(b) When parallel to the field, 𝜃 = 𝜔 𝑡 = 90° 𝐾= = = 20
𝑉𝑆 12
∈ = ∈𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 2 𝜋 𝑓 sin 𝜔 𝑡  Number of turns in secondary coil ; 𝑵𝑺 = 𝑁𝑃 𝐾 = 100 𝑋 20 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎
50
∈ = 600 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 2 𝜋 𝑋 𝑋 sin 90°  Primary current ; 𝑰𝑷 = 𝐼𝑆 𝐾 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 20 = 1000 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟏 𝑨
6
22 18. Write down the equation for a sinusoidal voltage of 50 Hz and its peak value is
∈ = 100 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 2 𝑋 𝑋 50 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−4 20 V. Draw the corresponding voltage versus time graph.
7
∈ = 88 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−4 = 𝟖𝟖 𝑽 Solution : 𝑓 = 50 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑉𝑚 = 20 𝑉 ; 𝑉 = ? ; 𝑇 = ?
(c) When inclined at 60o with the field, 𝜃 = 𝜔 𝑡 = 90° − 60° = 30°  Voltage at any instant,
∈ = ∈𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 2 𝜋 𝑓 sin 𝜔 𝑡 𝑉 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡
50 𝑉 = 20 sin(2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 50 𝑋 𝑡)
∈ = 600 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 2 𝜋 𝑋 𝑋 sin 30° 𝑽 = 𝟐𝟎 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟑𝟏𝟒 𝒕
6
22 1  Time for one cycle ,
∈ = 100 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 70 𝑋 2 𝑋 𝑋 50 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 1 1
7 2
∈ = 44 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−4 = 𝟒𝟒 𝑽 𝑇= = = 0.02 𝑠
𝑓 50
16. An ideal transformer has 460 and 40,000 turns in the primary and secondary 𝑻 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒔 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒎𝒔
coils respectively. Find the voltage developed per turn of the secondary if the  Corresponding Wave form is shown
transformer is connected to a 230 V AC mains. The secondary is given to a load 19. The equation for an alternating current is given by i = 77 sin 314t. Find the peak
of resistance 104 Ω. Calculate the power delivered to the load. current, frequency, time period and instantaneous value of current at t = 2 ms.
Solution : 𝑁𝑃 = 460 ; 𝑁𝑆 = 40000 ; 𝑉𝑃 = 230 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝑆 = 104 Ω ;
𝑉𝑆
=? ; 𝑃 =? Solution : : 𝑖 = 77 sin 314 𝑡 ; 𝑡 = 2 𝑚𝑠 = 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑠
𝑁𝑆
 General equation for alternating current ; 𝑖 = 𝐼𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝐼𝑚 sin 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡
 From the transformer equation, voltage per turn of the secondary is ;
𝑉𝑆 𝑉𝑃 230 1  Comparing this equation with given equation, we get
= = = (a) Peak current ; 𝑰𝒎 = 𝟕𝟕 𝑨
𝑁𝑆 𝑁𝑃 460 2 𝝎 314 314 100
𝑽𝑺 (b) Frequency ; 𝒇 = 2𝜋 = = 2 𝑋 3.14 = = 𝟓𝟎 𝑯𝒛
2𝜋 2
∴ = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝑽/𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒏 1 1
𝑵𝑺 (c) Time period ; 𝑻= = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟐 𝒔
𝑓 50
 Total secondary voltage ; 𝑽𝑺 = 𝑁𝑆 𝑋 0.5 = 40000 𝑋 0.5 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝑽
(d) At 𝑡 = 2 𝑚𝑠, instantaneous current
 Power delivered to the load ,
𝑉𝑆 𝑖 = 77 sin (314 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑟𝑎𝑑)
𝑃𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 180°
𝑅𝑆 𝑖 = 77 sin (314 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 )
20000 𝑋 20000 3.14
𝑃𝑆 = = 40000 𝑊 𝑖 = 77 𝑋 sin 36°
104 𝒊 = 77 𝑋 0. 5877 = 𝟒𝟓. 𝟐𝟔 𝐀
𝑷𝑺 = 𝟒𝟎 𝒌𝑾 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
20. A 400 mH coil of negligible resistance is connected to an AC circuit in which an  Phase angle between voltage and current ;
effective current of 6 mA is flowing. Find out the voltage across the coil if the 𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶
tan 𝜙 =
frequency is 1000 Hz. 𝑅
Solution : 𝐼𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 6 𝑚𝐴 = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 ; 𝐿 = 400 𝑚𝐻 = 400 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 ; 𝑓 = 1000 𝐻𝑧 −1
𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 184 − 144
𝜙 = tan [ ] = tan−1 [ ]
 Voltage across the coil of inductance 𝐿 𝑅 30
40 4
𝑉𝐿 = 𝐼 𝑋𝐿 = 𝐼 𝜔 𝐿 = 𝐼 (2 𝜋 𝑓) 𝐿 𝜙 = tan−1 [ ] = tan−1 [ ]
𝑉𝐿 = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1000 𝑋 400 𝑋 10−3 30 3
𝝓 = tan−1 [1. 333] = 𝟓𝟑. 𝟏𝟐°
𝑉𝐿 = 150.72 𝑋 10−1
 Since the phase angle is positive, voltage leads current by 53.12° for this
𝑽𝑳 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟎𝟕𝟐 𝑽
inductive circuit.
𝟏𝟎𝟐
21. A capacitor of capacitance μF is connected across a 220 V, 50 Hz A.C. mains. 23. A 500 μH inductor,
𝟖𝟎
pF capacitor and a 628 Ω resistor are connected to form
𝝅
𝝅𝟐
Calculate the capacitive reactance, RMS value of current and write down the a series RLC circuit. Calculate the resonant frequency and Q-factor of this circuit
equations of voltage and current. at resonance.
102 102
Solution : 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 220 𝑉 ; 𝑓 = 50 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝐶 = 𝜇𝐹 = 𝑋 10−6 𝐹 ; 𝑋𝐶 = ? ; 𝐼𝑅𝑀𝑆 = ? Solution : 𝐿 = 500 𝜇𝐻 = 500 𝑋 10−6 𝐻 ; 𝐶 =
80
𝑝𝐹 =
80
𝑋 10−12 𝐹 ; R = 628 Ω
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋2 𝜋2
1 1
 Capacitive reactance ; 𝑋𝐶 = = 
Resonance frequency,
𝜔𝐶 2𝜋𝑓𝐶
1 1 1 1 1
𝑋𝐶 = = 𝑓𝑟 = = = −9
102 10−2 2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶 80 10
2𝜋𝑋 𝑋 80
2 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 50 𝑋 (
𝜋
) 𝑋 10−6 2 𝜋 √500 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 2 𝑋 10−12
𝜋 𝜋 √500
𝑿𝑪 = 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝛀 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝛀 109 109 109 109 109 1
𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 220 𝑓𝑟 = = = = = 2
= 𝑋 107
 RMS value of alternating current ; 𝑰𝑹𝑴𝑺 = = = 𝟐. 𝟐 𝛀 2√500 𝑋 80 2√40000 2 𝑋 200 400 4 𝑋 10 4
𝑋𝐶 100 𝑓𝑟 = 0.25 𝑋 107 = 2500 𝑋 103 𝐻𝑧 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝒌 𝑯𝒛
 Equation for alternating voltage ;  Q -factor,
𝑉 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔𝑡 𝑉𝐿 𝐼 𝑋𝐿 𝑋𝐿 𝜔𝑟 𝐿 2 𝜋 𝑓𝑟 𝐿
𝑉 = 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 √2 sin 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡 𝑄= = = = =
𝑉𝑅 𝐼𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 𝑅
𝑉 = 220 𝑋 1.414 sin 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 50 𝑋 𝑡 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2500 𝑋 103 𝑋 500 𝑋 10−6
𝑽 = 𝟑𝟏𝟏 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟑𝟏𝟒 𝒕 𝑄=
 Equation for alternating current ; 628
𝜋 2 𝑋 2500 𝑋 103 𝑋 500 𝑋 10−6 25000 𝑋 10−3
𝑖 = 𝐼𝑚 sin (𝜔𝑡 + ) 𝑄 = =
2 200 2
𝜋 𝑸 = 𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟓
𝑖 = 𝐼𝑅𝑀𝑆 √2 sin (2 𝜋 𝑓 𝑡 + ) 24. Find the instantaneous value of alternating voltage 𝒗 = 𝟏𝟎 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟑𝝅 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 𝒕) volt
2
𝜋 at (a) 0 s (b) 50 μs (c) 75 μs.
𝑖 = 2.2 𝑋 1.414 sin (2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 50 𝑋 𝑡 + )
2 Solution :
𝝅
𝒊 = 𝟑. 𝟏𝟏 𝐬𝐢𝐧 (𝟑𝟏𝟒 𝒕 + )  Voltage at any instant ; 𝑣 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔 𝑡
𝟐
22. Find the impedance of a series RLC circuit if the inductive reactance, capacitive  Given voltage equation ; 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑡)
reactance and resistance are 184 Ω, 144 Ω and 30 Ω respectively. Also calculate (a) At 𝑡 = 0 𝑠 ; 𝑣 = 10 sin 0° = 𝟎
the phase angle between voltage and current. (b) At 𝑡 = 50 𝜇𝑠 ,
Solution : 𝑋𝐿 = 184 Ω ; 𝑋𝐶 = 144 Ω ; R = 30 Ω ; Z = ? ; ϕ = ? 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−6 )
 Impedance ; 2
𝑍 = √𝑅 + (𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 ) 2 𝑣 = 10 sin(150 𝜋 𝑋 10−2 𝑟𝑎𝑑)
180°
𝑍 = √302 + (184 − 144)2 = √302 + 402 𝑣 = 10 sin (150 𝜋 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 )
𝜋
𝑍 = √900 + 1600 = √2500 𝑣 = 10 sin(1.5 𝑋 180° ) = 10 sin(270° )
𝒁 = 𝟓𝟎 𝛀 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑣 = 10 𝑋 (−1) = − 𝟏𝟎 𝑽
(c) At 𝑡 = 75 𝜇𝑠 ; 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑋 75 𝑋 10−6 ) (c) New Q- factor,

−2 −2 180°
𝑣 = 10 sin(225 𝜋 𝑋 10 𝑟𝑎𝑑) = 10 sin (225 𝜋 𝑋 10 𝑋 ) 1 2𝐿 1 2 𝑋 80 𝑋 10−6
𝜋
𝑣 = 10 sin(2.25 𝑋 180° ) = 10 sin(405° ) 𝑄𝑛𝑒𝑤 = √ = 𝑋√
𝑅 𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 50 1000 𝑋 10−12
𝑣 = 10 sin(360 + 45° ) = 10 sin(45° )
𝑣 = 10 𝑋 (0.7071) = 𝟕. 𝟎𝟕𝟏 𝑽 1 160 𝑋 106 1 16 𝑋 107 1
25. The current in an inductive circuit is given by 0.3 sin (200t – 40°) A. Write the 𝑄𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 𝑋√ = 𝑋√ = 𝑋 √16 𝑋 104
50 1000 50 1 𝑋103 50
equation for the voltage across it if the inductance is 40 mH.
4 𝑋 102 400
Solution : 𝑖 = 0.3 𝑠𝑖𝑛 (200 𝑡 − 40°) 𝐴 ; 𝐿 = 40 𝑚𝐻 = 40 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 ; 𝑉 = ? 𝑄𝑛𝑒𝑤 = = =𝟖
50 50
 In an inductive circuit, the voltage leads the current by 90o. Therefore, 𝟏𝟎 −𝟒 𝟐
𝑣 = 𝑉𝑚 sin(𝜔 𝑡 + 90°) 27. capacitor of capacitance F, an inductor of inductance H and a resistor of
𝝅 𝝅
𝑣 = 𝐼𝑚 𝑋𝐿 sin(𝜔 𝑡 + 90°) resistance 100 Ω are connected to form a series RLC circuit. When an AC supply
𝑣 = 𝐼𝑚 𝜔 𝐿 sin(𝜔 𝑡 + 90°) of 220 V, 50 Hz is applied to the circuit, determine (a) the impedance of the
𝑣 = 0.3 𝑋 200 𝑋 40 𝑋 10−3 sin(200 𝑡 − 40° + 90°) circuit (b) the peak value of current flowing in the circuit (c) the power factor
𝒗 = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝒕 + 𝟓𝟎°) 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕 of the circuit and (d) the power factor of the circuit at resonance.
26. A series RLC circuit which resonates at 400 kHz has 80 μH inductor, 2000 pF 10−4 2
capacitor and 50 Ω resistor. Calculate (a) Q-factor of the circuit (b) the new Solution : 𝐶 = 𝐹 ; 𝐿= 𝐻 ; 𝑅 = 100 Ω ; 𝑉𝑟𝑚𝑠 = 220 𝑉 ; 𝑓 = 50 𝐻𝑧
𝜋 𝜋
value of capacitance when the value of inductance is doubled and (c) the new (a) Inductive reactance,
Q-factor. 2
𝑋𝐿 = 𝜔 𝐿 = 2 𝜋 𝑓 𝐿 = 2 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 50𝑋 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝛀
Solution : 𝑓𝑟 = 400 𝑘𝐻𝑧 = 400 𝑋 103 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝐿 = 80 𝜇𝐻 = 80 𝑋 10−6 𝐻 ; 𝜋
𝐶 = 2000 𝑝𝐹 = 2000 𝑋 10−12 𝐹 ; 𝑅 = 50 Ω Capacitive reactance,
(a) Q-factor of the circuit, 1 1 1 104
𝑋𝐶 = = = = = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝛀
𝜔𝐶 2𝜋𝑓𝐶 10−4 100
1 𝐿 1 80 𝑋 10−6 1 80 𝑋 106 1 8 𝑋 107 2 𝜋 𝑋 50 𝑋
𝜋
𝑄= √ = 𝑋√ = 𝑋 √ = 𝑋 √
𝑅 𝐶 50 2000 𝑋 10−12 50 2000 50 2 𝑋103 Impedance ; 𝑍 = √𝑅2 + (𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 )2
1 2 𝑋 102 200 𝑍 = √1002 + (200 − 100)2
𝑄= 𝑋 √4 𝑋 104 = = =𝟒
50 50 50 𝑍 = √1002 + 1002
(b) Resonance frequency ;
1 1 𝑍 = √2 𝑋 1002 = √2 𝑋 100 = 1.414 𝑋 100
𝑓𝑟 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓𝑟 2 = 2
𝒁 = 𝟏𝟒𝟏. 𝟒 𝛀
2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶 4𝜋 𝐿𝐶 (b) Peak value of current,
1
∴ 𝐶= 𝑉𝑚 𝑉𝑟𝑚𝑠 √2
4 𝜋 2 𝐿 𝑓𝑟 2 𝐼𝑚 = =
When inductance 𝐿 is doubled, new capacitance , 𝑍 𝑍
220 𝑋 1.414 220
1 𝐼𝑚 = =
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 141.1 100
4 𝜋 2 (2 𝐿) 𝑓𝑟 2 𝑰𝒎 = 𝟐. 𝟐 𝑨
1 (c) Power factor of the circuit,
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 =
4 𝑋 (3.14) 2 𝑋 2 𝑋 80 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (400 𝑋 103 )2 𝑅 100 1 1
1 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝝓 = = = = = 𝟎. 𝟕𝟎𝟕
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 𝑍 141.4 1.414 √2
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2 𝑋 80 𝑋 160000 (d) Power factor of the circuit at resonance (𝑍 = 𝑅),
1
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 𝑅 𝑅
3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 640 𝑋 160000 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝝓 = = = 𝟏
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 = 9. 9 06 𝑋 10−10 𝑍 𝑅
𝐶𝑛𝑒𝑤 ≅ 10 𝑋 10−10 = 1000 𝑋 10−12 𝐹
𝑪𝒏𝒆𝒘 ≅ 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝑭 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 5. A rectangular coil of area 6 cm2 having 3500 turns is kept in a uniform magnetic
1. A square coil of side 30 cm with 500 turns is kept in a uniform magnetic field of field of 0.4 T. Initially, the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the field and is
0.4 T. The plane of the coil is inclined at an angle of 30 o to the field. Calculate the then rotated through an angle of 180o. If the resistance of the coil is 35 Ω, find
the amount of charge flowing through the coil.
magnetic flux through the coil.
Solution : 𝐴 = 6 𝑐𝑚2 = 6 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝑁 = 3500 ; 𝐵 = 0.4 𝑇 ; 𝜃𝑖 = 90° − 90° = 0°
Solution : 𝑁 = 500 ; 𝑎 = 30 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝐴 = 𝑎2 = 900 𝑐𝑚2 = 900 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ;
𝜃𝑓 = 180° − 90° = 90° ; 𝑅 = 35Ω ; 𝑞 = ?
𝜃 = 90° − 30° = 60 ° ; 𝐵 = 0.4 T ; N Φ𝐵 = ?
 Initial magnetic flux ; 𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃𝑖 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 0° = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴
 Total Magnetic flux through the coil,
 Final magnetic flux ; 𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃𝑓 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 180° = − 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴
𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃
𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 500 X 0.4 X 900 𝑋 10−4 cos 60°  Change in magnetic flux ; 𝑑 (𝑁 Φ𝐵 ) = 𝑁 𝐴 𝐵 − (− 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴) = 2 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴
1 1  Hence rate of change in magnetic flux (i.e.) induced emf;
𝑁 Φ𝐵 = 180000 X 10−4 X = 18 X = 𝟗 𝑾𝒃 𝑑 (𝑁 Φ𝐵 )
2 2 ∈ = = 2𝑁𝐵𝐴
2. A straight metal wire crosses a magnetic field of flux 4 mWb in a time 0.4 s. Find 𝑑𝑡
the magnitude of the emf induced in the wire. ∈ = 2 𝑋 3500 𝑋 0.4 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−4 = 16800 𝑋 10−4
Solution : dΦ𝐵 = 4 𝑚𝑊𝑏 = 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.4 𝑇 ; ∈ = ? ∈ = 168 𝑋 10−2 𝑉
 Magnitude of the emf induced in the wire,  Thus induced current (rate of flow of electric charge).
∈ 168 𝑋 10−2
𝑑 Φ𝐵 4 𝑋 10−3 𝒊 = = = 𝟒. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝑨
∈= = = 𝟏𝟎 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑽 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝑽 𝑅 35
𝑑𝑡 0.4  So the amount of charge flowing through the coil,
3. The magnetic flux passing through a coil perpendicular to its plane is a function
𝑞 = 𝑖 𝑡 = 4. 8 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 1 = 𝟒. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝑪
of time and is given by 𝚽𝑩 = (𝟐 𝒕𝟑 + 𝟒 𝒕𝟐 + 𝟖 𝒕 + 𝟖 ) Wb. If the resistance of the
6. An induced current of 2.5 mA flows through a single conductor of resistance
coil is 5 Ω, determine the induced current through the coil at a time t = 3 second. 100 Ω. Find out the rate at which the magnetic flux is cut by the conductor.
Solution : 𝑑 Φ𝐵
Solution : 𝑅 = 100  ; 𝑖 = 2.5 𝑚𝐴 = 2.5 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 ; =?
 Magnitude of the induced emf, 𝑑𝑡
𝑑 Φ𝐵 𝑑  The rate of change in magnetic flux (i.e.) induced emf

∈= = (2 𝑡 3 + 4 𝑡 2 + 8 𝑡 + 8 ) 𝒅 𝚽𝑩
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 = ∈ = 𝑖 𝑅 = 2.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 100 = 250 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝒎 𝑾𝒃 𝒔−𝟏
∈ = 2 𝑋 3𝑡 2 + 4 𝑋 2 𝑡 + 8 + 0 = 6 𝑡 2 + 8 𝑡 + 8 𝒅𝒕
7. A fan of metal blades of length 0.4 m rotates normal to a magnetic field of
If t = 3 s , ∈ = 6 (3)2 + 8 (3) + 8 = 54 + 24 + 8 = 𝟖𝟔 𝑽
𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑻. If the induced emf between the centre and edge of the blade is
 Then the induced current through the coil, 0.02 V, determine the rate of rotation of the blade.
∈ 86
𝑖= = = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟐 𝑨 Solution : 𝑙 = 0.4 m ; A = π 𝑙 2 = 0.16 𝜋 ; B = 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑇 ; ∈𝒎 = 0.02 𝑉 ; 𝜔 =?
𝑅 5  Maximum value of induced emf,
4. A closely wound circular coil of radius 0.02 m is placed perpendicular to the
magnetic field. When the magnetic field is changed from 8000 T to 2000 T in ∈𝑚 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔
∈𝑚 0.02
6 s, an emf of 44 V is induced in it. Calculate the number of turns in the coil. ∴ 𝜔= =
𝑁𝐵𝐴 1 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.16 𝜋
Solution : 𝑟 = 0.02 m ; dt = 6 s ; 𝑑𝐵 = 8000 − 2000 = 6000 𝑇 ; ∈ = 44 𝑉 0.02
𝜃 = 90° − 90° = 0° ; 𝑁 = ? 𝜔=
0.64 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 3.14
 Magnitude of the induced emf ; 0.02
𝑑 Φ𝐵 𝑑 𝑑𝐵 𝜔=
0.64 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 3.14
∈= 𝑁 =𝑁 (𝐵 𝐴 cos 𝜃) = 𝑁 𝐴 cos 𝜃 ( )
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 0.02 𝑋 103
∈ ∈ 44 𝜔=
2.0096
∴ 𝑁= = = 𝜔 = 9.954 𝑋 10−3 𝑋103
𝑑𝐵 𝑑𝐵 22 6000
𝐴 cos 𝜃 ( ) 𝜋 𝑟 2 cos 𝜃 ( ) 𝑋 (0.02)2 cos 0° ( ) 𝝎 = 𝟗. 𝟗𝟓𝟒 revolutions/second
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 7 6
44 𝑋 7 𝑋 6 84 840
𝑁= = = = 35 𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑛𝑠
22 𝑋 0.0004 𝑋 1 𝑋 6000 2.4 24
8. A bicycle wheel with metal spokes of 1 m long rotates in Earth’s magnetic field. 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 200002 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 0.022
The plane of the wheel is perpendicular to the horizontal component of Earth’s Φ𝐵 = 𝑋1
0.5
field of 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟓 𝑻.If the emf induced across the spokes is 31.4 mV, calculate the −7 8
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10 𝑋 4 𝑋 10 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 0.0004
rate of revolution of the wheel. Φ𝐵 = 𝑋1
0.5
Solution : 𝑙 = 1 𝑚 ; 𝐵𝐻 = 4 𝑋 10−5 𝑇 ; ∈ = 31.4 𝑚 𝑉 = 31.4 𝑋 10−3 𝑉 ; 𝜔 = ? 64 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10 −3
 Maximum value of induced emf, Φ𝐵 =

0.5
∈𝑚 = 𝑁 𝐵 𝐴 𝜔 = 𝑁 𝐵 (𝜋 𝑙 2 )𝜔 Φ𝐵 = 128 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−3
∈𝑚 31.4 𝑋 10−3 Φ𝐵 = 1.262 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟔𝟐 𝑾𝒃
∴ 𝜔= =  Hence magnetic flux linked with each turn
𝑁 𝐵 𝜋 𝑙2 1 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 3.14 𝑋12
10 𝑋 102 1000 𝚽𝑩 1. 262
𝜔= = = = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟑𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝑾𝒃
4 4 𝑁 20000
𝝎 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎 revolutions/second 12. A coil of 200 turns carries a current of 0.4 A. If the magnetic flux of 4 mWb is
9. Determine the self-inductance of 4000 turn air-core solenoid of length 2m and linked with each turn of the coil, find the inductance of the coil.
diameter 0.04 m. Solution : 𝑁 = 200 ; 𝐼 = 0.4 𝐴 ; Φ𝐵 = 4 𝑚𝑊𝑏 = 4 𝑋 10−3 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝐿 = ?
Solution : : 𝑙 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑑 = 0.04 𝑚 ; 𝑟 = 0.02 𝑚 ; 𝑁 = 4000 ; 𝐿 = ?  Self inductance of the coil,
 Self inductance of air core solenoid, 𝑁 Φ𝐵 200 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−3
𝐿= = = 2000 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟐 𝑯
𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝐴 𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝜋 𝑟 2 𝐼 0.4
𝐿= == 13. Two air core solenoids have the same length of 80 cm and same cross–sectional
𝑙 𝑙
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 40002 𝑋 𝜋 𝑋 0.02 𝑋 0.02 area 5 cm2. Find the mutual inductance between them if the number of turns in
𝐿 = the first coil is 1200 turns and that in the second coil is 400 turns.
2
𝐿 = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 16 𝑋106 𝑋 0.02 𝑋 0.02 Solution : 𝑙 = 80 𝑐𝑚 = 80 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝐴 = 5 𝑐𝑚2 = 5 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ;
𝐿 = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 16 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−5 𝑁1 = 1200 ; 𝑁2 = 400 ; 𝑀 = ?
𝐿 = 128 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5  Mutual inductance between the coils,
𝐿 = 1.262 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−5 = 1.262 𝑋 10−2 𝐻 = 12.62 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋1200 𝑋 400 𝑋 5 𝑋 10−4
𝑀= =
𝑳 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟔𝟐 𝒎 𝑯 𝑙 80 𝑋 10−2
10. A coil of 200 turns carries a current of 4 A. If the magnetic flux through the coil 𝑀 = 4 𝜋 𝑋15 𝑋 400 𝑋 5 𝑋 10−9 = 3.14 𝑋 12 𝑋10−5
is 6 × 10–5 Wb, find the magnetic energy stored in the medium surrounding the 𝑀 = 37.68 𝑋10−5 𝐻 = 0.3768 𝑋 10−3 𝐻 = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟕𝟔𝟖 𝒎 𝑯
coil. 14. A long solenoid having 400 turns per cm carries a current 2A. A 100 turn coil of
Solution : 𝑁 = 200 ; 𝐼 = 4 𝐴 ; Φ𝐵 = 6 𝑋 10−5 𝑊𝑏 ; 𝑈𝐵 = ? cross-sectional area 4 cm2 is placed co-axially inside the solenoid so that the
 Magnetic energy stored, coil is in the field produced by the solenoid. Find the emf induced in the coil if
1 1 𝑁 Φ𝐵 2 1 the current through the solenoid reverses its direction in 0.04 sec.
𝑈𝐵 = 𝐿 𝐼 2 = [ ] 𝐼 = 𝑁 Φ𝐵 𝐼 Solution : : 𝑛1 = 400 ; 𝑁1 = 400 𝑋 100 = 4 𝑋 104 ; 𝑁2 = 100 ;
2 2 𝐼 2
1 𝐴 = 4 𝑐𝑚2 = 4 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝐼1 = 2 𝐴 ; 𝑡 = 0.04 𝑠
𝑈𝐵 = 𝑋 200 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 4  Mutual inductance,
2
𝑈𝐵 = 100 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−5 𝑋 4 = 2400 𝑋10−5 𝐽 𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 4 𝑋 104 𝑋 100 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−4
𝑼𝑩 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟐𝟒 𝑱 𝑀= =
𝑙 1
11. A 50 cm long solenoid has 400 turns per cm. The diameter of the solenoid is 𝑀 = 64 𝜋 𝑋 10−5 = 64 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 10−5
0.04 m. Find the magnetic flux linked with each turn when it carries a current 𝑀 = 200.96 𝑋 10−5 = 2.0096 𝑋 10−3
of 1 A. 𝑴 ≅ 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑯
Solution : 𝑙 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 0.5 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 400 ; 𝑁 = 𝑛 𝑙 = 400 𝑋 50 = 20000 ;  If the current through the solenoid is reversed its direction, the emf inuced in the
𝑑 = 0.04 𝑚 ; 𝑟 = 0.02 𝑚 ; 𝐼 = 1 𝐴 ; Φ𝐵 = ? coil is,
 Let ‘L’ be the self inductance of the solenoid, magnetic flux is, 𝑑𝐼1 2 − (−2) 4
𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝐴 𝜇𝑜 𝑁 2 𝜋 𝑟 2 ∈2 = 𝑀 = 2 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 = 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋
𝑑𝑡 0.04 0.04
Φ𝐵 = 𝐿 𝐼 = 𝐼= 𝐼 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
∈2 = 2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 100 = 2 𝑋 10−1 𝑉 = 𝟎. 𝟐 𝑽
𝑙 𝑙
15. A 200 turn circular coil of radius 2 cm is placed co-axially within a long solenoid 18. A 200V/120V step-down transformer of 90% efficiency is connected to an
of 3 cm radius. If the turn density of the solenoid is 90 turns per cm, then induction stove of resistance 40 Ω. Find the current drawn by the primary of the
calculate mutual inductance of the coil and the solenoid. transformer.
Solution : 𝑟 = 2 𝑐𝑚 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑁1 = 200 ; 𝑁2 = 90 𝑋100 = 9000 Solution : 𝜂 = 90 % ; 𝑉𝑃 = 200 𝑉 ; 𝑉𝑆 = 120 𝑉 ; 𝑅 = 40 
 Mutual inductance of the coil and the solenoid,  Output power ; 𝑃𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆
𝑉𝑆
=
𝑉𝑆2
=
1202
=
120 𝑋 120
= 360 𝑊
𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 𝜇𝑜 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝜋 𝑟 2 𝑅
𝑃𝑆
𝑅
360
40 40
𝑀= =  Thus secondary current is; 𝐼𝑆 = = = 𝟑𝑨
𝑙 𝑙 𝑉𝑆 120
4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 200 𝑋 9000 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (2 𝑋 10−2 )2  We know, the efficiency of the transformer ; 𝜂 = 𝑆 = 𝑆 𝑆
𝑃 𝑉 𝐼
𝑀= 𝑃𝑃 𝑉𝑃 𝐼 𝑃
1 90 360
𝑀 = 3.14 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 288 𝑋 10−6 = 2.839 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−6 =
𝑴 = 𝟐. 𝟖𝟑𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑯 = 𝟐. 𝟖𝟑𝟗 𝒎 𝑯 100 200 𝑋 𝐼𝑃
16. The solenoids S1 and S2 are wound on an iron-core of relative permeability 900.  The current drawn by the primary of the transformer
Their areas of their cross-section and their lengths are the same and are 4 cm 2 360 𝑋 100 36000
𝐼𝑃 = = = 𝟐𝑨
and 0.04 m respectively. If the number of turns in S1 is 200 and that in S2 is 800, 200 𝑋 90 18000
calculate the mutual inductance between the solenoids. If the current in 19. The 300 turn primary of a transformer has resistance 0.82 Ω and the resistance
solenoid 1 is increased form 2A to 8A in 0.04 second, calculate the induced emf of its secondary of 1200 turns is 6.2 Ω. Find the voltage across the primary if the
in solenoid 2. power output from the secondary at 1600V is 32 kW. Calculate the power losses
Solution : 𝜇𝑟 = 900 ; 𝐴 = 4 𝑐𝑚2 = 4 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ; 𝑙 = 0.04 𝑚 ; 𝑁1 = 200 ; in both coils when the transformer efficiency is 80%.
𝑁2 = 800 ; 𝑑𝐼1 = 8 − 2 = 6 𝐴 ; 𝑑𝑡 = 0.04 𝑠 ; 𝑀 =? ; ∈2 = ? Solution : 𝑁𝑃 = 300 ; 𝑁𝑆 = 1200 ; 𝑅𝑃 = 0.82  ; 𝑅𝑆 = 6.2  ; 𝑉𝑆 = 1600 𝑉
80
 Mutual inductance, 𝑃𝑆 = 32 𝑘𝑊 = 32 𝑋 103 𝑊 ; 𝜂 = 80 % =
𝜇𝑜 𝜇𝑟 𝑁1 𝑁2 𝐴 4 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 900 𝑋 200 𝑋 800 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−4 100
𝑀= = 𝑃𝑆 32 𝑋 103 32000
𝑙 0.04  Output power ; 𝑃𝑆 = 𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑺 = = = = 𝟐𝟎 𝑨
𝑉𝑆 1600 1600
𝑀 = 100 𝜋 𝑋 10−7 𝑋 900 𝑋 200 𝑋 800 𝑋 4 𝑋 10−4 𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑆 𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑃 1600 𝑋 300 4800
 Transformer equation ; = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑽𝑷 = = = = 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝑽
𝑀 = 3.14 𝑋 576 𝑋 10−3 𝑉𝑃 𝑁𝑃 𝑁𝑆 1200 12
𝑃𝑆 𝑃𝑆
𝑴 = 1.808 𝑋 103 𝑋 10−3 ≅ 𝟏. 𝟖𝟏 𝑯  Efficiency ; 𝜂= =
𝑃𝑃 𝑉𝑃 𝐼𝑃
 The induced emf in solenoid 2 is,
80 32 𝑋 103
𝑑𝐼1 6 600 =
∈2 = − 𝑀 = −1.81 𝑋 = −1.81 𝑋 100 400 𝑋 𝐼𝑃
𝑑𝑡 0.04 4
∈2 = −1.81 𝑋 150 = −𝟐𝟕𝟏. 𝟓 𝑽 32 𝑋 103 𝑋 100 3200
𝑰𝑷 = = = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝑨
17. A step-down transformer connected to main supply of 220 V is used to operate 400 𝑋 80 32
11V, 88 W lamp. Calculate (a) Voltage transformation ratio and (b) Current in  Power loss in primary coil = 𝐼𝑃 𝑅𝑃 = 100 𝑋 0.82 = 8200 𝑊 = 𝟖. 𝟐 𝒌𝑾
2 2
the primary.  Power loss in secondary coil = 𝐼𝑆2 𝑅𝑆 = 202 𝑋 6.2 = 2480 𝑊 = 𝟐. 𝟒𝟖 𝒌𝑾
Solution : 𝑉𝑃 = 220 𝑉 ; 𝑉𝑆 = 11 𝑉 ; 𝑃𝑆 = 88 𝑊 ; 𝐾 = ? ; 𝐼𝑃 = ? 20. Calculate the instantaneous value at 60o, average value and RMS value of an
𝑉𝑆 𝑁𝑆 𝐼𝑃 alternating current whose peak value is 20 A.
(a) Voltage transformation ratio ; 𝐾 = = =
𝑉𝑃 𝑁𝑃 𝐼𝑆 Solution : 𝐼𝑚 = 20 𝐴 ; 𝜔𝑡 = 60° ; 𝑖 = ? ; 𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑔 = ? ; 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = ?
𝑉𝑆 11 𝟏  Alternating current at any instant,
∴ 𝑲= = =
𝑉𝑃 220 𝟐𝟎 √3
(b) We know the output power ; 𝑃𝑆 = 88 𝑊 𝑖 = 𝐼𝑚 sin 𝜔𝑡 = 20 sin 60° = 20 𝑋 = 10 𝑋 1.732 = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟑𝟐 𝑨
(𝑖. 𝑒) 2
𝑉𝑆 𝐼𝑆 = 88 𝑊
 Average value of alternating current,
Hence, the secondary current ;
2 𝐼𝑚
88 88 𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑔 = = 0.637 𝐼𝑚 = 0.637 𝑋 20 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟕𝟒 𝑨
𝐼𝑆 = = =8𝐴 𝜋
𝑉𝑆 11  RMS value of alternating current,
 Thus, current in the primary 𝐼𝑚
1 4 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = = 0.707 𝐼𝑚 = 0.707 𝑋 20 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝑨
𝐼𝑃 = 𝐾 𝐼𝑆 = 𝑋8= = 𝟎. 𝟒 𝑨 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
√2
20 10
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -5
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 4. A magnetron in a microwave oven emits electromagnetic waves (em waves)
1. Consider a parallel plate capacitor which is connected to an 230 V RMS value with frequency f = 2450 MHz. What magnetic field strength is required for
and 50 Hz frequency. If the separation distance between the plates of the electrons to move in circular paths with this frequency?
capacitor and area of the plates are 1 mm and 20 cm 2 respectively. Calculate the :Solution :- 𝑓 = 2450 𝑀𝐻𝑧 = 2450 𝑋 106 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑞 = |𝑒| = 1`. 6 𝑋 10−9 𝐶 ;
displacement current at t = 1 s. 𝑚 = 9.11 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝐵 =?
:Solution :- 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 230 𝑉 ; 𝑑 = 1 𝑚𝑚 = 1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐴 = 20 𝑐𝑚2 = 20 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 ❖ Angular frequency of the circular motion,,
𝑓 = 50𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑡 = 1 𝑠 ; 𝐼𝑑 = ? 𝐵𝑞
𝜔=
❖ Potential difference between the plates ; 𝑚
𝐵𝑞
𝑉 = 𝑉𝑚 sin 𝜔𝑡 = 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 √2 sin 2𝜋𝑓𝑡 (𝑜𝑟) 2𝜋 𝑓 =
𝑉 = 230 𝑋1.414 𝑋 sin(2𝜋 𝑋 50 𝑡) 𝑚
❖ Therefore, the magnetic field required is,
𝑉 = 325 sin(100 𝜋 𝑡) 2𝜋𝑓𝑚
❖ Hence the displacement current, 𝐵=
𝑑Φ𝐸 𝑑 𝑞
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜 = 𝜀𝑜 (𝐸𝐴) [∵ Φ𝐸 = 𝐸𝐴] 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2450 𝑋 106 𝑋 9.11 𝑋 10−31
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝐵=
𝑑 𝑉 𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝑑𝑉 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜 ( ) 𝐴= [ ] 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2450 𝑋 9.11 𝑋 10−6
𝑑𝑡 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑𝑡 𝐵=
𝜀𝑜 𝐴 𝑑 1.6
𝐼𝑑 = [ (325 sin100 𝜋 𝑡)] 𝐵 = 8.76 𝑋 104 𝑋 10−6
𝑑 𝑑𝑡 𝑩 = 𝟖. 𝟕𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟖𝟕𝟔 𝑻
𝜀𝑜 𝐴
𝐼𝑑 = [325 𝑋100 𝜋 𝑋 cos100 𝜋 𝑡 ]
𝑑
8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 20 𝑋 10−4
𝐼𝑑 = 𝑋 325 𝑋 100 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 cos100 𝜋(1)
1 𝑋 10−3
𝐼𝑑 = 825 𝑋 20 𝑋 325 𝑋 314 𝑋 10−13 𝑋 (1) [∵ cos100 𝜋 = 1]
𝑰𝒅 = 1. 806 𝑋 107 𝑋 10−13 = 1. 806 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 𝟏. 𝟖𝟎𝟔 𝝁 𝑨
2. The relative magnetic permeability of the medium is 2.5 and the relative
electrical permittivity of the medium is 2.25. Compute the refractive index of
the medium.
:Solution :- 𝜇𝑟 = 2.5 ; 𝜀𝑟 = 2.25 ; 𝑛=?
❖ The refractive index of the medium,
𝑛 = √𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟
𝑛 = √2.5 𝑋 2.25 = √5.625
𝒏 = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟕𝟐 (𝒏𝒐 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕)
3. Compute the speed of the electromagnetic wave in a medium if the amplitude of
electric and magnetic fields are 3 × 104 N C–1 and 2 × 10–4 T, respectively.
:Solution :- 𝐸𝑜 = 3 𝑋 104 𝑁 𝐶 −1 ; 𝐵𝑜 = 2 𝑋 10−4 𝑇 ; 𝑣 = ?
❖ The speed of the electromagnetic wave
𝐸𝑜 3 𝑋 104 3
𝑣= = −4
= 𝑋 108
𝐵𝑜 2 𝑋 10 2
𝒗 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 4. Let an electromagnetic wave propagate along the x - direction, the magnetic
1. Consider a parallel plate capacitor whose plates are closely spaced. Let R be the field oscillates at a frequency of 1010 Hz and has an amplitude of 10−5 T, acting
radius of the plates and the current in the wire connected to the plates is 5 A, along the y - direction. Then, compute the wavelength of the wave. Also write
calculate the displacement current through the surface passing between the down the expression for electric field in this case.
plates by directly calculating the rate of change of flux of electric field through :Solution :- 𝒇 = 1010 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝐵𝑜 = 10−5 𝑇 ; 𝜆 = ? ; ⃗⃗⃗𝐸 (𝑥, 𝑡) = ?
the surface. ❖ Wavelength of electromagnetic waves,
:Solution :- 𝐼𝐶 = 5 𝐴 ; 𝐼𝑑 =? 𝐶 3 𝑋 108
𝝀= = = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝒎
❖ Electric flux, 𝑓 1010
❖ Expression for electric field,
Φ𝐸 = ∮ 𝐸 𝑑𝐴 cos 0°
𝐸 (𝑥, 𝑡) = 𝐸𝑜 sin(𝑘𝑥 − 𝜔𝑡) − − − − − − − − (1)
𝜎 𝑞 ❖ We know that, the velocity of electromagnetic waves,
Φ𝐸 = 𝐸 𝐴 = 𝐴=
𝜀𝑜 𝜀𝑜 𝐸𝑜
❖ Hence displacement current, 𝐶=
𝐵𝑜
𝑑Φ𝐸 𝑑 𝑞 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑬𝒐 = 𝐵𝑜 𝐶 = 10−5 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜 = 𝜀𝑜 ( )
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝜀𝑜 ❖ Angular frequency,
1 𝑑𝑞 𝝎 = 2 𝜋 𝑓 = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1010 = 𝟔. 𝟐𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒓𝒂𝒅 𝒔−𝟏
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀𝑜
𝜀𝑜 𝑑𝑡 ❖ And wave number,
𝑑𝑞 𝜔 6.28 𝑋 1010
𝐼𝑑 = 𝒌= = = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒓𝒂𝒅 𝒎−𝟏
𝑑𝑡 𝐶 3 𝑋 108
𝑰𝒅 = 𝑰𝑪 = 𝟓 𝑨 ❖ Put this in equation (1),
2. A transmitter consists of LC circuit with an inductance of 1 μH and a capacitance 𝑬 (𝒙, 𝒕) = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟐. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒙 − 𝟔. 𝟐𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒕) 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
of 1 μF. What is the wavelength of the electromagnetic waves it emits? ❖ Since the electric field oscillates along z -axis,
:Solution :- 𝐿 = 1 𝜇 𝐻 = 1 𝑋 10−6 𝐻 ; 𝐶 = 1 𝜇 𝐹 = 1 𝑋 10−6 𝐹 ; 𝜆 = ? ⃗⃗⃗𝑬 (𝒙, 𝒕) = 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟐. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒙 − 𝟔. 𝟐𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒕) 𝒌 ̂ 𝑵 𝑪−𝟏
❖ Wavelength of electromagnetic waves,
𝐶 𝐶 5. If the relative permeability and relative permittivity of a medium are 1.0 and
𝜆= = 2.25 respectively, find the speed of the electromagnetic wave in this medium.
𝑓 1
( ) :Solution :- : 𝜇𝑟 = 1.0 ; 𝜀𝑟 = 2.25 ; 𝑣 = ?
2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶
❖ Refractive index of the medium,
𝜆 = 𝐶 (2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶)
𝜇 = √𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟
𝜆 = 3 𝑋 108 (2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 √1 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 ) 𝐶
(𝑜𝑟) = √𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟
𝜆 = 3 𝑋 108 𝑋 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑣
𝝀 = 𝟏𝟖. 𝟖𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟖𝟖𝟒 𝒎 𝐶 3 𝑋 108
3. A pulse of light of duration 10−6 s is absorbed completely by a small object ∴ 𝑣= =
√𝜇𝑟 𝜀𝑟 √1.0 𝑋 2.25
initially at rest. If the power of the pulse is 60 × 10 −3 W, calculate the final 3 𝑋 108
momentum of the object. 𝑣=
1.5
:Solution :- 𝑡 = 10−6 𝑠 ; 𝑃 = 60 𝑋 10−3 𝑊 ; 𝑝 = ? 𝒗 = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
❖ Final momentum,
𝐸
𝑝= [ 𝐸 = 𝑚 𝐶 2 = 𝑝 𝐶]
𝐶
𝑃𝑋𝑡 𝑊 𝐸
𝑝= [𝑃 = = ]
𝐶 𝑡 𝑡
60 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10−6
𝑝=
3 𝑋 108
𝒑 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟕 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -6
RAY OPTICS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS-  By the law of reflection, the angle of incidence and angle of reflection are the same
1. Prove that for the same incident light when a reflecting surface is tilted by an for the two extreme reflections. The normals are now the bisectors of the angles
angle θ, the reflected light will be tilted by an angle 2θ. between the incident and the reflected rays at the two points.
-Solution :-  By geometry, the height of the mirror needed is only half of the height of the
 𝐴𝐵 − reflecting surface person. (i.e.)
𝐼𝑂 − incident ray ℎ1 ℎ2 ℎ1 + ℎ2 𝒉
+ = =
𝑂𝑅1 − reflected ray 2 2 2 𝟐
𝑂𝑁 − normal 3. An object is placed at a distance of 20.0 cm from a concave mirror of
∠𝐼𝑂𝑁 − angle of incidence (𝑖) focal length 15.0 cm. (a) What distance from the mirror a screen should be
∠𝑁𝑂𝑅1 − angle of reflection (r) placed to get a sharp image? (b) What is the nature of the image?
 From law of refraction ; -Solution :- 𝑓 = −15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢 = −20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑣 = ?
∠𝐼𝑂𝑁 = ∠𝑁𝑂𝑅1 = 𝑖 (a) From the mirror equation,
1 1 1
 When the surface AB is tilted to 𝐴1 𝐵1 by an angle θ, the normal N is also is tilted = +
to 𝑂𝑁 1 by the same angle θ 𝑓 𝑢 𝑣
1 1 1 𝑢−𝑓
 Now, in the tilted system, (𝑜𝑟) = − =
the angle of incidence ; ∠𝐼𝑂𝑁 1 = 𝑖 + 𝜃 𝑣 𝑓 𝑢 𝑓𝑢
the angle of reflection ; ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅2 = 𝑖 + 𝜃 𝑓𝑢
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑣 =
 The angle between 𝑂𝑁 1 and OR1 is ; ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅1 𝑢−𝑓
 The angle tilted on the reflected light is the angle between OR1 and OR2 which is, (−15)(−20) 300 300
∴ 𝑣 = = =
∠𝑅1 𝑂𝑅2 = ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅2 − ∠𝑁 1 𝑂𝑅1 (−20 ) − (−15) −20 + 15 −5
∠𝑅1 𝑂𝑅2 = (𝑖 + 𝜃) − (𝑖 − 𝜃) = 𝑖 + 𝜃 − 𝑖 + 𝜃 𝒗 = −𝟔𝟎 𝒄𝒎
∠𝑹𝟏 𝑶𝑹𝟐 = 𝟐 𝜽  The screen is to be placed at distance 60.0 cm to the left of the concave mirror.
2. What is the height of the mirror needed for a person to see his/her image fully (b) Magnification,
on the mirror? ℎ1 𝑣
-Solution :- 𝑚= =−
ℎ 𝑢
(−60)
𝒎= − = −𝟑
(−20)
 As the sign of magnification is negative, the image is inverted.
 As the magnitude of magnification is 3, the image is enlarged three times.
 As the image is formed to the left of the concave mirror, the image is real.
4. A thin rod of length f/3 is placed along the optical axis of a concave mirror of
focal length f such that one end of image which is real and elongated just touches
the respective end of the rod. Calculate the longitudinal magnification.
𝑓
-Solution :- Object length = 𝑙 = ; image length = 𝑙1
3
 By definition,
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
𝐿𝑜𝑛𝑔𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =
𝑜𝑏𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
 Let us assume a person of height h is standing in front of a vertical plane mirror. 𝑙1 𝑙1 3 𝑙1
 The person could see his/her head when light from the head falls on the mirror 𝑚= = =
𝑙 𝑓 𝑓
and gets reflected to the eyes. Same way, light from the feet falls on the mirror and 3
gets reflected to the eyes. (𝑜𝑟) 𝑙1 =
𝑚𝑓
−−−−−−−−− (1)
 Let the distance between his head H and eye E is h1 and distance between his feet 3
 Image of one end coincides with the respective end of object. Thus, the coinciding
F and eye E is h2. The person’s total height is ; h = h1 + h2 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
end must be at centre of curvature. Thus, 𝑢1 = 𝑅 = 2 𝑓
 From figure, (b) Let ‘t’ be the time taken by light to travel through the glass slab,
𝑓 𝑑 50 𝑋 10−2
𝑢1 = 𝑢 + 𝑡= = = 25 𝑋 10−10 𝑠 = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝒔
3 𝑣 2 𝑋108
𝑓 (c) Optical path ; 𝑑1 = 𝑛 𝑑 = 1.5 𝑋 50 𝑋 10−2 = 𝟕𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟕𝟓 𝒄𝒎
2𝑓 = 𝑢+
3  Light would have travelled an additional 25 cm (75 cm – 50 cm) in vacuum at
𝑓 5𝑓 the same time had there been no glass slab in its path.
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑢 = 2𝑓 − =
3 3 7. Light travelling through transparent oil enters in to glass of refractive index 1.5.
𝑓 1 If the refractive index of glass with respect to the oil is 1.25, what is the
& 𝑣 =𝑢+ +𝑙
3 refractive index of the oil?
5𝑓 𝑓 𝑚𝑓 5𝑓+𝑓+𝑚𝑓 𝑓 𝑓 -Solution : 𝑛𝑔 = 1.5 ; 𝑛𝑔𝑂 = 1.25 ; 𝑛𝑂 = ?
𝑣= + + = = (5 + 1 + 𝑚) = (6 + 𝑚) 𝑛𝑔
3 3 3 3 3 3  Refractive index of glass with respect to oil ; 𝑛𝑔𝑂 =
1 1 1 𝑛𝑂
 From mirror ; = + 𝑛𝑔 1.5 150
𝑓 𝑢 𝑣 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑛𝑂 = = = = 𝟏. 𝟐
1 1 1 𝑛𝑔𝑂 1.25 125
 For concave mirror ; = 5𝑓 + 𝑓
[− 𝑓] [− ]
3
[− (6+𝑚)]
3
8. A coin is at the bottom of a trough containing three immiscible liquids of
3 3 refractive indices 1.3, 1.4 and 1.5 poured one above the other of heights 30 cm,
(𝑜𝑟) 1= + 16 cm, and 20 cm respectively. What is the apparent depth at which the coin
5 (6 + 𝑚)
3 3 appears to be when seen from air medium outside? In which medium the coin
(𝑜𝑟) 1− = will appear?
5 6+𝑚
2 3 -Solution : 𝑑1 = 30 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑑2 = 16 𝑐𝑚 ∶ 𝑑3 = 20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑛1 = 1.3 ; 𝑛2 = 1.4 ∶ 𝑛3 = 1.5
(𝑜𝑟) =  The equations for apparent depth for each medium is,,
5 6+𝑚
12 + 2 𝑚 = 15 𝑑1 30
2 𝑚 = 15 − 12 = 3 𝑑11 = = = 23. 1 𝑐𝑚
𝑛1 1.3
𝟑 𝑑2 16
𝒎 = = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝑑21 = = = 11.4 𝑐𝑚
𝟐 𝑛2 1.4
5. Pure water has refractive index 1.33. What is the speed of light through it?
𝑑3 20
-Solution : 𝑛 = 1.33 ; 𝑣 = ? 𝑑31 = = = 13.3 𝑐𝑚
𝑐 𝑛3 1.5
𝑛=  Total depth of three medium,,
𝑣
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 108 9 𝑋 108 𝑑 = 𝑑1 + 𝑑2 + 𝑑3
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑣= = = =
𝑛 1.33 4 4 𝑑 = 30 + 16 + 20 = 66 𝑐𝑚
( )
3  Total apparent depth of three medium,
𝒗 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 𝑑1 = 𝑑11 + 𝑑21 + 𝑑31 = 23.1 + 11.4 + 13.3 = 𝟒𝟕. 𝟖 𝒄𝒎
 Light travels with a speed of 2.26 × 108 m s-1 through pure water. 9. What is the radius of the illumination when seen above from inside a swimming
6. Light travels from air into a glass slab of thickness 50 cm and refractive index pool from a depth of 10 m on a sunny day? What is the total angle of view? [Given,
1.5. refractive index of water is 4/3]
(a) What is the speed of light in the glass slab? -Solution : 𝑛=
4
; 𝑑 = 10 𝑚
(b) What is the time taken by the light to travel through the glass slab? 3
(c) What is the optical path of the glass slab? (a) Radius of illumination,
𝑑 10 10
-Solution : 𝑑 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 50 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5 ; 𝑣 = ? ; 𝑡 = ? ; 𝑑1 =? 𝑅= = =
𝑐 √𝑛2 −1 2 16
(a) Refractive index of the medium ; 𝑛 = √(4) −1 √ −1
3 9
𝑣
10 10 𝑋 3 30
 Speed of light in the glass slab is 𝑅= = =
16−9 √16−9 √7
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 √
𝑣= = = 𝟐 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 9
𝑛 1.5 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝑹 = 𝟏𝟏. 𝟑𝟒 𝒎
(b) Critical angle, 12. Locate the image of the point object O in the situation shown. The point C
1 1 3 denotes the centre of curvature of the separating surface.
𝑖𝐶 = sin−1 [ ] = sin−1 [ ] = sin−1 [ ] = sin−1 [0.75] = 𝟒𝟖. 𝟔 ° -Solution : 𝑛1 = 1 ; 𝑛2 = 1.5 𝑢 = −15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅 = 30 𝑐𝑚
𝑛 4⁄ 4
3  Equation for single spherical surface is
(c) The total angle of view of the cone =2 𝑖𝐶 = 2 𝑋 48.6 ° = 𝟗𝟕. 𝟐 ° 𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 − 𝑛1
− =
10. A optical fibre is made up of a core material with refractive index 1.68 and a 𝑣 𝑢 𝑅
cladding material of refractive index 1.44. What is the acceptance angle of the 1.5 1 1.5 − 1
− =
fibre if it is kept in air medium without any cladding? 𝑣 − 15 30
-Solution : 𝑛1 = 1.68 ; 𝑛2 = 1.44 1.5 1 0.5
+ =
 If there is cladding, then acceptance angle ; 𝑣 15 30
1.5 0.5 1 0.5 − 2 1.5
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √𝑛12 − 𝑛22 = − = =−
𝑣 30 15 30 30
1 1
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √1.682 − 1.442 = − (𝑜𝑟) 𝒗 = − 𝟑𝟎 𝒄𝒎
𝑣 30
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √2.8224 − 2.0736  The image is a virtual image formed 30 cm to the left of the spherical surface.
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √0.7488 13. A biconvex lens has radii of curvature 20 cm and 15 cm for the two curved
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 (0.8653) surfaces. The refractive index of the material of the lens is 1.5.
𝒊𝒂 ≈ 𝟔𝟎° (a) What is its focal length?
 If there is no cladding then, n2 = 1. Then acceptance angle (b) Will the focal length change if the lens is flipped by the side?
-Solution : 𝑅1 = 20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅2 = −15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √𝑛12 − 1  From lens makers formula,
1 1 1
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √1.682 − 1 = (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 √2.8224 − 1 = sin−1 √1.8224 𝑓 𝑅1 𝑅2
𝑖𝑎 = sin−1 (1.349) 1 1 1
= (1.5 − 1) [ − ]
−1
Here sin (> 1) is not possible. But, this includes the range 0o to 90o. Hence, all 𝑓 20 − 15
the rays entering the core from flat surface will undergo total internal reflection. 1 1 1 3+4 7 7
= 0.5 𝑋 [ + ] = 0.5 𝑋 [ ] = 0.5 𝑋 [ ] =
11. The thickness of a glass slab is 0.25 m. It has a refractive index of 1.5. A ray of 𝑓 20 15 60 60 120
light is incident on the surface of the slab at an angle of 60 o. Find the lateral 𝟏𝟐𝟎
displacement of the light when it emerges from the other side of the glass slab. ∴ 𝒇= = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟏𝟒 𝒄𝒎
𝟕
-Solution : 𝑡 = 0.25 𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5 ; 𝑖 = 60°  As the focal length is positive the lens is a converging lens.
 By Snell’s law ,  When the lens is flipped by the side;𝑅1 = 15 𝑐𝑚, 𝑅2 = −20 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑛 = 1.5
√3 1 1 1
( ) = (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
sin 𝑖 sin 𝑖 sin 60° 2 √3 1 𝑓 𝑅1 𝑅2
𝑛= (𝑜𝑟) sin 𝑟 = = = = = = 0.58
sin 𝑟 𝑛 1.5 1.5 3 √3 1 1 1 1 1
= (1.5 − 1) [ − ] = 0.5 𝑋 [ + ]
𝑟 = sin−1 (0.58) = 35.25° 𝑓 15 − 20 20 15
 Hence the lateral displacement, 𝟏𝟐𝟎
sin(𝑖 − 𝑟) ∴ 𝒇= = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟏𝟒 𝒄𝒎
𝟕
𝐿=𝑡 [ ]
cos 𝑟  Thus, it is concluded that the focal length of the lens will not change if it is flipped
sin(60° − 35.25°) sin 24.75° by the side. This is true for any lens.
𝐿 = 0.25 𝑋 [ ] = 0.25 𝑋 [ ]  The focal length is positive the lens is a converging lens.
cos 35.25° cos 35.25°
0.4187
𝐿 = 0.25 𝑋 [ ]
0.8166
𝑳 = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟐𝟖𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟖𝟐 𝒄𝒎 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
14. Determine the focal length of the lens made up 17. An object of 5 mm height is placed at a
of a material of refractive index 1.52 as shown in distance of 15 cm from a convex lens of
the diagram. (Points C1 and C2 are the centers of focal length 10 cm. A second lens of focal
curvature of the first and second surfaces length 5 cm is placed 40 cm from the first
respectively.) lens and 55 cm from the object. Find (a) the
-Solution : 𝑛 = 1.52 ; 𝑅1 = 10 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅2 = 20 𝑐𝑚 position of the final image, (b) its nature
 From lens makers formula, and (c) its size.
1 1 1 -Solution :ℎ1 = 5 𝑚𝑚 = 0.5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢1 = − 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓1 = 10 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓2 = 5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑑 = 40 𝑐𝑚
= (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
𝑓 𝑅1 𝑅2  For the first lens, the lens equation is,
1 1 1 1 1 1
= (1.52 − 1) [ − ] − =
𝑓 10 20 𝑣1 𝑢1 𝑓1
1 2−1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
= 0.52 𝑋 [ ] = 0.52 𝑋 (𝑜𝑟) = + = + = −
𝑓 20 20 𝑣1 𝑓1 𝑢1 10 − 15 10 15
𝟐𝟎 1 15 − 10 5 1
∴ 𝒇= = 𝟑𝟖. 𝟒𝟔 𝒄𝒎 = = ==
𝟎. 𝟓𝟐 𝑣1 150 150 30
 As the focal length is positive, the lens is a converging lens ∴ 𝒗𝟏 = 𝟑𝟎 𝒄𝒎
15. If the focal length is 150 cm for a lens, what is the power of the lens?  Equation for magnification of first lens,
-Solution : 𝑓 = 150 𝑐𝑚 = 1.5 𝑚 ℎ2 𝑣1
𝑚= =
 Power of the lens, ℎ1 𝑢1
1 1 10 𝑣1 30 15
𝑃= = = = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟕 𝒅𝒊𝒐𝒑𝒕𝒆𝒓 ∴ ℎ2 = ℎ1 = 0.5 𝑋 = −
𝑓 1.5 15 𝑢1 − 15 15
 As the power is positive, it is a converging lens. 𝒉𝟐 = − 𝟏 𝒄𝒎
16. What is the focal length of the combination if the lenses of focal lengths –70 cm  As the height of the image is negative, the image is inverted and real.
and 150 cm are in contact? What is the power of the combination?  This image acts as object for second lens. The object distance for second lenses
-Solution : 𝑓1 = −70 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓2 = 150 𝑐𝑚 𝑢2 = −(40 − 30) = −10 𝑐𝑚. For the second lens, the lens equation is
 The focal length of the combination lens, 1 1 1
− =
1 1 1 𝑣2 𝑢2 𝑓2
= + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
𝐹 𝑓1 𝑓2 (𝑜𝑟) = + = + = −
1 1 1 1 1 𝑣2 𝑓2 𝑢2 5 − 10 5 10
= + =− + 1 10 − 5 5 1
𝐹 − 70 150 70 150 = = =
1 − 150 + 70 80 8 𝑣2 50 50 10
= = − = −
𝐹 10500 10500 1050 ∴ 𝒗𝟐 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒄𝒎
1050  Let the height of the final image formed by the second lens is ℎ21 and we have
∴ 𝐹=−
8 height of the object for the second lens is ℎ2 . Then Equation for magnification 𝑚1
𝑭 = − 𝟏𝟑𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 𝒄𝒎 = −𝟏. 𝟑𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝒎 for the second lens is,
 As the final focal length is negative, the combination of two lenses is a diverging ℎ21 𝑣2
system of lenses. 𝑚1 = =
ℎ2 𝑢2
 The power of the combination , 𝑣2 10
1 𝟏
𝒉𝟐 = ℎ2 = (−1) 𝑋 = 𝟏 𝒄𝒎 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑃= 𝑢2 (−10)
𝑓 (a) Thus the final image is formed 10 cm to the right of the second lens.
1
𝑃= (b) As the height of the image is positive, the image is erect and real.
− 1.3125 (c) The size (i.e.) height of the final image is10 mm
𝑷 = − 𝟎. 𝟕𝟔𝟏𝟔 𝑫 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
18. A thin biconvex lens is made up of a glass of 19. A monochromatic light is incident on an equilateral prism at an angle 30o and is
refractive index 1.5. The two surfaces have emergent at an angle of 75o. What is the angle of deviation produced by the
equal radii of curvature of 30 cm each. One prism?
of its surfaces is made reflecting by -Solution : 𝐴 = 60° ; 𝑖1 = 30° ; 𝑖2 = 75°
silvering it from outside. (a) What is the  Equation for angle of deviation,
focal length and power of this silvered 𝑑 = 𝑖1 + 𝑖2 − 𝐴
lens? (b) Where should an object be placed 𝑑 = (30° + 75°) − 60° = 105 − 60 = 𝟒𝟓
in front of this lens so that the image is 20. Light ray falls at normal incidence on the first face
formed on the object itself? and emerges gracing the second face for an
-Solution : n = 1.5; R1 = 30 cm; R2 = –30 cm; equilateral prism.
(a) By Lens makers formula,focal length of (a) What is the angle of deviation produced?
lens ; (b) What is the refractive index of the material of
1 1 1 the prism?
= (𝑛 − 1) [ − ]
𝑓𝑙 𝑅1 𝑅2 -Solution : 𝐴 = 60° ; 𝑖1 = 0° ; 𝑖2 = 90°
1 1 1 2 1 2 1 (a) Equation for angle of deviation,
= (1.5 − 1) [ − ] = (0.5) [ ] = [ ] =
𝑓𝑙 30 (−30) 30 2 30 30 𝑑 = 𝑖1 + 𝑖2 − 𝐴
∴ 𝒇𝒍 = 𝟑𝟎 𝒄𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟑 𝒎 𝑑 = (0° + 90°) − 60° = 90 − 60
 And focal length of mirror ; 𝒅 = 𝟑𝟎
𝑅2 −30 (b) The light inside the prism must be falling on the second face at critical angle as it
𝒇𝒎 = = = −15 𝑐𝑚 = −𝟎. 𝟏𝟓 𝒎
2 2 graces the boundary. ic = 90° – 30° = 60°
 Now the focal length of the silvered lens is,  Critical angle and refractive index are related as
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 2 2 1 1
=[ + ]= [ + ]=[ + ]= = = 𝑛= =
−𝑓 𝑓𝑙 − 𝑓𝑚 30 −(−15) 30 15 30 15 7.5 sin 𝑖𝐶 sin 60
∴ 𝒇 = −𝟕. 𝟓 𝒄𝒎 = −𝟎. 𝟎𝟕𝟓 𝒎 1 2 1
𝑛 = √3 = = 2 𝑋 0.577 [∵ = 0.577]
 The silvered mirror behaves as a concave mirror with its focal length on left ( ) √3 √3
2
side. 𝒏 = 𝟏. 𝟏𝟓𝟒
 The power of the silvered lens, 21. The angle of minimum deviation for an equilateral prism is 37o. Find the
𝑃 = 2 𝑃1 + 𝑃𝑚 refractive index of the material of the prism.
2 1 4 400 40
𝑃= + = = = = 13.33𝐷 -Solution : 𝐴 = 60° ; 𝐷 = 37°
𝑓𝑙 − 𝑓𝑚 30 𝑋 10−2 30 3  Equation for refractive index is
 As the power is positive it is a converging system. 𝐴+𝐷
Note: sin ( )
𝑛= 2
 Here, we come across a silvered lens which has negative focal length and 𝐴
sin ( )
positive power. Which implies that the focal length is to the left and the 2
60 + 37 97
system is a converging one. Such situations are possible in silvered lenses
2 = sin(48.5) = 0.75 = 75
sin ( ) sin ( )
2
because a silvered lens is basically a modified mirror. 𝑛=
60
=
60
sin ( ) sin ( ) sin(30) 0.5 5
(b) Here both 𝑢 and 𝑣 are sane (𝑣 = 𝑢) as the image coincides with the object.From 2 2
the mirror formula ; 𝒏 = 𝟏. 𝟓
1 1 1 1 1 2 22. Find the dispersive power of a prism if the refractive indices of flint glass for
= + = + =
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢 𝑢 𝑢 𝑢 red, green and violet colours are 1.613, 1.620 and 1.632 respectively.
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑢 = 2𝑓 = 2(−7.5) = −15 𝑐𝑚 = −0.15𝑚 -Solution : 𝑛𝑉 = 1.632 ; 𝑛𝐺 = 1.620 ; 𝑛𝑅 = 1.613
 The object is to be placed to the left of the silvered lens.  The dispersive power
𝑛𝑉 − 𝑛𝑅 1.632 − 1.613 0.019
𝜔= = = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟔𝟓
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑛𝐺 − 1 1.620 − 1 0.620
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. A beam of light consisting of red, green and blue is incident
1. An object of 4 cm height is placed at 6 cm in front of a concave mirror of radius on a right-angled prism as shown in figure. The refractive
of curvature 24 cm. Find the position, height, magnification and nature of the index of the material of the prism for the above red, green
and blue colours are 1.39, 1.44 and 1.47 respectively.
image.
What are the colours suffer total internal reflection?
-Solution : ℎ = 4 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑅 = −24 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢 = −6 𝑐𝑚
-Solution : : 𝒊 = 45°; 𝑛𝑅 = 1.39 ; 𝑛𝐺 = 1.44 ; 𝑛𝐵 = 1.47
(i) Position of the image:
 Condition for total internal reflection, 𝒊 > 𝒊𝒄
 From the relation between focal length (f) and radius of curvature (R),
𝑅 − 24  From Snell’s law, 𝑛1 sin 𝑖 = 𝑛2 sin 𝑟
𝑅 = 2𝑓 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓= = = −12 𝑐𝑚  When 𝒊 = 𝒊𝒄 𝒕𝒉𝒆𝒏 𝒓 = 𝟗𝟎° Hence ,
2 2 𝑛
1 1 1 𝑛1 sin 𝑖𝑐 = 𝑛2 sin 90° (or) 𝑛1 sin 𝑖𝑐 = 𝑛2 (or) sin 𝑖𝑐 = 2
 From mirror equation ; = + 𝑛1
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 + 2 1 1
 Here,, 𝑛1 = 𝑛 and 𝑛2 = 1 So, sin 𝑖𝑐 = (or)
∴ = − = − =− + = = 𝑛
𝑣 𝑓 𝑢 (−12) (−6) 12 6 12 12 1 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝒗 = +𝟏𝟐 𝒄𝒎 𝑛= = = √2 = 1.414
sin 45° 1/√2
(ii) Magnificantion :
𝑣 12  Hence, 𝑛𝑅 < 𝑛 So red colour will emerge out of the prism
 Magnification is given by ; 𝒎= − = − = +𝟐  But, 𝑛𝐺 > 𝑛 and 𝑛𝐵 > 𝑛 So green and blue undergo total internal reflection
𝑢 (−6)
(iii) Height of the image: 4. An object is placed at a certain distance from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm.
𝒉𝟏 Find the object distance if the image obtained is magnified 4 times.
 Magnification; 𝒎 = Hence height of the image ; 𝒉𝟏 = 𝑚 ℎ = 2 𝑋 4 = 𝟖 𝒄𝒎 -Solution : 𝑓 = 20 𝑐𝑚 = 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑚 = 4
𝒉
 Thus the imageis erect, virtual, twice the height of object formed on right side  If u be the object distance, then magnification,
of mirror ℎ2 𝑓 𝑓
𝑚= = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓+𝑢 =
2. An object is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal length 20 cm. The image ℎ1 𝑓+𝑢 𝑚
formed is three times the size of the object. Calculate two possible distances of 𝑓 20
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑢= − 𝑓= − 20 = 5 − 20 = −𝟏𝟓 𝒄𝒎
the object from the mirror. 𝑚 4
5. Obtain the lens maker’s formula for a lens of
-Solution : 𝑓 = − 20 𝑐𝑚 = − 20 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
refractive index n2 which is separating two
 From the equation of magnification,
𝑓 𝑓 media of refractive indices n1 and n3 on the left
𝑚= (𝑜𝑟) 𝑢= 𝑓− and right respectively.
𝑓−𝑢 𝑚 -Solution :
 For real image, = −3 . Hence the distance of the object
 For the refracting surface , the light goes
(−20) 20 −60 − 20
𝑢 = (−20) − = −20 − = from n1 to n2, then
(−3) 3 3 𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛2 − 𝑛1
𝟖𝟎 − = − − − − − (1)
𝒖= − 𝒄𝒎 𝑣1 𝑢 𝑅1
𝟑  For the refracting surface , the light goes from n2 to n3, then
 For virtual image, = +3 . Hence the distance of the object 𝑛3 𝑛2 𝑛3 − 𝑛2
(−20) 20 −60 + 20 − 1= − − − − − (2)
𝑢 = (−20) − = −20 + = 𝑣 𝑣 𝑅1
3 3 3  Adding equations (1) and (2)
𝟒𝟎 𝑛2 𝑛1 𝑛3 𝑛2 𝑛2 − 𝑛1 𝑛3 − 𝑛2
𝒖= − 𝒄𝒎 − + − 1= +
𝟑 𝑣1 𝑢 𝑣 𝑣 𝑅1 𝑅1
𝒏𝟑 𝒏𝟏 (𝒏𝟐 − 𝒏𝟏 ) (𝒏𝟑 − 𝒏𝟐 )
− = +
𝒗 𝒖 𝑹𝟏 𝑹𝟏
6. A thin converging lens of refractive index 1.5 has a power of + 5.0 D. When this  From figure,
lens is immersed in a liquid of refractive index n, it acts as a divergent lens of 𝐷 =𝑢+𝑣 − − − − − − (1)
focal length 100 cm. What must be the value of n? 𝑑 =𝑣−𝑢 − − − − − − (2)
-Solution : 𝑛𝑔 = 1.5 ; 𝑃𝑔 = + 5.0 𝐷 ; 𝑓 = − 100 𝑐𝑚 = − 1𝑚 ; 𝑛𝑎 = 1  (1) + (2) 𝐷+𝑑 =𝑢+𝑣+𝑣−𝑢 =2𝑣
 Power of lens placed in water, 𝐷+𝑑
1 1 𝑣=
𝑃𝑙 = = = = − 1 .0 𝐷 2
𝑓 (− 1)  (1) - (2) 𝐷−𝑑 = 𝑢+𝑣−𝑣+𝑢 = 2𝑢
 When glass lens place in air 𝐷−𝑑
𝑛𝑔 𝑢=
1 1 2
𝑃𝑔 = ( − 1) [ − ] − − − − − (1)  If ‘f’ is the focal length of convex lens,,
𝑛𝑎 𝑅1 𝑅2
 When glass lens immersed in liqiud 1 1 1 1 1 𝑢+𝑣
= − = + =
𝑛𝑔 1 1 𝑓 𝑣 (−𝑢) 𝑣 𝑢 𝑢𝑣
𝑃𝑙 = ( − 1) [ − ] − − − − − (2) 𝑢𝑣
𝑛 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑓=
𝑛𝑔 1 1 𝑛𝑔 𝑢+𝑣
(1) 𝑃𝑔 ( − 1) [ − ] ( − 1)  𝑃𝑢𝑡 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑢 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑣,
𝑛𝑎 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑛𝑎
⇒ = 𝑛 = 𝑛 (𝐷 + 𝑑)(𝐷 − 𝑑)
(2) 𝑃𝑙 𝑔 1 1 𝑔 𝐷−𝑑 𝐷+𝑑 [ ]
( − 1) [ − ] ( − 1) ( )( ) 4
𝑛 𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑛 2 2
1.5 𝑓= =
𝐷+𝑑 𝐷−𝑑 𝐷+𝑑+𝐷−𝑑
5.0 ( − 1) + [ ]
= 1 2 2
(𝑫 + 𝒅)(𝑫 − 𝒅)
2
(−1.0) 1.5
( − 1) 𝒇=
𝑛 𝟒𝑫
(1.5 − 1) (0.5) 𝑫𝟐 − 𝒅𝟐
−5 = = 𝒇=
1.5 1.5 𝟒𝑫
( − 1) ( − 1)
𝑛 𝑛 8. Prove that a convex mirror can only form a virtual, erect and diminished image.
1.5 (0.5)
−1 = = −0.1 -Solution :
𝑛 −5
1.5
= −0.1 + 1 = 0.9
𝑛
1 0.9 9 3
= = =
𝑛 1.5 15 5
𝟓
𝒏 =
𝟑
7. If the distance D between an object and screen is greater than 4 times the focal
length f of a convex lens, then there are two positions for which the lens forms
an enlarged image and a diminished image respectively. This method is called Figure (i):
conjugate foci method. If d is the distance between the two positions of the lens,  Position of object - At infinity
obtain the equation for focal length of the convex lens.  Position of image- At F, right side of convex mirror
-Solution :
 Size of the image - Point image
Figure (ii):
 Position of object - Between pole (P) and infinity
 Position of image- Between Pole (P) and Focus (F) on right side of convex mirror
 Size of the image - very small
9. A point object is placed at 20 cm from a thin plano-

convex lens of focal length 15 cm whose plane
surface is silvered. Locate the position and nature of
the final image.
-Solution : : 𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 = 15 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑢 = 20 𝑐𝑚
 The light from’O’undergoes two refractions (1,3)
and one reflection (2) and forms final image at ‘I’
 Hence the equivalent power of this combination,
𝑃𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 = 2𝑃𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 + 𝑃𝑚𝑖𝑟𝑟𝑜𝑟
1 2 1
− = +
𝑓𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑓𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑥 𝑓𝑚𝑖𝑟𝑟𝑜𝑟
1 2 1 2 1
− = + =− [∵ = 0]
𝑓𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 15 ∞ 15 ∞
𝟏𝟓
∴ 𝒇𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 = − 𝒄𝒎
𝟐
1 1 1
 From mirror equation; + =
𝑣 𝑢 𝒇𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡
1 1 1 2 1 2 1 −8 + 3 − 5 1
∴ = − =− − =− + = = = −
𝑣 𝒇𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑢 15 (− 20) 15 20 60 60 12
𝒗 = −𝟏𝟐 𝒄𝒎
 Hence final image will form at 12 cm left side of the system.
10. Find the ratio of the intensities of lights with wavelengths 500 nm and 300 nm
which undergo Rayleigh scattering.
-Solution : 𝜆1 = 500 𝑛𝑚 = 500 𝑋10−9 𝑚 ; 𝜆2 = 300 𝑛𝑚 = 300 𝑋10−9 𝑚
1
 From Rayleigh’s scattering law, the intensity of scattered light ; 𝐼 ∝
𝜆4
1 1
 Hence, 𝐼1 ∝ and 𝐼2 ∝ 𝜆 4
𝜆14 2
 From this,
𝐼1 𝜆24
4
300 𝑋10−9 3 4 81
= 4=( ) = ( ) =
𝐼2 𝜆 1 500 𝑋10 −9 5 625
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝟏 : 𝑰𝟐 = 𝟖𝟏: 𝟔𝟐𝟓
11. Refractive index of material of the prism is 1.541. Find the critical angle?
-Solution : 𝒏 = 𝟏. 𝟓𝟒𝟏
 Let 𝑖𝐶 be the critical angle, then
1 1
sin 𝑖𝐶 = = = 0.6489
𝑛 1.541
∴ 𝒊𝑪 = sin (0.6489) = 𝟒𝟐°𝟐𝟕
−1
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT -7
WAVE OPTICS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 3. Two light sources of equal amplitudes interfere with each other. Calculate the
1. The wavelength of light from sodium source in vacuum is 5893Å.What are its (a) ratio of maximum and minimum intensities.
wavelength, (b) speed and (c) frequency when this light travels in water which -Solution :-
has a refractive index of 1.33.  Let ‘a’ be the amplitude ,then equation for intensity
-Solution :- 𝑛1 = 1 ; 𝑛2 = 1.33 ; 1 = 5893 A ; 𝜙
𝐼 ∝ 4 𝑎2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ]
 Refractive index of water, 2
𝑐 1  1 𝜙
 When, 𝜙 = 0 (𝑜𝑟) cos ( ) = 1 then, intensity will be maximum.
𝑛= = = 2
𝑣 2  2 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 ∝ 4 𝑎2
1 5893 𝑋 10−10 𝜙
 When 𝜙 = 180 (𝑜𝑟) cos ( ) = 0 then, intensity will be minimum.
2 = = 2
𝑛 1.33 𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0
𝟐 = 𝟒𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 = 𝟒𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝐀
𝑐  Hence the ratio of maximum and minimum ,
 Since, 𝑛 = , velocity of light in water,
𝑣 𝑰𝒎𝒂𝒙 ∶ 𝑰𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟒 𝒂𝟐 ∶ 𝟎
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 108 9 𝑋 108 4. Two light sources have intensity of light as I0. What is the resultant intensity at
𝑣= = = = = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟖 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝑛 1.33 4 4 a point where the two light waves have a phase difference of π/3?
( ) 𝝅
3 -Solution :- 𝜙=
 Frequency is same in both air and water medium, then 𝟑
𝜙
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 1018  Resultant intensity, 𝐼 ∝ 4 𝑎2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ] [∵ 𝐼𝑂 ∝ 𝑎2 ]
 =
2
= =
1 5893 𝑋 10−10 5893 𝜙
𝜋
( ) 𝜋 √3
2
3
𝐼 = 4 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ] = 4 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ 3
] = 4 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [ ] = 4 𝐼𝑂 [ ] = 4 𝐼𝑂 [ ]
 = 5. 090 𝑋 10−4 𝑋 1018 = 𝟓. 𝟎𝟗𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯𝒛 2 2 6 2 4
2. Two light sources with amplitudes 5 units and 3 units respectively interfere 𝑰 = 𝟑 𝑰𝑶
with each other. Calculate the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities. 5. The wavelength of a light is 450 nm. How much phase it will differ for a path of
-Solution :- 𝑎1 = 5 ; 𝑎2 = 3 3 mm?
 Resultant amplitude, -Solution :- 𝜆 = 450 𝑛𝑚 = 450 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝛿 = 3 𝑚𝑚 = 3 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
 Phase difference,
A = √𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2 𝑎1 𝑎2 cos 𝜙
2𝜋 2𝜋 𝝅
 When 𝜙 = 0 (𝑜𝑟) cos 𝜙 = 1 , then resultant amplitude will be maximum. 𝜙= 𝛿= 𝑋 3 𝑋 10−3 = 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒓𝒂𝒅 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 𝒓𝒂𝒅
𝜆 450 𝑋 10−9 𝟕𝟓
6. In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits are 0.15 mm apart. The light
A𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2 𝑎1 𝑎2 (1)
source has a wavelength of 450 nm. The screen is 2 m away from the slits.
A𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √( 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 )2 = 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 = 5 + 3 (a) Find the distance of the second bright fringe and also third dark fringe from
𝐀𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟖 units the central maximum.
 When 𝜙 = 180° (𝑜𝑟) cos 𝜙 = − 1 then resultant amplitude will be (b) Find the fringe width.
minimum. (c) How will the fringe pattern change if the screen is moved away from the
 A𝑚𝑖𝑛 = √𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2 𝑎1 𝑎2 (−1) slits?
(d) What will happen to the fringe width if the whole setup is immersed in
A𝑚𝑖𝑛 = √( 𝑎1 − 𝑎2 )2 = 𝑎1 − 𝑎2 = 5 − 3 waterof refractive index 4/3.
𝐀𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟐 units -Solution :- 𝑑 = 0.15 𝑚𝑚 = 0.15 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝜆 = 450 𝑛𝑚 = 450 𝑋 10−9 𝑚
 Intensity is directly proportional to the square of the amplitude (𝐼 ∝ 𝐴2 ) 𝐷
2 (a) Distance of nth bright fringe from centre, 𝑦𝑛 = 𝑛 𝜆
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝐴𝑚𝑎𝑥 82 64 16 𝑑
= 2 = 2= = 𝐷 𝜆
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝐴𝑚𝑖𝑛 2 4 1 Distance of nth dark fringe centre, 𝑦𝑛 = (2𝑛 − 1)
𝑑 2
𝑰𝒎𝒂𝒙 ∶ 𝑰𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟏𝟔 ∶ 𝟏 Hencedistance of 2 bright fringe,
nd
𝐷 2
𝑦2 = 𝑛𝜆= 𝑋 2 𝑋 450 𝑋 10−9 = 2 𝑋 2 𝑋 3000 𝑋 10−6
𝑑 0.15 𝑋 10−3
𝒚𝟐 = 12000 𝑋 10−6 = 𝟏𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟐 𝒎𝒎
And distance of 3rd dark fringe, 8. Find the minimum thickness of a film of refractive index 1.25, which will
𝐷 5𝜆 2 5 𝑋 450 𝑋 10−9 strongly reflect the light of wavelength 589 nm. Also find the minimum
𝑦3 = = 𝑋 = 5 𝑋 3000 𝑋 10−6 thickness of the film to be anti-reflecting.
𝑑 2 0.15 𝑋 10−3 2
𝒚𝟑 = 15000 𝑋 10−6 = 𝟏𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟓 𝒎𝒎 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 589 𝑛𝑚 = 589 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝜇 = 1.25
(b) Fringe width,  For the film to have strong reflection, the reflected waves should interfere
𝜆𝐷 450 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 2 constructively. Hence the path difference,
𝛽= = = 3000 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 2 = 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟔 𝒎𝒎 𝜆
𝑑 0.15 𝑋 10−3 2 𝜇 𝑡 = (2𝑛 − 1)
(c) Since, 𝜷 ∝ 𝑫 , when distance (D) between slit and screen increases, the fringe 2
width (𝜷) also increases.  The least optical path difference, 𝑛 = 1, then
4 𝜆
(d) When, 𝑛 = ,then fringe width (𝛽1 ) in water 2𝜇𝑡 =
3 2
1
𝜆 𝐷 𝜆𝐷 𝛽 6 𝑋 10−3 3 𝑋 6 𝑋 10−3 18 𝑋 10−3 𝜆 𝜆 589 𝑋 10−9 589 𝑋 10−9
𝛽1 = = = = = = [∵ 𝜆1 = ] ∴ 𝑡= = =
𝑑 𝑛𝑑 𝑛 4 4 4 𝑛 4𝜇 4 𝑋 1.25 5
( )
3 𝒕 = 𝟏𝟏𝟕. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝒎 = 𝟏𝟏𝟕. 𝟖 𝒏𝒎
𝜷𝟏 = 𝟒. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟒. 𝟓 𝒎𝒎  For the film to be anti-reflecting, the reflected rays should interfere destructively.
7. Lights of two wavelengths 560 nm and 420 nm are used in Young’s double slit Hence the path difference,
experiment. Find the least distance from the central fringe where the bright 2𝜇𝑡 =𝑛𝜆
fringes of the two wavelengths coincide.  The least optical path difference, 𝑛 = 1, then
-Solution :- 𝝀𝟏 = 560 𝑛𝑚 = 560 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝝀𝟐 = 420 𝑛𝑚 = 420 𝑋 10−9 𝑚
𝟏 2𝜇𝑡 =𝜆
 Here for given ‘y’, 𝝀 ∝ .Here, nth order bright fringe of longer wavelength λ1 𝜆 589 𝑋 10−9 589 𝑋 10−9 5890 𝑋 10−9
𝒏
coincides with (n+1)th order bright fringe of shorter wavelength λ2, ∴ 𝑡= = = =
2𝜇 2 𝑋 1.25 2.5 25
𝐷
 Distance of nth bright fringe ; 𝑦𝑛 = 𝑛𝜆 𝒕 = 𝟐𝟑𝟓. 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟗 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟑𝟓. 𝟔 𝒏𝒎
𝑑
𝐷 𝐷 9. Light of wavelength 500 nm passes through a slit of 0.2 mm wide. The diffraction
 Hence, 𝑛 𝜆1 = (𝑛 + 1) 𝜆2
𝑑 𝑑 pattern is formed on a screen 60 cm away. Determine the,
𝑛 𝜆1 = (𝑛 + 1) 𝜆2 (a) angular spread of central maximum
(𝑛 + 1) 𝜆1 (b) the distance between the central maximum and the second minimum.
(𝑜𝑟) =
𝑛 𝜆2 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 500 𝑛𝑚 = 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑎 = 0.2 𝑚𝑚 = 0.2 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
1 𝜆1 𝐷 = 60 𝑐𝑚 = 60 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
(𝑜𝑟) 1+ =
𝑛 𝜆2 (a) Equation for diffraction minimum is, 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛 𝜆
1 𝜆1 The central maximum is spread up to the first minimum. Hence, n = 1
= −1 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆
𝑛 𝜆2
1 560 𝑋 10−9 𝜆 500 𝑋 10−9 5000 𝑋 10−6
= −1 (𝑜𝑟) sin 𝜃 = = −3
= = 2500 𝑋10−6
𝑛 420 𝑋 10−9 𝑎 0.2 𝑋 10 2
1 4 1 (𝑜𝑟) sin 𝜃 = 0.0025
= −1= (𝑜𝑟) 𝜽 = 𝐬𝐢𝐧−𝟏 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟓 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟓 𝒓𝒂𝒅
𝑛 3 3
∴ 𝒏=𝟑 From the figure, for first mininmum
 Thus, the 3rd bright fringe of λ1 and 4th bright fringe of λ2 coincide at the least 𝑦1
tan 𝜃 =
distance y. 𝐷
 The least distance from the central fringe where the bright fringes of the two As 𝜃 is small, sin 𝜃 ≈ tan 𝜃 For first minimum
wavelengths coincides is 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆
𝑦1
𝐷 1 𝑎 =𝜆
𝑦𝑛 = 𝑛𝜆= 𝑋 3 𝑋 560 𝑋 10−9 𝐷
𝑑 3 𝑋 10−3 𝜆𝐷 500 𝑋 10 𝑋60 𝑋 10−2
−9
5000 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 60 𝑋 10−2
𝒚𝒏 = 𝟓𝟔𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 𝒎𝒎 ∴ 𝑦1 = = = = 150000 𝑋10−8
𝑎 0.2 𝑋 10−3
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 2 𝑋 10−3
𝒚𝟏 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝒎
For second minimum (𝑛 = 2) 13. A monochromatic light of wavelength of 500 nm strikes a grating and produces
𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 2 𝜆 fourth order maximum at an angle of 30°. Find the number of slits per
𝑦2 centimeter.
𝑎 = 2𝜆
𝐷 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 500 𝑛𝑚 = 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ;  = 30 ; 𝑚 = 4
2𝜆𝐷 2 𝑋 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑋60 𝑋 10−2  Equation for diffraction maximum for grating is ; sin 𝜃 = 𝑁 𝑚 𝜆
∴ 𝑦2 = =
𝑎 0.2 𝑋 10−3 1
20 𝑋 500 𝑋10−9 𝑋 60 𝑋 10−2 sin 𝜃 sin 30° ( ) 1
∴ 𝑁= = = 2 = 𝑋 106 = 0.25 𝑋 106
𝑦2 = = 300000 𝑋10−8 𝜆𝑚 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 4 2000 𝑋 10−9 4
2 𝑋 10−3
𝒚𝟐 = 𝟑. 𝟎 𝑿𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟑 𝒎𝒎 𝑵 = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒍𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔⁄𝒎 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝒍𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔⁄𝒄𝒎
(b) The distance between the central maximum and second minimum is, 14. The optical telescope in the Vainu Bappu observatory at Kavalur has an
𝒚𝟐 − 𝒚𝟏 = 𝟑 − 𝟏. 𝟓 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝒎 objective lens of diameter 2.3 m. What is its angular resolution if the wavelength
10. A monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 Å passes through a single slit of light used is 589 nm?
producing diffraction pattern for the central maximum as shown in the figure. -Solution :- 𝜆 = 589 𝑛𝑚 = 589 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑎 = 2.3 𝑚
Determine the width of the slit.  Equation for angular resolution,
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 5000 𝐀 = 5000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ;  = 30 ; 𝑛 = 1 1.22 𝜆 1.22 𝑋 589 𝑋 10−9
 Equation for diffraction minimum is,  = =
𝑎 2.3
𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛 𝜆  = 3. 125 𝑋 102 𝑋 10−9 = 𝟑. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒓𝒂𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏 ≈ 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟏𝟏
 For first minimum (𝑛 = 1) 15. Two polaroids are kept with their transmission axes inclined at 30 o.
𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆 Unpolarised light of intensity I falls on the first polaroid. Find out the intensity
𝜆 of light emerging from the second polaroid.
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑎= -Solution :-
sin 𝜃
5000 𝑋 10−10 5000 𝑋 10−10  As the intensity of the unpolarised light falling on the first polaroid is I, the
𝑎= = intensity of polarized light emerging from it will be,
sin 30° 1
( ) 𝑰
2 𝑰𝑶 =
𝟐
𝑎 = 10000 𝑋 10−10 = 1 𝑋 10−6 𝑚 = 0.001 𝑋 10−3  Let 𝐼1 be the intensity of light emerging from the second polaroid.
𝒂 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟏 𝒎𝒎 𝐼1 = 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃
11. Calculate the distance upto which ray optics is a good approximation for light of 2
𝐼 𝐼 √3 𝐼 3
wavelength 500 nm falls on an aperture of width 0.5 mm. 𝐼 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 30° =
1
( ) = 𝑋
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 500 𝐧𝐦 = 500 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑎 = 0.5 𝑚𝑚 = 0.5 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 2 2 2 2 4
𝑎2 𝟏
𝟑
 Fresnel distance, 𝑧 = 𝑰 = ( )𝑰
𝟖
2𝜆
(0.5 𝑋 10−3 )2 0.25 𝑋 10−6 0.25 𝑋 10−6 16. Two polaroids are kept crossed (transmission axes at 90o) to each other.
𝑧= −9
= −9
= (a) What will be the intensity of the light coming out from the second polaroid
2 𝑋 500 𝑋 10 1000 𝑋 10 10−6
𝒛 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟓 𝒄𝒎 when an unpolarised light of intensity I falls on the first polaroid?
12. A diffraction grating consists of 4000 slits per centimeter. It is illuminated by a (b) What will be the intensity of light coming out from the second polaroid if a
monochromatic light. The second order diffraction maximum is produced at an third polaroid is kept in between at 45o inclination to both of them.
angle of 30°. What is the wavelength of the light used? -Solution :-
-Solution :- 𝑁 = 4000 𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑠 ⁄𝑐𝑚 = 400000 𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑠 ⁄𝑚 ;  = 30 ; 𝑚 = 2 (a) As the intensity of the unpolarised light falling on the first polaroid 𝑃1 is I, the
 Equation for diffraction maximum for grating is, 𝑰
intensity of polarized light emerging from it will be ; 𝑰𝑶 =
sin 𝜃 = 𝑁 𝑚 𝜆 𝟐
1 Let 𝐼1 , be the intensity of light emerging from the second polaroid 𝑃2 . From
sin 𝜃 sin 30° ( ) 1 Malus’ law
𝜆= = = 2 = 𝑋 10−5
𝑁𝑚 400000 𝑋 2 8 𝑋 10 5 16 𝐼
𝐼1 = 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 90° = 0
𝝀 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟔𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟓 = 𝟔𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝑨° 2
No light comes out from the second polaroid.
(b) If third polaroid 𝑃3 kept between 𝑃1 & 𝑃2 at 45o, the intensity of emergent (b) Magnification in near point focusing,
light from 𝑃3 𝐷 25
2 𝒎= 1+ = 1+ =1+5=𝟔
𝐼 𝐼 1 𝐼 1 𝐈 𝑓 5
𝐼1 = 𝐼𝑂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 45° = ( 2) = 𝑋 =
2 2 √ 2 2 𝟒 Magnification in normal focusing,
Finally, the intensity of emergent light from 𝑃2 , 𝐷 25
𝒎= = =𝟓
I I 1 2 I 1 𝐈 𝑓 5
𝐼11 = 𝐼1 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 45° = ( ) = 𝑋 = 20. A microscope has an objective and eyepiece of focal lengths 5 cm and 50 cm
4 4 √2 4 2 𝟖
17. Find the polarizing angles for (i) glass of refractive index 1.5 and (ii) water of respectively with tube length 30 cm. Find the magnification of the microscope
refractive index 1.33. in the (a) near point and (b) normal focusing.
-Solution :- -Solution :- 𝑓𝑂 = 5 𝑐𝑚 = 5 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑓𝑒 = 50 𝑐𝑚 = 50 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
(i) When, 𝑛 = 1.5 , from Brewster’s law ; tan 𝑖𝑃 = 𝑛 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑖𝑃 = tan−1 𝑛 𝐿 = 30 𝑐𝑚 = 30 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 25 𝑐𝑚 = 25 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
𝒊𝑷 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 𝟏. 𝟓 = 𝟓𝟔. 𝟑° (a) Magnification of the microscope in near point focusing,
𝐿 𝐷
(ii) When, 𝑛 = 1.33 from Brewster’s law ;, tan 𝑖𝑃 = 𝑛 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑖𝑃 = tan−1 𝑛 𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ] [1 + ]
𝑓𝑂 𝑓𝑒
𝒊𝑷 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 𝟏. 𝟑𝟑 = 𝟓𝟑. 𝟏°
30 𝑋 10−2 25 𝑋 10−2
18. What is the angle at which a glass plate of refractive index 1.65 is to be kept with 𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ] [1 + ]
respect to the horizontal surface so that an unpolarised light travelling 5 𝑋 10−2 50 𝑋 10−2
horizontal after reflection from the glass plate is found to be plane polarised? 1 3 18
𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [6] [1 + ] = 6 𝑋 = =𝟗
-Solution :- 𝑛 = 1.65 2 2 2
 From Brewster’s law ; tan 𝑖𝑃 = 𝑛 (b) Magnification of the microscope in normal focusing,
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑖𝑃 = tan−1 𝑛 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 𝟏. 𝟔𝟓 = 𝟓𝟖. 𝟖° 𝐿 𝐷
𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ] [ ]
 The angle at which a glass plate to be kept with respect to the horizontal surface 𝑓𝑂 𝑓𝑒
= 𝟗𝟎° − 𝟓𝟖. 𝟖° = 𝟑𝟏. 𝟐° 30 𝑋 10−2 25 𝑋 10−2
𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [ ][ ]
19. A man with a near point of 25 cm reads a book which has small print using a 5 𝑋 10−2 50 𝑋 10−2
magnifying lens of focal length 5 cm. 1 6
(a) What are the closest and the farthest distances at which he should keep the 𝑚 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 = [6] [ ] = =𝟑
2 2
lens from the book? 21. A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 125 cm and an eyepiece
(b) What are the maximum and the minimum magnification possible? of focal length 2 cm. (a) What is the magnification of the telescope? (b) What is
-Solution :- 𝐷 = 25 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝑓 = 5 𝑐𝑚 the separation between the objective and the eyepiece?(c) What is the angular
 Closest distance of object =𝑢 separation between two stars when viewed through this telescope if they
Image distance (near point focusing) = 𝑣 = −25 𝑐𝑚 subtend 1 ' for bare eye?
 Farthest distance of object = 𝑢1 -Solution :- 𝑓𝑂 = 125 𝑐𝑚 = 125 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 ; 𝑓𝑒 = 2 𝑐𝑚 = 2 𝑋 10−2 𝑚
Image distance (normal focusing) = 𝑣1 = ∞ (a) Magnification of telescope,
(a) Lens equation for near point focusing, 𝑓𝑂 125 𝑋 10−2 125
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 − 5 6 𝑚= = =
− = (𝑜𝑟) = − = − =− − = = − 𝑓𝑒 2 𝑋 10−2 2
𝑣 𝑢 𝑓 𝑢 𝑣 𝑓 (−25) 5 25 5 25 25 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓
𝟐𝟓 (b) Equation for approximate length of telescope,
𝒖= − = −𝟒. 𝟏𝟔𝟕 𝒄𝒎
𝟔 𝐿 = 𝑓𝑂 + 𝑓𝑒
Lens equation for normal focusing, 𝐿 = (125 𝑋 10−2 ) + (2 𝑋 10−2 ) = (125 + 2) 𝑋 10−2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 𝑳 = 𝟏𝟐𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝒎 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟕 𝒎
− 1 = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 1 = 1 − 1 = − = −0− =−
𝑣 1 𝑢 𝑓 𝑢 𝑣 𝑓 ∞ 5 5 5 (c) The angular separation,
𝒖𝟏 = − 𝟓 𝒄𝒎 𝜃𝑖
𝑚= (𝑜𝑟) 𝜃𝑖 = 𝑚 𝜃𝑜
The closest distance between the lens and the book is, u = −𝟒. 𝟏𝟔𝟕 𝒄𝒎 𝜃𝑜
The farthest distance at which the person can keep the book is = −𝟓𝒄𝒎 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓
𝜽𝒊 = 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏 = 𝟔𝟐. 𝟓 = = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟒°
𝟔𝟎
22. Calculate the power of the lens of the spectacles needed to rectify the defect of EXERCISE PROBLEMS
nearsightedness for a person who could see clearly up to a distance of 1.8 m. 1. The ratio of maximum and minimum intensities in an interference pattern is
-Solution :- 𝑥 = 1.8 𝑚 36 : 1. What is the ratio of the amplitudes of the two interfering waves?
 The lens should have a focal length of 𝒇 = −𝒙 = −𝟏. 𝟖 𝒎 -Solution :- 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 ∶ 𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 36 ∶ 1
 It is a concave (or) diverging lens. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 (𝑎1 +𝑎2 )2 𝑎1 +𝑎2 𝐼 36
 The power of the lens is,  We have, = (𝑜𝑟) = √ 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √ 1 = 6
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 (𝑎1 −𝑎2 )2 𝑎1 −𝑎2 𝑚𝑖𝑛
1 1
𝑃 = =−  Hence, 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 = 6 (𝑎1 − 𝑎2 )
𝑓 1.8 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 = 6 𝑎1 − 6 𝑎2
𝑷 = −𝟎. 𝟓𝟔 diopter 𝑎2 + 6 𝑎2 = 6 𝑎1 − 𝑎1
23. A person has farsightedness with the far distance he could see clearly is 75 cm. 7 𝑎2 = 5 𝑎1
Calculate the power of the lens of the spectacles needed to rectify the defect. 𝑎1 7
-Solution :- 𝑦 = 75 𝑐𝑚 = 75 𝑋 10−2 𝑚 =
𝑎2 5
 The lens should have a focal length of 𝑓, 𝒂𝟏 ∶ 𝒂𝟐 = 𝟕 ∶ 𝟓
𝑦 𝑋 25 𝑐𝑚
𝑓= 2. In Young’s double slit experiment, 62 fringes are seen on a screen for sodium
𝑦 − 25 𝑐𝑚 light of wavelength 5893 Å. If violet light of wavelength 4359 Å is used in place
75 𝑐𝑚 𝑋 25 𝑐𝑚 1875 of sodium light, how many fringes will be seen?
𝑓= = 𝑐𝑚
75 𝑐𝑚 − 25 𝑐𝑚 50 -Solution :- 𝜆1 = 5893 A ; 𝜆2 = 4359 A ; 𝑛1 = 62
𝟏𝟖𝟕𝟓 𝜆𝐷
𝒇= 𝒄𝒎 = 𝟑𝟕. 𝟓 𝒄𝒎  Equation of fringe width ; 𝛽 =
𝟓𝟎 𝑑
 It is a convex lens (or) converging lens.  Hence fringe width of n-fringes , 𝑛 𝛽 = 𝑛 .Thus
𝜆𝐷
𝑑
 The power of the lens is, 𝜆1 𝐷 𝜆2 𝐷
1 1 10−2 100 𝑛1 = 𝑛2
𝑃 = =− = = 𝑑 𝑑
𝑓 37.5 𝑋 10 −2 37.5 37.5 𝑛1 𝜆1 = 𝑛2 𝜆2
𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟕 diopter 𝑛1 𝜆1
𝑛2 =
𝜆2
62 𝑋 5893 𝑋 10−10 62 𝑋 5893
𝑛2 = −10
=
4359 𝑋 10 4359
𝒏𝟐 = 𝟖𝟑. 𝟖𝟏 ≈ 𝟖𝟒
3. Light of wavelength 600 nm that falls on a pair of slits producing interference
pattern on a screen in which the bright fringes are separated by 7.2 mm. What
must be the wavelength of another light which produces bright fringes
separated by 8.1 mm with the same apparatus?
-Solution :- 𝜆1 = 600 𝑛𝑚 = 600 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝛽1 = 7.2𝑚𝑚 = 7.2 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ;
𝛽2 = 8.1 𝑚𝑚 = 8.1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚
𝜆𝐷
 Equation of fringe width ; 𝛽= 𝑑
 Hence,
𝛽1 𝜆1 𝛽2
= (or) 𝜆2 = 𝜆1
𝛽2 𝜆2 𝛽1
8.1 𝑋 10−3 4860
𝜆2 = 600 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 −3
= 𝑋 10−9 = 675 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 = 675 𝑛𝑚
7.2 𝑋 10 7.2
4. A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source falls on a single slit 𝐼𝑜
𝐼3 = cos 2 𝜃 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃)
1 mm wide and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m 2
away. What is the distance between the first dark fringes on either side of the 𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2 𝜃 2
central bright fringe? 𝐼3 = cos 2 𝜃 sin2 𝜃 = [𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃]2 = [ ]
2 2 2 2
-Solution :- 𝑎 = 1𝑚𝑚 = 1 𝑋 10−3 𝑚 ; 𝐼𝑜 sin2 2𝜃 𝐼𝑜
𝜆 = 600 𝑛𝑚 = 600 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 2 𝑚 𝐼3 = [ ]= sin2 2𝜃
2 4 8
 Equation for diffraction minimum,  When sin2 2𝜃 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 , then 𝐼3 will bemaximum. (i.e.)
𝑦
𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑛 𝜆 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑎 = 𝑛 𝜆 sin2 2𝜃 = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2𝜃 = 1 (𝑜𝑟) 2𝜃 = 90°
𝐷
 Condition for 1st minimum (n=1) ∴ 𝜽 = 𝟒𝟓°
𝑦 7. An unpolarised light of intensity 32 Wm –2 passes through three Polaroids such
𝑎 =𝜆
𝐷 that the axes of the first and the last Polaroids are at 90°. What is the angle
𝐷𝜆 2 𝑋 600 𝑋 10−9 between the axes of the first and middle Polaroids so that the emerging light
∴ 𝑦 = = = 1200 𝑋 10−6 𝑚 = 1.2 𝑋10−3 𝑚 = 1.2 𝑚𝑚
𝑎 1 𝑋 10−3 has an intensity of only 3 Wm–2?
 Hence distance between the first fringe on either side of the central bright fringe
-Solution :- : 𝐼𝑜 = 32 𝑊𝑚−2 ; 𝐼3 = 3 𝑊𝑚−2
𝒀 = 2 𝑦 = 2 𝑋1.2 = 𝟐. 𝟒 𝒎𝒎
5. Light of wavelength of 5000 Å produces diffraction pattern of the single slit of  If the intensity of the unpolarised light is I then the intensity of polarised light will
width 2.5 μm. What is the maximum order of diffraction possible? be I/2. The other half of intensity is restricted by the polariser.
-Solution :- 𝑎 = 2.5 𝜇𝑚 = 2.5 𝑋 10−6 𝑚 ; 𝜆 = 5000 Å = 5000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚
 Equation for diffraction minimum : 𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝜽 = 𝒏 𝝀
 For maximum order ; 𝜃 = 90° (𝑜𝑟) 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 1 . Hence
𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝜽 2.5 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 1
𝒏= = = 0.5 𝑋 101 = 𝟓
𝝀 5000 𝑋 10−10
6. I0 is the intensity of light existing between two cross Polaroids kept with their
axes perpendicular to each other. A third polaroid is introduced between them.
What must be the angle between the axes of first and the newly introduced  Intensity of incident light on 𝑃1 = 𝐼𝑜
polaroid to get the maximum light from the whole arrangement? 𝐼
 Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃1 ; 𝐼1 = 𝑜
-Solution :- 2
𝐼𝑜
 If the intensity of the unpolarised light is I then the intensity of polarised light will  Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃2 ; 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 cos 2 𝜃 = cos 2 𝜃
2
be I/2. The other half of intensity is restricted by the polariser.  Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃3 ; 𝐼3 = 𝐼2 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃)
𝐼𝑜
cos 2 𝜃 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃)
𝐼3 =
2
𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝐼𝑜 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2 𝜃 2
𝐼3 = cos 2 𝜃 sin2 𝜃 = [𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃]2 = [ ]
2 2 2 2
2
𝐼𝑜 sin 2𝜃 𝐼𝑜
𝐼3 = [ ]= sin2 2𝜃
2 4 8
32
3= sin2 2𝜃
8
 Intensity of incident light on 𝑃1 = 𝐼𝑜 24 3

𝐼
Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃1 ; 𝐼1 = 𝑜 (𝑜𝑟) sin2 2𝜃 = =
2 32 4
𝐼 √3
 Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃2 ; 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 cos 2 𝜃 = 𝑜 cos 2 𝜃 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2𝜃 =
2
2
 Intensity of emergent light from 𝑃3 ; 𝐼3 = 𝐼2 cos 2 (90 − 𝜃) √3
(𝑜𝑟) 2𝜃 = sin−1 [ ] = 60°
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 2
∴ 𝜽 = 𝟑𝟎°
8. The reflected light is found to be plane polarised when an unpolarized light falls 10. A compound microscope has a magnifying power of 100 when the image is
on a denser medium at 60° with the normal. Find the angle of refraction and formed at infinity. The objective has a focal length of 0.5 cm and the tube length
critical angle of incidence for total internal reflection in the denser to rarer is 6.5 cm. What is the focal length of the eyepiece.
medium reflection. Solution :- 𝑚 = 100 ; 𝑓𝑜 = 0.5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝐿 = 6.5 𝑐𝑚 ; 𝐷 = 25𝑐𝑚
Solution :-  When the image is formed at infinity, the real image produced by objective lens is
 The angle of incidence at which the reflected ray get completely plane polarized formed at the focus of the eyepiece, then 𝑣𝑜 + 𝑓𝑒 = 𝐿
is called angle of polarization (𝑖𝑃 ). Hence 𝒊𝑷 = 𝟔𝟎° 𝑣𝑜 + 𝑓𝑒 = 6.5 − − − − − (1)
 At polarizing angle, the angle of refraction ,
𝐫 = 90° − 𝑖𝑃 = 90° − 60° = 𝟑𝟎°
 Magnification of compound microscope ;
 From Brewster’s law, 𝑛 = tan 𝑖𝑃 = tan 60° = √3
𝑣𝑜 𝐷 𝑣𝑜 𝐷 𝑣𝑜 25
 Let 𝑖𝐶 be the critical angle, then 𝑚= 𝑋 = − [1 − ] = − [1 − ]
𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒 𝑓𝑜 𝑓𝑒 𝑓𝑜 𝑓𝑒
1 1
sin 𝑖𝐶 = = = 0.5774 𝑣𝑜 25
𝑛 √3 100 = − [1 − ]
0.5 𝑓𝑒
𝒊𝑪 = sin (0.5774) = 𝟑𝟓. 𝟐𝟔° = 𝟑𝟓°𝟏𝟔𝐈
−1
𝑣𝑜 1
9. The near point and the far point for a person are 50 cm and 500 cm, 4 = − [1 − ]
0.5 𝑓𝑒
respectively. Calculate the power of the lens the person should wear to read a 𝑣𝑜
book held in hand at 25 cm. What maximum distance is clearly visible for the 4 𝑓𝑒 = − 1 + = −1 + 2 𝑣𝑜
0.5
person with this lens on the eye? (𝑜𝑟) 2 𝑣𝑜 − 4 𝑓𝑒 = 1 − − − − − (2)
Solution :-𝑢 = −25 𝑐𝑚 = −0.25 𝑚 ; 𝑣𝑛 = −50𝑐𝑚 = −0.5 𝑚 ; 𝑣𝑓 = −500𝑐𝑚 = −5𝑚 (1)𝑋 2 ⟹ 2 𝑣𝑜 + 2 𝑓𝑒 = 13 − − − − − (3)
 Power of lens ; (3) − (2) ⟹ 6 𝑓𝑒 = 12
1 1 1 12
𝑷= = − 𝒇𝒆 = = 𝟐 𝒄𝒎
𝑓 𝑣𝑛 𝑢 6
1 1 1 1
𝑷= − =− + = −2 + 4 = 𝟐 𝑫
(−0.5) (−0.25) 0.5 0.25
 Let 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 be the maximum distance, then
1 1 1
𝑷= = −
𝑓 𝑣𝑓 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥
1 1 1 1
𝟐= − =− −
(−5) 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 5 𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥
1 1 11
=− −2=−
𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 5 5
5
𝑢𝑚𝑎𝑥 = − = − 0.454 𝑚 = − 45.45 𝑐𝑚
11
 The maximum distance that clearly visible for the person with this lens on the eye
will be = 45.45 𝑐𝑚
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT - 8
DUAL NATURE OF
RADIATON AND MATTER

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 2. A radiation of wavelength 300 nm is incident on a silver surface. Will

1. For the photoelectric emission from cesium, show that wave theory predicts photoelectrons be observed? [work function of silver = 4.7 eV]
that (i) maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons (Kmax) depends on the -Solution :- : 𝜆 = 300 𝑛𝑚 = 300 𝑋 10−9 𝑚
intensity I of the incident light (ii) Kmax does not depend on the frequency of the  Energy of the incident photon is
incident light and (iii) the time interval between the incidence of light and the ℎ𝑐
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= (𝑗𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒)
ejection of photoelectrons is very long. (Given : The work function for cesium is 𝜆
2.14 eV and the power absorbed per unit area is 𝟏. 𝟔𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝑾 𝒎−𝟐 which ℎ𝑐
𝐸= (𝑒𝑉)
produces a measurable photocurrent in cesium.) 𝜆𝑒
-Solution :- 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
𝐸=
For the sake of simplicity, the following standard assumptions can be made when light 300 𝑋 10−9 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
is incident on the given material. 6.626 𝑋 10−26 6.626 66.26
(a) Light is absorbed in the top atomic layer of the metal 𝐸= = =
100 𝑋 10−28 𝑋 1.6 1.6 16
(b) For a given element, each atom absorbs an equal amount of energy and this 𝑬 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝒆𝑽
energy is proportional to its cross-sectional area A  The work function of silver = 4.7 eV. Since the energy of the incident photon is less
(c) Each atom gives this energy to one of the electrons. than the work function of silver, photoelectrons are not observed in this case.
(i) According to wave theory, the energy in a light wave is spread out uniformly and 3. When light of wavelength 2200Å falls on Cu, photo electrons are emitted from it.
continuously over the wavefront. Find (i) the threshold wavelength and (ii) the stopping potential. Given: the work
 The energy absorbed by each electron in time t is given by E = I A t function for Cu is ϕ0 = 4.65 eV.
 With this energy absorbed, the most energetic electron is released with Kmax -Solution :- 𝜆 = 2200 𝐴° = 2200 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜙𝑂 = 4.65 𝑒𝑉 = 4.65 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
by overcoming the surface energy barrier or work function ϕ0 and this is (i) Work function ; 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈𝑂 =
ℎ𝑐
expressed as ; 𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝑰 𝑨 𝒕 − 𝝓𝑶 𝜆𝑂
 Thus, wave theory predicts that for a unit time, at low light intensities when Hence threshold wavelength,
𝑰 𝑨 < 𝝓𝑶 , no electrons are emitted. At higher intensities, when 𝑰 𝑨 ≥ 𝝓𝑶 , ℎ𝑐 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−26
𝜆𝑂 = = =
electrons are emitted. This implies that higher the light intensity, greater will 𝜙𝑂 4.65 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 7.44 𝑋 10−19
−7
be Kmax. 19.878 𝑋 10
𝜆𝑂 =
 Kmax is dependent only on the intensity under given conditions – that is, by 7.44
suitably increasing the intensity, one can produce photoelectric effect even if 𝝀𝑶 = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟕𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟔𝟕𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟐𝟔𝟕𝟐 𝑨°
the frequency is less than the threshold frequency. So the concept of (ii) By Einstein’s photo electric equation; 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
ℎ𝑐
threshold frequency does not even exist in wave theory.  Energy of incident photon; 𝐸 = ℎ 𝜈 =
𝜆
(ii) According to wave theory, the intensity of a light wave is proportional to the
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−16
square of the amplitude of the electric field (𝐸 2𝑂 ). The amplitude of this electric 𝐸= =
field increases with increasing intensity and imparts an increasing acceleration 2200 𝑋 10−10 2200
and kinetic energy to an electron. This means that Kmax should not depend at all 𝐸 = 9. 036 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10−16 = 9. 036 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
on the frequency of the classical light wave which again contradicts the  and working function,
experimental results. 𝜙𝑂 = 4. 65 𝑒𝑉 = 4.65 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 = 7.44 𝑋10−19 𝐽
(iii) If an electron accumulates light energy just enough to overcome the work  Hence, 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
function, then it is ejected out of the atom with zero kinetic energy. Therefore, 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = 9. 036 𝑋 10−19 − 7.44 𝑋10−19 = 1.596 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
0 = 𝐼 𝐴 𝑡 − 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐼 𝐴 𝑡 = 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = 1. 6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽
𝜙𝑂 𝜙𝑂 2.14 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19  Then stopping potential,
∴ 𝑡= = = 2 = 𝟔. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒔 ≈ 𝟕𝟗 𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔
𝐼𝐴 𝐼 𝜋 𝑟2 1.60 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (1 𝑋 10−10 ) 1. 6 𝑋 10−19 1. 6 𝑋 10−19
𝑉𝑂 = =
 Thus, wave theory predicts that there is a large time gap between the 𝑒 1. 6 𝑋 10−19
incidence of light and the ejection of photoelectrons but the experiments 𝑽𝑶 = 𝟏 𝑽
show that photo emission is an instantaneous process
4. The work function of potassium is 2.30 eV. UV light of wavelength 3000 Å and (ii) Threshold wavelength ;
intensity 2 Wm–2 is incident on the potassium surface. (i) Determine the ℎ𝑐 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
maximum kinetic energy of the photo electrons (ii) If 40% of incident photons 𝜆 𝑂 = =
𝜙𝑂 3.337 𝑋 10−19
produce photo electrons, how many electrons are emitted per second if the area 19.878 𝑋 10−26 19.878 𝑋 10−7
of the potassium surface is 2 cm2 ? 𝜆𝑂 = =
3.337 𝑋 10−19 3.337
-Solution :-𝜆 = 3000 𝐴° = 3000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜙𝑂 = 2.30 𝑒𝑉 ; 𝐴 = 2 𝑐𝑚2 = 2 𝑋 10−4 𝑚2 𝝀𝑶 = 𝟓. 𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒎 = 𝟓𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟓𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝑨°
ℎ𝑐
(i) Energy of incident photon; 𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= 6. Calculate the momentum and the de Broglie wavelength in the following cases:
𝜆
6.626 𝑋 10 −34
𝑋 3 𝑋 10 8
6.626 𝑋 10 −36 (i) an electron with kinetic energy 2 eV.
𝐸= −10
= −10
= 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟗 𝑱 (ii) a bullet of 50 g fired from rifle with a speed of 200 m/s
3000 𝑋 10 1000 𝑋 10
6.626 𝑋 10 −19
6.626 66.26 (iii) a 4000 kg car moving along the highways at 50 m/s
𝐸= −19
𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟒 𝒆𝑽 Hence show that the wave nature of matter is important at the atomic level but
1.6 𝑋 10 1.6 16
By Einstien’s photo electric equation, the maximum kinetic energy is, is not really relevant at macroscopic level.
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 -Solution :-
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 4.14 − 2.30 = 𝟏. 𝟖𝟒 𝒆 𝑽 [∵ 1 𝑒𝑉 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽] (i) 𝐾 = 2 𝑒𝑉 = 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 ; 𝑚 = 9.1` 𝑋 10−31 𝑘𝑔
(𝒐𝒓) 𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟐. 𝟗𝟒𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 −𝟏𝟗 Momentum of electron,
𝑃 𝑝 = √2 𝑚 𝐾
(ii) Number of photons reaches the surface per second; 𝑛𝑃 = 𝑋 𝐴
𝐸
2 −4
4 15
𝑝 = √2 𝑋 9.1` 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
𝑛𝑃 = 𝑋 2 𝑋 10 = 𝑋 10
6.626 𝑋 10−19 6.626 𝑝 = √58.24 𝑋 10−50 = 𝟕. 𝟔𝟑𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟓 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝑛𝑃 = 6.037 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1015 = 𝟔. 𝟎𝟑𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄 Hence de Broglie wavelength of electron,
Hence rate of emission of photons, ℎ 6.626 𝑋 10−34
𝑛 = 40% 𝑛𝑃 = 0.40 𝑋 𝑛𝑃 = 0.4 𝑋 6.037 𝑋 1014 𝜆= =
𝑝 7. 631 𝑋 10−25
𝒏 = 𝟐. 𝟒𝟏𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄
6.626 𝑋 10−9
5. Light of wavelength 390 nm is directed at a metal electrode. To find the energy 𝜆=
of electrons ejected, an opposing potential difference is established between it 7. 631
𝜆 = 8. 684 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 10−9 = 8. 684 𝑋 10−10 𝑚
and another electrode. The current of photoelectrons from one to the other is
𝝀 = 𝟖. 𝟔𝟖𝟒 𝑨
stopped completely when the potential difference is 1.10 V. Determine (i) the
(ii) 𝑚 = 50 𝑔 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑣 = 200 𝑚𝑠 −1 , then momentum of bullet,
work function of the metal and (ii) the maximum wavelength of light that can
eject electrons from this metal. 𝑝 = 𝑚 𝑣 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 200 = 10000 𝑋 10−3
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 390 𝑛𝑚 = 390 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 ; 𝑉𝑂 = 1.10 𝑉 𝒑 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
(i) By Einstien’s photo electric equation,, Hence de Broglie wavelength of bullet,
ℎ 6.626 𝑋 10−34
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂 𝜆= = = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟓 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
 Hence working function, 𝑝 10
ℎ𝑐 (iii) 𝑚 = 4000 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑣 = 50 𝑚𝑠 −1 then momentum of car,
𝜙𝑂 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝑒𝑉𝑂 = − 𝑒𝑉𝑂 𝑝 = 𝑚 𝑣 = 4000 𝑋 50 = 200000
𝜆
6.626 𝑋 10 −34
𝑋 3 𝑋 10 8 𝒑 = 𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
−19
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [1.6 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.10] Hence de Broglie wavelength of car,
390 𝑋 10−9
−17 ℎ 6.626 𝑋 10−34
19.878 𝑋 10 −19 𝜆= = = 𝟑. 𝟑𝟏𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟗 𝒌𝒈 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [1.76 𝑋 10 ] 𝑝 2 𝑋 105
390
 From these calculations, we notice that electron has significant value of de Broglie
𝜙𝑂 = [5.097 𝑋 10−19 ] − [1.76 𝑋 10−19 ] = [5.097 − 1.76] 𝑋 10−19
wavelength (≈10–9m which can be measured from diffraction studies) but moving
𝝓𝑶 = 𝟑. 𝟑𝟑𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟗 𝑱 bullet and car have negligibly small de Broglie wavelengths associated with them
3.337 𝑋 10−19 33.37 (≈10–33m and 10–39m respectively, which are not measurable by any experiment).
(𝒐𝒓) 𝝓𝑶 = 𝑒𝑉 =
1.6 𝑋 10−19 16  This implies that the wave nature of matter is important at the atomic level but it
𝝓𝑶 = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟖𝟓 𝒆𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
is not really relevant at the macroscopic level.
7. Find the de Broglie wavelength associated with an alpha particle which is 9. Calculate the cut-off wavelength and cut-off frequency of x-rays from an x –ray
accelerated through a potential difference of 400 V. Given that the mass of the tube of accelerating potential 20,000 V.
proton is 1.67 × 10–27 kg. -Solution :- 𝑉 = 20000 𝑉
-Solution :- 𝑉 = 400 𝑉 ; 𝑚𝑃 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔  The cut-off wavelength of the x-rays in the continuous spectrum is given by,
 An alpha particle contains 2 protons and 2 neutrons. It is represented by 42𝐻𝑒 12400
𝜆𝑂 = 𝐴°
 Hence ; 𝑞 = 2𝑒 = 2 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 = 3.2 𝑋 10−19 𝐶 𝑉
𝑀 = 4 𝑚𝑃 = 4 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27 = 6.68 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 12400 12400
𝜆𝑂 = 𝐴° = 𝐴° = 6200 𝑋 10−4 𝐴°
 The de Broglie wavelength associated with it is, 20000 2 𝑋 104
ℎ 𝝀𝑶 = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟐 𝑨°
𝜆=  The corresponding frequency is
√2 𝑀 𝑞 𝑉 𝑐
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝜈𝑂 =
𝜆= 𝜆𝑂
√2 𝑋 6.68 𝑋 10−27 𝑋 3.2 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 400 3 𝑋 108 3 𝑋 1018
6.626 𝑋 10−34 6.626 𝑋 10−11 𝜈𝑂 = =
𝜆= = 0.62 𝑋 10−10 0.62
√17100.8 𝑋 10−46 √17100.8 𝝂𝑶 = 𝟒. 𝟖𝟑𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟖 𝑯𝒛
𝜆 = 5. 068 𝑋 10−2 𝑋10−11
𝝀 = 𝟓. 𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑨°
8. A proton and an electron have same de Broglie wavelength. Which of them moves
faster and which possesses more kinetic energy?
Solution :-
ℎ
 de Broglie wavelength of proton ; 𝜆𝑃 =
√2 𝑚𝑃 𝐾𝑃
ℎ
 de Broglie wavelength of electron ; 𝜆𝑒 =
√2 𝑚𝑒 𝐾𝑒
 Since proton and electron have same de Broglie wavelength (𝜆𝑃 = 𝜆𝑒 ), we get,
ℎ ℎ
=
√2 𝑚𝑃 𝐾𝑃 √2 𝑚𝑒 𝐾𝑒
𝐾𝑃 𝑚𝑒
(𝑜𝑟) = − − − − − − − − (1)
𝐾𝑒 𝑚𝑃
Since 𝒎𝒆 < 𝒎𝑷 ; 𝑲𝑷 < 𝑲𝒆 (𝑖. 𝑒. ) the electron has more kinetic energy than the
proton.
1
 Also kinetic energy of proton ; 𝐾𝑃 = 𝑚𝑃 𝑣𝑃2
2
1
 And kinetic energy of eletron ; 𝐾𝑒 = 𝑚𝑒 𝑣𝑒2
2
1
𝐾𝑃 𝑚 𝑣2
2 𝑃 𝑃
 Then ratio of the kinetic energies ; = 1
𝐾𝑒 𝑚 𝑣2
2 𝑒 𝑒
𝑣𝑃2 𝐾𝑃 𝑚𝑒 𝑣𝑃 𝐾𝑃 𝑚𝑒
= (𝑜𝑟) = √
𝑣𝑒2 𝐾𝑒 𝑚𝑃 𝑣𝑒 𝐾𝑒 𝑚𝑃
𝑣𝑃 𝑚 𝑚𝑒 𝑚2 𝒎𝒆
 Put equation (1), = √ 𝑒 = √ 𝑒2 =
𝑣𝑒 𝑚 𝑃 𝑚𝑃 𝑚 𝑃 𝒎𝑷
Since 𝒎𝒆 < 𝒎𝑷 ; 𝒗𝑷 < 𝒗𝒆 (𝑖. 𝑒. ) the electron moves faster than the proton.
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- (ii) If 𝜆 = 0.1 𝑛𝑚 = 0.1 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 then, energy of X-ray photon,
1. How many photons per second emanate from a 50 mW laser of 640 nm? ℎ𝑐
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈=
-Solution :- 𝑃 = 50 𝑚𝑊 = 50 𝑋 10−3 𝑊 ; 𝜆 = 640 𝑛𝑚 = 640 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 𝜆
 Number of photons per second, 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−36
𝐸= =
𝑃 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃𝜆 0.1 𝑋 10−9 1 𝑋 10−10
−16
𝑛𝑃 = = = = 𝐸 = 19.878 𝑋 10 𝐽
𝐸 ℎ𝜈 (ℎ 𝑐⁄𝜆) ℎ𝑐 19.878 𝑋 10−17 19.878 𝑋 102 198.78 𝑋 102
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
50 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 640 𝑋 10−9 32000 𝑋 10−12 1.6 𝑋 10−19 1.6 16
𝑛𝑃 = −34 8
= 2
𝐸 = 12.42 𝑋 10 𝒆𝑽 = 𝟏𝟐𝟒𝟐 𝒆𝑽
6.626 𝑋 10 𝑋 3 𝑋 10 19.878 𝑋 10−26
32000 𝑋 10 14 (iii) If 𝜆 = 10 𝑚 then, energy of radio waves,
𝑛𝑃 = = 1.610 𝑋 103 𝑋 1014 = 𝟏. 𝟔𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟕 ℎ𝑐
19.878 𝐸 =ℎ𝜈=
2. Calculate the maximum kinetic energy and maximum velocity of the 𝜆
photoelectrons emitted when the stopping potential is 81V for the photoelectric 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−36
𝐸= =
emission experiment. 10
−27
10
-Solution :- 𝑉𝑂 = 81 𝑉 𝐸 = 19.878 𝑋 10 𝐽
19.878 𝑋 10−27 19.878 𝑋 10−8 198.78 𝑋 10−8
 The maximum kinetic energy of photo electrons is equal to stopping potential (𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
energy. (i.e.) 1.6 𝑋 10−19 1.6 16
−8 −𝟕
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑒 𝑉𝑂 𝐸 = 12.42 𝑋 10 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟒𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝒆𝑽
4. A 150 W lamp emits light of mean wavelength of 5500 Å . If the efficiency is 12%,
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 81 = 129.6 𝑋 10−19
find out the number of photons emitted by the lamp in one second.
𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟗𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟕 𝑱 12
 But kinetic energy is given by -Solution :- 𝑃 = 150 𝑊 ; 𝜆 = 5500 𝐴° = 5500 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜂 = 12% =
100
1 2  Number of photons emitted per second,
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑚𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥
2 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃𝜆
1 𝑛𝑃 = = = =
1.296 𝑋 10−17 = 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 2 𝐸 ℎ𝜈 ℎ 𝑐
( ⁄𝜆) ℎ𝑐
2
2
2 𝑋 1.296 𝑋 10−17 2. 592 𝑋 1014 150 𝑋 5500 𝑋 10−10
𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 = = 𝑛𝑃 =
9.1 𝑋 10−31 9.1 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
825000 𝑋 10−10 825 𝑋 1019
2. 592 𝑋 1014 259.2 𝑋 1012 𝑛𝑃 = = = 4.150 𝑋 101 𝑋 1019
∴ 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 = √ = √ 19.878 𝑋 10−26 19.878
9.1 9.1 𝒏𝑷 = 𝟒. 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄
𝒗𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟓. 𝟑𝟑𝟕 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏  The number of photons emitted by the lamp in one second,
3. Calculate the energies of the photons associated with the following radiation: (i) 12
violet light of 413 nm (ii) X-rays of 0.1 nm (iii) radio waves of 10 m. 𝑛 = 𝜂 𝑛𝑃 = 𝑋 4.150 𝑋 1020 = 12 𝑋 4.150 𝑋 1018 = 49.8 𝑋 1018
100
-Solution :- 𝒏 = 𝟒. 𝟗𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟗 𝒑𝒉𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄
(i) If 𝜆 = 413 𝑛𝑚 = 413 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 , then energy of violet light photon, 5. How many photons of frequency 1014 Hz will make up 19.86 J of energy?
ℎ𝑐 𝑈
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= -Solution :- 𝜈 = 1014 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑃 = = 19.86 𝐽
𝑡
𝜆 Number of photons emitted per second,
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.878 𝑋 10−36 𝑃 𝑃
𝐸= = 𝑛𝑃 = =
413 𝑋 10−9 413 𝑋 10−9 𝐸 ℎ𝜈
−17
19.878 𝑋 10 19.86
𝐸= 𝐽 𝑛𝑃 =
413 6.626 𝑋10−34 𝑋 1014
−17
19.878 𝑋 10 19.878 𝑋 102 19.86 𝑋1020
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
413 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 660.8 𝑛𝑃 =
−2 2 6.626
𝐸 = 3.008 𝑋 10 𝑋 10 = 𝟑. 𝟎𝟎𝟖 𝒆𝑽 ≈ 𝟑 𝒆𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝒏𝑷 = 𝟐. 𝟗𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎 ≈ 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟎
6. What should be the velocity of the electron so that its momentum equals that of (iii) By Einstein’s photo electric equation,
4000 Å wavelength photon. 1 2
ℎ 𝜈 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥
-Solution :- 𝑝𝑒 = 𝑝𝑃 ; 𝜆𝑃 = 4000 𝐴° = 4000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 2
 de Broglie wavelength of photon, 1 2
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥
ℎ ℎ ℎ 2
𝜆𝑃 = = = (𝑜𝑟) 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝑒 𝑉𝑂
𝑝𝑃 𝑝𝑒 𝑚 𝑣𝑒
𝜙𝑂 = (33.13 𝑋 10−20 ) − (1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 0.8)
ℎ 6.626 𝑋10−34
∴ 𝑣𝑒 = = 𝜙𝑂 = (33.13 𝑋 10−20 ) − (1.28 𝑋 10−19 )
𝑚 𝜆𝑃 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 4000 𝑋 10−10 𝜙𝑂 = (3.313 𝑋 10−19 ) − (1.28 𝑋 10−19 )
6.626 𝑋107 6.626 𝑋104 𝜙𝑂 = (3.313 − 1.28 ) 𝑋 10−19
𝑣𝑒 = = = 1.821 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 104
9.1 𝑋 4000 36.4 𝝓𝑶 = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟑𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟗 𝑱
𝒗𝒆 = 𝟏𝟖𝟐𝟏 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 2.033 𝑋 10−19 20.33
7. When a light of frequency 9 X 1014 Hz is incident on a metal surface, (𝑜𝑟) 𝜙𝑂 = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉
1.6 𝑋 10−19 16
photoelectrons are emitted with a maximum speed of 8 X10 5 ms-1. Determine (𝑜𝑟) 𝝓𝑶 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟕𝟎 𝒆𝑽
the threshold frequency of the surface. (iv) Work function,
-Solution :- : 𝜈 = 9 𝑋 1014 𝐻𝑧 ; 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 8 𝑋 105 𝑚 𝑠 −1 𝜙𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈𝑂
 By Einstein’s photo electric equation, 𝜙𝑂 2.033 𝑋 10−19 2.033 𝑋 1015
1 2 (𝑜𝑟) 𝜈𝑂 = = =
ℎ 𝜈 = ℎ 𝜈𝑂 + 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 ℎ 6.626 𝑋10−34 6.626
2 𝝂𝑶 = 3. 068 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1015 = 𝟑. 𝟎𝟔𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯
1 2
(𝑜𝑟) ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝑚 𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 (v) Net energy of the electron after it leaves the surface is nothing but its kinetic
2
1 energy which is given by,
ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [6.626 𝑋10−34 𝑋9 𝑋 1014 ] − [ 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 64 𝑋 1010 ] 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
2
𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 2.071 − 1.270
ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [59.634 𝑋10−20 ] − [291.2 𝑋 10−21 ]
𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟎. 𝟖𝟎𝟏 𝒆𝑽
(𝑜𝑟) ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [59.634 𝑋10−20 ] − [29.12 𝑋 10−20 ]
9. A 3310 Å photon liberates an electron from a material with energy 3 X 10 -19 J
ℎ 𝜈𝑂 = [59.634 − 29.12] 𝑋10−20 = 30.514 𝑋10−20 while another 5000 Å photon ejects an electron with energy 0.972 X 10-19 J from
30.514 𝑋10−20 30.514 𝑋10−20 30.514 𝑋1014 the same material. Determine the value of Planck’s constant and the threshold
∴ 𝜈𝑂 = = =
ℎ 6.626 𝑋10 −34 6.626 wavelength of the material.
𝝂𝑶 = 𝟒. 𝟔𝟎𝟑 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯𝒛 -Solution :- 𝜆1 = 3310 𝐴° = 3310 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝐾1 = 3 X 10−19 J
−10
8. When a 6000Å light falls on the cathode of a photo cell, photoemission takes 𝜆2 = 5000 𝐴° = 5000 𝑋 10 𝑚 ; 𝐾2 = 0.972 X 10−19 J
place. If a potential of 0.8 V is required to stop emission of electron, then  By Einstein’s photo electric equation,
determine the (i) frequency of the light (ii) energy of the incident photon (iii) ℎ 𝜈 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥
work function of the cathode material (iv) threshold frequency and (v) net ℎ𝑐
(𝑜𝑟) = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥
energy of the electron after it leaves the surface. 𝜆
-Solution :- 𝜆 = 6000 𝐴° = 6000 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝑉𝑂 = 0.8 𝑉  For given material, work function is constant ,
(i) Frequency of light , ℎ𝑐
= 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾1 − − − − − − (1)
𝑐 3 𝑋 108 1 𝑋 1015 𝜆1
𝜈= = = = 0.5 𝑋 1015 ℎ𝑐
𝜆 6000 𝑋 10−10 2 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾2 − − − − − − (2)
𝝂 = 𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑯𝒛 𝜆2
(ii) Energy of incident photon, ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐
(1) − (2) ⟹ − = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾1 − 𝜙𝑂 − 𝐾2
𝐸 = ℎ 𝜈 = 6.626 𝑋10−34 𝑋 5 𝑋 1014 = 33.13 𝑋 10−20 𝐽 𝜆1 𝜆2
33.13 𝑋 10−20 331.3 𝑋 10−1 1 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 = 20. 71 𝑋 10−1 𝑒𝑉 ℎ 𝑐 [ − ] = 𝐾1 − 𝐾2
1.6 𝑋 10−19 16 𝜆1 𝜆2
𝑬 = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟕𝟏 𝒆𝑽 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
𝜆2 − 𝜆1 11. UV light of wavelength 1800Å is incident on a lithium surface whose threshold

ℎ𝑐 [ ] = 𝐾1 − 𝐾2
𝜆1 𝜆2 wavelength is 4965Å. Determine the maximum energy of the electron emitted.
5000 − 3310 1 -Solution :- 𝜆 = 1800 𝐴° = 1800 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 ; 𝜆𝑂 = 4965 𝐴° = 4965 𝑋 10−10 𝑚
ℎ (3𝑋108 ) [ ] = (3 − 0.972) 𝑋 10−19  By Einstein’s photo electric equation,
3310 𝑋 5000 10−10
1690 ℎ 𝜈 = 𝜙𝑂 + 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥
ℎ (3𝑋108 ) [ ] = 2.028 𝑋10−19
16550 𝑋 10−7 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ 𝜈 − 𝜙𝑂
2.028 𝑋10−19 𝑋 16550 𝑋 10−7 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ 𝜈 − ℎ 𝜈 𝑂
ℎ = ℎ 𝑐 ℎ𝑐 1 1
1690 𝑋 3𝑋108
2.028 𝑋16550 𝑋 10−34 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = − =ℎ𝑐 [ − ]
ℎ = 𝜆 𝜆𝑂 𝜆 𝜆𝑂
5070 𝜆𝑂 − 𝜆
𝒉 = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟒 𝑱 𝒔 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ 𝑐 [ ]
𝜆 𝜆𝑂
 From equation (2), Work function is, 4965 − 1800 1
ℎ𝑐 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 [ ] 𝑋 −10
𝜙𝑂 = − 𝐾2 4965 𝑋 1800 10
𝜆2 3165
6.621 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3𝑋108 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 19.878 𝑋 10−19 [ ] 𝐽
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [0.972 𝑋 10−19 ] 8937
−19
5000 𝑋 10−10 19.878 𝑋 10 3165
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = [ ] 𝑒𝑉
19.863 𝑋 10−19 1.6 𝑋 10 −19 8937
𝜙𝑂 = [ ] − [ 0.972 𝑋 10−19 ] 198.78 3165
5 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = [ ] [ ] 𝑒𝑉
𝜙𝑂 = [3.972 𝑋 10−19 ] − [0.972 𝑋 10−19 ] 16 8937
12.42 𝑋 3165
𝜙𝑂 = [3.972 − 0.972 ] 𝑋 10−19 (𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑒𝑉
𝜙𝑂 = 3 𝑋 10−19 8937
ℎ𝑐 𝑲𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟒. 𝟑𝟗𝟖 𝒆𝑽 ≈ 𝟒. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
(𝑜𝑟) = 3 𝑋 10−19 12. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of a proton whose kinetic energy is equal to
𝜆𝑂
81.9 × 10–15 J. (Given: mass of proton is 1836 times that of electron).
ℎ𝑐 6.621 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
∴ 𝜆𝑂 = = -Solution :- 𝐾𝑃 = 81.9 X 10−15 J ; 𝑚𝑃 = 1836 𝑚𝑒
3 𝑋 10−19 3 𝑋 10−19  de Broglie wavelength of proton,
𝝀𝑶 = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 = 𝟔𝟔𝟐𝟏 𝑨°
ℎ ℎ
10. At the given point of time,the earth receives energy from sun at 4 cal cm–2 min–1 𝜆𝑃 = =
Determine the number of photons received on the surface of the Earth per cm 2 √2 𝑚𝑃 𝐾𝑃 √2 (1836 𝑚𝑒 ) 𝐾𝑃
per minute. (Given : Mean wavelength of sun light = 5500 Å ) 6.621 𝑋 10−34
-Solution :- 𝑃 = 4 𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑚−2 𝑚𝑖𝑛 −1 = 4 𝑋 4.2 = 16.8 𝐽 𝑐𝑚−2 𝑚𝑖𝑛−1 𝜆𝑃 =
√2 𝑋 1836 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 81.9 X 10−15
𝜆 = 5500 𝐴° = 5500 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 6.621 𝑋 10−11
 The number of photons received on the surface of the Earth per cm2 per minute , 𝜆𝑃 =
√2 𝑋 1836 𝑋 9.1 𝑋 81.9
𝑃 𝑃 𝑃 𝑃𝜆 𝜆𝑃 = 4. 005 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 10−11
𝑛𝑃 = = = =
𝐸 ℎ𝜈 ℎ 𝑐
( ⁄𝜆) ℎ𝑐 𝝀𝑷 ≈ 𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟒 𝒎
16.8 𝑋 5500 𝑋 10−10 13. A deuteron and an alpha particle are accelerated with the same potential. Which
𝑛𝑃 = one of the two has (i) greater value of de Broglie wavelength associated with it
6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 and (ii) less kinetic energy? Explain.
924 𝑋 1018
𝑛𝑃 = = 4.648 𝑋 101 𝑋1018 -Solution :- 𝑚𝑁 = 1.67 𝑋 10−27 𝑘𝑔 ; 𝑒 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐶
19.878
𝒏𝑷 = 𝟒. 𝟔𝟒𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟗  For deuteron ; 𝑚𝑑 = 2 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝑑 = 𝑒
For alpha particle ; 𝑚𝛼 = 4 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝛼 = 2 𝑒
(i) de Broglie wavelength of deuteron,
ℎ ℎ ℎ ℎ
𝜆𝑑 =
√2 𝑚𝑑 𝑞𝑑 𝑉
=
√2 (2 𝑚𝑁 ) 𝑒 𝑉
=
√4 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉
=
2 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉
de Broglie wavelength of alpha particle, 15. The ratio between the de Broglie wavelength associated with proton,
ℎ ℎ ℎ ℎ accelerated through a potential of 512 V and that of alpha particle accelerated
𝜆𝛼 = = = =
√2 𝑚𝛼 𝑞𝛼 𝑉 √2 (4 𝑚𝑁 ) (2 𝑒) 𝑉 √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 4 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 through a potential of X volts is found to be one. Find the value of X.
ℎ -Solution :- 𝑉𝑃 = 512 𝑉 ; 𝜆𝑃 ∶ 𝜆𝛼 = 1 ; 𝑉𝛼 = 𝑋
[ ] 1
( )  For proton ; 𝑚𝑃 = 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝑃 = 𝑒
𝜆𝑑 2 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 4
= = 2 = =2 For alpha particle ; 𝑚𝛼 = 4 𝑚𝑁 , 𝑞𝛼 = 2 𝑒
𝜆𝛼 ℎ 1 2
[ ] ( )  de Broglie wavelength of proton,
4
4 √𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉 ℎ ℎ
𝝀𝒅 = 𝟐 𝝀𝜶 𝜆𝑃 = =
(ii) de Broglie wavelength of deuteron , √2 𝑚𝑃 𝑞𝑃 𝑉𝑃 √2 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉𝑃
ℎ ℎ ℎ de Broglie wavelength of alpha particle,
𝜆𝑑 = = = ℎ ℎ ℎ
√2 𝑚𝑑 𝐾𝑑 √2 (2 𝑚𝑁 ) 𝐾𝑑 √4 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝑑 𝜆𝛼 = = =
ℎ 2 √2 𝑚𝛼 𝑞𝛼 𝑉𝛼 √2 (4 𝑚𝑁 ) (2 𝑒) 𝑋 √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑋
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜆𝑑2 = ℎ
4 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝑑 [ ]
ℎ2 𝜆𝑃 √2 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉𝑃 ℎ √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑋 8𝑋
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝑑 = = = 𝑋 = √
4 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝑑2 𝜆𝛼 ℎ √2 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑉𝑃 ℎ 𝑉𝑃
[ ]
de Broglie wavelength of alpha particle, √16 𝑚𝑁 𝑒 𝑋
ℎ ℎ ℎ 𝜆𝑃 2 8𝑋
𝜆𝛼 = = = (𝑜𝑟) ( ) =
√2 𝑚𝛼 𝐾𝛼 √2 (4 𝑚𝑁 ) 𝐾𝛼 √8 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝛼 𝜆𝛼 𝑉𝑃
ℎ 2
𝜆𝑃 2 𝑉𝑃
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜆𝛼2 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑋 = ( )
8 𝑚𝑁 𝐾𝛼 𝜆𝛼 8
ℎ2 512
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐾𝛼 = 𝑋 = (1)2
8 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝛼2 8
ℎ2 𝑿 = 𝟔𝟒 𝑽
[ ]
𝐾𝑑 4 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝑑2 ℎ2 8 𝑚𝑁 𝜆𝛼2 𝜆𝛼2 𝜆𝛼 2
∴ = 2 = 2 𝑋 = 2 2 = 2 ( )
𝐾𝛼 ℎ 4 𝑚 𝑁 𝜆𝑑 ℎ2 𝜆𝑑 𝜆𝑑
[ 2 ]
8 𝑚 𝑁 𝜆𝛼
𝐾𝑑 𝜆𝛼 2 1 1
∴ = 2( ) = 2𝑋 =
𝐾𝛼 2 𝜆𝛼 4 2
𝑲𝜶
𝑲𝒅 =
𝟐
14. An electron is accelerated through a potential difference of 81V. What is the
de Broglie wavelength associated with it? To which part of electromagnetic
spectrum does this wavelength correspond?
-Solution :- 𝑉 = 81 𝑉
 de Broglie wavelength of electron,
12. 27
𝜆= 𝐴
√𝑉
12. 27 12. 27
𝜆= 𝐴 = 𝐴
√81 9
𝝀 = 𝟏. 𝟑𝟔 𝑨
 It lies in X -ray region of electromagnetic spectrum.. kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT - 9
ATOMIC PHYSICS
AND
NUCLEAR PHYSICS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- • For hydrogen atom ; 𝑍 = 1 , and for first orbit ; 𝑛 = 1. Hence
1. The radius of the 5th orbit of hydrogen atom is 13.25 Å. Calculate the de Broglie 𝑣𝑛 𝑒2 (1.6 𝑋 10−19 )2
= 𝛼= =
wavelength of the electron orbiting in the 5th orbit. 𝑐 2𝜀𝑜 ℎ 𝑐 2 𝑋 8.85 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108
𝒐
𝑣𝑛 1.6 𝑋 1.6 1
-Solution :- 𝒓 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟐𝟒 𝑨 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟎 𝒎 ; 𝒏 = 𝟓 = 𝛼= =
• From quantum mechanics ; 2 𝜋 𝑟 = 𝑛 𝜆 𝑐 2 𝑋 8.85 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 3 136.9
2𝜋𝑟 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 13.24 𝑋 10−10 𝑣𝑛 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝜆 = = = 2 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.648 𝑋 10−10 = 𝛼≈
𝑛 5 𝑜 𝑐 137
• It is dimensionless number.
𝜆 = 16.63 𝑋 10−10 𝑚 = 16.63 𝐴 (b) From equation (1) ,
2. Find the (i) angular momentum (ii) velocity of the electron revolving in the 5 th 𝑍
orbit of hydrogen atom. (h = 6.6 × 10–34 Js, m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg) 𝑣𝑛 = 𝛼 [ ] 𝑐
𝑛
-Solution :- 𝒏 = 𝟓 ; 𝒉 = 𝟔. 𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟒 𝑱𝒔, 𝒎 = 𝟗. 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟏 𝒌𝒈 • For hydrogen atom ; 𝑍 = 1 Hence.
(i) According to Bohr’s atom model, the angular momentum 1
𝑛ℎ 5 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 10−34 5 𝑋 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 7 𝑣𝑛 = 𝛼 𝑐 [ ]
𝑙 =𝑛ℏ= = = 𝑛
2𝜋 22 2 𝑋 22 • For first orbit (i.e.) ground state ; 𝒏 = 𝟏
2𝑋
7 1
𝑙 = 2.5 𝑋 0.3 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 7 𝑣1 = 𝛼 𝑐 = 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 = 2.19 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 108
137
𝒍 = 𝟓. 𝟐𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑𝟒 𝒌𝒈 𝒎𝟐 𝒔−𝟏 𝒗𝟏 = 𝟐. 𝟏𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
(ii) By definition, angular momentum is given by; = 𝑚 𝑣 𝑟𝑛 .
• For second orbit (i.e.) first excited state ; 𝒏 = 𝟐
Hence velocity, 1 1 1 1
𝑙 𝑙 𝑣2 = 𝛼 𝑐 [ ] = 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 [ ] = 2.19 𝑋 106 𝑋 [ ]
𝑣= = 2 137 2 2
𝑚 𝑟𝑛 𝑚 𝑛2 𝑟1 𝒗𝟐 = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟗𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
5.25 𝑋 10−34 • For third orbit (i.e.) second excited state ; 𝒏 = 𝟑
𝑣 =
9.1 𝑋 10−31 𝑋 25 𝑋 0.53 𝑋 10−10 1 1 1 1
5.25 𝑋 107 𝑣3 = 𝛼 𝑐 [ ] = 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 [ ] = 2.19 𝑋 106 𝑋 [ ]
𝑣 = 3 137 3 3
9.1 𝑋 25 𝑋 0.53 𝒗𝟑 = 𝟎. 𝟕𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏
𝒗 = 4.355 𝑋 10−2 𝑋 107 = 𝟒. 𝟑𝟓𝟓 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒎 𝒔−𝟏 • Here ; 𝒗𝟏 > 𝒗𝟐 > 𝒗𝟑
3. (a) Show that the ratio of velocity of an electron in the first Bohr orbit to the 4. The Bohr atom model is derived with the assumption that the nucleus of the
speed of light c is a dimensionless number. (b) Compute the velocity of electrons atom is stationary and only electrons revolve around the nucleus. Suppose the
in ground state, first excited state and second excited state in Bohr atom model nucleus is also in motion, then calculate the energy of this new system.
for hydrogen atom. -Solution :-
-Solution :- • Let the mass of the electron be m and mass of the nucleus be M. Since there is no
ℎ 𝑍
(a) Velocity of electron in nth orbit ; 𝑣𝑛 = [𝑛] external force acting on the system, the
2𝜋𝑚𝑎𝑜
𝑜 centre of mass of hydrogen atom
𝜀𝑜 ℎ2
• Where, 𝑎𝑜 = = 0.53 𝐴 → Bohr radius remains at rest. Hence, both nucleus and
𝜋𝑚𝑒2
ℎ 𝑍 ℎ 𝜋𝑚𝑒 2 𝑍 𝑒2 𝑍 electron move about the centre of mass
• Hence ; 𝑣𝑛 = 𝜀 ℎ2
[𝑛 ] = [𝑛 ] = [𝑛 ] as shown in figure.
2𝜋𝑚( 𝑜 2 ) 2𝜋𝑚𝜀𝑜 ℎ 2 2𝜀𝑜 ℎ
𝜋𝑚𝑒 • Let V be the velocity of the nuclear
• If ‘c’ be the velocity of light, then motion and υ be the velocity of electron
𝑣𝑛 𝑒2 𝑍 𝑍 motion. Since the total linear
= [ ] = 𝛼 [ ] − − − − (1)
𝑐 2𝜀𝑜 ℎ 𝑐 𝑛 𝑛 momentum of the system is zero ;
𝑒2 ⃗𝑝𝑒 + ⃗𝑝𝑛 = ⃗0 (or) |⃗𝑝𝑒 | = |⃗⃗𝑝𝑛 | = 𝑝
• Where, = 𝛼 → fine structure constant
2𝜀𝑜 ℎ 𝑐
• Hence kinetic energy of the system, First excitation energy,

𝑝𝑒2 𝑝𝑛2 𝑝2 1 1 𝑝2 𝑚 + 𝑀 𝑬𝒆𝒙𝒄𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = 𝐸2 − 𝐸1 = −13.6 − (−54.4) = −13.6 + 54.4 = 𝟒𝟎. 𝟖 𝒆𝑽
𝐾𝐸 = + = [ + ]= [ ] Hence first excitation potential,
2𝑚 2𝑀 2 𝑚 𝑀 2 𝑚𝑀
𝑝 2
1 4
𝜇𝑚 𝑒 1 𝑬 40.8 𝑒𝑉
𝐾𝐸 = [ ]= 𝑽𝒆𝒙𝒄𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = = = 𝟒𝟎. 𝟖 𝑽
2 𝜇𝑚 8 𝜀𝑜2 ℎ2 𝑛2 𝑒 𝑒
𝑚𝑀 Similarly, first ionization energy
Where, 𝜇𝑚 = → reduced mass 𝑬𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = 𝐸∞ − 𝐸1 = 0 − (−54.4) = 𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
𝑚+ 𝑀
• Potential energy of the system, and first ionization potential,
𝜇𝑚 𝑒 4 1 𝑬𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 54.4 𝑒𝑉
𝑈 = − 𝑽𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 = = = 𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 𝑽
4 𝜀𝑜2 ℎ2 𝑛2 𝑒 𝑒
• Hence total energy of the system, (c) Consider two photons to be A and B. Given that photon A with energy 42 eV and
𝜇𝑚 𝑒 4 1 photon B with energy 51 eV From Bohr assumption, difference in energy levels is
𝐸𝑛 = − equal to the energy photon absorbed, then atom will absorb energy, otherwise,
8 𝜀𝑜2 ℎ2 𝑛2
not.
• Since the nucleus is very heavy compared to the electron, the reduced mass is
closer to the mass of the electron 𝐸2 − 𝐸1 = −13.6 − (−54.4) = −13.6 + 54.4 = 𝟒𝟎. 𝟖 𝒆𝑽
5. Suppose the energy of an electron in hydrogen–like atom is given as 𝐸3 − 𝐸1 = −6.04 − (−54.4) = −6.04 + 54.4 = 𝟒𝟖. 𝟑𝟔 𝒆𝑽
𝟓𝟒.𝟒 𝐸4 − 𝐸1 = −3.4 − (−54.4) = −3.4 + 54.4 = 𝟓𝟏 𝒆𝑽
𝑬𝒏 = − 𝒆𝑽 where ∈ ℕ . Calculate the following: 𝐸3 − 𝐸2 = −6.04 − (−13.6) = −6.04 + 13.6 = 𝟕. 𝟓𝟔 𝒆𝑽
𝒏𝟐
(a) Sketch the energy levels for this atom and compute its atomic number. • For all possibilities, no difference in energy is an integer multiple of photon
(b) If the atom is in ground state, compute its first excitation potential and also energy. Hence, photon A is not absorbed by this atom. But for Photon B,
its ionization potential E4 – E1 = 51 eV, which means, Photon B can be absorbed by this atom.
(c) When a photon with energy 42 eV and another photon with energy 56 eV 𝑎𝑜 𝑛 2
(d) The radius of Bohr orbit is ; 𝑟𝑛 =
are made to collide with this atom, does this atom absorb these photons? 𝑧
(d) Determine the radius of its first Bohr orbit. Here, 𝑛 = 1 , 𝑧 = 2
(e) Calculate the kinetic and potential energies of electron in the ground state. 𝑎 0.529 𝑋 10−10
Hence, ; 𝑟1 = 𝑜 = = 0.264𝑋10−10 𝑚 = 0.2648 Å
-Solution :- 2 2
(e) Since, total energy is equal to negative of kinetic energy in Bohr atom model, we
(a) Given energy ;
𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 get
𝑬𝒏 = − 𝒆𝑽 54.4 54.4
𝒏𝟐 𝐾𝐸𝑛 = − 𝐸𝑛 = − (− 2 𝑒𝑉) = 𝑒𝑉
• If 𝒏 = 𝟏 then, 𝐸1 = − 54.4 𝑒𝑉 𝑛 𝑛2
For ground state (𝑛 = 1) ; 𝑲𝑬𝟏 = 𝟓𝟒. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
• If 𝒏 = 𝟐 then, 𝐸2 = − 13.6 𝑒𝑉
And potential energy,
• If 𝒏 = 𝟑 then, 𝐸3 = − 6.04 𝑒𝑉 54.4 108.8
• If 𝒏 = 𝟒 then, 𝐸4 = − 3.4 𝑒𝑉 𝑈𝑛 = −2 𝐾𝐸𝑛 = − 2 ( 2 𝑒𝑉) = − 𝑒𝑉
𝑛 𝑛2
• If 𝒏 = ∞ then, 𝐸∞ = 0 𝑒𝑉 For ground state (𝑛 = 1) ; 𝑼𝟏 = − 𝟏𝟎𝟖. 𝟖 𝒆𝑽
(b) From Bohr’s atom model, total energy of an atom ; 6. Calculate the average atomic mass of chlorine if no distinction is made between
𝟏𝟑. 𝟔 𝒁𝟐 its different isotopes?
𝑬𝒏 = − 𝒆𝑽 -Solution :
𝒏𝟐
Compare it with the given equation, • The element chlorine is a mixture of 75.77% of 35 37
17𝑐𝑙 and 24.23% of 17𝑐𝑙. So the
13.6 𝑍 2 = 54.4 average atomic mass will be
54.4 75.77 24.23
𝑍2 = = 4 = 𝑋 34.96885 𝑢 + 𝑋 36.96593 𝑢 = 𝟑𝟓. 𝟒𝟓 𝒖
13.6 100 100
𝑍 = ±2
Since, atomic number cannot be negative number, Z = 2
7. Calculate the radius of 𝟏𝟗𝟕

𝟕𝟗 𝑨𝒖 nucleus. 11. (a) Calculate the disintegration energy when stationary 𝟐𝟑𝟐 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 nucleus decays to
-Solution : 𝑍 = 79 ; 𝐴 = 197 thorium 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 with the emission of α particle. The atomic masses are of
1 𝟐𝟑𝟐 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟒
𝑅 = 𝑅𝑜 𝐴3 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 = 𝟐𝟑𝟐. 𝟎𝟑𝟕𝟏𝟓𝟔 𝒖, 𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 = 𝟐𝟐𝟖. 𝟎𝟐𝟖𝟕𝟒𝟏 𝒖, 𝟐 𝑯𝒆 = 𝟒. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟑 𝒖
1 (b) Calculate kinetic energies of 𝟐𝟐𝟖𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 and α-particle and their ratio.
𝑅 = 1.2 𝑋 10−15 𝑋 (197)3
-Solution :
𝑅 = 1.2 𝑋 10−15 𝑋 5.818 𝟐𝟐𝟖
𝑅 = 6.9816 𝑋 10−15 𝑚 = 6.9816 𝐹 (a) The equation is given by ; 𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟗𝟐 𝑼 → 𝟗𝟎 𝑻𝒉 + 𝜶
8. Calculate the density of the nucleus with mass number A. • Hence the mass defect,
-Solution : ∆𝑚 = Total mass before decay - Total mass after decay
• The total mass of the nucleus having mass number A is equal to 𝐴 𝑚 where m is ∆𝑚 = 𝑚𝑈 − (𝑚 𝑇ℎ + 𝑚𝛼 ) = 232.037156 − (228.028741 + 4.002603)
mass of the proton and is equal to 1.6726 x 10-27 kg ∆𝑚 = 232.037156 − 232.031344 = 0.005812
• Hence the nuclear density, • Energy equivalent to 𝟏 𝒖 is 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽. Hence the binding energy is,
Nuclear mass 𝐴𝑚 𝐴𝑚 𝑸 = ∆𝒎 𝑿 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽 = 0.005812 𝑋 931 = 𝟓. 𝟒𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽
𝜌= = 4 = 1 3
Nuclear volume 𝜋 𝑅3
3 4
𝜋 (𝑅0 𝐴3 ) • This disintegration energy Q appears as the kinetic energy of α particle and
3
the daughter nucleus.
𝐴𝑚 𝑚 3 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10−27
𝜌= = = (b) In any decay, the total linear momentum must be conserved. (i.e.)
4 4 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 (1.2 𝑋 10−15 )3 • Total linear momentum of the parent nucleus = total linear momentum of
𝜋 𝑅𝑜3 𝐴 𝜋 𝑅𝑜3
3 3
3 𝑋 1.67 𝑋 10 18
5.01 𝑋 1018 the daughter nucleus and α particle
𝜌= = = 2.308 𝑋 10−1 𝑋 1018 𝑚𝑈 (0) = 𝑚𝜶 ⃗⃗𝑣𝜶 + 𝑚𝑇ℎ ⃗⃗𝑣𝑇ℎ
4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 1.728 21.70368
0 = 𝑚𝜶 ⃗⃗⃗𝑣𝜶 + 𝑚 𝑇ℎ ⃗⃗⃗𝑣 𝑇ℎ
𝝆 = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟎𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟕 𝒌𝒈 𝒎−𝟑
𝑚𝜶 ⃗⃗⃗𝑣𝜶 = − 𝑚 𝑇ℎ ⃗⃗⃗𝑣 𝑇ℎ
• It implies that nucleons are extremely tightly packed or compressed state in the
• It implies that the alpha particle and daughter nucleus move in opposite
nucleus and compare this density with the density of water which is 103 kg m-3.
directions.
9. Compute the binding energy of 𝟒𝟐 𝑯𝒆 nucleus using the following data: Atomic
• In magnitude, 𝑚𝜶 𝑣𝜶 = 𝑚𝑻𝒉 𝑣𝑻𝒉 . Hence the velocity of 𝛼-particle,
mass of Helium atom, 𝑴𝑨(𝑯𝒆) = 𝟒. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝟔𝟎 𝒖 and that of hydrogen atom, 𝑚 𝑇ℎ
𝒎𝑯 = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟎𝟕𝟖𝟓 𝒖 . 𝑣𝜶 = 𝑣 − − − − − (1)
𝑚𝜶 𝑻𝒉
-Solution : 𝑍 = 2 ; 𝐴 = 4 ; 𝑁 = 𝐴 − 𝑍 = 2 ; 𝑀𝐴(𝐻𝑒) = 4.00260 𝑢 ; 𝑚𝐻 = 1.00785 𝑢 • The ratio of the kinetic energy of α particle to that of the daughter nucleus
• Mass defect , ∆𝑚 = 𝑍 𝑚𝐻 + 𝑁 𝑚𝑛 − 𝑀𝐴(𝐻𝑒) 1
𝐾𝐸𝛼 𝑚𝛼 𝑣𝛼2 𝑚𝛼 𝑣𝛼2
∆𝑚 = (2 𝑋 1.00785) + (2 𝑋 1.008665) − 4.00260
= 2 =
∆𝑚 = 2.0157 + 2.01733 − 4.00260 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ 1 2 𝑚𝑇ℎ 𝑣𝑇ℎ 2
𝑚𝑇ℎ 𝑣𝑇ℎ
∆𝑚 = 4.03303 − 4.00260 2
∆𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟒𝟑 𝒖 • Put equation (1) , we get,
𝐾𝐸𝛼 𝑚𝛼 𝑚𝑇ℎ 2
• The energy equivalent to this mass defect is called binding energy.
= ( 𝑣𝑻𝒉 )
• Energy equivalent to 𝟏 𝒖 is 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽. Hence the binding energy is, 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ 𝑚𝑇ℎ 𝑣𝑇ℎ 2
𝑚𝜶
𝑩𝑬 = ∆𝒎 𝑿 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽 = 0.03043 𝑋 931 = 𝟐𝟖. 𝟑𝟑 𝑴𝒆𝑽 𝐾𝐸𝛼 𝑚 𝑇ℎ 228.02871
= = = 57
10. Compute the binding energy per nucleon of 𝟒𝟐 𝑯𝒆 nucleus. 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ 𝑚𝜶 4.002603
-Solution : 𝑍 = 2 ; 𝐴 = 4 𝐾𝐸𝛼 = 57 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ − − − − (2)
• Mass defect of helium nucleus, ∆𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟒𝟑 𝒖 • The kinetic energy of products
• Binding energy of helium nucleus, 𝐾𝐸𝛼 + 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ = 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
𝑩𝑬 = ∆𝒎 𝑿 𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽 = 0.03043 𝑋 931 = 𝟐𝟖 𝑴𝒆𝑽 57 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ + 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ = 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
• Hence Binding energy per nucleon, 58 𝐾𝐸𝑇ℎ = 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
𝐵𝐸 28 5.41 𝑀𝑒𝑉
̅̅̅̅ =
𝑩𝑬 = = 𝟕 𝑴𝒆𝑽 𝑲𝑬𝑻𝒉 = = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟗𝟑 𝑴𝒆𝑽
𝐴 4 58
kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com 𝑲𝑬𝜶 = 57 𝑋 0.093 = 𝟓. 𝟑𝟎𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽
12. Calculate the number of nuclei of carbon-14 un decayed after 22,920 years if the 14. Keezhadi (கீழடி), a small hamlet, has become one of the very important
initial number of carbon-14 atoms is 10,000. The half-life of carbon-14 is 5730 archeological places of Tamilnadu. It is located in Sivagangai district. A lot of
years. artefacts (gold coins, pottery, beads, iron tools, jewellery and charcoal, etc.)
-Solution : 𝑁𝑜 = 10000 ; 𝑡 = 22920 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 ; 𝑇1/2 = 5730 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 have been unearthed in Keezhadi which have given substantial evidence that an
• Number of half life periods, ancient urban civilization had thrived on the banks of river Vaigai. To determine
𝑡 22920 the age of those materials, the charcoal of 200 g sent for carbon dating is given
𝑛= = =4 in the following figure (b). The activity of 𝟏𝟒𝟔 𝑪 is found to be 38 decays/s.
𝑇1/2 5730
• The number of nuclei remaining un decayed after 22,920 years (i.e.) 4 half life Calculate the age of charcoal.
periods, -Solution : 𝑅 = 38 𝑑𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑦𝑠/𝑠
1 𝑛 1 4 10000
𝑵 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = ( ) 𝑋 10000 = = 𝟔𝟐𝟓
2 2 16
𝟏𝟑
13. A radioactive sample has 26.μg of pure 𝟕 𝑵 which has a half-life of 10 minutes.
(a) How many nuclei are present initially? (b) What is the activity initially?
(c) What is the activity after 2 hours? (d) Calculate mean life of this sample.
-Solution : : 𝑇1/2 = 10 min = 600 𝑠 ; 𝑚 = 2.6 𝜇𝑔 = 2.6 𝑋 10−6 𝑔 ; 𝐴 = 13
(a) The atomic mass of nitrogen is 13. Therefore, 13 g of 𝟏𝟑𝟕 𝑵 contains Avogadro
number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms. • The atomic mass of carbon is 12. Therefore, 12 g of 𝟏𝟐
𝟔 𝑪 contains Avogadro
6.02 𝑋 1023 number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms.
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟏𝟑𝟕 𝑵 atoms present = 6.02 𝑋 1023
13
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟏𝟐𝟔 𝑪 atoms present =
• So the number of 𝟏𝟑𝟕 𝑵 atoms present in 2.6 μg is 12
6.02 𝑋 10 23
15.652 • So the number of 𝟏𝟐𝟔 𝑪 atoms present in 200 𝑔 is
𝑁𝑜 = 𝑋 2.6 𝑋 10−6 = 𝑋 10−17 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟎𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟕 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔 6.02 𝑋 1023 12.04
13 13 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑋 200 = 𝑋 1025 = 𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟓 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔
(b) The initial activity R0 12 12
0.6931 0.6931 • When the tree(sample) was alive, 146 𝐶 : 126 𝐶 = 1.3 𝑋 10−12 ∶ 1
𝑅𝑜 = 𝜆 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑋 1.204 𝑋 1017
𝑇1 600 • So the total number of carbon-14 atoms is given by
2 𝑵𝒐 = 1 𝑋 1025 𝑋 1.3 𝑋 10−12 = 𝟏. 𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟑 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔
𝑅𝑜 = 0.6931𝑋 0.2006 𝑋1017 𝑋1017 = 0.1390 𝑋 1017 𝑋 10−2 • Decay constant,
𝑹𝒐 = 𝟏. 𝟑𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏/ 𝒔 = 𝟏. 𝟑𝟗 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟒 𝑩𝒒 0.6931 0.6931
Since , 1 𝐶𝑖 = 3.7 𝑋 1010 𝐵𝑞 we have, 𝜆 = =
𝑇1 5730 𝑋 365.24 𝑋 24 𝑋 60 𝑋 60
1.39 𝑋 1014 13900 139000 2
𝑅𝑜 = 10
𝐶𝑖 = = = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟓𝟔 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝑪𝒊 𝜆 = 𝟑. 𝟖𝟑𝟐 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟏𝟐 𝒔−𝟏
3.7 𝑋 10 3.7 37
(c) Activity after 2 hours • The initial activity ,
𝑛
𝑡 2𝑋3600
12 𝑅𝑜 = 𝜆 𝑁𝑜 = 3.832 𝑋 10−12 𝑋 1.3 𝑋 1013
1 1 𝑇1/2 1 600 1
𝑅 = ( ) 𝑅𝑜 = ( ) 𝑋 𝑅𝑜 = ( ) 𝑋 3.756 𝑋 103 = ( ) 𝑋 3.756 𝑋 103 𝑅𝑜 = 4.9816 𝑋 10 = 49.816 ≈ 50 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏/ 𝒔
2 2 2 2 𝑹𝒐 = 𝟓𝟎 𝑩𝒒
1
𝑹= 𝑋 3756 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟏𝟔𝟗 𝑪𝒊 • Activity of the sample ; 𝑅 = 𝑅𝑜 𝑒 − 𝜆 𝑡
4096 𝑅 𝑅𝑜
(d) Mean life, = 𝑒− 𝜆 𝑡 (𝑜𝑟) = 𝑒𝜆𝑡
𝑇1 𝑅𝑜 𝑅
𝜏= 2 • Taking log on both sides, we get
0.6931 𝑅𝑜 𝑅𝑜
600 ln ( ) = 𝜆 𝑡 (𝑜𝑟) 2.303 log10 ( ) = 𝜆 𝑡
𝜏= = 865.8 𝑠 𝑅 𝑅
0.6931 1 𝑅𝑜
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑡= 2.303 log10 ( )
𝜆 𝑅
𝑡=
1 50
2.303 log10 ( ) EXERCISE PROBLEMS-
3.832 𝑋 10 −12 38 1. Consider two hydrogen atoms HA and HB in ground state. Assume that hydrogen
1
𝑡= 2.303 log10 (1.316) atom HA is at rest and hydrogen atom HB is moving with a speed and make head-
3.832 𝑋 10−12 on collision with the stationary hydrogen atom H A. After the collision, both of
1
𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.1193 them move together. What is minimum value of the kinetic energy of the moving
3.832 𝑋 10−12 hydrogen atom HB, such that any one of the hydrogen atoms reaches first
2.303 𝑋 0.1193 𝑋 1012
𝑡= excitation state.
3.832 -Solution :
𝑡 = 7.170 𝑋 10−2 𝑋1012 = 7.170 𝑋 1010 𝑠 • The collision between atom is elastic and during elastic collision, there is no loss
• In years, in kinetic energy. (i.e.)
7.170 𝑋 1010 Total K. E before collision = Total K.E after collision
𝑡= 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 1 1 1 1
365.24 𝑋 24 𝑋 60 𝑋 60
7.170 𝑋 1010 𝑚𝐴 𝑢𝐴2 + 𝑚𝐵 𝑢𝐵2 = 𝑚𝐴 𝑣𝐴2 + 𝑚𝐵 𝑣𝐵2
𝑡= 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 2 2 2 2
3.156 𝑋 107 • Here, 𝑚𝐴 = 𝑚𝐵 = 𝑚 ; 𝑢𝐴 = 0 ; 𝑢𝐵 = 𝑢𝑖 ; 𝑣𝐴 = 𝑣𝐵 = 𝑣𝑓 . Then
3
7.170 𝑋 10 1 1 1
𝑡= 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 0 + 𝑚𝑢𝑖2 = 𝑚𝑣𝑓2 + 𝑚𝑣𝑓2
3.156 2 2 2
3
𝑡 = 2.272 𝑋 10 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 1 1
2 2
𝒕 = 𝟐𝟐𝟕𝟐 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔 ≈ 𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔 𝑚𝑢𝑖 = 2 ( 𝑚𝑣𝑓 )
𝟐𝟑𝟓
2 2
15. Calculate the amount of energy released when 1 kg of 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 undergoes fission 𝐸𝑖 = 2 𝐸𝑓 − − − − − − − − − (1)
reaction. • We know that, for hydrogen atom
-Solution : Energy of electron in Ground state (n=1) = −13.6 𝑒𝑉
• The atomic mass of 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 is 235. Therefore, 235 g of
𝟐𝟑𝟓
𝟗𝟐 𝑼 contains Avogadro Energy of electron in First excited state (n=2) = −3.4 𝑒𝑉
number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms. Hence first excitation energy ; 𝐸𝑓 = −3.4 − (−13.6) = 10.2 𝑒𝑉
6.02 𝑋 1023
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟐𝟑𝟓
𝟗𝟐 𝑼 atoms present =
• The minimum value of the kinetic energy of the moving hydrogen atom HB
235
𝑬𝒊 = 2 𝐸𝑓 = 2 𝑋 10.2 = 𝟐𝟎. 𝟒 𝒆𝑽
• So the number of 𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟗𝟐 𝑼 atoms present in 235 𝑔 is
2. In the Bohr atom model, the frequency of transitions is given by the following
6.02 𝑋 1023 6.02 𝑋 1026 𝟏 𝟏
𝑁= 𝑋 1000 = 𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑚𝑠 expression 𝝂 = 𝑹 𝒄 [ 𝟐 − 𝟐] 𝐰𝐡𝐞𝐫𝐞 𝒏 < 𝒎.
235 235 𝒏 𝒎
• 𝟐𝟑𝟓
Each 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 nucleus releases 200 MeV of energy during the fission. The total Consider the following transitions: Show that the
energy released by 1kg of 𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟗𝟐 𝑼 is
frequency of these transitions obey sum rule
6.02 𝑋 1026 1204 𝑋 1026 (which is known as Ritz combination principle)
𝑄= 𝑋 200 𝑀𝑒𝑉 = 𝑀𝑒𝑉 -Solution :
235 235
𝑸 = 𝟓. 𝟏𝟐𝟑 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑴𝒆𝑽𝟐𝟔 • For transition 3 → 2 ; 𝒎 = 𝟑 ; 𝒏 = 𝟐 . Hence
• In terms of joule, [1 𝑒𝑉 = 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 ] the frequency.
𝑄 = 5.123 𝑋 1026 𝑋 106 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝐽 1 1 1 1 5𝑅𝑐
𝜈3 →2 = 𝑅 𝑐 [ 2 − 2 ] = 𝑅 𝑐 [ − ] =
𝑸 = 𝟖. 𝟏𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟑 𝑱 2 3 4 9 36
• In terms of joules [1 𝑘𝑊ℎ = 3.6 𝑋 106 𝐽 ] • For transition 2 → 1 ; 𝒎 = 𝟐 ; 𝒏 = 𝟏 . Hence the
8. 197 𝑋 1013 81.97 frequency
𝑄 = = 𝑋 107 1 1 1 3𝑅𝑐
3.6 𝑋 106 36 𝜈2 →1 = 𝑅 𝑐 [ 2 − 2 ] = 𝑅 𝑐 [1 − ] =
𝑸 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟕𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟕 𝒌𝑾𝒉 1 2 4 4
• For transition 3 → 1 ; 𝒎 = 𝟑 ; 𝒏 = 𝟏 . Hence the frequency,
1 1 1 8𝑅𝑐
𝜈3 →1 = 𝑅 𝑐 [ 2 − 2 ] = 𝑅 𝑐 [1 − ] =
1 3 9 9
• From additive law, 4. Calculate the radius of the earth if density of the earth is equal to the density of
5𝑅𝑐 3𝑅𝑐 the nucleus. [mass of earth 𝟓. 𝟗𝟕 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟒 𝒌𝒈].
𝜈3 →2 + 𝜈2 →1 = + -Solution :- 𝑀𝐸 = 5.97 𝑋 1024 𝑘𝑔
36 4
5 𝑅 𝑐 + 27 𝑅 𝑐 32 𝑅 𝑐 • Given, 𝜌𝐸 = 𝜌𝑁 = 2.3 𝑋 1017 𝑘𝑔 𝑚−3
𝜈3 →2 + 𝜈2 →1 = =
36 36 • Density of earth,
8 𝑅𝑐 𝑀𝐸 𝑀𝐸
𝜈3 →2 + 𝜈2 →1 = 𝜌𝐸 = =
9 𝑉𝐸 4
𝝂𝟑 →𝟐 + 𝝂𝟐 →𝟏 = 𝝂𝟑 →𝟏 𝜋 𝑅𝐸3
3
3. (a) A hydrogen atom is excited by radiation of wavelength 97.5 nm. Find the 𝑀𝐸 𝑀𝐸
∴ 𝑅𝐸3 = =
principal quantum number of the excited state. (b) Show that the total number 4 4
𝜋 𝜌𝐸 𝜋 𝜌𝑁
of lines in emission spectrum is
𝒏(𝒏−𝟏)
Compute the total number of possible 3 3
𝟐 5.97 𝑋 1024 3 𝑋 5.97 𝑋 1024
lines in emission spectrum as given in (a). 𝑅𝐸3 = =
4 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.3 𝑋 1017
-Solution : 𝜆 = 97.5 𝑛𝑚 = 97.5 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.3 𝑋 1017
3
(a) Energy required to excite the atom to nth level, 3 𝑋 5.97 𝑋 1024 17.91 𝑋107 179.1 𝑋106
ℎ𝑐 6.626 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 𝑅𝐸3 = 17
= =
𝐸 =ℎ𝜈= = 𝐽 4 𝑋 3.14 𝑋 2.3 𝑋 10 28.888 28.888
1 1
𝜆 97.5 𝑋 10−9 179.1 𝑋106 3 179.1 3
−34 8
6.626 𝑋 10 𝑋 3 𝑋 10 ∴ 𝑅𝐸 = [ ] = [ ] 𝑋 102
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 21.888 21.888
97.5 𝑋 10 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19
−9
19.878 𝑋 10 2
1987.8 𝑅𝐸 = 1. 837𝑋 102 = 183.7 𝑚
𝐸= 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑉 𝑹𝑬 = 𝟏𝟖𝟒 𝒎
156 156
𝐸 = 12.74 𝑒𝑉 5. Calculate the mass defect and the binding energy per nucleon of the 𝟏𝟎𝟖
𝟒𝟕
𝑨𝒈
• For hydrogen atom, the ground state energy ; 𝐸1 = − 13.6 𝑒𝑉 nucleus. [atomic mass of Ag =107.905949 u]
• If 𝐸𝑛 be the energy of nth state, then the excitation energy -Solution :- 𝑍 = 47 ; 𝐴 = 108 ; 𝑁 = 𝐴 − 𝑍 = 61 ; 𝑀𝐻𝑔 = 107.905949
𝐸 = 𝐸𝑛 − 𝐸1 • In terms of this atomic mass unit,
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐸𝑛 = 𝐸 + 𝐸1 = 12.74 + (−13.6) = 12.74 − 13.6 the mass of the neutron = 1.008665 u,
𝐸𝑛 = − 0.86 𝑒𝑉 the mass of the proton = 1.007276 u,
• From Bohr’s postulate, the energy of hydrogen atom in nth state, the mass of the hydrogen atom = 1.007825 u
13.6 • Mass defect ,
𝐸𝑛 = − 2 𝑒𝑉
𝑛 ∆𝑚 = 𝑍 𝑚𝐻 + 𝑁𝑚𝑛 − 𝑀𝐻𝑔
2
13.6 13.6 ∆𝑚 = (47 𝑋 1.007825) + (61𝑋1.008665) − 107.905949
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑛 = − 𝑒𝑉 = − 𝑒𝑉
𝐸𝑛 (− 0.86 𝑒𝑉) ∆𝑚 = 47.367775 + 61.528565 − 107.905949
13.6 ∆𝑚 = 108.89634 − 107.905949
𝑛2 = = 15.81 ≈ 16
0.86 ∆𝒎 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟗𝟎𝟑𝟗𝟏 𝒖
∴ 𝒏=𝟒 • Binding energy,
(b) Total number of possible transitions, 𝐵𝐸 = ∆𝑚 𝑋 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉 = 0.990391 𝑋 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉
𝑛(𝑛 − 1) 4(4 − 1) 4 𝑋 3 12
= = = =6 𝑩𝑬 = 𝟗𝟐𝟐. 𝟎𝟓𝟒𝟎𝟐𝟏 𝑴𝒆𝑽
2 2 2 2 • Binding energy per nucleon,
Thus the possible transitions, 𝐵𝐸 922.054021
1) 4 → 3 ̅̅̅̅
𝐵𝐸 = =
2) 4 → 2 𝐴 108
̅̅̅̅ = 𝟖. 𝟓𝟑𝟗 𝑴𝒆𝑽
𝑩𝑬
3) 4 → 1
4) 3 → 2
5) 3 → 1
6) 2 → 1 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
6. Half lives of two radioactive elements A and B are 20 minutes and 40 minutes (c) Mean life period,
respectively. Initially, the samples have equal number of nuclei. Calculate the 𝑇1/2 5.01
𝜏= =
ratio of decayed numbers of A and B nuclei after 80 minutes. 0.6931 0.6931
-Solution :- 𝐴
𝑇1/2 𝐵
= 20 min ; 𝑇1/2 = 40 min ; 𝑡 = 80 𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝝉 = 𝟕. 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔
• Let the initial number of nuclei in sample A and B be = 𝑁𝑜 (d) If 𝑁𝑜 be the number of atoms present in the sample initially,
𝑡 80 𝑅𝑜 = 𝜆 𝑁𝑜
• Number of half lives for sample A ; 𝑛𝐴 = 𝐴 = =4
𝑇1/2 20 𝑅𝑜 1 𝜇 𝐶𝑖
𝑡 80 ∴ 𝑁𝑜 = =
Number of half lives for sample B ; 𝑛𝐵 = = =2 𝜆 1.601 𝑋 10−6
𝑇𝐵
1/2 40 1𝑋 10−6 𝑋 3.7 𝑋1010
• Then the number of nuclei remains undecayed in the samples after 80 minutes, 𝑁𝑜 =
1.601 𝑋 10−6
1 𝑛𝐴 1 4 𝑁𝑜 3.7 𝑋1010
𝑁𝐴 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑁𝑜 =
2 2 16 1.601
1 𝑛𝐵 1 2 𝑁𝑜 𝑵𝒐 = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟏𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔
𝑁𝐵 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 = ( ) 𝑁𝑜 =
2 2 4 8. Calculate the time required for 60% of a sample of radon undergo decay.
• Thus the number of nuclei decayed in the samples after 80 minutes, Given T1/2 of radon =3.8 days
𝑁𝑜 16 𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝑜 15 𝑁𝑜 -Solution : 𝑁𝑜 = 100 % ; 𝑁 = 100 − 60 = 40 % ; 𝑇1/2 = 3.8 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐴 = 𝑁𝑜 − = =
16 16 16 • From law of disintegration, the amount of sample left un decayed,
𝑁𝑜 4 𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝑜 3 𝑁𝑜
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐵 = 𝑁𝑜 − = = 𝑁 = 𝑁𝑜 𝑒 − 𝜆 𝑡
4 4 4 40 = 100 𝑒 − 𝜆 𝑡
• Hence the ratio of the number of nuclei decayed in the samples A and B , 4
15 𝑁𝑜 = 𝑒− 𝜆 𝑡
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐴 ( ) 15 𝑁𝑜 4 5 10
16 10
= = 𝑋 =
𝑁𝑜 − 𝑁𝐵 3𝑁 16 3 𝑁𝑜 4 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑒𝜆𝑡 = = 2.5
( 𝑜) 4
4
(𝑵𝒐 − 𝑵𝑨 ) ∶ (𝑵𝒐 − 𝑵𝑩 ) = 𝟓 ∶ 𝟒 • Taking log on both sides,
7. On your birthday, you measure the activity of the sample 210Bi which has a half- 𝜆 𝑡 = log 𝑒 2.5
life of 5.01 days. The initial activity that you measure is 1μCi . (a) What is the (𝑜𝑟) 𝜆 𝑡 = 2.303 𝑋 log10 2.5
1
approximate activity of the sample on your next birthday? Calculate (b) the 𝑡 = 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
decay constant (c) the mean life (d) initial number of atoms. 𝜆
1
-Solution :- 𝑇1/2 = 5.01 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠 ; 𝑅𝑜 = 1 𝜇 𝐶𝑖 ; 𝑡 = 1 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟 = 365 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
0.6931
• Number of half-life periods, (
𝑇1/2
)
𝑡 365
𝑛= = ≈ 73 𝑇1
𝑇1/2 5.01 𝑡= 2
𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
(a) The activity of given sample after 73 half-life periods (i.e.) after 1 years 0.6931
3.8
1 𝑛 1 73 1 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.3979
𝑅 = ( ) 𝑅𝑜 = ( ) 1 𝜇 𝐶𝑖 = 73 𝜇 𝐶𝑖 0.6931
2 2 2 𝒕 = 𝟓. 𝟎𝟐𝟓 𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔
𝑅 = 1.064 𝑋 10−22
9. Assuming that energy released by the fission of a single 𝟐𝟑𝟓 𝟗𝟐 𝑼 nucleus is 200MeV,
𝑹 ≈ 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟐 𝝁 𝑪𝒊
calculate the number of fissions per second required to produce 1 watt power.
(b) Decay constant,
-Solution :-
0.6931 0.6931 0.6931
𝜆 = = 𝑑𝑎𝑦 −1 = 𝑠 −1 • Energy released per fission = 200 MeV = 200 X 106 X 1.6 X 10−19 J
𝑇1/2 5.01 5.01 𝑋 24 𝑋 60 𝑋 60
• Energy produced per second (i.e.) power = 1W = 1 J/s
0.6931 −1
𝜆 = 𝑠 • Let Number of fissions per second f = N (say)
432864
𝝀 = 𝟏. 𝟔𝟎𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝒔−𝟏 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
• Hence. • Taking log on both sides,

Energy released per fission X N = Energy produced per second (power) 100
log 𝑒 ( ) = 𝜆𝑡
200 X 106 X 1.6 X 10−19 X N = 1 17.5
1 1 100
N = = 𝑋 1013 2.303 𝑋 log10 ( )= 𝜆𝑡
6
200 X 10 X 1.6 X 10 −19 320 17.5
N = 3.125 𝑋10−3 𝑋1013 1 100
∴ 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 log10 ( )
𝑵 = 𝟑. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟎 𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒎𝒔 𝜆 17.5
10. Show that the mass of radium ( 𝟐𝟐𝟔 1
𝟖𝟖𝑹𝒂 ) with an activity of 1 curie is almost a 𝑡= 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 ( log10 100 − log10 17.5)
gram. Given T1/2 =1600 years. 0.6931
-Solution :- 𝑅 = 1 𝐶𝑖 = 3.7 𝑋 1010 disintegration/s ( )
𝑇1
• From law of disintegration, 2
𝑇1/2
dN 𝑡 = 𝑋 2.303 𝑋(2.000 − 1.2430)
= λN (or) 𝑅 = λ N 0.6931
dt 5730
R R T1/2 𝑡 = 𝑋 2.303 𝑋 0.757
N = = = 𝑋𝑅 0.6931
λ 0.6931 0.6931
(
T1/2
) 𝒕 = 𝟏. 𝟒𝟒𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟒 years
1600 X 365 X 24 X 60 X 60
N= X 3.7 X 1010
0.6931
N = 2.694 X 1011 X 1010
N = 2.694 X 1021 atoms
• The atomic mass of 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑚 is 226. Therefore, 226 g of 𝟐𝟐𝟔 𝟖𝟖𝑹𝒂 contains Avogadro
number (6.02 𝑋 1023 ) of atoms.
(i.e.) mass of 6.02 𝑋 1023 atoms = 226 g
226
Hence, mass of one atom = 𝑔
6.023 X 1023
6.02 𝑋 1023
• In 1 g, the number of 𝟐𝟐𝟔
𝟖𝟖𝑹𝒂 atoms present = 235
• Hence, total mass of 2.694 X 1021 atoms with an activity of 1 𝐶𝑖 is,
226
𝑚 = 𝑋 2.694 𝑋 1021
6.023 X 1023
226 𝑋 2.694 𝑋 10−2
𝑚 =
6.023
𝑚 = 1.012 𝑋 102 𝑋 10−2 = 1.012 𝑔
𝒎 ≈𝟏𝒈
11. Charcoal pieces of tree is found from an archeological site. The carbon-14
content of this charcoal is only 17.5% that of equivalent sample of carbon from
a living tree. What is the age of tree?
-Solution :- 𝑇1 = 5730 years, 𝑁𝑜 = 100 % ; 𝑁 = 17.5 %
2
• From law of disintegration,
𝑁 = 𝑁𝑂 𝑒 −𝜆𝑡
17.5 = 100 𝑒 −𝜆𝑡
17.5
= 𝑒− 𝜆 𝑡
100
100 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
(𝑜𝑟) = 𝑒 𝜆𝑡
17.5
HIGHER SECONDARY
SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
UNIT - 10
ELECTRONICS
AND
COMMUNICATIONS

PG ASST (PHYSICS)
EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 4. Determine the wavelength of light emitted from LED which is made up of GaAsP
1. An ideal diode and a 5 Ω resistor are semiconductor whose forbidden energy gap is 1.875 eV. Mention the colour of
connected in series with a 15 V power the light emitted (Take h = 6.6 × 10–34 Js).
supply as shown in figure below. -Solution :- 𝐸𝑔 = 1.875 𝑒𝑉 = 1.875 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 𝑱 ; ℎ = 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝐽 𝑠
Calculate the current that flows through • By definition,
the diode. ℎ𝑐
𝐸𝑔 = ℎ 𝜈 =
-Solution :- 𝜆
• The diode is forward biased and it is an ideal one. Hence, it acts like a closed switch ℎ𝑐 6.6 𝑋 10−34 𝑋 3 𝑋 108 19.8 𝑋 10−7
∴ 𝜆 = = =
with no barrier voltage. Therefore, current that flows through the diode can be 𝐸𝑔 1.875 𝑋 1.6 𝑋 10−19 3
calculated using Ohm’s law. 𝜆 = 6.6 𝑋 10−7 𝑚 = 660 𝑋 10−9 𝑚 = 𝟔𝟔𝟎 𝒏𝒎
𝑉=𝐼𝑅 • The wavelength 660 nm corresponds to red colour light.
𝑉 15 5. In a transistor connected in the common base configuration
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰= = =𝟑𝑨
𝑅 5 𝜶 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟓 , 𝑰𝑬 = 𝟏 𝒎𝑨. Calculate the values of IC and IB.
2. A silicon diode is connected with 1kΩ -Solution :- 𝛼 = 0.95 , 𝐼𝐸 = 1 𝑚𝐴
resistor as shown. Find the value of 𝐼𝐶
current flowing through AB. • Current gain in common base mode ; 𝛼= 𝐼𝐸
-Solution :- 𝑅 = 1 𝑘 Ω = 1000 Ω • Hence, 𝑰𝑪 = 𝛼 𝐼𝐸 = 0.95 𝑋 1 = 𝟎. 𝟗𝟓 𝒎𝑨
• The barrier voltage for silicon diode ; 𝑉𝑏 (𝑆𝑖) = 0.7 𝑉 • Also, 𝐼𝐸 = 𝐼𝐵 + 𝐼𝐶 (𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑩 = 𝐼𝐸 − 𝐼𝐶 = 1 − 0.95 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟓 𝒎𝑨
• The P.D. between A and B is given by ; 6. In the circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage Vi is 20 V, VBE = 0 V and
𝑉 = [𝑉𝐴 − 𝑉𝐵 ] − 𝑉𝑏 (𝑆𝑖) = [3.3 − (−7.4)] − 0.7 = 10.7 − 0.7 = 𝟏𝟎 𝑽 VCE = 0 V. What are the values of IB , IC , β?
• The value of current flowing through AB can be obtained using Ohm’s law. -Solution :- 𝑅𝐵 = 500 𝑘 Ω ; 𝑅𝐶 = 4 𝑘 Ω
𝑉=𝐼𝑅 • Voltage across 𝑅𝐵 ; 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝑖 − 𝑉𝐵𝐸
𝑉 10 1 Since, 𝑉𝐵𝐸 = 0 𝑉 we have, 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝑖 Hence
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰= = = = 10−2 𝐴 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎 𝑨
𝑅 1000 100 𝑉𝐵 𝑉𝑖 20
3. Find the current through the Zener diode when the load resistance is 2 kΩ. Use 𝑰𝑩 = = = = 0.04 𝑋 10−3
diode approximation. 𝑅𝐵 𝑅𝐵 500 𝑋 103
-Solution :- 𝑉 = 15 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝑆 = 1 𝑘 Ω = 1000 Ω 𝑰𝑩 = 40 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 𝟒𝟎 𝝁 𝑨
𝑉𝑍 = 9 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐿 = 2 𝑘 Ω = 2000 Ω • Similarly, voltage across 𝑅𝐶 ; 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸
• From figure, 𝑉𝑅 = 𝑉 − 𝑉𝑍 = 15 − 9 = 6 𝑉 Since, 𝑉𝐶𝐸 = 0 𝑉 we have, 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 Hence
• From Ohm’s law, current through ‘𝑅𝑆 ’ 𝑉𝐶 𝑉𝐶𝐶 20
𝑉𝑅 6 𝑰𝑪 = = = = 5 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟓 𝒎 𝑨
𝑅𝐶 𝑅𝐶 4 𝑋 103
𝑰= = = 6 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟔 𝒎 𝑨
𝑅𝑆 1000 • And current gain,
• And current through load resistance 𝑅𝐿 𝑰𝑪 5 𝑋 10−3
𝑉𝐿 𝑉𝑍 9 4.5 𝜷= = = 0.125 𝑋 103 = 𝟏𝟐𝟓
𝑰𝑳 = = = = = 4.5 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟒. 𝟓 𝒎 𝑨 𝑰𝑩 40 𝑋 10−6
𝑅𝐿 𝑅𝐿 2000 1000 7. The current gain of a common emitter transistor
• If 𝑰𝒁 be the current through Zener diode, then using Kirchoff’s current law at circuit shown in figure is 120. Draw the DC load line
junction A gives, and mark the Q point on it. (VBE to be ignored).
𝐼 = 𝐼𝐿 + 𝐼𝑍 -Solution :- 𝛽 = 120 ; 𝑉𝐶𝐶 = 25 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐵 = 1 𝑀Ω ;
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐼𝑍 = 𝐼 − 𝐼𝐿 = 6 − 4.5 𝑅𝐶 = 5 𝑘Ω
𝑰𝒁 = 𝟏. 𝟓 𝒎𝑨 • Voltage across 𝑅𝐵 ; 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐵𝐸
Since, 𝑉𝐵𝐸 = 0 𝑉 we have, 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 Hence
𝑉𝐵 𝑉𝐶𝐶 25 −6
𝑰𝑩 = = = 6 = 25 𝑋 10 𝐴 = 𝟐𝟓 𝝁 𝑨
𝑅𝐵 𝑅𝐵 1 𝑋 10
• By definition, current gain ; 𝛽 =

𝐼𝐶 10. In the combination of the following gates,
𝐼𝐵 write the Boolean equation for output Y in
• Hence collector current, terms of inputs A and B.
𝐼𝐶 = 𝛽 𝐼𝐵 = 120 𝑋 25 𝑋 10−6 = 3000 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 -Solution :-
𝑰𝑪 = 3 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟑 𝒎 𝑨 • The output at the 1st AND gate = 𝑨 . 𝑩 ̅
• From figure, 𝑉𝐶𝐸 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 • The output at the 2nd AND gate = 𝑨 . 𝑩
̅
𝑉𝐶𝐸 = 25 − (3 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 5𝑋 103 ) • The output at the OR gate ; 𝒀 = 𝑨 . 𝑩 ̅ .𝑩
̅+ 𝑨
𝑽𝑪𝑬 = 25 − 15 = 𝟏𝟎 𝑽 11. Prove the Boolean identity AC + ABC = AC and give its circuit description.
8. Calculate the range of the variable capacitor that is to be used in a tuned- -Solution :-
collector oscillator which has a fixed inductance of 150 μH. The frequency band 𝐴 𝐶 + 𝐴 𝐵 𝐶 = 𝐴 𝐶. (1 + 𝐵) [OR law-2]
is from 500 kHz to 1500 kHz. = 𝐴 𝐶 .1 [AND law – 2]
-Solution :- 𝐿 = 150 𝜇 𝐻 𝑨𝑪+𝑨𝑩𝑪= 𝑨𝑪
1 1
• Resonance frequency ; 𝑓𝑜 = (𝑜𝑟) 𝑓𝑜2 = • Thus the Boolean identity is proved.
2 𝜋 √𝐿 𝐶 4 𝜋2 𝐿 𝐶
1 Circuit description:
• Hence capacitance ; 𝐶 =
4 𝜋2 𝐿 𝑓𝑜2
• When, 𝑓𝑜 = 500 𝑘𝐻𝑧 ,
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 (3.14 )2 𝑋 150 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (500 𝑋 103 )2
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 9.8596 𝑋 150 𝑋 250000
𝐶 = 6.761 𝑋 10−10 𝐹 = 676.1 𝑋 10−12 𝐹 12. A transmitting antenna has a height of 40 m and the height of the receiving
𝑪 ≈ 𝟔𝟕𝟔 𝒑𝑭 antenna is 30 m. What is the maximum distance between them for line-of-sight
• When, 𝑓𝑜 = 1500 𝑘𝐻𝑧 communication? The radius of the earth is 6.4×106 m.
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 (3.14 )2 𝑋 150 𝑋 10−6 𝑋 (1500 𝑋 103 )2
1
𝐶 =
4 𝑋 9.8596 𝑋 150 𝑋 2250000
𝐶 = 7.511 𝑋 10−11 𝐹 = 75.11 𝑋 10−12 𝐹
𝑪 ≈ 𝟕𝟓 𝒑𝑭
• Therefore, the capacitor range is 𝟕𝟓 𝒑𝑭 - 𝟔𝟕𝟔 𝒑𝑭
9. What is the output Y in the following -Solution :-
circuit, when all the three inputs A, B, and • The total distance d between the transmitting and receiving antennas will be the
C are first 0 and then 1? sum of the individual distances of coverage.
-Solution :-
𝑑 = 𝑑1 + 𝑑2 = √2 𝑅 ℎ1 + √2 𝑅 ℎ2 = √2 𝑅 (√ℎ1 + √ℎ2 )
• Out put of 𝐴𝑁𝐷 gate P : 𝑿 = 𝑨 . 𝑩
• Out put of 𝑁𝐴𝑁𝐷 gate Q : 𝒀 = ̅̅̅̅̅̅ 𝑿 .𝑩 𝑑 = √2 𝑋 6.4 𝑋 106 (√40 + √30)
A B C 𝑿 = 𝑨.𝑩 𝒀 = ̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑿 .𝑩 𝑑 = √2 𝑋 6.4 𝑋 106 𝑋 √10 (√4 + √3)
0 0 0 0 1 𝑑 = √2 𝑋 6.4 𝑋 107 (√4 + √3)
1 1 1 1 0 √2 𝑋 64 𝑋 106 (√4 + √3)
𝑑=
𝑑= 1.414 𝑋 8 𝑋 103 (2 + 1.732)
𝑑= 1.414 𝑋 8 𝑋 103 𝑋 3.732
𝒅= 𝟒𝟐. 𝟐𝟏 𝑿 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝒎 = 𝟒𝟐. 𝟐𝟏 𝒌𝒎
EXERCISE PROBLEMS- 3. Assuming VCEsat = 0.2 V and β = 50, find the minimum
1. The given circuit has two ideal diodes connected as shown in figure below. base current (IB) required to drive the transistor
Calculate the current flowing through the resistance R1. given in the figure to saturation.
-Solution :- 𝑉𝐶𝐶 = 3 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐶 = 1 𝑘Ω = 1000 Ω
• From figure, 𝑉𝐶𝐶 = 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 + 𝑉𝐶𝐸
(𝑜𝑟) 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸
𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸 3 − 0.2
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑪 = =
𝑅𝐶 1000
𝑰𝑪 = 𝟐. 𝟖 𝑿 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 𝑨
𝐼
• Then current gain ; 𝛽 = 𝐶 . Hence,
𝐼𝐵
-Solution :- 𝐼𝐶 2.8 𝑋 10−3
• Here diode 𝑫𝟏 is reverse biased. So it acts as open switch (OFF) and hence it does 𝑰𝑩 = = = 0.056 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 56 𝑋 10−6 = 𝟓𝟔 𝝁 𝑨
𝛽 50
not allows current to pass through it. 4. A transistor of α = 0.99 and VBE = 0.7 V is connected in the common emitter
• But diode 𝑫𝟐 is forward biased. So it acts as closed switch (ON) and hence it allows configuration as shown in the figure. If the transistor is in saturation region, find
current to pass through it. the value of collector current.
• From Ohm’s law, 𝑉 = 𝐼 𝑅𝑆 -Solution :-
𝑉 10 10 • If 𝛼 = 0.99 then,
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰= = = = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑨
𝑅𝑆 (2 + 2) 4 𝛼 0.99 0.99
𝛽 = 1− 𝛼 = = = 99
2. Four silicon diodes and a 10 Ω resistor are connected as shown in figure below. 1−0.99 0.01
Each diode has a resistance of 1Ω. Find the current flows through the 10Ω • By definition. current gain,
resistor. 𝐼𝐶 𝐼𝐶 𝐼𝐶
𝛽= (𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑩 = =
-Solution :- 𝐼𝐵 𝛽 90
• Here diode 𝑫𝟏 & 𝑫𝟒 is reverse biased. So it • Here one thing must be remember that,
acts as open switch (OFF) and hence it does transistor in saturation region have,
not allows current to pass through it. 𝑉𝐵𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡 = 0.8 𝑉 and 𝑉𝐶𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡 = 0.2 𝑉
• But diode 𝑫𝟐 & 𝑫𝟑 is forward biased. So it • From figure, for input applying Kirchoff’s voltage law
acts as closed switch (ON) and hence it allows 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉3 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐵𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡
current to pass through it. 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) + 10000 𝐼𝐵 + 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) = 12 − 0.8
• Hence the given circuit is simplified as shown. 2000 𝐼𝐶 + 12000 𝐼𝐵 = 11.2 − − − − − − (1)
• Since the barrier voltage of silicon is 0.7 V and • Similarly for output applying Kirchoff’s voltage law
hence voltage across 𝟏𝟎 𝛀 resistor, 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉3 = 𝑉𝐶𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶𝐸−𝑠𝑎𝑡
𝑉10 = 3 − 0.7 − 0.7 = 𝟏. 𝟔 𝐕 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) + 10000 𝐼𝐵 + 1000 (𝐼𝐶 + 𝐼𝐵 ) = 12 − 0.2
• Total resistance of the circuit, 3000 𝐼𝐶 + 2000 𝐼𝐵 = 11.8 − − − − − − (2)
𝑅𝑆 = 1 + 10 + 1 = 𝟏𝟐 𝛀 • (2) X 6  18000 𝐼𝐶 + 12000 𝐼𝐵 = 70.8 − − − − − − (3)
• Then the current through 𝟏𝟎 𝛀 resistor, • (3) - (1)  16000 𝐼𝐶 = 59.6
𝑉10 1.6 59.6
𝐼= = = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟑𝟑 𝑨 𝐼𝐶 = = 3. 724 𝑋 10−3 𝐴
𝑅𝑆 12 16000
−𝟑
𝑰𝑪 = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟐𝟒 𝑿 𝟏𝟎 𝑨 = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟐𝟒 𝒎𝑨
5. In the circuit shown in the figure, the BJT has a ̅ B = A + B using truth table.
8. Verify the given Boolean equation A + 𝑨
current gain (β) of 50. For an emitter – base Solution :-
voltage VEB = 600 mV, calculate the emitter – ̅ ̅𝑩 ̅𝑩
A B 𝑨 𝑨 𝑨+𝑨 A+B
collector voltage VEC (in volts).
Solution :- 𝑉𝐸 = 3 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐵 = 60𝐾Ω ; 𝑅𝐶 = 500 Ω 0 0 1 0 0 0
• From figure, , 𝑉𝐸 = 𝑉𝐸𝐵 + 𝑉𝐵 0 1 1 1 1 1
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑉𝐵 = 𝑉𝐸 − 𝑉𝐸𝐵 1 0 0 0 1 1
60000 𝐼𝐵 = 3 − 600 𝑋 10−3 1 1 0 0 1 1
60 𝑋 103 𝐼𝐵 = 3 − 0.6 = 2.4
2.4 9. In the given figure of a voltage
𝐼𝐵 = = 0.04 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 regulator, a Zener diode of breakdown
60 𝑋 103 voltage 15V is employed. Determine the
= 40 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 𝟒𝟎 𝝁 𝑨
𝐼𝐶 current through the load resistance, the
• By definition, current gain 𝛽= total current and the current through
𝐼𝐵
(𝑜𝑟) 𝑰𝑪 = 𝛽 𝐼𝐵 = 50 𝑋 40 𝑋 10−6 = 2000 𝑋 10−6 𝐴 = 2 𝑋 10−3 = 𝟐 𝒎 𝑨 the diode. Use diode approximation.
• Hence, 𝑉𝐸𝐶 = 𝑉𝐸 − 𝑉𝐶 = 𝑉𝐸 − 𝐼𝐶 𝑅𝐶 = 3 − (2 𝑋 10−3 𝑋 0.5 𝑋 103 ) Solution :- 𝑉 = 25 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝑆 = 500 Ω ; 𝑉𝑍 = 15 𝑉 ; 𝑅𝐿 = 3 𝑘 Ω = 3000 Ω
𝑽𝑬𝑪 = 𝟑 − 𝟏 = 𝟐 𝑽 • From the figure, 𝑽𝑹𝑺 = 𝑉 − 𝑉𝑍 = 25 − 15 = 10 𝑉
6. Determine the current flowing through 3Ω and 4Ω • From Ohm’s law Current through load resistance 𝑅𝐿 ,
resistors of the circuit given below. Assume that diodes 𝑉
𝑰𝑳 = 𝐿 = 𝑍 =
𝑉 15
= 5 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟓 𝒎 𝑨
D1 and D2 are ideal diodes. 𝑅 𝐿 𝑅 𝐿 3000
Solution :- • And, current through 𝑅𝑆 (i.e.) total current
• Here diode D1 is forward biased (closed switch) and D2 𝑽𝑹 10 1
𝑰 = 𝑅 𝑺 = 500 = 50 = 0.02 𝐴 = 20 𝑋 10−3 𝐴 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒎 𝑨
is reverse biased (open switch) 𝑆
• So D1 conducts while D2 do not conduct the current. • If 𝑰𝒁 be the current through Zener diode, then from Kirchoff’s current law,
• For ideal diode, there is no barrier voltage (i.e.) VB = 0 𝐼 = 𝐼𝐿 + 𝐼𝑍
(𝑜𝑟) −3 −3 −3
• Let ‘I’ be the current through D1,then by Ohm’s Kirchoff’s voltage law, 𝐼𝑍 = 𝐼 − 𝐼𝐿 = (20 𝑋 10 ) − (5 𝑋 10 ) = 15 𝑋 10 𝐴
𝟐 𝑰 + 𝟒 𝑰 = 𝟏𝟐 (𝒐𝒓) 𝟔 𝑰 = 𝟏𝟐 (𝒐𝒓) 𝑰 = 𝟐 𝑨 𝑰𝒁 = 𝟏𝟓 𝒎𝑨
• Since D2 will not conduct, no current flows through diode D2 10. Write down Boolean equation for the output
• Thus current flowing through 3Ω and 4Ω resistors of the circuit are 0 and 2 A Y of the given circuit and give its truth table.
Respectively. Solution :-
7. Prove the following Boolean expressions using the laws and theorems of • Output of AND gate= 𝐴. 𝐵
̅ ̅
Boolean algebra. (i) (A+B) (A+𝑩) = A (ii) A(𝑨+B) = AB (iii) (A+B) (A+C) = A+BC • Output of NOR gate = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝐴+𝐵
Solution :- • Thus the final output of OR gate ;
̅ ̅
(i) (𝐴 + 𝐵)(𝐴 + 𝐵 ) = 𝐴 𝐴 + 𝐴 𝐵 + 𝐵 𝐴 + 𝐵 𝐵 ̅ ̅
[ By AND laws; 𝐴 𝐴 = 𝐴 & 𝐵 𝐵 = 0] 𝒀 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
= (𝑨. 𝑩) + (𝑨 + 𝑩)
̅
= 𝐴 + 𝐴 ( 𝐵 + 𝐵) + 0 ̅
[ By OR laws ; 𝐵 + 𝐵 = 1 & A +0 =0] A B A.B A+B ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑨+𝑩 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝒀 = (𝑨. 𝑩) + (𝑨 + 𝑩)
= 𝐴 + 𝐴 (1) [ By AND laws ; 𝐴. 1 = 𝐴 ]
(𝑨 + 𝑩)(𝑨 + 𝑩 ̅) = 𝑨 [ By OR laws ; 𝐴 + 𝐴 = 𝐴 ] 0 0 0 0 1 1
(ii) 𝐴 ( ̅𝐴 + 𝐵) = 𝐴 𝐴̅ + 𝐴 𝐵 [ By AND laws ; 𝐴 𝐴̅ = 0] 0 1 0 1 0 1
= 0+𝐴𝐵 [ By OR laws ; 0 + 𝐴 = 𝐴 ] 1 0 0 1 0 1
𝑨 (̅𝑨 + 𝑩) = 𝑨 𝑩 1 1 1 1 0 1
(iii) (𝐴 + 𝐵)( 𝐴 + 𝐶) = 𝐴𝐴 + 𝐴 𝐶 + 𝐵 𝐴 + 𝐵 𝐶
=𝐴+𝐴𝐶+𝐵𝐴+𝐵𝐶
= 𝐴(1 + 𝐶 + 𝐵) + 𝐵 𝐶 [ By OR laws ; 1 + 𝐴 = 1]
= 𝐴(1) + 𝐵 𝐶 kalviasiriyarkal.blogspot.com
(𝑨 + 𝑩)( 𝑨 + 𝑪) = 𝑨 + 𝑩 𝑪

12-Physics Book Problems

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

12-Physics Book Problems

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HIGHER SECONDARY

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

EXAMPLE PROBLEMS. 3. Two small-sized identical equally charged spheres, each

(b) = − 2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟𝑃 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝑄 = 6𝑚 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑃 =? 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑄 =? ▪ Its magnitude, |⃗⃗⃗𝐸𝐴 | = 2.25 𝑋 109 √12 + 12 = 2.25 𝑋 109 √2

22. Find the equivalent capacitance between P and Q ▪ Total charge ; 𝑄 = 𝑞1 + 𝑞2

EXERCISE PROBLEMS. ▪ Resultant force on ‘q’ along Y- axis

Thus 𝐶𝑆1 and 𝐶𝑆2 are in parallel ℎ =0+

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

14. In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V gives a balance point at 35

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 3. Compute the magnetic length of a uniform bar

17. A particle of charge q moves with velocity 𝒗

tension in the supporting wires is zero when it is kept 𝑡

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

 So, the induced current flows in such a way to ∈ = 𝑩 𝝎 𝒍𝟐

(c) At 𝑡 = 75 𝜇𝑠 ; 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑋 75 𝑋 10−6 ) (c) New Q- factor,

𝑑 Φ𝐵 𝑑  The rate of change in magnetic flux (i.e.) induced emf

 Maximum value of induced emf, Φ𝐵 =

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

9. A point object is placed at 20 cm from a thin plano-

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 2. A radiation of wavelength 300 nm is incident on a silver surface. Will

𝜆2 − 𝜆1 11. UV light of wavelength 1800Å is incident on a lithium surface whose threshold

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

• Hence kinetic energy of the system, First excitation energy,

7. Calculate the radius of 𝟏𝟗𝟕

• Hence. • Taking log on both sides,

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

• By definition, current gain ; 𝛽 =

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

EXAMPLE PROBLEMS. 3. Two small-sized identical equally charged spheres, each

(b) = − 2 𝜇𝐶 ; 𝑟𝑃 = 2 𝑚 ; 𝑟𝑄 = 6𝑚 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑃 =? 𝐸 ⃗ 𝑄 =? ▪ Its magnitude, |⃗⃗⃗𝐸𝐴 | = 2.25 𝑋 109 √12 + 12 = 2.25 𝑋 109 √2

22. Find the equivalent capacitance between P and Q ▪ Total charge ; 𝑄 = 𝑞1 + 𝑞2

EXERCISE PROBLEMS. ▪ Resultant force on ‘q’ along Y- axis

Thus 𝐶𝑆1 and 𝐶𝑆2 are in parallel ℎ =0+

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

14. In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V gives a balance point at 35

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

EXAMPLE PROBLEMS- 3. Compute the magnetic length of a uniform bar

17. A particle of charge q moves with velocity 𝒗

tension in the supporting wires is zero when it is kept 𝑡

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

 So, the induced current flows in such a way to ∈ = 𝑩 𝝎 𝒍𝟐

(c) At 𝑡 = 75 𝜇𝑠 ; 𝑣 = 10 sin(3𝜋 𝑋 104 𝑋 75 𝑋 10−6 ) (c) New Q- factor,

𝑑 Φ𝐵 𝑑  The rate of change in magnetic flux (i.e.) induced emf

 Maximum value of induced emf, Φ𝐵 =

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed

PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

victory R. SARAVANAN. M.Sc, M.Phil, B.Ed